# Programming Manual mc-16 **/** 

# mc-20 HoTT.1.en



# mc-16 mc-202 **Table of contents** Function fields in the display

......................... 32 P osition indicator

........................................... 32 Entry lockout

.................................................. 32 Warning notices

............................................. 33 HIDDEN MODE

............................................. 34 Language selection VOICE

................................................. 34 Change of display language

................ 35 Firmware update via SD card

................... 35 STICK CALIBRATION

.............................. 36 Bluetooth initialisation

.............................. 37 Telemetry data display

................................... 38 Commissioning the transmitter

................................ 46 Downloading a firmware packet

......................... 48 Transmitter firmware updates

............................. 50 Restoring the transmitter software

..................... 52 Receiver initialization

............................................... 54 Receiver power supply

....................................... 56 Receiver system power supply

........................... 57 Receiver firmware updates

................................. 58 Backing up receiver settings

............................... 62 Installation notices

................................................... 64 Definitions of terms

.................................................. 66Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

....................................................................... 68 Digital trim

............................................................... 70 Winged models

........................................................ 72 Receiver layout

................................................... 73 Servos in wrong direction

................................... 73 Helicopter models

.................................................... 74 Receiver layout

................................................... 75 **Program descriptions**



### mc 16 20 * Loading a new memory location

.............................. 76

» **Model select** «

....................................   79

» **Copy / Erase** «

....................................   80

» **Suppress codes** «

..............................   84 **General notices**
Table of contents

....................................................... 2 Environmental protection notices

.............................. 3 Safety notices

............................................................ 4 Safety notices and handling regulations for Lithium-Ion (LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer (LiPo) batteries

..................................................................... 8 Foreword

.................................................................. 10 Remote control set description

................................ 11 Technical data

.......................................................... 15 General operating notices Transmitter

.......................................................... 16 Transmitter power supply............................... 16 Charging the transmitter battery

.................... 16 Charging with automatic chargers

................. 16 Recommended chargers (accessor y)

........... 16 Removing the transmitter’s battery

................ 17 Inserting the transmitter’s battery

.................. 17 Battery operation timer

................................. 17 General charging notices

.............................. 17 Opening the transmitter housing

................... 18 Lithium battery CR 2032

............................... 18 Stick conversions

........................................... 19 Stick length adjustment

................................. 20 Transmitter neckstrap support bars

............... 20 Transmitter description Front side....................................................... 21 Face-side connectors Charger socket

......................................... 22 DSC jack

.................................................. 22 Data jack

.................................................. 23 Headset connector

................................... 23 Card slot

................................................... 24 Mini-USB connector

................................. 25 Bottom side transmitter interior

..................... 26 Displa y and keypad

....................................... 28 Operating the “data terminal“

........................ 29 Shortcuts

....................................................... 30 Concealed menu columns

............................. 31 

# Table of contents

» **Suppress models** «

............................   85

» **Base setup model** «   Winged model

.................................................... 86 “Binding” transmitter and receiver

................. 87 Range test

..................................................... 91 Helicopter model

................................................ 94 “Binding” transmitter and receiver

................. 95 Range test

..................................................... 99

» **Model type** «

.......................................   104

» **Helicopter type** «

................................   108

» **Servo adjustment** «

...........................   112

» **Stick mode** «   Winged model

.................................................. 114 Helicopter model

.............................................. 116

» **Control adjust** «   Winged model

.................................................. 118 Helicopter model

.............................................. 122 Throttle limit function

................................... 127 Basic idle setting

......................................... 127 Throttle limit in combination with “AR” in the

» **Stick mode** « menu

................................... 129

» **Dual Rate / Expo** «   Winged model

.................................................. 130 Helicopter model

.............................................. 134

» **Channel 1 curve** «   Winged model

.................................................. 138 Helicopter model

.............................................. 141

» **Switch display** «

.................................   144

» **Control switches** «

.............................   145

» **logical switches** «

..............................   148 How is a flight phase programmed?

...................... 150

» **Phase settings** «   Winged model

.................................................. 152 Helicopter model

.............................................. 156

» **Phase assignment** «

..........................   158

» **Phase trim** « (Winged model)

.............   160

» **Non-delayed channels** «....................   161

» **Timers (general)** «

..............................   162

» **Flight phase timers** «

.........................   166 What is a mixer?

.................................................... 1693 **Table of contents** » **Wing mixers** «

....................................   170 Model type: “1AIL”

............................................. 173 Model type: “1AIL 1FL”

..................................... 174 Model type: “2AIL”

............................................. 175 Model type: “2/4AIL 1/2/4FL”

............................ 177 (Max. 2 ailerons and 2 flaps with the standard 8-channel 

### mc-16 transmitter)

» **Helicopter mixer** «

.............................   188 Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve

........................................................ 198 Autorotation setting

........................................... 202 General notes on freely programmable mixers

...... 204

» **Free mixers** «

.....................................   205 Linear mixers

.................................................... 208 Curve mixers

.................................................... 210 Examples

.......................................................... 213

» **Mix active / phase** «

...........................   215

» **Mix-only channel** «

............................   216

» **Dual mixer** «

.......................................   218

» **Swashplate mixer** «

...........................   220

» **Fail safe** «

...........................................   220

» **Teacher/Pupil** «   Connecting with a tr ainer lead

.......................... 222 Connection schematic

...................................... 225 Wireless HoTT system

..................................... 226

» **Tx. output swap** «

..............................   230

» **Profi trim** «   Winged model

.................................................. 232 Helicopter model

.............................................. 234

» **Trim memory** «   Winged model

.................................................. 236 Helicopter model

.............................................. 238

» **Telemetry** «

.........................................   240 Important notices:

............................................. 240 SETTINGS & DATAVIEW.................................. 241 Satellite mode

.............................................. 250 Sensor(s)

..................................................... 251 SENSOR SELECT

........................................... 252 RF STATUS VIEW

............................................ 253 VOICE TRIGGER

............................................. 254 **Environmental protection notices** The symbol on this product, its operating instructions or packaging gives notice that this product may not be discarded as common household waste at the end of its service life. It must be turned over to a recycling collection point for electric and electronic apparatus. The materials can be recycled according to their markings. You make an important contribution to protection of the environment by utilizing facilities for reuse, material recycling or other means of exploiting obsolete equipment. Batteries must be removed from the unit and disposed of separately at an appropriate collection point. Please inquire with local authorities about the responsible waste collection locations.

This manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notification. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in the information section of this manual. » **Channel Sequence** «

.........................   256

» **Multichannel** «

....................................   258

» **Ring limiter** «

......................................   262

» **MP3 player** «

.......................................   266

» **Basic settings, transmitter** «.............   268

» **Servo display** «

..................................   274

» **Servo test** «

........................................   275

» **Code lock** «

........................................   276

» **Info Display«** 

.....................................   278

*  Standard option  Option can be unlocked at extra cost **Programming examples**
Introduction.

........................................................... 280 Winged model First steps

......................................................... 282 Incorporating an electric drive

.......................... 288 C1 joystick switchover between: Electric motor and butterfly

.................... 291 Electric motor and airbrake

.................... 293 Timer confirmation with control or switch

......... 294 Parallel operating servos

.................................. 296 Using flight phases Example 1

................................................... 298 Example 2

................................................... 302 Control of temporal processes

......................... 308 Delta and flying wing

........................................ 310 F3A model

........................................................ 314 Helicopter models

.................................................. 318 **Appendix**
FCC Information

.................................................... 329 Declaration of Conformity

...................................... 330 Warranty Certificate

............................................... 3314 **Safety notices** In order to enjoy your modeling hobby for a long time, please read these instructions thoroughly and give particular attention to the safety notices. You should also register right away at https://www.graupner.de/ en/service/product_registration.aspx since this is the only way for you to automatically receive current information about your product via email. If you are a beginner with remote controlled modelaircraft, ships or cars, you should really ask an experienced model pilot for assistance. If this remote control system changes ownership, these instructions should surely be included with remote control system. **Intended usage** This remote control system may only be used for thepurpose intended by the manufacturer, i.e. for the operation of unmanned remote controlled models. Any other usage is not permissible. **Safety notices** SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT and REMOTE CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT TOYS ... because even small models can cause substantial property damage and/or personal injuries if they are not handled properly - even if caused by third parties.Technical defects of an electrical or mechanical nature can lead to unexpected startup of a motor and/or parts being hurled through the air to pose a danger of injury to you and to others. Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely! A short circuit condition may not only destroy parts of the remote control system but, depending on the circumstances and the battery energy involved, mayalso pose acute danger of incineration or even explosion.All motor-driven parts, such as aircraft or ship propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes etc. represent a constant danger. Contact with these parts must be avoided. A rapidly turning aircraft propeller can, for example, sever a finger. Also pay attention that other objects do not come into contact with driven parts. When a drive battery is connected or a motor is running: **never** get into the danger zone of driving mechanisms. Be sure to pay attention that motors do not start upunintentionally while performing programming operations. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before programming. Protect all units from dust, dirt, moisture and other foreign parts. Never expose these units to vibrationsor excessive hot or cold temperatures. Remote control operation may only be performed under “normal” outdoor temperatures, i.e. within a range of -10 °C to +55 °C.Avoid mechanical jarring and pressure stresses. Always check units for damage to housings and cables.Do not use units which have been damaged or become wet, even after they are dry again. Only those components and accessories which we recommend may be used. Always use original Graupner plug and jack connectors which are made for one another out of the same materials. When routing cables, pay attention that they are not stressed, unduly kinked or broken. The sharp edgesof adjacent parts also represent a hazard for insulated conductors. Be sure that all plug and jack connections are firmly seated. Do not pull on the cable to disconnect a plugged connector. No modifications whatsoever may be made to units. Modifications will void the operating permit and all insurance protection. If necessary, send the device concerned to your local Graupner Service Centre; see page 331. **Installing the receiver** The receiver is to be installed with a cushion of foam rubber to afford protection against jarring; in aircraft models behind a strong rib, for a car or ship model the location must be protected against dust and spray water. However, do not enclose your receiver completely, otherwise it may overheat in use. The receiver may not be mounted in direct contact with the hull or chassis as this would allow motor vibrations and/or roadway jarring to be transferred directly to the receiver. When a receiver system is installed in a model with a combustion motor, all receiver parts should always be protected against the intrusion of exhaust gases and oil residue. Above all, this applies to the model’s ON/OFF switch, which is typically built into the model’s outer surface. Position the receiver such that connecting cables to the servos and the power supply are routed with a bit of slack and that the receiver’s antennas are at least 5 cm a way from any large metal parts or wiring except for other receiver wires/cables. In addition to steel, this also includes carbon fiber parts, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps and all sorts of cables, etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may a servo cable be wrapped around the antenna or routed close to it. Make sure that cables near the antenna cannot move about during flight. **Routing the receiver’s antennas** The receiver and its antennas must be positioned as far away as possible from drives of any kind. If the model’s hull is made of carbon fiber material, the ends of the antennas must extend outside of the hull. If your model features a carbon fibre fuselage, the aerial tips must always extend outside the fuselage for a length of at least 35 mm. If this is not possi

# Safety notices Be sure to pay attention!5 **Safety notices**group. Pilots standing off to themselves not only endanger their own models but those of others as well. However, when 2 or more pilots using 2.4 GHz remote control systems are closer than 5 m to one another this can lead to retur n channel overdrive which, in turn, will trigger a range warning much too early. Increase your distance between one another until the range warning ceases.
**Pre-start checks Before**  switching the receiver on, be sure the throttle control is at its Stop/Idle position. **Always switch the transmitter on first and then the receiver.**  **Always switch the receiver off first and then the transmitter.**  If this sequence is not maintained, such that the receiver is still switched on when the corresponding transmitter is switched to “OFF”, then the receiver may respond to other transmitters or general radio frequency noise. This can cause the model to execute uncontrolled operations that may cause personal injuries and/or property damage. In particular, for models equipped with a mechanical gyro: before switching off the receiver, disconnect themodel’s power supply to prevent the motor from revving up unintentionally. **The residual spin of a gyro often produces so much voltage that the receiver may falsely in**  **terpret a throttle signal! This will then cause the motor to start up unexpectedly.** 
**Range test** Perform checks for proper operation and range before every session. Secure the model adequately in place and ensure that no one is in front of the model. Perform a complete functional test on the ground and execute a complete simulated flight to exclude thepossibility of system faults or problems with the model’s programming. When doing this, be sure to follow the notices provided on pages 91 and 99. Never operate the transmitter in Model mode, i.e. for flying or driving, without an antenna. Be sure the antenna is firmly seated in its socket. **Operating a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or car**Never fly over spectators or other pilots. Never endanger humans or animals. Never fly in the vicinity of high-voltage wires. Do not operate the model in the vicinity of sluice locks or where real boats or ships are operating. Do not operate a model on public streets or highways, paths or plazas, etc. **Never switch the transmitter off whilst operating a model! If this should happen accidentally, keep**  **your nerve and wait until the transmitter screen is entirely blank, i.**  **e . until the transmitter has**  **shut down completely; this takes at least three seconds. Do not switch your transmitter on again**  **until this has occurred. If you neglect this, there is a risk that the transmitter will “hang” immediately**  **after being switched on, and you will lose control of the model. In this case your only recourse is to**  **switch the transmitter off again, allow it to shut down completely, and then switch on once more**  **after the correct interval. Aero-towing**  When operating a powered tug, ensure that the receiving systems in the two models are always at least 50 cm apar t. We recommend the use of satellite receivers in such situations. If you neglect this, there is a chance of interference from the downlink channel. **Monitoring transmitter and receiver batteries** You must stop running the model to recharge thetransmitter’s battery no later than when low transmitter battery voltage triggers the “ **Batt must be re charged!!**  ” display and acoustic signal. ble, it is essential to substitute longer aerials for the standard ones (approx. 145 mm long) fitted to HoTT receiv er(s). The orientation of the aerial(s) is not critical, but it isadvantageous to install one receiver aerial in a vertical

– upr ight

– position in the model. If your receiver is a Diversity type

– tw o aerials

– the activ e tip of the second aerial should be positioned at 90 ° to the tip of the first aer ial, and ideally the distance between the two tips should be greater than 125 mm.
**Ser vo installation** Always mount servos with the provided rubber vibration-damper parts. Only in this manner can theseparts be protected against excessively hard vibrations. **Installing control rods** Control rods must be installed such that they operate freely and smoothly. It is particularly important that all rudder levers are able to move to their full limits, i.e. not otherwise mechanically blocked. In order to be able to stop a running motor at any time, control rods must be adjusted such that the carburetor tap is completely closed when the joystick and trim lever are brought into their end idle position. Pay attention that no metal parts, e. g. as a result of rudder actuation, vibration, rotating parts, etc., rub against one another. Metal-to-metal contact causes electrical “noise” which can interfere with the correct operation of the receiver.
**Transmitter antenna orientation** Transmission field strength is minimal in an imaginaryline extending straight out from the end of the transmitter’s antenna. This means that “pointing” the transmitter’s antenna directly toward the model will not produce good reception but rather degrade reception.When multiple remote controls are operating simultaneously, pilots should position themselves in a loose6 **Safety notices** Check the charge in batteries routinely, particularly the receiver’s battery. Do not wait until the movements of controlled mechanisms are noticeably slower.Replace expended batteries before they cause problems. The battery manufacturer’s charging instructions arealways to be followed, this includes mandatory adherence to the length of charging time. Never leave batteries being charged unattended.Never attempt to charge primary batteries (non-rechargeable batteries) because they can explode. All secondary batteries (rechargeable batteries) must be charged before every session. To avoid short circuit conditions, first connect the charger cable’s banana plugs, polarity correct, into the charger and thereafter connect the charger cable’s plugs to the transmitter and receiver batteries. Disconnect all power sources from the model when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. **Never** attempt to use defective batteries, damagedbatteries or mixed-type battery combinations as a single group. Do not use mixed combinations of old and new batteries or batteries of different manufacture. **Capacity and operating time** The rule: “capacity is reduced with every successiverecharging”, applies to all batteries. Internal resistance increases at low temperatures to further reduce capacity. As a consequence, the battery’s ability to provide current and hold its voltage is reduced. Frequent charging or the use of battery maintenance programs can also result in gradual loss of battery capacity. Therefore the capacity of batteries should be checked at regular intervals, not in excess of every six months, and replaced if performance is found to be significantly deficient. Purchase only genuine Graupner batteries! **Interference suppression for electric motors**All conventional electric motors produce sparks between their collector and brushes. Depending on the type of motor involved, this may cause more or lessinterference with the functionality of the remote control system. The electric motors of a properly built system should therefore have interference suppression features. For electric drive models it is particularly important thatevery one of its motors is provided with proper interference suppression. Interference filters extensively suppress such disturbances and should always be included. Follow the respective recommendations included in the motor’s operating and installation notices. For further details about interference filters, refer to the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.
**Servo interference filters for extension cables** Order no. **1040** The servo interference filter is necessary when anextended-length servo cable is used. This filter is attached directly to the receiver output. In critical cases a second filter can be attached to the servo. **Using electronic speed controllers** Choosing the right electronic controller is largely amatter of matching controller performance to the motor to be controlled. In order to prevent an overload or damage to the speed controller, its current rating should be at least half of the maximum locked-rotor current draw of the motor to which it is connected. Particular attention is appropriate for so-called “tuning motors”. Because of their low-turns coils these motorscan draw a multiple of their rated current in a lockedrotor condition and this can lead to the destruction of the speed controller. **Electric ignition systems** Combustion motor ignition systems also produce interference that can negatively influence remote control functionality. Always supply power to an electric ignition system from a separate, dedicated battery. Use only interference-suppressed spark plugs, spark caps and shielded ignition leads. Mount the receiver sufficiently far away from ignition system components. **Static charges** A remote control system will be destroyed by the magnetic shock waves produced by a lightning strike

– e ven if the storm is miles away. Therefore ...**... stop flying right away if a storm is approach ing. Static charging via the antenna also repre**  **sents a lethal hazard.**
**Attention**

• In order to fulfill FCC HF emission requirements f or mobile transmitters, a distance of at least 20 cm
m ust be maintained between this system’s antenna and other persons when this system is operating. Operation of this system at a lesser distance is therefore not recommended.

• T o avoid disturbance caused by the electricalcharacteristics and emissions of other transmitters, keep at least a 20 cm distance from other tr ansmitters.

• Oper ation of the remote control system requires a correct program setting for the given country in the transmitter unit. This is necessary for compliance with diverse regulations like FCC, ETSI, CE etc. Follow the respective instructions provided for this with the transmitter and receiver.

• Pr ior to every flight, perform a complete functional test, range test and execute a complete simulated flight in order to exclude the possibility of system faults or problems with the model’s programming.

• Ne ver program the transmitter or receiver while 

# Safety notices7 **Safety notices** the model is being operated.
**Care and maintenance** Never clean the housing, antenna, etc. with cleaning agents, gasoline, water or similar means. Use only a dry, soft cloth. **Components and accessories** As manufacturer of this equipment Graupner GmbH &Co. KG recommends only components and accessories which have been tested and approved by Graupner for their suitability, functionality and safety. If this recommendation is followed, Graupner accepts responsibility for the product. **Graupner cannot accept any responsibility for** **the parts or accessories of other manufactur ers which have not been approved and**  **Graupner cannot evaluate every individual product made by**  **other companies to assess if they are safe to use. Liability exclusion / damage compensation**  This manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notification. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in this manual. Graupnercannot monitor compliance with the assembly instructions, the operating instructions or the conditions and methods under which remote controlcomponents are installed, operated, utilized or maintained. Therefore Graupner accepts no form of liability for loss, damage or costs consequential to incorrect usage or operation or which can be attributed to

same. Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of Graupnerto provide damage compensation, regardless of legal grounds, is limited to the invoice value of the quantity of Graupner goods contributing directly to the damage-inducing event. This does not apply if Graupner is found to be subject to unlimited liability pursuant to binding legal stipulations with respect to intent or gross negligence. Furthermore we will only consider claims if a log file is present; see page 24 under “Data recording”. For the same reason the transmitter must always be updated to the latest software status.It is essential that you register at https://www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx to ensurethat you are constantly informed of important software updates. This is the only means by which we can automatically keep you aware of new updates by e-mail.8 **Safety notices** 

# Safety notices and handling regulations for Lithium-Ion **(LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer (LiPo) batteries**

As applicable for all highly technical products, observance of the following safety notices and handling instructions is essential for a long service life, fault-free operation, and harmless utilization of lithium/polymer batteries. These instructions are to be safeguarded. If the unit is transferred to another user, these instructions should certainly be passed along to the new user.
**General notices**LiIo-/LiPo batteries require particularly attentive handling. This applies to charging, discharging as well as for storage and other handling. Adherence to the following special specifications is necessary:

• Incorrect handling can lead to e xplosions, fire, smoke and poisoning hazards. Furthermore, disregard for instructions and warnings can lead to performance losses and other defects.

• The batter y’s capacity is reduced by every charge/discharge cycle. Storing the battery at temperatures which are too high or too low can also leadto a gradual reduction in capacity. In model operation, battery capacity drops to about 50 ... 80 % of ne w battery capacity after about 50 charge/discharge cycles

– e ven though all charge/discharge rules are followed. This is due in part to the high discharge currents and inductive currents caused by motors.

• Batter y packs may only be connected in series or parallel in exceptional cases as cell capacities and charged state can differ too greatly. This is why the battery packs we deliver are selected. **Special notices for charging LiIo-/LiPo batteries from**  **Graupner**

• Since GraupnerGmbH & Co. KG cannot supervise the correct charging and discharging of cells, the entire guarantee is void in cases of improper charging or discharging.

• Ne ver leave batteries being charged unattended. • Only appro ved chargers with appropriate chargingcables may be used for charging LiIo-/LiPo batteries. Any manipulation to the charger or charger cables can lead to severe damage.

• The maxim um charging capacity must be limited to 1.05 times the battery’s capacity. Example: 700 mAh batter y = 735 mAh max. charging capacity

• Use only the outlet-charger included with the set or a specially designed charger/discharger from Gr aupnerto charge and discharge LiIo-/LiPo batteries, refer to page 17 or www.graupner.de.

• Ensure the settings f or the number of cells or forfinal charging voltage and final discharge voltage are correct. Be sure to observe the operating instructions for your charger/discharger. **Other handling notices**

• The batter y to be charged must be placed on a non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface during the charging process. Combustible or readily ignited objects are to be kept away from the charging configuration. Batteries may only be charged under supervision.

• LiIo-/LiP o batteries connected in series within apack may only be charged as a group if the voltage of individual cells do not differ by more than 0.05 V . The LiIo battery included with the set is equipped with a special safety circuit such that “compensation” for voltage differences between individual cells, by way of an otherwise typical balancer plug connection, is not necessary.

• Under these conditions GraupnerLiIo-/LiPo batteries can be charged with a maximum of 2 C (the

v alue 1 C corresponds to the cell capacity) charg

ing current. At a voltage of maximum 4.2 V per cell and abo ve, charging must continue a constant voltage of 4.2 V per cell until charging current drops belo w 0.1 ... 0.2 A. • Charging v oltage over 4.20 V per cell m ust be avoided absolutely as the cell would otherwise bepermanently damage and could cause a fire. In order to prevent the over-charging of individual cells in a pack, a cut-off voltage between 4.1 ... 4.15 V per cell should be set to increase ser vice life.

• Ne ver attempt to charge battery cells with the wrong polarity. Abnormal chemical reactions take place when batteries are charged with reversed polarity and the battery will be useless. This can cause breaks, smoke and flames.

• The per missible temperature range for charging and storing LiIo-/LiPo batteries is 0 ... +50 °C

. **Storage** LiIo-/LiPo cells should have a 10 ... 20 % charge capacity when stored. If cell voltage drops below 3 V
, then LiIo-/LiPo cells must absolutely be recharged to a capacity of 10 ... 20 % of full capacity . Otherwise, further deep-discharging of the battery will make it useless during storage in a discharged state.**Special notices for discharging LiIo-/LiPo batter ies from**  **Graupner**

• A contin uous current rate of about 1 C does not represent a major prob lem for Graupner LiIo-/LiPo batteries. For larger currents, please follow the catalog specifications. In any case, observe the maximum current rating for the connector system, see maximum discharge current on the battery.

• Discharging belo w 2.5 V per cell damages cells per manently and is therefore to be avoided absolutely.Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely. Permanent short circuits lead to destruction of the battery, high temperatures and perhaps even self-ignition may follow.

• Dur ing discharge, battery temperature must not rise, in any case, to over +70 °C . Otherwise, better cooling or a lower rate of discharge must be in-9 **Safety notices** troduced. The temperature can easily be checked with the infrared thermometer, order no. **1963** . Thebattery must never be discharged via the transmitter’s charging socket. This socket is not suitable for this purpose. **Other handling notices**

• Ne ver short-circuit the battery. A short-circuit allows very high current to flow and this heats up the cells. This will lead to loss of electrolyte, the production of gases and perhaps even explosions. In the vicinity of, or while handling, Graupner LiIo-/LiPo batteries, avoid electrically conducting surfaces because of the danger of creating a shortcircuit condition.

**• Handling connector**  **s** These connectors are not as robust as for other batteries. This applies particularly to the plus pole connector. The connections can easily be broken off. Due to thermal transfer, the connector tabs may not be soldered directly.

**• Cell connection**  Direct solder ing on battery cells is not permitted. The heat of direct soldering can damage battery components, such as separator or isolator.Battery connections should only be made by industrial spot welding. A professional repair made by the manufacturer or distributor is necessary to replace missing or torn-off cables.

**• Replacing individual batter**  **y cells** The replacement of battery cells may only be made by the manufacturer or distributor and never by the user himself.

**• Dama**  **ged cell usage** Damaged cells may never be used or returned to service.Characteristics of damaged cells include: damaged housing packing, deformed battery cells, electrolyte or leaking electrolyte. In these cases, further use of the battery is not permissible. Damaged or useless cells are hazardous waste items and must be appropriately disposed. **General warning notices**

• Batter ies must never be put in fire or burned.

• Batter y cells must not be submerged in liquids, such as water, seawater or beverages. Any contact with liquids, of whatever nature, is to be avoided.

• Individual batter y cells and batteries are not toysand must therefore not get into the hands of children. Batteries/cells must be kept out of the reach of children.

• Batter ies must not get into the vicinity of babies orsmall children. If a battery is swallowed, immediately go to a doctor or emergency medical facility.

• Batter ies must not be put in a microwave oven or put under pressure. Smoke, fire and more can be the consequences.

• Ne ver dismantle a LiIo-/LiPo battery. Dismantling a battery can cause internal short-circuits. Gas, fire, explosions and other problems can result.

• The electrolyte and electrolytic v apors in LiIo-/LiPo batteries are harmful. Absolutely avoid all direct contact with electrolytes. If electrolytes come intocontact with skin, eyes or other body parts, immediately wash out or rinse out with generous amounts of fresh water then be sure to consult

a doctor.

• Batter ies built into equipment must always beremoved from that equipment when it is not currently in use. Always switch off equipment after it is used to prevent deep discharging. Always charge batteries before it is too late. Store batteries on a non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface! Deep-discharged LiIo-/LiPo batteries are defective and may no longer be used! **Notice for remote control set** 

### mc-16 **HoTT and** 

### mc-20 **HoTT** Order no. **33016** / **33020** These radio control sets are fitted as standard with a LiIo transmitter battery with integral protective circuit (changes reserved). Once the factory preset voltage limit of 3.60 V has been reached, a w arning will appear in the display. **Disposal of used batteries** Some countries have laws requiring that all used batteries be turned over to an authorized collection center. Disposing of batteries along with common household garbage is forbidden. Old batteries can be turned into communal collection centers for disposal at no charge or they can be returned to one of our dealerships or anywhere else where batteries of that given type are sold. Used batteries we have delivered can also be sent back to us, at your cost, through the mail. Use the return address below: Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Service: Used batteries Henriettenstr. 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim unter TeckThis represents an essential contribution to environmental protection.
**Caution: Damaged batteries require among other things,**  **special packaging, because they are very toxic!**10 **Foreword** 

# mc-16 **and** 

# mc-20 **The Newest Generation of Remote Control Technology**

The technical advances across the entire spectrum of model building is an ever-present challenge to designengineers. This is why the introduction of new transmission technology in the 2.4 GHz band represents a

ne w milestone. The HoTT-System ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission) developed by Graupner is a synthesis of know-how, engineering and testing done around the world by professional pilots. Established Graupner HoTT techniques theoretically permit over 200 models to be operated at the same time. However, because of the interspersed radio

frequency utilization per mitted by certification for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this n umber is significantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than w ould be the case in conventional35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is

– as often bef ore

– is still lik ely to be the size of available operating space (i. e . airspace for aircraft).Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite difficult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security. Bidirectional communication between transmitter and receiver, by way of a return channel built into the receiver, permits convenient access to data and programming in the HoTT receiver. For example, this makes it possible to swap receiver outputs or to divide up control functions among multiple servos (channel mapping). Servo travel and servo rotation directions in the receiver can also be matched to one another with these facilities. Telemetry data, like VARIO and GPS data, can be called up from optionally available modules. The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT radio control sets are based on the Graupner/JR mc-24 computer radio control system, which was introduced back in 1997. The new equipment has been specially developed for the advanced RC pilot. The transmitters of this series offer an unprecedented level of security and reliability combined with outstanding operating convenience and ease of use.Both these HoTT systems can easily be used to operate all current model types, whether your preference is for fixed-wing model aircraft or helicopters, model cars or boats. For example, every 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20HoTT transmitter is fully equipped in terms of software and hardware to allow the use of the renowned NAUTIC modules. A further innovation is the “channel sequencer”

– a vailable as standard only on the 

### mc20 HoTT

– which pro vides a means of automating servo sequences involving up to three servos.However, it is fixed-wing model aircraft and helicopters in particular which call for complex mixed functions involving the control surfaces or swashplate control system. In this respect the latest computer technology makes it extremely simple to program thesystem to cope with a vast range of model requirements: simply select the appropriate model type inthe program of your HoTT transmitter, and the software automatically sets up all the relevant mixingand coupling functions. Separate modules for implementing complex coupling functions are no longer required, and complicated mechanical mixers in the model are completely superfluous. Additional flight-phase-specific settings can be stored in every model memory location. For example, such settings can be made for various parameters that can be called up to implement particular flight maneuversat the “press of a button”. Additional model memories can be stored on the SD card, which is included standard with the set. Even telemetry data can be recorded for subsequent evaluation on a PC. Since the 

### mc-20 HoTT is equipped with two displays, the lower display has been optimized for comprehensible, simple operation of the software. Thegraphic representation of mixer functions is particularly helpful. The upper display allows telemetry data to be called up from the receiver. Functionally-related options are clearly arranged bycontent in a simple organization. The clear, comprehensible program structure permits a beginner to quickly become familiar with the various functions andable to use all options pertinent to his level of expertise with remote control models. This handbook describes every menu in detail. There are tips, many notices and programming examples to supplement the descriptions and also explanations formodel specific technical terms, like transmitter control, dual rate, butterfly, and so on. Please observe the safety notices and technical notices. Read through the instructions attentively. Before usage, test all functions by simply attaching servos to the receiver included in the set. While doing this, observe respective notes on page 77. This will help you learn the essential operating techniques and functions of your HoTT transmitter. Always handle your remote controlled model with a sense of responsibility so that you do not endanger yourself or others. The Graupner team wishes you much pleasure andsuccess with your HoTT transmitter system, the newest generation of remote control systems.

Kirchheim-Teck, November 201211 **Remote control set description** 

# mc-16 **and** 

# mc-20 **series computer systems** two remote control sets with 2,4-GHz- Graupner|SJ -HoTT technology ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission)

**Technology that enthralls. The superior functional security of**  **Graupner/SJ HoTT technology accomplished with bidirectional** **communications between transmitter and receiv er with integrated telemetry, freely programmable**  **voice output via headset connector, and ultra-fast response times.** **Simplified programming using capacitive touch buttons on the**  

### mc-20 **HoTT and four-way push buttons on the**  

### mc-16 **HoTT. High-contrast eight-line graphic screen provides** **a clear display of all set-up parameters. Switcha ble blue backlighting. The**  

### mc-20 **HoTT features an independent second screen for displaying te**  **lemetry data. Storage of telemetry data on a micro SD memory card.**  **USB connection to read and write the model’s memories as well as for making firmware updates.**  • Integ rated Graupner|SJHoTT 2.4 GHz transmission system

• The high-speed pr imary processor is used for data transfer, ensuring ultra-fast response times.

• Maxim um interference immunity made possible by optimized frequency hopping through as many as 75 channels and wider channel spread

• Intelligent data tr ansfer with correction function

• Ov er 200 systems can be used simultaneously

• The HoTT technique of bidirectional comm unication between sender and receiver, as well as the fastest possible transmission rate (10 ms) assures

e xtremely short reaction times.

• Modulation can be s witched by software: when necessary, you can switch from “HoTT” to “EXT.” or “SP.” by pressing a button.

• Case incor porates integral patch aerial

• T ransmitter features integral slot for SD and SDHC memory cards, formatted to FAT or FAT32, forsaving log files, model programming data and supplementary functions such as transmitter firmware updates.

• T ransmitter features alternative method of battery charging via the USB socket.

• 6 diff erent languages (Dutch, English, French,German, Italian and Spanish) available per software update. For the availability of a given language, refer to the download area.

• Simplified arr angement of operating elements, such as joysticks, external switches, proportional controls and trim levers as control functions

• CONVENIENCE MODE SELECT OR to simplify changeovers between operating modes 1 ... 4 (e. g. throttle left/throttle right)

• Extremely wide receiv er operating voltage range of 3.6 V to 8.4 V (functional to 2.5 V)

• F ail-safe, free channel assignment (channel mapping), mixer functions and all servo settings are The illustration shows the contents of the mc-20 HoTT transmitter set.12 **Remote control set description** simple to program

• Sw ashplate limiting: This function limits the swashplate’s tilt angle to prevent the potential for mechanical collision in helicopter 3D operation at full-limit roll and pitch-axis

• Multi-channel function f or operating Graupner product line NAUTIC modules

• Digital tr imming, effective per specific flight-phase

• C1 changeo ver, brake/elec. motor: This changeover can be implemented very easily via enhanced flight phase programming. The pilot determines the joystick positions (forward/rear) at which the motor is to switched off or the airbrakes are to be retracted.

• T welf freely programmable mixers for fixed-wing or helicopter models, each with freely selectable input and output functions; four curve mixers with innovative 6-point curve technology for easy to set and adjust curve values at up to eight pointsfor throttle, pitch, tail or other nonlinear characteristics. The arithmetic unit in the CPU employs aningenious method of calculating polynomial approximations for truly-rounded, ideal MPC (multipoint curve) mixer curves.

• Cur ve mixer points can be offset in both axes using the four-way buttons.

• Up to se ven flight-phase programs can be indivi

dually adapted f or each model and given a name. The switchover time is programmable separately.

• SUPER SER VO menu with a perfect overview ofall servo setting data and simple parameter correction at four “levels”: direction of rotation, midpoint setting, separate servo travel on both sides and separate travel limiting on both sides for 8 ( 

### mc-16 HoTT) respectively 12 servos ( 

### mc-20 HoTT) with a total of 48 respectively 72 setting options.

• SUPER-DU AL-RATE, EXPO and EXPO/DUALRATE menu with 36 potential setting variants for three servo functions and up to seven flight phases

• Ser vo display hot-key: from virtually any menu, pressing the  and  buttons of the left-hand four-way button takes you directly to the servo display

• Highly practical multi-function menus for fixed-wingmodel aircraft and helicopters. Entering the number of aileron and flap servos, or collective pitch servos, automatically sets up all the relevant mixer functions in the appropriate multi-function menu.

• Helicopter s washplate mixer for 1, 2, 3, or 4 point steering.

• Future-proof design: updatable, high-speed 32- bit operating system with modern flash memory, simple update capability via the USB port and the micro-SD card.

• T ransmitters feature sockets for PC USB interface, earphone, SMART-BOX, DSC system as standard; they are prepared for Trainer mode operations

• **ESC** button switches the screen from the Main menu to the » **Telemetry** « menu and back.

• Comprehensiv e telemetry displays, programming and analysis functions directly on the transmitter

screen

• Wired and wireless Trainer systems with total transfer; all settings are entered at the Teacher transmitter.



### mc-16 **HoTT**

• 20 model memor ies with storage of all model-specific programming and set-up parameters

• Eight control functions as standard, can be e xpanded to twelve at extra cost

• MUL TI-DATA GRAPHIC LCD monitor with bluebacklighting for greatly improved legibility in difficult lighting conditions.

• Function encoder with tw o four-way push-buttons 

# mc-16 **and** 

# mc-20 **series computer systems** two remote control sets with 2,4-GHz- Graupner|SJ -HoTT technology ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission)
for simplified programming and accurate settings

• K ey-Lock function guards against accidental operation

• T ransmitter features two 3-position switches (SW 5/6 + SW 11/12), two side-mounted proportional controls (Lv1 + 2) and two proportional sliders (Sl1 + 2) as standard; controls can be assigned to any function

• Cer tain menu points can be unlocked as an extracost option; see Contents on pages 2 and 3 and the start of the relevant menu points

*  Standard option

 Option can be unlocked at extra cost



### mc-20 **HoTT**

• 24 model memor ies with storage of all model-specific programming and set-up parameters

• Maxim um twelve control functions

• T wo MULTI-DATA GRAPHIC LCD monitors with blue backlighting for improved legibility in difficult lighting conditions

• A function encoder with tw o touch-sensitive, fourway keys („CAP Touch“) permit simplified programming and precise settings

• T welve toggle switches (three 3-position switches (SW 2/3, 5/6 + 11/12), five 2-position switches(SW 4, 7, 9, 13 + 15), two centre-biased 2-position switches (SW 8 + 14), two 2-position locking switches (SW 1 + 10), two momentary switches on the rear of the transmitter (SW 16 + 17 / 18 +19), two INC/DEC buttons (CTL 5 + 6), two sidemounted proportional controls (Lv1 + 2) and two proportional sliders (Sl1 + 2) installed as standard; controls can be assigned to any function

• K ey-Lock function guards against accidental ope

r ation

• V oice and, as applicable also MP3 file, output over headset output or loudspeaker13 **Remote control set description** • Ring-limiter : functions similar to swashplate limitation but is used for control of up to three VoithSchneider drives in ship models.

• Channel sequencer f or automating servo motion sequences of up to three servos, e. g. to automate the lowering of landing gear or to extend/retract drives in self-launching gliders. **Model programs**

• Model type icon: graphic model type indicator (fixed-wing / helicopter)

• T ransmitter operating hours timer

• Flight phase s witch assignments: six switches, two with a priority function. Every switch combination can be named freely. This makes the number of flight phases independent of the number of flight phase switches.

• T ail type normal, V-tail, Delta/flying-wing and 2 HR Sv 3+8 (which immediately makes two coupled elevator servos available without using free mixers or dual mixers)

• Flap count 4 AIL/4 FL: Full support of eight wing servos, even without use of free mixers (standard feature only on the twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter; can be unlocked at extra cost on the 

### mc-16 HoTT)

• Expanded tr ansmitter control menu: single-sided centre offset facility. With the exception of thetrims, all transmitter control elements can be assigned as transmitter controls. Option of assigning two switches to each input to act as a genuine three-stage function.

• Wing mix ers: New concept for the multi-flap menu to simplify settings of one to eight wing servos on a flight-phase specific basis in a comprehensible manner without requiring the use of free mixers

• » **Logical switches** «: this function permits two switches to be coupled as »and« or »or« logic functions. The result can be employed as a virtual switch. Typical application: The activation of certain functions should only be possible in conjunction with other functions, e. g. wheel brake can only beactivated when the landing gear is down. A number of functions which are normally independent of one another, are to be put in their base settings by way of an »Emergency switch«. This program automation can be activated by multiple switchesthat also select the appropriate program. (Standard only on the 

### mc-20 HoTT, optional on the 

### mc-16 HoTT.)

• Flight phase s witching cutoff delay: the delay time can be switched off for individual channels on a flight-phase basis (e. g. for motor off in electric models or to activate/deactivate helicopter head lock). (Standard only on the 

### mc-20 HoTT, optional on the 

### mc-16 HoTT.)

• Expanded ser vo centre adjustment range: now +/-125 %

• Number of flight phases: fixed-wing: 7, helicopter: 6 + AR

• Phase tr im available on all axes of fixed-wing mo

dels

• Ser vo assignments can be swapped at the receiver output

• Additional functions planned; implementation via software update.
**General HoTT features**

• Simple , extremely fast binding for each model

• Ultr a-fast re-binding even at maximum range

• An y number of receivers can be bound to provide additional channels (max. 32 channels)

• Range: test and warning function

• Lo w-voltage warning

• GR-16 and GR-24 receiv ers used in SAME mode can simultaneously address a maximum of four servos as a block, with a frame rate of 10 ms (digi

tal servos only!) • Thanks to cycle time reduced do wn to as little as 10 ms , extremely short response times are achieved.

• Real-time telemetr y analysis on the transmitter screen. As an option, telemetry data can also be displayed on the SMART-BOX.

• Selectab le cycle time: 10 ms or 20 ms/30 ms , depending on receiver and operating mode

• Channel mappingin the receiver allows free distribution of control functions. The travel distance and rotation direction settings integrated into the receiver make it possible, forexample, to match up mapped servos with one another.

• The prog rammable fail-safe functions »Hold«, »Off« and »Move to preset positions« that are built into the receiver for every individual servo channel can be set separately.14 **Remote control set description** Other accessories in Internet at www.graupner.de. Contact or visit your local dealer. He will be glad to provide advice. 

# mc-16 **and** 

# mc-20 **series computer systems** two remote control sets with 2,4-GHz- Graupner|SJ -HoTT technology ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission)

**The Order No. 33016 set includes**

• Microcomputer tr ansmitter 

### mc-16 HoTT with b uilt-in LiIo transmitter battery 1s4p/4000 mAh/3.7 V and tw o 3-position switches, two proportional sliders on the centre console and two side-mounted proportional rotary controls (change reserved)

• plug-in charger (4.2 V , 500 mA)

• Shor t and long stick-tops (Order No. **33000.2** and **33000.3** )

• bidirectional receiv er Graupner|SJ GR-16 HoTT (order no. **33508** ) for connection of up to 8 servos

• USB adapter/interf ace (order no. **7186.6** ) including suitable USB cable for connection to a PC and an adapter cable for receiver updates

• Micro-SD card (4 GB) with an adapter f or a card reader **The Order No. 33020 set includes**

• Microcomputer tr ansmitter 

### mc-20 HoTT with built-in LiIo transmitter battery 1s6p/6000 mAh/3.7 V and tw elve toggle switches (three 3-position switches, five 2-position switches, two centre-biased 2-position switches and two 2-position locking switches), two momentary switches on the back of the transmitter, two INC/ DEC buttons (CTL 5 + 6) plus two side-mounted proportional rotary controls and two proportional sliders (specification reserved)

• plug-in charger (4.2 V, 500 mA)

• Shor t and long stick-tops (Order No. **33000.2** and **33000.3** )

• bidirectional receiv er Graupner|SJ GR-24 HoTT (order no. **33512** ) for connection of up to 12 servos

• USB adapter/interf ace (order no. **7186.6** ) including suitable USB cable for connection to a PC and an adapter cable for receiver updates

• Micro-SD card (4 GB) with an adapter f or a card reader

• Metal hanger f or transmitter straps

• T ransmitter strap

• Hand rests

• Alumin um transmitter case **Accessories** Order No. Descr iption **71.26** T ransmitter straps, Graupner|SJ HoTT **72.40** T ransmitter straps, deluxe

T

eacher/pupil cable for the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT, see page 225 **Replacement parts** Order No. Descr iption **3080** Alumin um transmitter case, HoTT, 400 x 300 x 150 mm **33000.1** Transmitter battery, flat LiIo, single cell sixpack/6000 mAh 3.7 V TX **33002.1** Micro-SD card, 4 GB f or HoTT transmitter **33012.2** T ransmitter metal hanger for 

### mc-16 and 

### mc-20 HoTT **33012.3** Hand rests f or the transmitters 

### mc-16 and 

### mc-20 HoTT (2 piece)15 **Remote control set description** 

### mc-16 **HoTT and** 

### mc-20 **HoTT transmitter** Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz
Modulation FHSS Region EUR O or FRANCE, see page 272 Control functions 

### mc-16 HoTT: 8 functions, 4 of these can be trimmed, can be expanded to 12 functions at extra cost 

### mc-20 HoTT: 12 functions, 4 of these can be trimmed Temperature range -10 ... +55 °C
Antenna Integ ral patch aerial inside

case Operating voltage 3.2 ... 4.8 V Current dr aw about 400 mA Range up to about 4 000 m Dimensions about 235 x 228 x 66 mm (without hand rests) Weight about 1200 g with tr ansmitter battery, without accessorys **GR-16 HoTT receiver** order no. **33508** Operating voltage 3.6 ... 8.4 V* Current dr aw about 70 mA Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz
Modulation FHSS
Antenna 2 div ersity antennas, about 145 mm long, about 115 mm of this length encapsulated and about 30 mm activ e Plug-in servos 8 Sensor sockets 1 Temperature range -10 ... +55 °C
Dimensions about 46 x 21 x 14 mm W eight about 12 g **GR-24 HoTT receiver** order no. **33512** Operating voltage 3.6 ... 8.4 V* Current dr aw about 70 mA Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz
Modulation FHSS
Antenna 2 div ersity antennas, about 145 mm long, about 115 mm of this length encapsulated and about 30 mm activ e Plug-in servos 12 Sensor sockets 1 Temperature range -10 ... +55 °C
Dimensions about 46 x 31 x 14 mm W eight about 16 g 

# Technical data

* The specification f or permissible operating voltage range applies only to the receiver. Please note in this context that receiver input voltage is applied without regulation to connected servos but the voltage range for most connectible servos (speed controls, gyros, etc.) is only 4.8 to 6 V16 **General operating notices** 

# General operating notices


# mc-16 HoTT and 

# mc-20 HoTT transmitters

**Transmitter power supply**


### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters arefitted as standard with rechargeable Lithium-Ion batteries differing in capacity. (Change reserved.) **However, the standard built-in battery is not charged upon delivery of the transmitter.**  When the transmitter is used, its battery voltage should be monitored by way of the indicators provided in the LCD display. If battery voltage drops below the adjustable voltage setting (set via item “Batterie warning” in the “ **Basic Settings** ” menu, page 272,), default value 3,60 V, an audib le warning signal willsound and the message window shown below will appear in the screen

#01

0:22h Stp 0 00 0

0V 3.5V

x T Batt. must be re- charged!!

No later than now, operation must be terminated so the battery can be charged again.
Notice: Be sure that the correct battery type is set in the

“ **Basic Settings** ” menu, page 272! **“Lith” must be set as standard.**  The transmitter’s rechargeable LiIo battery can be charged by way of the charger socket located behind a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter

– as view ed from the front

– with the included plug-in charger (order no. **32032.4** ), see page 22. **Charging the transmitter battery using the plug type charger**  With the plug-type charger (4.2 V / 500 mA) included in the set the charge time for the tr ansmitter battery is up to about fifteen hours, depending on the pack’s initial state of charge.Never use any other type or make of plug-type charger, nor a charger designed for other types of battery.There is a risk of excessive output voltage and incorrect connector polarity (see below), either of which can result in very serious damage. We recommendthat you label the standard charger to avoid confusion. Please read the Safety Notes on pages 8 ... 9. The transmitter must be switched “OFF” during theentire charging procedure. Never switch on the transmitter when it is connected to the charger. Even a brief interruption to charging can cause charging voltage to rise to a level that will immediately damage the transmitter with over-voltage. Also for this reason, be sure all connectors are always plugged in securely and have good contact. **Charging the transmitter battery via the USB socket**  The transmitter is supplied fitted with a genuine Graupner/SJtransmitter battery with integral protective circuit, Order No. **33000.1** , which can also be charged via the USB port of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter at the usual current available at USB ports; see “mini-USB socket” on page 25. **C A U T I O N**  : charging a battery without integral protective circuit via the USB socket incurs a serious risk of fire! **Charging with automatic chargers** To achieve quicker recharging of the single cell LiIo battery, Graupner automatic chargers can also be used. The table below shows a selection of these chargers. **Recommended chargers (accessory)**

Order No. DesignationInput voltage 220VInput voltage 12V suitable for battery typesintegr. balancerNiCdNiMHLiPo/LiIolead battery

**6411** Ultramat 8 x x x x x **6463** Ultramat 12 plus x x x x x x **6464** Ultramat 14 plus x x x x x x x **6466** Ultra Trio plus 14 x x x x x x x **6468** Ultramat 16S x x x x x x x **6469** Ultra Trio Plus 16 x x x x x x **6470** Ultramat 18 x x x x x x x **6475** Ultra Duo Plus 45 x x x x x x x **6478** Ultra Duo Plus 60 x x x x x x x **6480** Ultra Duo Plus 80 x x x x x x x

Charger cable, order no. 3022is additionally needed for the transmitter and charger cable, order no. 3021 is additionally needed for the receiver. Other charger units and details about the listed chargers can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. The charger socket is equipped standard with a diode to protect against reversed polarity. Original Graupnerautomatic chargers also detect battery voltage polarity. Observe the configuration notices for the charger used.17 **General operating notices First connect the charger cable’s banana plugs**  **to the charger and only then connect the cable’s other end into the charging jack on the transmit**  **ter. Never allow the bare ends of the banana plugs to come into contact with one another when the** **other end of the cable is plugged into the trans mitter.**  **Charging current may not exceed 1.5 A as other** 

**** **wise the diode, and perhaps other components, could be damaged. If necessary, limit the current**  **at the charger.**



### mc- **charging jack polarity**The charger cables on the market from other manufacturers often have different polarities. Therefore use only an original Graupner charger cable, order no. **3022**

.

**Removing the transmitter’s battery** To remove the transmitter battery locate the cover of the battery compartment in the back of the transmitter and slide it off in the direction of the arrow:

**Battery connector**

Lift one side of the battery and withdraw it from thehook-and-loop tape without using force. Then disconnect the transmitter battery’s connector by carefully pulling on the supply line cable. (The photo shows the battery of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.) **Inserting the transmitter’s battery** The battery connector is protected against a reversepolarity connection by two slanted edges, see illustration. When correctly plugged in, the unconnected pin of the connector is at the bottom, as shown in the illustration. The plus pole (red lead) is in the middle and the minus pole (brown or black lead) is toward the antenna side. Never try to force the connector onto its circuit-board socket. Place the battery into its compartment and close the transmitter’s cover. **Battery operation timer at the bottom left of the**

**screen**This timer shows the transmitter’s cumulative operating time since the transmitter’s battery was last charged. This timer is automatically reset to “0:00” when the transmitter is switched on and its battery voltage is significantly higher than when the transmitter was last used, e. g. because the batter y was charged.

#01

0:00h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M x HoTT Transmitter connector polarity **General charging notices**

• The charging instructions f or the charger as well as for the battery from its manufacturer to be observed.

• Pa y attention to the maximum permissible charging current specified by the battery’s manufacturer. In order to prevent damage to the transmitter, charging current should never exceed 1 A. If necessar y, limit the current at the charger.

• If the transmitter batter y is nevertheless to be charged at a current rate in excess of 1 A, then it is imperativ e that this is done outside the transmitter.Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the transmitter’s board due to overloading its printed circuit paths and/or overheating of the battery.

• If an automatic charger is to be used for charging, perf orm several test charging procedures to ensure the flawless functionality of its automatic shut-off. This applies particularly if you want to charge the standard installed Lithium battery with an automatic charger unit. You may need to alter the charger’s cut-off behaviour if the charger you are using offers this option.

• Do not ex ecute a battery discharge or battery maintenance program through the charger jack. The charger jack is not suitable for this purpose.

• Alwa ys connect the charger cable to the charger first and then to the receiver or transmitter battery. This avoids the possibility of shorting the bare banana plug ends together.

• If the battery heats up significantly, check the battery’s condition, replace the battery or reduce the charging current.

**• Never lea**  **ve a charging battery unattended.**

**• Follow the saf**  **ety notices and handling instruc tions provided on page 8.** 18 **General operating notices Opening the transmitter housing**  Carefully read the notices below before opening the transmitter housing. It may be better if unexperienced users ask a Graupner Service location to take care of the procedures described below.The transmitter should only be opened in the following situations:

• to con vert a neutralized joystick to a non-neutralized joystick or a non-neutralized joystick to a neutralized joystick.

• to adjust jo ystick return tension. Switch off the transmitter before opening its cover. Open the battery compartment as described onthe previous double-page. If the handrests are fitted, undo the three lower retaining screws of the six screws in each handrest. Now undo the five recessed screws in the back of the transmitter and the battery well using a PH1-size cross-point screwdriver; see illustration:

Note that the screw-holes are inclined slightly to the rear, so the cross-point screwdriver should be applied at the corresponding angle. Hold the two housing sections together by hand then turn the transmitter upright over a suitable surface so these 5 screws can fall out without getting lost. Now lift up on the backplate carefully and place it to one side. **Important notices:**

**• Ensure that the shor**  **ter screw**

**– in the batter**  **y well** 

**– does not fall inside the transmitter** 

**.**

**• Make no modifications of an**  **y kind to the cir cuitry as this will void the guarantee as well as**  **the unit‘s official permit. This applies in particular to the switches in**  **stalled on both sides of the front screen. If you wish to change the arrangement, contact your**  **nearest Graupner Service Centre.**

**• Be sure not to touc**  **h the circuit boards with any metallic objects. Do not touch contacts**  **with your fingers.**

**• Ne**  **ver switch the transmitter on when its hou sing is open.**  **When you close the transmitter again, be sure that ...** 

• ... no cab les are caught between housing edges when the backplate is put into position.

• ... both housing par ts are properly seated with one another before screwing them together. Never force the housing sections together.

• T urn the screws down into the existing housing threads without str ipping them out.

• ... fit the shor ter of the five screws in the battery compartment again.

• ... reconnect the batter y.

• ... re-install the handrests if y ou wish. **Lithium battery CR 2032** When you remove the transmitter back panel, you will see the holder for a CR 2032 battery on the circuit board below the aerial base, slightly left of centre:

**Lithium battery**

This battery maintains the date and time settings during a transmitter power supply outage, for example when the transmitter’s main battery is being replaced.19 **General operating notices Joystick restoring force**  The joystick’s restoring force can also be adjusted to the pilot’s preference. The adjustment is located nextto the return springs, see markings in the figure below. Spring force for the given direction of motion can beadjusted by turning the respective screw with a Phillips screwdriver.

• cloc kwise = stronger retur n,

• counter-cloc kwise = w eaker return.

**vertical**

**horizontal**

Note: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located to the right of the middle. **Stick conversions**

**Neutralization** Both the left and the right joystick can be configured for neutralized or non-neutralized operation. Open the transmitter. To change the joystick’s factory setting, locate the screw shown in the figure below enclosed in a white circle.
Note: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so the corresponding screw for the right joystick is on the right side just below the middle.

Now turn this screw down until the respective joystick is free to move from limit to limit

– or tur n the screw out until the joystick again completely self-restoring. **Brake spring and ratchet** The outboard screw of the two marked in the next figure adjusts the braking force and the inboard screw adjusts the strength of the ratchet for the respective joystick:

Note: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located at the top left.20 **General operating notices Transmitter neckstrap support bars**  As standard the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter set includes a strong support system for the attachment of a neckstrap. The 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter can be retro-fitted with the transmitter support system, Order No. **33012.2** , at any time. The support bars are inserted in the sockets in thetransmitter case, and locked in place. After the transmitter has been used, they can be removed again in similar fashion:

first press, then turn

The support bars are installed as follows: push one of the bars into the socket in the transmitter case, angled towards the centre of the transmitter as shown above. Now ensure that the retaining pin attached to the bar is in line with the slot in the socket, and pressthe bar against the spring in the direction of the transmitter for a distance of about one centimetre. At the same time fold the bar outwards (do not use force) in order to lock it in place. Install the second support bar in the same manner. To remove the support bars first unlock one of the bars by lightly pressing it inwards, and then fold it towards the centre of the transmitter. As soon as the retaining pin is free, you can withdraw the support bar from its guide. Repeat the procedure with the second support bar. **Stick length adjustment**The length of both joysticks can be continuously adjusted to adapt these transmitter controls to the pilot’s preference. Hold the lower half of the knurled grip in place then turn the upper section to release its counter-locked threads:

Now pull up or push down on the joystick’s end to the desired length. When the length is suitable, tighten the counter-locked threads of the upper and lower sections again. The procedure is the same if you wish to replace the short stick-tops with the longer ones also supplied in the set. **The following straps are available as accessories:** Order no. Description **71.26** T ransmitter straps, Graupner/SJ HoTT **72.40** T ransmitter straps, deluxe21 **Transmitter description - Front side** 

# Transmitter description Front side

(The illustration shows the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.)

**Integral aerial inside case**

**Option wells** for switches and buttons: The following are fitted as standard: 

### mc-16 HoTT: 2 three-position s witches 

### mc-20 HoTT: 12 s witches of various type and 2 INC/DEC buttons

**Function module** two sliders “Sl1” and “Sl2”
**Digital trim** For the fine-tuning of servo positions (travelneutralization). Each click produces an increment of adjustment (position indicator in display). The trim increment can be selected in the » **Stick settings** « menu.

**LC Display** (more details available on page 28.) **Contrast adjustment in the »General settings« menu; see page 271.**  **Warning indicators:**

• f or underrun of preset battery voltage threshold

• f or fault function of the teacher/pupil system

• C1 jo ystick too far toward full throttle when transmitter is switched on

•

... **ON/OFF s witch (ON/OFF with LED display)**  Hold the ON/OFF switch pressed in for about one second to switch the transmitter on. Hold it pressed in for about three seconds to switch off.

**touch sensitive keys, left and right LC Display**  (more details available on page 28.)

**Function module** rotary control: left side “Lv1”, right side “Lv2” **Loud speaker**  **Connector sockets** on the face side, protected by a cover, see beginning page 22

mc-20

**left four-way button:**

+ **ESC** = select/confir m **ESC** touched f or about 1 s: Changeover between telemetry menu and basic display

= scroll in one of the f our directions with every

tap ( 
, 
, 

,  ) sim ultaneous horizontal tap (  )

= changeo ver between basic display and servo

display

simultaneous vertical tap of the left (  ) keys + " **SET** " of the right fourway button = changeover to the "secret options", see page 34. **SET** = select/confirm

= scroll or change v alue with every touch of one

of the four direction symbols ( 
, 
, 

,  ) Circle with the finger around the circumference

= scroll/change v alues. Alternative values selection with the left four-way button ( 
, 
, 

,  )

simultaneous tap on 

or  = **CLEAR right four-way button:** 

or **LED indicators** BATTERY: illuminates when v oltage is sufficient RF: illuminates dur ing RF radiation WARNING: b links, for example, when "Throttle too high", "no pupil signal", "Transmitter battery voltage too low", ...

**Joystick** Two joysticks for a total of four independent control functions. The length of the joysticks can be adjusted. The correlation of control functions 1 ... 4 can be set on a model type basis by way of the » **Basic settings, model**  « menu, e. g. throttle left or right. Thethrottle joystick can be converted from neutralizing to non-neutralizing, see page 19.22 **Transmitter description - Face-side connections** sic display should show the character string “DSC” below the operating time clock. At this time, thedisplay of telemetry data and symbols will be suppressed.

ELEVE #11

0:01h Stp Flt DSC 0:00 0:00

4.1V HoTT

The transmitter’s upper display will show the message “CANNOT RECEIVE DATA” during this time. Thus the transmitter is ready for operation. In contrast, the transmitter in teacher mode is to be **switched on prior**  to plugging in the respective cable. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the desired unit in compliance with the giv en operating instructions for that unit. **Important: Pay attention that all plugs are inserted se**  **curely into their respective sockets and use only the prescribed 2-pole TRS connector**  **plugs on the DSC-side.** 4. In the line „DSC Output“ in the » **Basic settings, model**  «, page 92 or 100,

– depending on the number of functions tr ansferred

– one of the follo wing modes can be set: PPM10, PPM16, PPM18 or PPM24. Default setting: PPM10. Notice about flight simulators: Because of the myriad of flight simulators available on the market, it may be necessary to have the contact layout of the audio plug or DSC module appropriately modified by Graupner Service. 

# DSC jack

The acronym “DSC” is a carryover which stands for the original “Direct Servo Control” function. However, in HoTT systems the “direct servo control” function isno longer available via a diagnose cable due to technical reasons. Once the left-hand side flap has been moved away, the DSC socket is accessible:

The two-pole DSC socket fitted as standard to 

### mc16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters serves both as Trainer socket (Teacher and Pupil) and also as interface for flight simulators and external RF modules.**To ensure a proper DSC connection, please ob**

**serve:** 1. Make an y necessary menu changes. Refer to the section beginning on page 222 to adapt the transmitter to a teacher/pupil system. 2. When operating a flight sim ulator or when operating the transmitter as a pupil transmitter, **ALWAYS switch OFF**  the transmitter as only in this position does the transmitter‘s RF module remain inactive after the DSC cable is inserted. This also reduces the transmitter‘s power consumption somewhat. Only the red “ 

### Battery ” LED should remainconstantly illuminated and the transmitter’s ba

# Face-side connections Charger socket

(The illustration shows the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.)
The left-hand side flap provides access to the charge socket of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter:

The transmitter’s rechargeable LiIo battery can be charged by way of the charger socket located behind a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter

– as view ed from the front

– with the included plug-in charger (order no. **32032.4** ). Maximum permissible charging current with Graupner automatic chargers: 1,5 A. Nev er use plug-in chargers from other manufacturers or chargers intended for other battery types. Charger output voltage which is too high or possibly even different plug polarity, see further below, can cause immense damage. More information about charging the transmitter’s battery can be found on page 16. Observe the safety notices beginning on page 8 when handling lithium batteries.23 **Transmitter description - Face-side connections** The left-hand side flap provides access to the DATA socket of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter:

This jack is intended for connection of the optional Smart-Box, order no. **33700**

. Details about the Smart-Box can be found with the given product in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.However, the Data socket can also be used to connect external RF modules made by other manufacturers; see “EXT.” and “SP.” in the “Module” section of the “Basic model settings” menu on pages 88 and 96. 

# Data jack

Once the right face-side cover has been moved away, the transmitter’s headset connector is accessible:

The jack is intended for connecting conventional earplugs or a headset by way of a 3.5 mm TRS plug. (not included in the set) An appropriate symbol will appear in the basic display when a headset is connected:

#01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

The transmitter’s acoustic signals as well as thosesignals associated with the telemetry menu are output via this connection. These announcements are made in German language by default. More aboutthis can be found under “Voice output” in the section » **SECRET MODE** « beginning on page 34 and

» **Telemetry** « beginning on page 240. The volume of signals and voice output sent to the headset can be adjusted individually in the lines “Voice volume”, “Vario volume”, and “Beeps volume” of the » **General basic settings** « menu, page 268. 

# Headset connector24 **Transmitter description - Face-side connections** on the memory card. Within the “LogData” folder there will be log files, that are designated with names in theformat 0001_year-month-day.bin, 0002_year-monthday.bin, etc., in sub-folders named “model name”. If a model memory is still “unnamed” the respective log files can be found in a sub-folder designated “No

Name” when the memor y card is removed from the transmitter and inserted into the card slot of a PC orlaptop. There is a PC program available on the transmitter’s download web page at www.graupner.de withwhich the stored data can be evaluated on a compatible PC. **Importing voice files** As mentioned in section “Headsets”, here at the right, the transmitter’s acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with the » **Te**

  ** lemetry«** menu can be output by way of the headsetconnector. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but can be replaced by a voice packet of a different language at any time. More information about this can be found in the section

» **SECRET MODE** « beginning on page 34. **Transmitter firmware updates** The transmitter firmware can be updated and

– if necessary

– replaced at this menu point, using the procedure descr ibed in the previous section entitled “Importing voice files”; the screen language can also be changed here. For more details of this please refer to the section entitled “SECRET MODE” which starts on page 34. Updates and more information can be found on the product page for your specific HoTT transmitter; see the Download section at www.graupner.de. **Important notes:**

**• No claim can be considered unless a log file is**  **present; see left under “Data recording / stor-**  #01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

If the card has not previously been inserted, the transmitter first creates a number of folders on it; this is indicated in the transmitter’s base display by a card symbol which slowly fills from left to right. Thememory card is ready for use as soon as this animation ceases. You can remove the prepared memory card from the transmitter when required, and insert it in a suitable card reader. Connect the reader to your PC or laptop, and copy the files

– previously do wnloaded from the Download page for your transmitter

– into the appropr iate folder. Now remove the memory card from your card reader and insert it in the transmitter once more. **Removing the memory card** Press the SD or SDHC card a bit further into the card slot to release the slot’s latch then pull out the memory card. **Data acquisition / storage** The storage of data on the SD card is coupled to the flight timer. If this timer is started

– when a suitable

memor y card is inserted in the card slot and a telemetry link to the receiver exists

– data acquisition is also started. Data acquisition will stop again when the flight timer is stopped. The flight timer is started and stopped as described in the section » **Timers (gen eral)**  ” on page 162

. The amount of data written on the memory card is presented as a black bar graph ( ) which grows from left to right as data fills the memory card . After a data acquisition session is finished, there will be an (empty) folder “Models” and a “LogData” folder The transmitter’s card slot for type micro-SD and micro-SDHC memory cards becomes accessible once the right face-side cover has been turned away.

Although a memory card is supplied as standard, the slot also accepts any standard commercial micro-SDmemory cards of up to 2 GB capacity and microSDHC cards of up to 32 GB capacity. However, as a manufacturer we recommend the use of memorycards no larger than 4 GB as this is completely adequate for all normal situations. The type of memory card to be used in the transmitter is that known in conjunction with digital cameras and cell phones. It is to be pushed into the slot, contacts up, until it latches, see photos above. Once the memory card has been inserted, the transmitter’s cover flap can be closed again. If the standard memory card is inserted

– or another card which has already been inserted in the tr ansmitter at least once

– then the card is immediately ready for use when the tr ansmitter is switched on. When the transmitter is switched on again after inserting such a card, the stylised memory card icon appears in the base display: 

# Card slot

micro SD and micro SDHC25 **Transmitter description - Face-side connections** The right-hand side flap of 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT transmitters provides access to the software update socket, which is also used for altering the date and time via a PC using the Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system; this socket is located on the right-hand side under the flap:

The USB cable, order no. **32032** , which is includedwith the set is to be connected to this jack. The procedure for carrying out a software update via a PC is described on page 50. The PC software required, as well as the suitable USB driver, can be found on the download page for the given product on the Graupner website at www.graupner.de. Once the necessary driver and software is installedon the PC, this USB connection can be used to update the transmitter or even just to set the transmitter’s date and time. To set the transmitter’s date and time by way of this jack, refer to the » **Info display** « menu, beginning page 278.
Note: 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters canalso be charged using this USB socket at the standard currents present at USB ports; see page 16. 

# Mini-USB connector

**ing”.**

**• For the same reason the transmitter m**  **ust al ways be updated to the latest software status.** 

**• It is essential that y**  **ou register at https://www. graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.** **aspx to ensure that you are constantly in formed of important software updates. This is**  **the only means by which we can automatically keep you aware of new updates by e-mail.**  **Importing/exporting model memories** Any model memory can be stored to an insertedmemory card or from an inserted card into the transmitter. This feature is intended to support data exchange between identical transmitters or even use as data backup. More information about this can be found in the section » **Copy / Erase** « beginning on page 80.
Notes:

• Some special symbols that can be used in model names are subject to specific restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 file system used by the memory cards and these special symbols will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).

• In pr inciple the model memories of the mx-20 and 

### mc-20 transmitters are compatible, BUT: If you wish to carry out an “Import from SD card” in the other transmitter you must first copy or move the appropriate model memory to the appropriate folder on a PC. For example: from \\Models\mc-20 to \\Models\mx-20, or vice versa. See page 82 for more information on “Import from SD card”. **C A U T I O N :** After you have carried out an “Import from SD card” it is absolutely essential to check all the model functions with great care. Note also that the transmitter control and switch functions may need to be adjusted to suit the new transmitter.26 **Transmitter description - Bottom side transmitter interior** 

# Bottom side transmitter interior

(The illustration shows the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.) **Socket for optional Bluetooth module** Order No. **33002.5**

**RF modul**

**Sockets for optional transmitter controls and switches**  (In principle you can connect the switches in anyorder, but we strongly recommend that you maintain the same sequence as the case legends to avoid confusion.)

SW16/PB18 (when transmitter is closed), see “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68 SW17/PB19 (when transmitter is closed), see “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68 **Lithium battery CR2032**  **(not rechargeable)** Independent backup for the transmitter's date and time settings, see » **Info display** « menu on page 278.

**Transmitter battery plug** For charging the battery and a list of suitable automatic chargers, see page 16 **Notes: Disconnect the transmitter battery at its connec**  **tor when performing any type of work inside the transmitter. Never allow solder points to come**  **into contact with objects as this can create short circuit conditions.**  **All jacks and plugs not described are to be left unconnected.** 27 **For your notes**28 **Transmitter description - Display and keypad** 

# Display and keypad

(The illustration shows the control pad of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.)

Model memory location 

### mc-16 : 1 ... 20 

### mc-20 : 1 ... 24

Oper ating mode Flight phase timer display, if available; see “Flight phase timers”, page 166. **Flight phase name**

see menu » **Phase settings** «, page 152 or 156 **left four-way button:**

+ **ESC** = select/confir m **ESC** touched f or about 1 s: Changeover between telemetry menu and basic display

= scroll in one of the f our directions with every

tap ( 
, 
, 

,  ) sim ultaneous horizontal tap (  )

= changeo ver between basic display and servo

display

simultaneous vertical tap of the left (  ) keys + " **SET** " of the right fourway button = changeover to the "secret options", see page 34.

**SET** = select/confirm

= scroll or change v alue with every touch of one

of the four direction symbols ( 
, 
, 

,  ) Circle with the finger around the circumference

= scroll/change v alues. Alternative values selection with the left four-way button ( 
, 
, 

,  )

simultaneous tap on 

or  = **CLEAR right four-way button:** 

or Transmitter battery voltage with dynamic bar indicator. If the lithium battery voltage underruns the 3.60 V (adjustab le) threshold a warning message will appear and an acoustic warning will sound. (Switchover for NiMH batteries.)

Transmitter operating time. This will automatically be reset to zero after a charging process.

Display diagram for all four digital trim levers with numeric indicator and direction indicator Model type indicatorwinged model, helicopter

Model name Stopwatch in min:s (upward/downward) Flight timer in min:s micro-SD card inserted

A selection of potential warnings and notices. More about this on page 33

. No pupil signal! Throttle too high! Batt. mustbe recharged!! Fail Safe setup t.b.d.

Receiver battery voltage RX-SPG Signal strength

M = Model operation P = Pupil (pupil transmitter)29 **Transmitter description - Operating the “data terminal“** 

# Operating the “data terminal“ Entry keys **ESC** and **SET**

Display symbols **Displayed telemetry symbols** the activ e model memory has not yet been “bound” to a HoTT receiver. More about the “Binding” process can be found on page 87 or 95. Switched off on RF tr ansmitter side blinking antenna symbol: The last receiver bound to the active model is inactive or out of range

> M x no telemetr y signal to receive

> M signal strength indicator of the connection to the model

> P signal strength indicator of the connection to the pupil tr ansmitter in the display of the teacher transmitter for wireless teacher/pupil operation **Keys left of the display**

• **ESC** key each brief tap on the **ESC** key will cause a stepwise return in function selection or even further to the base screen. Any changes made to settings remain. Momentarily touching the **ESC** key for about 1 s while in the base screen will open and close the

» **Telemetry«** menu.

• Selection k eys   1. A tap on one of these k eys will scroll, appropriate for the given arrow direction, through lists, such as through the model selection list or the multi-function list or within menus though the menu‘s lines. 2. A br ief simultaneous tap on the  keys will cause a switch from the transmitters basescreen, as well as from almost any menu position, into the » **Servo display** « menu. **Keys to the right of the display**

• **S ET**  key 1. After s witching the transmitter on, a brief tap on the **SET** key will cause a jump from the displayed base screen to the Multi-function menu. In the same manner, a selected menu can now be called up with the **SET** key. 2. Within men us having settings, activate / deactivate (confirm) the given setting fields with a tap on the **SET** key.

• Selection k eys   1. “Leafing through” the multi-function menu, and the menu lines within the set-up menus, in thesame manner as the Select buttons of the lefthand four-way button, or

– on the 

### mc-20 transmitter

– in the same manner as “circling” over the four Select buttons. 2. Select or set par ameters in setting fields after their activation with a tap on the **SET** key, whereby the  and  keys will have thesame given function. In this case it is completely irrelevant which of these two keys are used. 3. A br ief simultaneous tap on the  o r  keys will set a changed parameter value in the entry field back to its default value ( **CLEAR** )

. Notes:

• In contr ast to the four-way buttons of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, which are “pressed” in the sameway as micro-switches, the touch-sensitive CapTouch buttons of the 

### mc-20 HoTT respond to the lightest of touches.

• T ouching the given four-way button does not itself initiate the given action but rather the end of the touch.

• In the e vent the four-way buttons do not exhibit any functionality immediately after switching the transmitter off and then on again right away, this is not a fault. Just switch the transmitter off again then wait for several seconds before switching it on again.30 **Transmitter description - Shortcuts** 

# Shortcuts

The following key combinations can be used to directly call up certain menus and options:

• **CLEAR** A br ief simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button will reset a changed para meter v alue in the active entry field back to its default value.

• » **Servo display** « A brief simultaneous tap on the  keys of theleft four-way button will change from the transmitter’s base screen or from almost any menu position to the » **Servo display** « menu, see page 274.

• » **Telemetry** « menu Tap the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button for about 1 s to call up the » **Telemetry** « menu from the transmitter’s base screen or return to the base screen again, see text beginning on page 228.

**• Graphic displa**  **y of telemetry data** Briefly touching one of the selection keys of the left or right four-way button will cause a jump fromthe base screen directly to the transmitter’s graphic display of telemetry data or will allow paging back and forth between individual graphic displays. A brief tap on the center **ESC** or **SET** key will cause a return back to the base screen.

• » **SECRET MODE** « (Language selection, Firmware update, Stick calibration etc.) Touch and hold the  selection keys of the left four-way button then momentarily touch the **SET** key of the right four-way button, see text beginning on page 34.

• **Entr y lockout**  Entry lockout is activated and deactivated from the base screen by simultaneously touching the **ESC** and **SET** keys for about 2 s

.

**• Quic**  **k-Select** From the multi-function list, a jump can be madeinto a “Structure overview” by way of a brief, simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button. Menus are arranged in clear groups in this overview.

Memory Servo setting Transm. controls Switches Flight phases Timers Mixers Special. funct. Global functions All menus

Now the desired group can be selected with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

Servo setting Transm. controls Switches Flight phases All menus Memory

... then finally tap the center **SET** key of the rightfour-way button briefly. As soon as the key is released, only the respective generic term for the given menu will remain listed. For example:

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Now you can select the desired menu point using the  or  buttons, and then call it up by pressing the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button.31 **Transmitter description - Concealed menu columns** 

# Concealed menu columns

Some menus have concealed columns to improvelegibility. Menus with concealed columns can be recognized by virtue of a triangle pointing to the right in the bottom left corner of the screen. For example, in the menu » **Servo settings** «:

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

In this menu, e. g. the column “- lim +” (servo travel limit) to the right of column “- travel +” is “concealed”. To reach this column, use the pointing triangle at the bottom left of the screen to push the frame marker with the arrow key  of the left or right four-way button to just beyond the column for “- travel +”:

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + lim 0% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% S4 S5

To again return to the now-concealed column “- travel +” or even further to the left, push the frame marker with arrow key  of the left or right four-way button appropriately to the left:

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

This procedure is analogous for the other menus.32 **Transmitter description - Function fields | Position indicator | Entry lockout** Note: This option is only available as standard on the 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter at extra cost. A lockout for the touch keys, and thus protection against inadvertent use of all setting options, can be established by touching and holding the **ESC** and **SET** keys simultaneously for about two seconds while the transmitter is in its basic display. This lockout condition is indicated by a key symbol, located at the intersection point of the trim bars, which is displayed in reverse video.

#01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

The lockout is effective immediately but controls remains operationally ready. This lockout can be removed by again touching and holding the **ESC** and **SET** keys for about two seconds. 

# Entry lockout

Depending on the given menu, certain function fields will appear on the bottom display line:

CLR SEL STO SYM ASY
A marked function is activated with a tap on the **SET** key

. **Function fields**

• **CLR** (clear) erase

• **SEL** (select) selection

• **SET** (set) “set” or adjust a v alue

• **STO** (store) store (e. g. control position)

• **SYM** set values symmetr ically

• **ASY** set values asymmetr ically

• **POS** Only in » **T rim memory**  « menu

• switch field symbol (assignment of all types of s witches)

• within a menu, change to the second page , (menu continuation) 

# Function fields in the display

**CLR**

, **SEL**

, **STO**

, **SET**

, **SYM**

, **ASY**

, **POS**

, , When you operate one of the two INC/DEC buttons CTL 5 + 6, which are fitted to the two switch boards of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, a small symbol appears on the left of the screen adjacent to the two vertical position indicators:

At the same time, for the duration of the control‘s operation, the position indicator for the two vertical bars in the middle will change from displaying current trim position to a display of the respective current position of the controls CTL 5 & 6. Logically, the left control (CTL 6) is displayed by the left bar indicator and the right bar indicator displaysthe position of the right control (CTL 5). The two horizontal bars continue to show current trim positions of respective stick trim controls:

#01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

3.9V M HoTT

About 2 seconds after operating one of the controls has ended, the display will again revert to display ofcurrent trim positions of the four trim controls generated by the two sticks.
Note: On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter these two INC/DEC buttons can be retro-fitted by your local Graupner Service Centre at extra cost. 

# Position indicator

INC/DEC buttons CTL 5 and 633 **Transmitter description - Warning notices Warning notices** 

Batt. must

be re- charged!! Operating voltage is too low

BIND. N/A OK „Bind not available“ A receiver has not yet been bound to the currently active model memory. A brief tap on the **SET** key will causea direct jump to the appropriate option.

Power on warning is active! If no controls are operated on the transmitter,it switches itself off automatically after about three minutes.

Attention! Switch-OFF the Receiver first! This warning appears if you try to change models in the » **Model select**  « menu with thereceiver of the previously active model still switched on.

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K No bound receiver in range

Please select

RF on/off? O N OFF Only for a receiver that has already been bound: Please select RF „on“ or „off“? RF

RF must be OFF OK Request to switch off the RF section. 

# Warning notices

Fail Safe setup t.b.d. Failsafe has not yet been activated

Thr

too high! The throttle stick of a fixed-wing model, or the throttle limiter of a helicopter, is too farin the direction of fullthrottle.

N o pupil signal Connection betweenteacher and pupil transmitter is interrupted

SD-CARD

INSERT OK No SD or SDHC memory card in the card slot or card is not legible

• If batter y voltage is too low, a model switch isblocked for reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low

• Is the “wireless teacher/pupil connection” that was active when the transmitter was last used to be continued, **ACT** or switched off **INH** ?

Please select Trainer link? ACT INH

Please select Trainer link? ACT INH34 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter’s » **HIDDEN MODE** « menu can be called up from almost any menu position by touching and holding the  selection keys of the left four-way button and the **SET** key of the right four-way button for at least 3 seconds. This will produce the display shown below.

 HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

**VOICE** As mentioned in section “Headsets” on page 23, the transmitter’s acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with the » **Te**

  ** lemetry«** menu can be output by way of the headsetconnector. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced by a voice packet of a different language at any time. At the time of this manual’s revision, the standard SD card delivered with the set includes the following languages:

• Dutch

• English

• French

• German

• Italian

• Spanish The given activ e language packet can be swappedout either with the PC program available as a download from the transmitter’s web page at www.graupner.de or with the SD card, as described below. If not already done, insert the SD card or SDHC card into the transmitter as described on page 24. Once the 

# HIDDEN MODE

Language selection, Firmware update, Stick calibration etc. memory card is inserted in the transmitter, switch the transmitter on with RF switched off.

Please select

RF on/off? O N OFF

Now move to the » **HIDDEN MDE** « menu as described earlier in this section: **Language change**Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the line “VOICE” line:

 HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

Use the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to switch to the selection page for the “VOICE” line:

FILE LIST

VOICE2_FRANCE.VDF VOICE2_GERMAN.VDF VOICE2_ITALIANO.VDF VOICE2_SPAIN.VDF VOICE2_ENGLISH.VDF VOICE2_DUTCH.VDF

Now use the  keys of the left or right four-way button to choose the desired language, for example:

FILE LIST

VOICE2_FRANCE.VDF

VOICE2_SPAIN.VDF VOICE2_GERMAN.VDF VOICE2_ITALIANO.VDF VOICE2 DUTCH.VDF VOICE2_ENGLISH.VDF

Confirm the choice with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The selected language packet will be loaded into the transmitter’s memory:

22/100% I  HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

The loading process is finished as soon as the progress bar at the lower edge of the display disappears:

 HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

When this process is finished, switch off the transmitter. All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact after a change of language has been made.
Notes:

• If the war ning ...

RF must be OFF OK
... appears, then the transmitter’s RF radiation is still active. Jump to the » **Base setup mod el**  « menu, select the “RF transmit” line, select its “OFF” option then repeat the procedure

• If the war ning ...
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears then the transmitter does not detect a memory card in its card slot or the card found can-35 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** not be read.

• If the selection window is empty ...

FILE LIST

... then the transmitter could not find an appropriate file on the inserted memory card. Check the contents of the SD card’s “VoiceFile” directory on a PC or laptop.
**FIRMWARE UPDATE Change display language**  **Important notice: Be sure to check the charge status of your trans** **mitter’s battery or charge its battery as a precau tion before every update. Also backup all occu**  **pied model memories so they can be restored if that should become necessary.** 

 HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

In the same manner as described above in the section “VOICE”, this menu item can be used to updateor change the transmitter’s firmware, including its display language. At the time of this manual’s revision, the standard SD card delivered with the set includes the following languages:

• Dutch

• English

• French • German

• Italian

• Spanish Additional languages will follo w at a later date. Updates and additional information for your system can be found on the product page for your specific HoTT transmitter in the Download section at www. graupner.de.

FILE LIST

MC-20_1V234_France.b MC-20_1V234_English. MC-20_1V234_Dutch.bi

MC-20_1V234_Italiano MC-20_1V234_Spain.bi MC-20_1V234_German.b

Now use the  selection keys of the left or rightfour-way button to choose the desired firmware version, for example:

FILE LIST

MC-20_1V234_France.b MC-20 1V234 Dutch.bi

MC-20_1V234_Italiano MC-20_1V234_Spain.bi MC-20_1V234_German.b MC-20_1V234_English.

Confirm the choice with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The loading of firmware into the transmitter’s memory will be started and following two displays, visible only very briefly, which only make reference to the firmware update ...

      Firmware Download Prozess Start Please Wait....       Boot Download Success!!! Please Wait....

..., the message:

      Firmware Downloading... Progress 023/201

... will appear in the display. As soon as the counter to the left of the “/” character reaches the value shown on the right as the volume to be loaded, the message

...

    Firmware Upgrade success!!!

... will appear. After a few seconds this message disappears, and the transmitter switches itself off. The transmitter is now ready for use.
Notes:

• If the war ning ...

RF must be OFF OK
..., then the RF section of the transmitter is still active. Switch it off in the “RF module” line of the

» **Basic settings** « menu, and repeat the proce-36 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** dure.

• If the war ning ...
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears then the transmitter does not detect amemory card in its card slot or the card found cannot be read.

• If the selection window is empty ...

FILE LIST

... then the transmitter could not find a suitable firmware file on the inserted memory card. Check the contents of the SD card’s “Firmware” directory on a PC or laptop.
**STICK CALIBRATION** If you feel the neutral position of your self-centering sticks (controls 1 ... 4) are not exactly 0 % of their control tra vel, then this can be checked and, if necessary, corrected as follows: Jump to the » **Model select** « menu and initialize a free model memory as described on page 79

.Whether the model to be initialized is a winged aircraft or a helicopter is irrelevant. Wait for the notices which typically appear in the transmitter’s base screen following a model change then jump to the » **Servo display** « menu, for example by simultaneously touching the  keys of the left four-way button WITHOUT any interim changes to trim settings or other program settings. If all four of your transmitter’s stick functions are still self-neutralizing, this display should ideally look like the one shown below:

1 3 5 7 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% 0%

0% 0%

Note: The screen-shot above, and the two which follow, show the screen of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. The screen of the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT shows correspondingly fewer channels.Otherwise the graph bars show current setting percentages for joystick control functions which are not self-neutralizing

– typically for the “C1” throttle/brake or throttle/pitch stick. For example, if the throttle/brake stick is in its “quarter-throttle” position, the display would appear as shown below:

1 3 5 7 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% –50%

0% 0%

One after the other, put both sticks into each of their four possible limit positions without exerting force at the limit position. In each of these eight possible limit positions, the

– side dependent

– indication for exactly -100 % or +100 % should be display ed. For example, if transmitter control 2 is at its right limit and the other three stick functions are in their respective middle positions then the transmitter’s display should look like the one shown below: 1 3 5 7 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8 –100% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% 0%

0% 0%

Regardless of the number of self-neutralizing stick functions available on your transmitter, if these checks produce four 0 % results and eight 100 % results then your tr ansmitter’s sticks are optimally calibrated. You can terminate this process then, if appropriate, delete the model memory just created. Otherwise jump (as described at the outset of the previous double page) to the “STICK CALIBRATION” line in the » **SECRET MODE** « menu then briefly touch the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

STICK CALIBRATION

0%  

The  selection keys of the right four-way buttonwill now allow you to cyclically select the four calibrated stick planes, e. g. the left/r ight plane of the right stick:

STICK CALIBRATION

0%

Now position the right stick

– without ex erting extra force

– to its left limit corresponding with the on-screen blinking arro w pointing to the left:37 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** STICK CALIBRATION

+102%

... and briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. This concludes this example calibration of the right stick’s left limit. The circle in the middle of the stylized stick plane will now blink as confirmation of the calibration:

STICK CALIBRATION

+100%

Now release the self-neutralizing stick so it can return to its center position and then tap again on the center **SET** key to calibrate the stick’s centered position. The right triangle marker will begin to blink:

STICK CALIBRATION

0%

Repeat the calibration process for the right limit of theright stick. The other stick planes are calibrated analogously. Proceed similarly to calibrate the two sliders mounted in the middle console and the two proportional rotarycontrols on the sides of the transmitter. The calibration options for these proportional controls can be reached by repeatedly tapping on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button until the desired calibration position is reached, e. g. ...

SLIDE CALIBRATION

0%  

 

 

 

LEVER CALIBRATION

0%  

 

 

 

Notes:

• Correct any bad calibrations by repeating the respective process.

• Within a given stick plane, each of the three calibration positions can be selected directly with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Briefly touching the center **ESC** key of the left fourway button will terminate the process and return to the sub-menu “STICK CALIBRATION”.
**Bluetooth initialisation**

 HIDDEN MODE  VOICE

STICK CALI. FIRMWARE UPDATE

BLUETOOTH INIT.

If you install a Bluetooth module, Order No. **33002.5**
,you should use this menu point to initialise it as described in the instructions supplied with the unit.38 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** The 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter features a single screen below the aerial socket which is used both for operating the transmitter and also to display telemetry data in graphic form. You can switch between the twooperating modes by pressing one of the Select buttons  or  of the left-hand four-way button in the base display. The 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter has two independent displays; a display for operating the transmitter and a display just below the antenna socket for the graphicdisplay of telemetry data. This display is activated automatically as soon as the transmitter receives telemetry data from the receiver via the return channel.

#01

0:00h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M x HoTT

If however, at the lower edge of the base display, only “X”

– as shown in the figure abo ve

– is display ed at two locations instead of “ ”, then the telemetry display will show the warning ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K
..., on the front screen of the 

### mc-20 HoTT, displaced shortly afterwards by the Graupner/SJ logo and the transmitter name ...



# mc20

..., and this means that there is no receiver within range capable of exploiting the telemetry link. Switch on the model’s receiver system or bind a receiver to the active model memory as described in detail on page 87 or 95.

#01

0:01h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

4.8V 4.1V M HoTT

If a telemetry link is present, the front screen of the 

### mc-20 HoTT shows the “Receiver” display by default. The same occurs on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter after you select the Telemetry display mode ...

RX–S QUA: 100% RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm:

– 33dBm RX–dBm: –33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8V TMP L–PACK: 10ms

R–LOW V:4.6V +22°C ... which is described in more detail in a section by the same name on the next page.
**Sensor Select**Up to four sensors can be connected, in any combination, to a telemetry-capable receiver. However, the data output by these sensors must be (as described on page 252) selected in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu of the » **Telemetry** « menu ...

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

... in order to activate their display. This data from the selected sensors is then appropriately prepared forillustration by the graphic indicators as described below. You must also ensure that the receiver selected in the “Telemetry receiver” line of the » **Telemetry** « menu (Bind 1 or 2) is the one to which the sensors are connected; see pages 87 and 95. If you select the “wrong” receiver, the “Receiver” display will only show the data from that unit.Furthermore, only sensors activated in the »SETTING & DATAVIEW« sub-menu of the » **Telemetry** «menu, beginning page 241, according to the instructions included with the given sensor will be responsive. To switch between the screens for activated sensors in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu of the » **Tele**

  ** metry** « menu, tap briefly on one of the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

GENERAL ELECT. AIR VARIO

GPS RECEIVER

AIR ESC

... and, after the selected screen has been displayed, use one of the  two keys to select the line of thedesired sensor. If no sensor is activated, then all display lines and sensors described in the next column, except for the “RECEIVER” line, are blended out of the display and the selection list:

RECEIVER

The selection can be confirmed right away by activating the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or 

# Telemetry data display39 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** by simply waiting until, after a brief pause, the maindisplay of the given selected sensor appears automatically.
Notes:

• The sequence of the below descr ibed displays is a consequence

– starting from the given main display

– of taps on the  key.

• More details about the follo wing named modules can be found in the appendix and in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product.
**RECEIVER**

RX–S QUA: 100% RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm:

– 33dBm RX–dBm: –33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8V TMP L–PACK: 10ms

R–LOW V:4.6V +22°C This screen presents the » **RX DATAVIEW** « of the

» **Telemetry«** menu’s » **SETTING & DATAVIEW** « sub-menu, see page 241, with data processed and displayed graphically. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** RX-S QUA signal quality in % RX-S STR signal strength in % RX-dBm Reception power in dBm TX-dBm transmit power in dBm L-PACK Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. RX-VOLT current operating voltage of the receiver's power supply in volts R-LOW V Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts TMP the thermometer depicts the receiver's current operating temperature

**GENERAL MODUL**

ELECT. AIR VARIO

GPS RECEIVER

AIR ESC GENERAL

0.0V BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C E FUEL F CELL.V 1:0.00 2:0.00 3:0.00 4:0.00 5:0.00 6:0.00 0

0.0V BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C E FUEL F ALT 0m 0m1 0m3

0.0A

POWER 0.0V

0 If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the data acquired by a General-Engine module, order

no. **33610,** or a General-Air module, order no. **33611**

. More details about these modules can be found in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product.Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the table below. The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), the measurement results of up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a fill level gage for the fuel tank. An alternating display along the screen’s right edge will display a list of current cell voltages for a LiPo battery with up to six cells or operational data (current altitude with respect to the starting location, ascent/ decent m/1 s and m/3 s, current current being dr awnin amperes and current voltage of the battery connected to the sensor). The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** BAT1 / BAT2 battery 1 or 2

FUEL fuel level / tank gage E / F empty **/** full
T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2
CELL V cell voltage of cells 1 ... max. 6
ALT current altitude 0m1 m/1 s ascent/decent rate
0m3 m/3 s ascent/decent rate
A current dr aw in amperes
V battery voltage
**Battery and load indicators** 

# 0.0V 0.0A 0mAh 0ml

This display depicts current voltage, current current draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of “Batt 1” connected to the General-Engine module (order no. **33610** ) or General-Air (order no. **33611** )40 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** module as well as the fuel consumed in ml.
**SENSOR 1**



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 1

If attached, this display depicts currently measuredvoltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor, order no. **33612** or **33613** , connectedto “T(EMP)1” of the General-Engine module (order no

. **33610** ) or the General-Air module (order

no. **33611** ).
**SENSOR 2**



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 2

If attached, this display depicts currently measuredvoltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor, order no. **33612** or **33613** , connected to “T(EMP)2” of the General-Engine module (order

no. **33610** ) or the General-Air module (order no. **33611** ). **Rotary speed sensor**



# rpm 

# 0

0 0

If attached, this display depicts the measured rotary speed of a speed sensor (order no. **33615** or **33616** ) attached to a General-Engine module (order

no. **33610** ) or a General-Air module (order no. **33611** ).

Note: The appropriate blade count must first be set in the module’s telemetry menu before the correct speed can be displayed.

**Vario** 

# 0.0 0 m m s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) data origina

ting from a V ario integrated into a General-Engine module (order no. **33610** ) or General-Air module (order no. **33611** ). **Speed display** 

# 0 km/h

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the model’s actual speed over the ground. **Air pressure display** 

# 0.0 Bar

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the actual air pressure.
**“Weakest cell”**



# Cell0=0.00V

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the voltage of the weakest cell in a battery block, together with the number of that cell.
**ELECTRIC AIR MODUL**

VARIO

GPS RECEIVER

AIR ESC GENERAL ELECT. AIR

0.0V 0m/3s BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C 0 1L0.00 2L0.00 3L0.00 4L0.00 5L0.00 6L0.00 ALT 0m

7L0.00 0.0V 0A41 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** 0.0V 0m/3s BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C 0 1H0.00 2H0.00 3H0.00 4H0.00 5H0.00 6H0.00 ALT 0m

7H0.00 0.0V 0A

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data acquired by an Electric-Air module, order no. **33620** . More details about this module can be found in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product.Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the adjacent table. The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), up to two temperature measurements (T1 and T2), current altitude with respect to the starting location, the model’s ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and m/3 s and, in the middle of the screen, the current dr aw currently being taken from a power source.Along the right edge of the screen is a table of alternating values for cell voltages at balancer connections (L) or voltages for up to 7 attached battery cell packs (H). The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
V current voltage
A current current BAT1 / BAT2 battery 1 or 2

ALT current altitude m/1s m/1 s ascent/decent r ate m/3s m/3 s ascent/decent r ate T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2 L or H cell voltage of cells 1 ... max. 14 L = balancer connection 1 H = balancer connection 2
**Micro-copter display**



## 0mAh 0:00 0.0V

0km/h 0 I: Dir: Alt: 0m 0° 0A 0m 0°

This screen displays the data generated by a HoTTcompatible micro-copter. Key, reading from top left to bottom right: **Value Explanation**
V Actual voltage „0:00“ Period switched on mAh Battery capacity consumed „0“ Altitude relative to take-off point, according to GPS system km/h Speed over ground, according to GPS system
Alt Actual altitude
Dir Direction of movement
I Actual current m Distance from take-off point, according to GPS system

° Position in degrees relative to take-off point, according to GPS system Any messages from the micro-copter sensor are displayed in the bottom line of the screen, which is empty in the screen-shot shown above. **ACCU** 

# 0.0V 0.0A 0mAh

This display depicts current voltage, current current draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of “Batt 1” connected to the Electric-Air module (order

no. **33620)**

. **SENSOR 1**



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 1

If attached, this display depicts currently measuredvoltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor (order no. **33612** or **33613** ) connected to “T(EMP)1” of the Electric-Air module (order

no. **33620** ).
**SENSOR 2**



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 2

If attached, this display depicts currently measuredvoltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor (order no. **33612** or **33613** ) connected to “T(EMP)2” of the Electric-Air module (order

no. **33620** ).42 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display Vario**  

# 0.0 0 m m s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) data origina

ting from a V ario integrated into a Electric-Air module (order no

. **33620** ). **Speed display** 

# 0 km/h

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the model’s actual speed over the ground.
**“Weakest cell”**



# Cell0=0.00V

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the voltage of the weakest cell in a battery block, together with the number of that cell. **VARIO**

GPS RECEIVER

AIR ESC GENERAL ELECT. AIR VARIO

RXSQ 0

MAX 0m

MIN 0m ALT 0 H

L m/1s

0.0

m/3s

0.0

m/10s 0.0 If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data acquired by a Vario module, order no. **33601**

. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
ALT current altitude RXSQ Signal quality of the signal received by the receiver in %, see page 241. MAX the preset maximum altitude limit relative to starting location at which, when exceeded, will cause an audible warning to be sounded MIN the preset minimum altitude limit relative to the starting location at which, when underrun, will cause an audible warning to be sounded m/1s m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3s m/3 s ascent/decent rate
m/10s m/10 s ascent/decent rate **Micr o-copter display** 



## 0mAh 0:00 0.0V

0km/h 0 I: Dir: Alt: 0m 0° 0A 0m 0°

This screen displays the data generated by a HoTTcompatible micro-copter. Key, reading from top left to bottom right: **Value Explanation**
V Actual voltage „0:00“ Period switched on mAh Battery capacity consumed „0“ Altitude relative to take-off point, according to GPS system km/h Speed over ground, according to GPS system
Alt Actual altitude
Dir Direction of movement
I Actual current m Distance from take-off point, according to GPS system

° Position in degrees relative to take-off point, according to GPS system Any messages from the micro-copter sensor are displayed in the bottom line of the screen, which is empty in the screen-shot shown above.43 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display Vario**  

# 0.0 0 m m s

If attached, this display will depict altitude relative tolocation or starting location (in m) as well as the current rate of ascent/decent (in m/s) from data acquired by a Vario module (order no. **33601** ). **Text display** If the corresponding sensors are available, text from them showing 2 x 10 or 3 x 7 characters can be superimposed in the two following displays when required: **GPS**

RECEIVER

AIR ESC GENERAL ELECT. AIR VARIO

GPS

N RXSQ 0 DIS 0m ALT 0m 0.0m/1s 0m/3s

N 0°00.0000 E 0°00.0000 W E

S Kmh 0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. **33600**

. Aside from the model’s current position and speed, the center section of this screen will also display current altitude with respect to the starting location as well as the model’s current ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and m/3 s, current reception quality and the model’ s distance from its starting location. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
W / N / E / S w est / north / east / south Kmh speed RXSQ return channel signal quality
DIS distance
ALT current altitude with respect to starting m/1s m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3s m/3 s ascent/decent rate **Micr o-copter display** 



## 0mAh 0:00 0.0V

0km/h 0 I: Dir: Alt: 0m 0° 0A 0m 0°

This screen displays the data generated by a HoTTcompatible micro-copter. Key, reading from top left to bottom right: **Value Explanation**
V Actual voltage „0:00“ Period switched on mAh Battery capacity consumed „0“ Altitude relative to take-off point, according to GPS system km/h Speed over ground, according to GPS system
Alt Actual altitude
Dir Direction of movement
I Actual current m Distance from take-off point, according to GPS system

° Position in degrees relative to take-off point, according to GPS system Any messages from the micro-copter sensor are displayed in the bottom line of the screen, which is empty in the screen-shot shown above.44 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display GPS** 

N

W O

S km/h DIS m
m/s ALT m 

# 0 0 0.0 0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. **33600**

. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
W / N / E / S w est / north / east / south km/h speed
DIS horizontal distance in m
m/s ascent/decent rate in m/s
ALT altitude relative to starting location in m

**Vario** 

# 0.0 0 m m s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) from data originating from the Vario integrated into the GPS-/ Vario module (order no. **33600** ). **Speed display** 

# 0 km/h

If the corresponding sensor is available, this screen displays the model’s actual speed over the ground.
**AIR ESC**

RECEIVER GENERAL ELECT. AIR VARIO

GPS AIR ESC

0 0 

### 0rpm 0.0A 0.0A 0 0mAh 0( 0)°C 0.0V/ 0.0V

This screen displays the data generated by a brushless speed controller with internal telemetry, Order No. **33718** to **33770** and **33850** (correct at time these instructions were revised), which is connected to the receiver. Key, reading from top left to bottom right: **Value Explanation**
V Left-hand value: actual battery voltage Right-hand value: actual battery voltage in present power-on period °C Left-hand value: actual speed controller temperature
Value in brackets: maximum controller temperature in present power-on period mAh Battery capacity consumed
A Centre and bar display: actual current Right-hand value: maximum current in present power-on period rpm Centre and bar display: actual rotational speed of the motor connected to the speed controller. Right-hand value: maximum rotational speed in present power-on period
**RPM display**



# rpm 

# 0

0 0

This screen displays the current rotational speed ofthe motor connected to the brushless speed controller.45 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display Current / consumption display**  

# 0.0A
0.0A 0


# 0mAh

This screen displays the actual current consumption, the peak drain which has occurred in the present power-on period, and the capacity drawn from the battery connected to the brushless speed controller within the same period.46 **Commissioning the transmitter Preliminary remarks**  The Graupner/SJ HoTT system theoretically permits simultaneous operation of more than 200 models.However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization permitted by certification for the 2.4 GHzISM band, this number is significantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than w ould be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is

– as often before

– still likely to be the siz e of available operating space (i. e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite difficult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security. **Battery charged?** Since the transmitter is delivered with an empty (not charged) battery, the battery must first be charged according to the charging instructions on page 16.Otherwise a warning tone will be sounded and an appropriate message will be blended into the basic display if the lowvoltage threshold set in the “Battery warning” line of the » **General basic settings**  « menu, see page 272, is underrun. **Transmitter startup** After being switched on, the message shown below will appear in the transmitter’s screen for about two seconds.

Please select RF on/off? O N OFF
Within this brief period there is an opportunity to switch RF transmission off by using the  or  key of the right four-way button to shift the position of the field shown in inverse video to the right so that **ON** is in standard video and **OFF** is presented in inverse video:

Please select RF on/off? O N OFF
Now switch the RF module off by tapping on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The telemetry display just below the antenna socket will then briefly show the message ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K... and in parallel to this, the transmitter’s basic display will appear similar to that shown below:

#01

0:00h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M x HoTT

The symbol combination means that the currently active model memory has already “bounded“ with a Graupner/SJ-HoTT receiver but there is no connection to that receiver at the moment. (In this example, 

# Commissioning the transmitter Preliminary remarks about the 

# mc-16 HoTT and 

# mc-20 HoTT transmitters

RF transmission has been switched off.) If, ho wever, the transmitter is switched on without switching RF transmission off, the symbolic antennamast will blink. At the same time, an acoustic warning will sound until a connection is established with the respective receiver. As soon as the connection isestablished, the “X” at the base of the symbolic antenna will be replace with a field strength indicator, for example , and the visual and acoustic warnings will cease. If a telemetry connection has also been established for the incoming signal, that is output by the receiver in the model, then the right side of this same screen line will display a similar indication of signal strength for this reception of the receiver’s transmitted signal (>M ) as well as the current voltage of the receiver’s power supply. On the other hand, if the symbol combination appears in the display and the front display shows themessage “Can’t receive data” then the currently active model memory is not “bound” to any receiver at the moment. **Under-voltage warning** If the transmitter’s voltage drops below a certain value set in the » **General basic settings** « menu, page 272, 3.60 V by def ault, there will be visual and acoustic under-voltage warnings issued. **Important notices:**

**• The transmitter in the set is already preset,**  **as delivered, with default values which are correct** **for operation in most European countries (ex cept France).** **If the remote control system is to be operat ed in France then the transmitter’s “Region”**  **setting MUST be changed over to “FRANCE” mode, see page 272. IN NO CASE may the**  **Universal/EUROPE mode be used IN FRANCE.**

**• Up to eight serv**  **os can be operated with the** Batt. must

be re- charged!!47 **Commissioning the transmitter GR-16 receiver supplied in the**  

### mc-16 **HoTT set; this receiver is supplied already bound to**  **the first model memory. Up to twelve servos can be operated with the**  **GR-24 receiver supplied in the** 

### mc-20 **HoTT set; this receiver is supplied already bound to**  **the first model memory. In order to achieve the greatest possible flexi** **bility but still preclude unnecessary inadvert ent operator errors, control channels 5 ... 8 re**  **spectively 5 ... 12 have not been assigned to any controls. This means that servos con**  **nected by way of these channels will remain in their middle positions until an operator ele**  **ment has been assigned. Practically all mixers are initially inactive for this same reason. More**  **about this can be found on page 118 (winged aircraft) or 122 (helicopter models).** 

**• The fundamental pr** **ocedure for initial program ming of a new model memory location can be** **found on page 76 and the programming ex amples that begin on page 282.** 

**• When the remote contr**  **ol system is switched on, being bonded or when making settings,**  **that the transmitter’s antenna is always far enough away from the receiver’s antennas. If**  **the transmitter’s antenna is brought too close to the receiver’s antennas this will cause re** **ceiver over-modulation and its red LED will il luminate. At the same time the return channel**  **will drop out and, as a consequence, the field strength indicator in the transmitter’s screen**  **will be replaced by an “x” and the receiver’s current battery voltage display will show 0.0**  **V**

**. The remote control is then in Fail-Save mode,**  **see page 208, i. e**  **. servos will remain in their current positions until a new, valid signal can** **be received. In such a case, increase the dis tance (between the transmitter and the model**  **containing the receiver) until the indicators are again “normal”.** 

**• Ne**  **ver switch the transmitter off whilst operat ing a model! If this should happen accidentally,**  **keep your nerve and wait until the transmitter screen is entirely blank, i.**  **e . until the transmit**  **ter has shut down completely; this takes at least three seconds. Do not switch your trans**  **mitter on again until this has occurred. If you neglect this, there is a risk that the transmitter**  **will “hang” immediately after being switched on, and you will lose control of the model. In**  **this case your only recourse is to switch the transmitter off again, allow it to shut down** **completely, and then switch on once more af ter the correct interval.** 48 **Downloading a firmware packet** Transmitter firmware updates are carried out ...

• ... either as descr ibed under “FIRMWARE UPDATE / Change display language” in the section

» **Secret mode** « on page 35 ...

• ... or as descr ibed below with the help of a PCrunning a Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system.Current software and information is available in Internet at www.graupner.de under the Download link for the given product.
Note: You will automatically be notified of new updates per email after registering your transmitter at https://www. graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx. The aforementioned “given product page” is most easily reached by entering “www.graupner.de” into your Internet browser’s address line then pressing the ENTER key on your PC or laptop keyboard.

On the so-called “homepage” for Graupner , click on one of the “flags” to switch the website to a language of your choice, e. g. the British flag for English. Afterwards locate the entry field with the title “Search”:

Place the cursor in this field with a mouse click then enter a search keyword, e. g. the article number printed on the type plate located on the rear side of the transmitter:

Another press of the ENTER key on the PC or laptop will open the sought page: 

# Downloading a firmware packet

Now use your Internet browser’s vertical scroll bar to move down the page a bit until the tabs “Charac

ter istics”, “Spare parts”, “Accessories” and “Down

loads” appear:

Move to the Download area by clicking on the “Download” tab. Select the file(s) you need, then doubleclick on “Download” below the selected file to initiate the downloading process. When you download “HoTT-Software VX” you actually download the file “HoTT_Software_VX.zip”. This is a compressed file containing all the files required to update the transmitter, HoTT receiver, sensors etc. Please note: at the time this manual was revised theprogram packet available is Version “4”: “HoTT-Software V4”. If you have previously updated the software of certain components of your radio control system using the firmware from software packet Version “V3” or earlier,but since then have updated at least one of your components using firmware from software packet “V4”, then it is ESSENTIAL to update all the components of the radio control system with firmware from packet49 **Downloading a firmware packet**Version “V4”. If you neglect this, individual components could malfunction. The same applies to future software packets, i. e . “V5” or higher.In contrast, if changes are made to individual firmware files within a particular version “VX”, then it is sufficient to install just the later firmware version for the corresponding product. The easy way to check whether firmware updates are available is to look at the creation date of the download file. The version numbers of the associated firmware files also change.

Now save the compressed file in a folder of your choice, and unpack it using a suitable program. If a transmitter update fails to work as described in the following section, please read the chapter entitled “Restoring your transmitter firmware” on page 52.
Note: At the time these instructions were revised, a list of the current firmware versions can be called up using the following link: http://www.graupner.de/en/supportdetail/4d589f17-24b4-4e50-97d2-13a0f39bd13d. If the link does not work, you can obtain the same information step-by-step via www.graupner.de => Service & Support => Update and revision history for Graupner|SJ HoTT components.50 **Transmitter firmware updates** The USB interface cable (USB-A to mini-B-USB 5-pole) included with the set, will be needed to updatethe transmitter’s software via the transmitter’s faceside USB interface connector. This cable’s connector is to be directly plugged into the 5-pole mini-USB connector socket on the rear side of the transmitter. **Important notes:**

**• Please note that the HoTT components in y**  **our radio control system can only communicate**  **perfectly if the firmware is compatible. That is why all the programs and files required to up** **date all HoTT components are grouped togeth er in one file, the current version of which is**  **entitled “HoTT_Software_V4.zip”.**

**• Be sure to c**  **heck the charge status of your transmitter’s battery or charge its battery as a**  **precaution before every update. Also backup all occupied model memories so they can be**  **restored if that should become necessary.**

**• It is essential not to disconnect the transmit** 

******ter from the PC or laptop during an update pro cess! Please ensure that the lead between the**  **transmitter and the computer is making good contact at both ends.**  **1. Installing driver**  **s** Install the required driver software, included in the “USB Drivers” folder of the program packet, onto your PC or laptop so your computer can handle the transmitter’s integrated USB interface. Start driver installation with a double-click on therespective file and follow the on-screen instructions. Once this software has been successfully installed, the computer must be re-started. Drivers only need to be installed once. **2. Installing the software up-loader**  Unpac k the file “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_ Ver-XX.zip” in a suitable directory then execute the“Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-XX.exe” pro

# Transmitter firmware updates

gram file with a double-click on its filename. Follow the instructions provided by the installation wizard. **3. Estab**  **lishing a transmitter-to-PC connection** With the transmitter switched off , connect the USB cable by way of its 5-pole mini-USB socket to the face-side of the transmitter. **4. Updating transmitter software**  Star t the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-X.X” program from the directory where it is located.

Use the selection sequence “Menu”, “Port Setup” or open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Port select”. Now in the “Port select” window, select the COM port connected to the USB interface. The correct port can be recognized by its designation “Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge” in the “Device Name” column. In the above example this would be the “COM 3” port. Now call up menu option “Firmware Upgrade” from “Menu” or open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Firmware Upgrade”.

Click on the button labeled “File Browse” and select the desired firmware update file with a “.bin” filename extension from the “Open file” window. Firmware files are product-specifically coded, i. e

. if you should accidentally select a file which does not correspond to the product (e. g. receiver update file instead of a transmitter update file), the “Product code error” popup window will appear and the block the update process from starting.Now switch on the transmitter then start the transmitter update by clicking on the “Download Start” button. After a brief period a warning will appear stating that the transmitter’s RF transmission will now be interrupted and that, because of this, any receiver system currently in operation should be switched off.51 **Transmitter firmware updates** Switch off your receiver system if it is switched on then click on “Yes”.This will start the actual update process. A progress bar will begin to operate above a sequence of running text lines.**The connection to the PC must not be inter rupted during the update process!** 

Do not terminate the update process before the progress bar has reached its right end and the “Firmware Download Success” message appears. Click on “OK”. Subsequently switch off the transmitter and disconnect the USB cable between the transmitter and the PC or Laptop. If the progress bar hangs up without showing any further progress, close the program and repeat the update process. Be sure to watch for any error messages that may appear.52 **Restoring the transmitter software** 

# Restoring the transmitter software

Program segment: “Restore” If a transmitter firmware update should fail, or if the transmitter software “hangs”

– it ma y then be impossible to switch the transmitter off using the “POWER” switch

– then y ou can reload the earlier firmware into the transmitter using the “Restore” program segment. If you find that the screen(s) are still switched on even though you have switched the transmitter off, then please disconnect the transmitter battery connector, wait a few seconds, and plug it in again. **1. Preparation**  Connect the tr ansmitter to the PC or laptop, andstart the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_VerX.X.exe” program as described under points 3 and 4 on page 50. (Version 2.1, which is the current version at the time this manual was revised, starts without being previously installed.) **2. Star**  **ting the “Restore” program segment** Now move to the “Transmitter” section and select the “Emergency” entry under “Controller Menu”:

Note that the transmitter must be switched off! Connect the USB lead to the PC or laptop, then connect the other end to the USB socket under the transmitter’s right-hand front cover. **3. Restoring the transmitter software**  Press the “File Browse” button, and a program window opens: search for the current firmware in this window. As mentioned earlier, you will findthis in the “Official Version \33112_..._33032_mxxx_mc-32 \ SD card \ Firmware” folder in the unpacked file “HoTT_Software_VX”. The file matching your particular transmitter starts with the transmitter designation, e. g.: “mc-20_1vXXX_English.bin” or “mc-16_1vXXX_English.bin” (or “...Ger

man.bin” or ...). Now initiate the update process by pressing the“Download Start” button. Wait for a moment until the status bar starts moving, and then switch the transmitter on. The screen may now light up without displaying any data, or

– in the case of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter

– the bottom screen

ma y not light up at all; don’t worry

– this is quite

nor mal. If the following message ...

... (“Boot signal receive failed”) appears before you switch the transmitter on, restart the update process by clicking on “Download Start”. The transmitter must be switched on within theprescribed period. When you do this, it can easily take a minute for the actual update process to start:

The progress bar indicates that data are beingtransferred correctly, and [Process Step] is displayed as “No 4, Firmware Update”. The update process must not be interrupted, so please ensure that the USB lead is making good contact at both ends.The firmware transfer is concluded when the progress bar reaches the right-hand end. The message “Firmware update ended” indicates that the data transfer was successful:

Now turn the transmitter on again by holding the main switch pressed in for about one second. Youwill hear the usual power-on melody, the transmitter screen(s) come to life, and you see the Start display “ 

### mc- ... HoTT” and the current firmware version. Finally click on “OK”. Switch the transmitter off anddisconnect the USB lead connecting the transmitter to the PC or laptop.53 **For your notes**54 **Receiver initialization** 

# Receiver initialization Preliminary remarks

**Receiver system** The 

### mc-16 HoTT radio control set includes a GR16 bi-directional 2.4 GHz receiver, with sockets for a maximum of eight servos. The 

### mc-20 HoTT set includes a GR-24 bi-directional 2.4 GHz receiver with sockets for a maximum of twelve servos. If you switch on the GR-16 HoTT receiver supplied in the 

### mc-16 HoTT set, or the GR-24 HoTT receiver supplied in the 

### mc-20 HoTT set, and “its” transmitter is not in range, or is switched off, then the receiver’s red LED will illuminate continuously for about 1 s then begin to blink slo wly. This indicates the receiver has not (yet) established a link to a Graupner|SJ HoTT transmitter. If a link has been established, the green LED will illuminate continuously and the red LED will extinguish. In order to establish a link to the transmitter, the Graupner|SJ HoTT receiver must first be “bound” to “its” particular model memory in “its” Graupner|SJHoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as “binding”. This “binding” linkage is only necessary once for each receiver/model memory combination. Refer to pages 87 or 95. The “binding” procedure has been done at the factory for model memory 1 of theunits delivered together as a set so this “binding” procedure will only be necessary to link additional receiv

ers or if a memory location change becomes necessary (and

– e. g. after a change of tr ansmitter

– can be repeated anytime).
**On-boar d voltage display**  The current voltage of the receiver’s power supply will be shown in the right side of the transmitter’s screen if a telemetry link exists between the receiver and transmitter: #01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

**Temperature warning** Should the receiver’s temperature sink below an adjustable threshold (default value -10 °C) or rise abo ve an adjustable threshold (default value +55 °C), an acoustic war ning will be issued by the transmitter in the form of a uniform beep of about 1 s duration. The aforementioned threshold limits are stored and adjusted in the receiver. **Servo connections and polarity** Graupner/SJ HoTT receiver servo connections are numbered. The connectors used are keyed against polarity reversal. Pay attention to the small side chamfers when plugging in these connectors. Never use force. The supply voltage is bussed across (i. e. common for) all numbered connections. The two vertical sockets at the extreme edge of theGR-16 and GR-24 receivers are intended for the battery connection. On the GR-16 these two sockets are marked “1+B-” and “6+B-”. On the GR-24 these two sockets are marked “11+B-” and “12+B-”. However, you can also connect the corresponding servos to these two sockets in parallel with the power supply simply by using a Y-lead, Order No. **3936.11**

. **Do not reverse the polarity of this connection. Reversed polarity could destroy the receiver and**  **devices attached to it.** The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. It is not only the throttle servo connection which is different for every manufacturer and model type. For example, in Graupner remote control systems the throttle servo is on channel 1 for winged aircraft and on channel 6 for helicopter models. Follow the installation instructions on page 64 for the receiver, the receiver antenna and for mounting the servo. Concluding notices:

• The significantly greater ser vo resolution characteristic of the HoTT system produces a noticeablyfirmer response behaviour in comparison to previous technology. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with this sensitive behaviour.

• If you ha ve a speed controller with integrated BEC* arranged in parallel with the receiver battery, its positive pole (red cable) may to be removedfrom the 3-pole connector. Be sure to look for notices about this in the instructions for the speed controller used. With a small screwdriver,carefully lift up the connector’s center latch (1) just a bit then pull out the red lead (2) and tape it up with insulation tape to prevent possible short circuits (3).

**Reset** To execute a reset of the receiver, press and hold the SET button on the receiver’s top-side while switchingthe power supply on. Hold the receiver’s SET button pressed in for about three seconds until the LED, flashing slowly red / green, goes out for about two seconds. If you have carried out the reset with the transmitter switched off, or with an unbound receiver, the greenand red LEDs fitted to the GR-16 and GR-24 receivers (supplied as standard in the sets) flash four times for around three seconds, after which both LEDs go

* Battery Elimination Circuit red
1

2 355 **Receiver initialization** out for just on three seconds, before only the red LED continues to flash. Release the button as soon as the LEDs go out. At the transmitter and receiver it is now possible to carry out a Binding procedure immediately.If the reset is done on a bound receiver and the corresponding model memory is active in the powered on transmitter, the LED will illuminate in green after 2 or 3 seconds as an indication that the transmitter/ receiver system is again ready for operation. **Please note the following: A receiver RESET will cause ALL receiver set**  **tings, except for binding information, to return to their factory settings.**  **Therefore if a RESET is triggered unintentionally, any custom settings that had been present in the** **receiver before the reset will have to be estab lished again by way of the »Telemetry« menu.**  **A deliberate RESET is recommended, especially if a receiver is to be “transferred” into another**  **model. This is a rather simple method to eliminate settings which are no longer applicable.** 56 **Receiver power supply** Auxiliary function

Y-lead, Order No. **3936.11** PRX stabilised receiver power supply, Order No. **4136**

For reasons of safety, do not use battery boxes or dry cell batteries.The voltage of the on-board power supply will be displayed at the bottom right of the transmitter’s screen while the model is in operation:

#01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

If the voltage falls below the warning threshold

– 3.80 V as standard

– set in the “RX SER VO TEST” display of the “SETUP, DISPLAYS” sub-menu of the » **Telemetry** « menu, page 248, then the system generates a visual and audible low voltage warning.**Despite this feature, be sure to check the condi tion of the battery at regular intervals. Do not wait**  **for the warning to be issued before recharging the battery.** 
Note: An overview of available batteries, chargers and current source test instruments can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. A selection of suitable Computer chargers are listed in the table on page 16. 500 mAh for e very digital servo. For example, from this point of view a battery with 1400 mAh would be the absolute minim um to power a receiver system with a total of 4 analog servos. But be sure to also consider the receiver itself into the calculation because its bidirectional functionality will draw about 70 mA of current too. Connect the po wer supply preferably by way of the socket/s which are close to connectors of attached servos. Where only high-power servos are connected,it may be necessary to use all receiver battery connections. Even where only two batteries are used via 1 PRX it is preferable to use the receiver connections closest to the servos which draw the most current. The figure below shows an example of a stabilized receiver power supply (PRX-5A, order no. **4136** ) for the connection of two batteries. As an alternativesolution, a switch could be inserted with power supply cables to two receiver connectors. Such a double connection not only reduces the risks associated with a cable break but also ensures a more uniform supply of power to attached servos. If a separate battery is connected to each receiver battery connection, be absolutely sure the batterieshave the same voltage and power rating. Never connect different battery types or batteries charged to significantly different levels to the receiver. This can lead to effects similar to short circuit conditions. In such cases, insert voltage stabilizers, such as the PRX-5A receiver power supply, between the batteries and the receiver.

Auxiliary function

Y-lead, Order No. **3936.11** PRX stabilised receiver power supply, Order No. **4136** Among other aspects, the safe operation of a model depends on a reliable power supply. In the event that, despite smooth operating rods, fully charged battery, battery leads with adequate cross-section, minimumcontact resistances at connectors, etc., the transmitter indicates repeated receiver voltage collapses or is receiver voltage is generally too low; please give attention to the following notices: Give primary attention to fully charged batteries when model operation is to be started. Be sure that the contact surfaces of connectors and switches really are low resistance. If necessary, measure the voltage drop across installed switch cables when they are under load because even new heavy-duty switches can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value can increase in contacts by factors as a consequence of aging and oxidation. The constant vibrations and jarring also takes its toll on contacts to produce a creeping increase of contact resistance. Servos present another possible problem source. Even rather small servos like a Graupner/JR DS-281 can draw up to 0.75 A of current when it is bloc ks under load. Just four of these servos in a “foam” model can therefore load down the on-board power supply by as much as 3 A ... A further f actor is that 2.4 GHz receivers generally pass control signals to servos at a higher rate than with comparable receivers used in earlier frequency ranges. This equates to shorter “off” periods, which also has an effect on the power consumption of the receiving system. The current drain of many of today’s digital servos is also higher, reflected by their greatlyimproved ability to hold the prescribed position between control signals. Therefore you should choose a power supply which will not break down under greater loads but ratheralways deliver sufficient voltage. To “calculate” necessary battery capacity you should always figure on at least 350 mAh for e very analog servo and at least 

# Receiver power supply57 **Receiver power supply** 

# Receiver system power supply

**NiMH 4-cell battery packs** In compliance with the aforementioned conditions, your Graupner/SJHoTT receiver system can be readily operated with traditional 4-cell battery packs aslong as the packs have adequate capacity and voltage level. **NiMH 5-cell battery packs**Five-cell battery packs offer a greater voltage tolerance than do 4-cell packs. However, be aware that not every servo available on the market is able to tolerate the voltage level output by a 5-cell pack over the long term, this is particularly true when the battery pack is freshly charged. Someof these servos react to this with a noticeable “grinding” sound. Therefore pay attention to the specifications of the servos you use before making a choice for a 5-cell battery pack..
**LiFe 6.6 V batteries with 2 cells** From a contemporary perspective, these new cells are the very best choice. LiFe cells are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage. Like LiPo cells, LiFe cells can be quick charged in suitable chargers and they are comparatively robust. This type of secondary cell battery is also rated for a significantly greater number of charge/discharge cycles than, for example, LiPo batteries The nominal 6.6 V output of a 2-cell LiF e battery pack does not present a problem for either Graupner/SJHoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyrosand other devices which have been specifically approved for operation in this

– higher

– v oltage range. **Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices built**  **in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market have only a permissible**  **voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V** 

**.** Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e. g. the PRX, Order No. **4136** , see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time. **LiPo 2-cell packs** For a given capacity, LiPo batteries are lighter than, for example, NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage. The comparatively high nominal voltage, 7.4 V , for a 2-cell LiPo pack does not present a problem for either Graupner/SJ HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices which have been specifically approved for operation in this

– higher

– voltage range. **Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gy**  **ros and other devices built in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market**  **have only a permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6**  **V.** Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator,

e. g. the PRX, Order No. **4136** , see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time. **Charging the receiver battery** Charger cable, order no. **3021** , can be plugged directly onto the receiver’s battery for charging. If the battery in the model is connected by way of an order

no. **3046**
, **3934**
, **3934.1** or **3934.3** power supply cable, then charging can be accomplished via the charging jack or special charging connector integrated into the switch. The switch in the power supply cable must be in its “OFF” position for charging.

Receiver battery connection polarity58 **Receiver firmware updates** Receiver firmware updates for the GR-16 and GR-24 receivers, which are supplied as standard in the RCsets, are carried out using the side-mounted Telemetry socket marked “- + T” and a PC or laptop running Windows XP, Vista or 7. You will also require the USB leads supplied in the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT sets, together with the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** , and the adapter lead, Order No. **7168.6S**

, both of which are also included. The programs and files also needed can be found in Internet on the Graupner website at www.graupner.de under thedownloads for the particular product. For more information please read the section entitled “Downloading a firmware packet” on page 48.
Note:After registering your receiver at https://www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx, you will automatically receive notification of future updates per email.
**Updating receiver firmware**
**Important notes:**

**• Please note that the HoTT components in your**  **radio contr ol system can only communicate**  **perfectly if the firmware is compatible. That is why all the programs and files required to up** **date all HoTT components are grouped togeth er in one file, the current version of which is**  **entitled “HoTT_Software_V4.zip”.**

**• Before an**  **y update procedure, be sure to check the charged status of the receiver’s battery. If**  **necessary, charge the battery before beginning with an update.** 

**• It is essential not to disconnect the receiv**  **er fr om the PC or laptop during an update pro**  **cess! Please ensure that the lead between the receiver and the computer is making good**  **contact at both ends.** 

# Receiver firmware updates

**1. Installing drivers**  The dr iver software for the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** , is identical to the driver software for the interface installed in the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. This means that thedriver only needs to be installed once; the procedure is described on page 50. **2. Establishing a receiver / PC connection**  Connect the USB interf ace cable, order no. **7168.6** , via the adapter cable, order no. **7168.6A**
,with the “- + T” connector on the receiver, see illustration. These connectors are protected against polarity reversal so pay attention to the small chamfers on the sides of connectors. Do not usebrute force, these connectors should latch in rather easily.

Adapter lead Order No. **7168.6S**

If a central red wire is present, cut through t

Adapter lead Order No. **7168.6S**

If a central red wire is present, cut through it

**Caution: If the** 

**– older** 

**– adapter cable still has wires f**  **or all three poles, cut the red insulated wire for**  **the middle connector pin of the adapter cable, Order No. 7168.6A.** Afterward, connect the USB interface with the included USB cable (USB-A/mini-B-USB 5-pole interface connector) to the PC or laptop. A red LED on the interface board should illuminate even though the connection is made correctly. If not already off, now switch the receiver off. **3. Firmware update**  Start the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_VerX.X.exe” program by double-clicking on it, exactly as described for updating the transmitter software

– see page 50. (At the time of re vision for this manual, this program’s current version is 2.1 and it can be started without first being installed.)

Move to the “Upgrade” folder, open the “ControllerMenu” and click on “Port Select”. (Alternatively select the “Port Select” entry under “Menu”.)59 **Receiver firmware updates** Select the correct COM port in the “Port select” window, i. e . the port to which the USB interface isconnected. This can be identified by the label “Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge” in the “Device name” column. In the screen-shot shown above this would be the “COM 3” port. In the “Devices” folder, call up the “HoTT receiver” option under “Controller Menu”. Alternatively select the “HoTT Receiver Upgrade” entry under “Menu”:

When you call up the program, you will see a row of numbers 1 ... 5 in the window’s title bar; the number “1” now flashes red to indicate that the program is currently in “[Process Step] 1”.The meaning of the step which is currently flashing is always displayed immediately below the row of numbers:

For example, this screen-shot shows Step 1 in progress, and the meaning is: “Connect the USB lead to the HoTT receiver”.
Note: You can position the mouse pointer over a number at any time to call up Quick Info: this gives a brief explanation of the individual steps: If you have not already done so, you should now connect your receiver to the PC or laptop. Click on the button marked “File Browse”, and the “Open file” dialogue opens. Select the firmware updatefile matching your receiver; it will end in a “bin” suffix. Assuming that you have already downloaded and unpacked the zip file “HoTT_Software_VX”, the file you need will usually be located in the folder whose name starts with the Order Number of the receiver you wish to update. If you are using one of the receivers supplied as standard in the RC sets, this would be the folder “33508_08CH_RX” ( 

### mc-16 ) or “33512_12CH_RX” ( 

### mc-20 ). The file appears in the associated window, and at the same time the “2” starts flashing red:

Note: Firmware files are product-specifically coded, i. e

. if a wrong file is accidentally selected which does not correspond to the product (e. g. a transmitter update file instead of a receiver update file), the “Product code error” popup window will appear and the update process will not start. With the receiver still switched off, follow the direction of “[Process Step] 2” and press the “Start update” button in the “HoTT Receiver Upgrade” window. (The announcement moves to „[ProcessStep] 3“.) Wait for the progress bar to start. Depending on the speed of the computer being used, this may take several seconds. Now switch on the receiver while holding its SETbutton down. After a few seconds the “Found target device ...” message will appear in the statusdisplay. Release the button again. The actual firmware update now starts automatically: “11, Start Firmware upgrade ...”.However, if the receiver is not detected, the “Target device ID not found” popup window will appear.If this should happen, check your update arrangement, and re-start the procedure:

The progress of the firmware update is shown by the Progress bar in the Status display. During the update process the red and green LEDs on the GR-16 and GR-24 receivers glow constantly.**The connection to the PC must not be inter rupted during the update process!**  The update is complete when the progress bar reaches the right-hand end. In the bottom line of60 **Receiver firmware updates** the Status display you will see “12, Complete !!” and at the same time the [Process Steps] display changes to “5”.When the update process is successfully concluded, the green LED on the receiver goes out, and the red LED starts flashing. If this process terminates before reaching the 100 % mar k, switch off your receiver’s power supply then try to start the update process all over again. Do this by performing the above steps again. If you accidentally try to transfer firmware which is older than the version stored in the receiver

– e ven though of the correct type

– the prog ram displays a warning:

Click on “No” if you do not want to load an older version of the firmware, and then load the correct *.bin file via the “Open file” button.**After this it is ESSENTIAL to initialise the re ceiver, i.**  **e . reset it to the factory default values.** 

To do this, switch the receiver off and remove the interface cable. **4. Receiver initialization**  F or safety reasons the receiver must be initialised before it is used again, and the display shown above makes this clear. Hold the SET button onthe receiver pressed in while you switch the receiver on: if you are using a GR-16 or GR-24 receiver, as supplied as standard in the RC sets, the green and red LEDs flash four times for about three seconds, then both LEDs go out for three seconds, and finally the red LED alone continues to flash. Release the button as soon as the LEDs go out. Switch the transmitter on again, wait until an RF signal is transmitted, and you will see the green LED on the bound receiver light up continuously for two to three seconds. If the receiver is not yet bound, you can now carry out the binding process with a transmitter; see pages 87 and 95. **Important note: The receiver is now reset to the factory de**  **fault values**

**– with the e**  **xception of the binding information** 

**– and an**  **y other settings previously programmed in the receiver must be re-entered**  **if required. If you wish to avoid this process by “rescuing”**  **the data, use the “Receiver Setup” program in the “Link” segment of the program before**  **carrying out the update process. This will save you the trouble of re-programming the receiver**  **via the “Telemetry” menu.**61 **For your notes**62 **Backing up receiver settings**The “Receiver Setup” segment of the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio” program provides a means of backing up the data programmed in the receiver. The data are saved in a file on your computer, so that the same data set can be loaded back into the receiver ifrequired; this avoids the need to re-program the settings using the “Telemetry” menu. It is best to call up the “Receiver Setup” applicationfrom within the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio” program, but it is also possible to start it directly: you will find the “Receiver_Setup.exe” file in the “Graupner_ PC-Software” folder.

Note:If you call up “Receiver_Setup.exe” from the Firmware_Upgrade program via the “Receiver Setup” menu point, you should check that the sub-program “Receiver_Setup.exe” is located in the same folder as the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio” program! For this program you need a USB lead together with the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** , which is supplied as standard in the radio control sets, and the interface lead, Order No. **7168.6S**

. **Backing up receiver settings**
**1. Establishing a connection between the receiv**  **er and the PC** With the receiv er switched off, connect the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** to the receiver socket marked “- + T” using the adapter lead, Order No. 

# Backing up receiver settings

**7168.6S**

. The connectors are polarised; check that the smallside chamfers are correctly aligned. On no account use force; the plugs should slide easily into the sockets.

Adapter lead Order No. **7168.6S**

If a central red wire is present, cut through t

Adapter lead Order No. **7168.6S**

If a central red wire is present, cut through it

**Caution: If you wish to use the earlier adapter lead,**  **Order No. 7168.6A, and it is still fitted with a three-core lead, cut through the central red**  **wire of the adapter lead before using it.**Connect the USB interface to the PC or laptop using the USB lead supplied (USB-A to 5-way mini-B-USB). When connected correctly, a red LED should light up on the interface circuit board. The receiver must remain switched off. **2. Receiver Setup: selecting the por**  **t**Start the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_VerX.X.exe” program by double-clicking on it, exactly as described for updating the transmitter software

– see page 50. (V ersion 2.1, which is thecurrent version at the time this manual was revised, starts without being previously installed.) Open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Receiver Setup” in the “Upgrade / Link” folder.Alternatively select the “Receiver Setup entry” under “Menu”:

A program window now appears: the first step isto set the “correct” COM port for the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** . If you are not sure of this, check the COM port in the “Port select” window of the “Controller Menu” (see earlier), and note theCOM port number associated with the entry “Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge”. If everything is as described earlier, this would be the “COM 3” port.

(If you select the wrong port, the program will inform you of your error.) **3. Reading out receiver data**  Click on the “Connect” button and wait until the lower Status bar starts moving:

Hold the SET button on the receiver pressed in while you switch it on. After about three secondsthe current values stored in the receiver are displayed in the corresponding fields. If the progress bar is “faster than you are”, and reaches the endbefore you have switched the receiver on, the popup window shown subsequent will appear.63 **Backing up receiver settings** Repeat the procedure:

**Important:** The active connection can be terminated using the “Disconnect” button, but you should only do this if you intend to initialise the receiver directly

– as de

scribed on page 60

– and do not wish to o verwrite the contents with a data set you backed up earlier. **4. Sa**  **ving receiver data** The “File Save” button stores the current servo configuration on the PC. The Windows dialogue “Save as” now opens: First select a suitable folder in which to save the file, and enter an unambiguous name under “File name”, so that you can assign the file again at a later stage. The program automatically appends the file suffix “rdf”. The data set is saved when you click on the “Save” button. When the process is complete, this message appears:

Click on “OK” to close this.Now you can reset the receiver to the factory default settings as previously mentioned and described on page 60. **Copying a data set to the receiver** The backed-up data can be reloaded using the “File Load” function in the Receiver Setup program. First connect the receiver as described in point 3“Reading out receiver data”, and click on the “Connect” button. If the receiver has previously been initialised, the software reads out the factory default settings.Now select the appropriate “rdf” file from the appropriate folder, and click on “OK” in the “File Load” pop-up window. Clicking on the “Write” button transfers the data to the receiver connected to the PC.As soon as the transfer is complete, the pop-up window “Receiver Data Write Success” appears:

Click on “OK” to conclude the data transfer procedure, then click on the “Disconnect” button to separate the Receiver Setup program from the receiver. **Important notes:**

**• The**  **“Receiver Setup” program includes addi tional functions which are still at the develop** **ment stage, and must not be used at this junc ture. You can check the current state of the** **software in the Download area for your par ticular receiver.** 

**• A separate man**  **ual dealing with the whole “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-X.X” pro**  **gram packet is in preparation, and will be made available in the Download area when it**  **is ready. The manual will then be continuously updated whenever new options become avail**  **able.**64 **Installation notices** Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Tubular brass spacer

4. Ser vo arms must be free to move throughout their entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are no objects which could hinder servo arm motion. The sequence in which servos are connected to the receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the connection layouts provided for this on pages 73 and 75. Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 ... 9. In order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos connected to the receiver during startup **always first switch on the transmitter**
**and then the receiver** and when finished with operation **first switch off the receiver**

**and then the transmitter.**When programming the transmitter, be sure that electric motors cannot start running without control or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe, disconnectthe receiver’s drive battery or, in the case of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply. twelve) sockets. A Y-lead can then be used to connect the corresponding servo. However, please note that the transverse sockets of the GR-12 should not be used for the connection of a receiver battery due to additional voltage losses. The function of every individual channel is determinedby the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However, channel assignments can be changed in the receiver by programming done in the » **Tele metry**  « menu. However, it is advisable to carry this out at the transmitter using the » **Tx. output swap** « option; this is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, but has to be unlocked (at extra cost) on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter; see page 230. **Several notices and suggestions for installing remote control components into a model are pro**  **vided below.** 1. Wr ap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at least 6 mm thic k. Attach the foam rubber to the receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing. However, do not enclose your receiver completely, otherwise it may overheat in use. 2. All s witches must be installed such that they are not affected by exhaust gases or vibration. Theswitch knob must be freely accessible over its entire range of movement. 3. Mount ser vos on rubber bushes/spacers with hollow brass bearings to protect them from vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws down too tight as this would negate the vibration protection to be provided by the rubber bush/spacer. Onlywhen servo fastening screws are properly tightened will this arrangement provide security and vibration protection for your servos. The figure below shows how a servo is mounted properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into the rubber bushes/ spacers from below. 

# Installation notices

**Receiver installation** Regardless of which Graupner receiver system you use, the procedure is always the same. Please pay attention that the receiver’s antennas must be mounted at least 5 cm a way from all large metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this also includes carbon fiber parts, servos, fuel pumps and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around the antennas or routed close to it.Please note that cables are subject to the acceleration forces which occur during flight and these forces may cause such cables, to shift in position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving cables can cause reception disturbances. Tests have shown that a single receiver aerial should be deployed in the vertical (upright) orientation for best results during long landing approaches. If your receiver is an aerial diversity type

– tw o aerials

– then the activ e tip of the second aerial should be positioned at 90 ° to the tip of the first aer ial, and ideally the distance between the two tips should be greater than 125 mm. If your model features a carbon fibre fuselage, the aerial tips must always extend outside the fuselage for a length of at least 35 mm. If this is not possible, it is essential to substitute longer aerials (300 mm, Order No. **33500.2** , or 450 mm, Order No. **33500.3** ) for the standard ones (approx. 145 mm long) fitted to HoTT receiver(s). The sockets marked “X+B-” on the HoTT GR-16 and GR-24 receivers supplied in the sets are intended for the battery connection. The power supply is passed through all the numbered sockets, and in principle the battery can be connected to any of the eight (or65 **For your notes**66 **Term definitions** 

# Definitions of terms Control function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, kind of switches

To make use of this manual easier, a number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this manual have been defined below.
**Control function** A “control function” is to be perceived

– initially inde

pendent of its signal path

– as a signal intended to aff ect a given control function. For example, this could be for throttle, rudder or aileron in a winged aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter. A control function signal can be applied directly over a single control channel or also through a mixer and then applied over multiple control channels. A typical example of multiple control channels is separately operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crowservos in helicopters. The control function explicitly includes the influence of the control’s mechanical travel on the respective servo. This can not only be spreador compressed by software but even the travel characteristic can be modified from linear to extremely exponential.
**Control**“Controls” include all operating elements on the transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot, that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers etc. connected to the receiver. This includes:

• both sticks for control functions 1 through 4, whereby these four functions can be freely swapped around for both model types (“winged aircraft” and “helicopters”) by way of software “Mode” settings, e. g. throttle left or right. The stick function for throttle/airbrake control at “winged aircraft” or throttle/pitch control at “helicopters” is often also referred to as the C1 control (channel 1).

• both propor tional controls located on the transmitter’s sides, which are, for example, given the de signations Lv1 (left-side “rotary slider”) and Lv2 (right-side “rotary slider”) in the » **Control adjust**  « menu, page 118 and 122.

• the tw o INC/DEC buttons, which are fitted on both sides of the front screen on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. These are typically labelled Cn5 and 6 in the » **Control adjust** « menu; see sections starting on page 118 and 122

. If they are assigned as transmitter controls in the

» **Control adjust** « menu, these buttons can be used to move a servo in 1 % increments relativ e to the servo travel currently set (as selected in the

» **Servo adjustment** « menu.) When you press one of the INC/DEC buttons, the positions are briefly superimposed on the base display. They are ideal for tasks such as setting flightphase specific flap positions and similar fine trimming. If a button is held pressed in, the rate of change automatically speeds up

– indicated b y a faster sequence of audible beeps; a different beep indicates the centre position. Since you can opt for the (trim) position of these two transmitter controls to be stored separately for each flight phase

– pro
vided that they have been assigned to one of the inputs 5 ... 12 in the “Control adjust” menu

– y ou can use one and the same INC/DEC button in thesame way for all flight phases you may have programmed. This does not apply to position-dependent proportional transmitter controls.

• the tw o proportional sliders in the middle console designated Sl1 and 2, for example as shown in the

» **Control adjust** « menu, page 118 and 122,

• the s witches present, if they are assigned to a control channel in the » **Control adjust** « menu. The proportional operating elements produce a directeffect on servos which is commensurate with the control’s position whereas switch modules can only effect a two or three increment change. Just which of these controls and switches operate which of the servos 5 ... 8 respectively 5 ... 12 is freely programmable. **Important notice: The transmitter is supplied with default program**  **ming in which certain inputs are “free”, i. e**  **. not yet assigned to any function. These inputs are: 5 ... 7**  **(** 

### mc-16 **) and 5 ... 11 (** 

### mc-20 **only as standard) for model helicopters, and 5 ... 8 (**  

### mc-16 **) and 5 ... 12 (**  

### mc-20 **only as standard) for fixed-wing model aircraft.** 
**Function input** This is an imaginary point in the signal path and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connected. The choice of “ **Stick mode** ” and settings in the » **Con trol**  **adjust** « menu have their effect “downstream” of these imaginary connection points. Thus differencesbetween the physical control’s number and the number of the downstream control channel can indeed emerge.
**Control channel** From the point at which a signal contains all control information necessary for a particular servo

– whether directly from the ph ysical control or indirectly by way of a mixer

– the ter m “control channel” is used. (For example, for a fixed-wing model aircraft set up as the model type “2AIL”, this means that the “Aileron” control function is divided into the control channels left and right aileron. Similarly: for a helicopter set up as the “3Sv(2roll)” type, the “Roll” control function is split into the control channels left and right roll servo.) The signal of this type of control channel can only be further influenced by the settings entered in the

» **Servo adjustment** « menu (and in the » **Tx. output swap**  « menu, which is available in the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked in the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter); the signal then leaves the transmitter via the RF module. Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still be modified by settings made in the » **Telemetry«** menu67 **Term definitions** before finally being applied as a control quantity for the respective servo.
**Mixer** The transmitter’s software contains a variety of mixer functions. These can be used to apply one control function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply multiple control functions to a single servo. Please look over the numerous mixer functions in the text beginning on page 169 of this manual.
**Switches** The standard toggle switches, the 3-way switchesand both push-button switches can also be incorporated into control programming. However, these switches are generally intended for switching program options, e. g. to start and stop timers, to switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be assigned any number of functions. Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.
**Control switches**Since it is very practical to have some functions automatically switched on or off for a certain control’s position (e. g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of spoilers and other possibilities), four control switches have been integrated into 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT software. These software switches, designated “C1 ... C4”, are merely defined by virtue of their contact state along the physical control’s course of travel by the touch of a key. The switching action can be correlated to the physical control’s travel direction by software.Of course control switches can also be freely combined with the aforementioned physical switches to solve even more complex problems. There is a series of instructive examples which makethis programming child’s play. Learn about this by taking advantage of the programming examples beginning on page 280. **Logical switches** This function, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter only, allows two switches, control switches and / or logical switches, or any combination of the above, to be linked in an “AND” or “OR”circuit. Eight logical switches “L1 ... L8” can be programmed in total; see page 148.
**Fixed switches FXI and FX** This type of switch turns a function, e. g. a timer, permanently on (closed fixed switch) or off (open fixed switch) or they can provide a fixed input signal for a control function, e. g. FXI = +100 % and FX = -100 %. For example, in flight phase programming, these fixed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed controller between two settings.68 **Physical control, switch and control switch assignments** 

# Physical control, switch and control switch assignments Principle procedure

Maximum flexibility is offered by the 

### mc-16 Hott and 

### mc-20 HoTT system when it comes to assigning standard equipment operating elements to certain functions. Since the assignment of controls and switches is done in the same way, even though different menus may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to explain the fundamental programming technique so that users can concentrate on the particular contents when reading the detailed menu descriptions. **Transmitter control assignment** It is possible to assign any direction of transmittercontrol (Ch1 ... Ch4), and also any available transmitter control, to inputs 5 ... 8 ( 

### mc-16 ) and 5 ... 12 ( 

### mc-20 only as standard) at the transmitter, in order to operate servos. This is carried out in the third column of the » **Control adjust** « menu; see the sections starting on pages 118 and 122 . When you press the central **SET** button of the right-hand touchkey the following window appears on the screen:

Move desired control adj.

Now simply operate the transmitter control you wish to use.
Note: The software only detects the transmitter control after it has moved a certain distance: move it left or right, or forward or back, until the assignment is displayedon the screen. If the travel in one direction is not sufficient, move the control in the opposite direction.The same method is used throughout the other menus when transmitter controls have to be assigned. **Switch assignment**Wherever programming permits a switch to be assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen’s bottom display line: Use the selection keys in the left or right four-way button to select the appropriate column. **How to assign a switch** 1. Br iefly touch the **SET** key of the right four-way button. The message shown below will appear in the

screen.
Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

2. No w it is only necessary to put the selected switch into the desired “ON” position or, as described at the right in “Assignment of external switches”, to select a switch from the list of “External switches”.This concludes the assignment. The switch symbol to the right of the switch’s number indicates the current state of the particular switch. **Special features of SW 16 + 17 / SW 18 + 19**

These two “push-buttons” are fitted in line with the side-mounted proportional sliders on the back of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, and can be assigned to operate in either of two ways:

• Change-o ver On / Off switch “SW 16” or “SW 17”, i. e . the switched state (“on” or “off”) changes every time you press the button briefly.

• Momentar y switch (push-button) “SW 18” and “SW 19”, i. e . the switch only remains ON for as long as the button is held pressed. **Important note: When the transmitter is switched on, the switches**  **“SW 16” and “SW 17” are always set to the “OFF” position by default.**  **Changing switch action**If the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite action, put the switch or stick in the desired OFF position, again activate the switch assignment and reassign the switch again so it will respond with the desired action.
**Clear switch**A switch which has been assigned as described under point 1 can be cleared with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination in the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). **Assignment from the “external switch” list** Those menus in which the message ...
Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)
... appears permit the assignment of switches belonging to the so-called “external switches”. Do this by confirming the message text with the **SET** key. A new window will appear with a list of the four control switches “C1 ... C4”, followed by two so-called “FX” fixed switches and the eight logical switches “L1 ... L8”. Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Use the selection keys in the left or right four-way button to select the desired switch then assign it with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.
Notes:

• Switching for some special functions may be better implemented from a certain freely programmable control position rather than switching them manually with a normal switch.69 **Physical control, switch and control switch assignments** To this end, there are a total of 4 so-called “controlswitches”, C1 ... C4, available whose switching direction can be established, even inverted, in the

» **Control switch** « menu, page 145.

• Logical s witches, which are available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter only (but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT at extra cost) allow two switches and / or control switches to be linked together logically in an “AND” or “OR” circuit. See the “Logical switches” menu on page 148. A total of 8 logical switches “L1 ... L8” (as well as another 8 inverted logical switches with inverted switching direction) are available. The result of a logical switch function can also beused as an input for another logical switch function. Refer to the appropriate menu for more details about this.

• The tw o FX switches switch a function on “FXI” or off “FX ” permanently.

• All s witches mentioned can have multiple assignments. Pay attention that you do not uninten

tionally assign reciprocally conflicting functionsto a single switch. If necessary, note down the given switch functions. Typical applications:

• Shut-off of an on-board glo w plug heater upon underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point programmed for the C1 stick. In this case the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a transmitter mixer.

• A utomatic switch on/off of the timer to measurepure “flight time” for a helicopter by way of a control switch on the throttle limiter.

• A utomatic switch off of the “AI  Rud” mixer when brake flaps are extended, for example to adapt theroll of a model to the ground when making a landing on a slope without inducing a change of flight direction due to influence on the rudder. • Extending landing flaps with ele vator trim adjustment during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is moved beyond its switch point.

• Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the operating time of electric motors.70 **Digital trim** 

# Digital trim Functional description and description of C1 cut-off

**Digital trim with visible and audible indicators** Both sticks are equipped for digital trimming. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one „click“), the neutral position of the associated stick channel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in the corresponding direction with increasing speed.These changes can be made „audible“ by way of different frequency tones. This makes finding the midpoint during flight easy, without looking at the screen. When the midpoint is overrun, a brief pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when amodel memory change is made. Furthermore, digital trim exercises flight phase specific control within a memory location (except for throttle/brake flaps trim)

– the socalled „C1“ (channel 1) control function. These def ault settings can be altered to “global” in the

» **Stick mode** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, see pages 114 and 116. This C1 trim includes yet another special function for winged aircraft and helicopter models, it allows thecarburetor‘s idle setting to easily be found for a combustion motor.Since the trim functions described in these instructions are only effective in the direction „Motor off“, the presentation in the screen of your transmitter may only change with respect to individual throttle or Pitch-min positioning of the C1 stick in the „forward“ or „back“ direction, such as throttle/pitch „left stick“ or „right stick“. The illustrations in these instructions are alwaysbased on „Throttle/Pitch right“ for both types of models and „Throttle back“ for winged aircraft and helicopters. **1. Winged models**C1 trimming has a special cut-off trim function intended especially for combustion motors. This cut-off trim function is configured as follows: First put the motor into a safe idle speed. Now if you push C1 trim in a single motion toward its „Motor cut-off“ direction until it is in its furthest travel position then an additional end-position marker will remain in the display. When the motor is restarted you can again immediately set the last idle speed with a single movement in the direction of „more gas“.

stp flt Current trim position

M

Trim at motor OFF position Last idle positionIdle direction

Ch 1 trim lever

This cut-off trim will be deactivated when “None” is entered on the “Motor at C1” line of the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104.
Notice: Since this trim function is only effective in the “Motor off” direction, the display illustrated above will change appropriately if the C1 stick’s control direction for minimum throttle is changed from “back” to “front” (on which the above illustration is based) in the “Motor at C1” line of the “ **Basic Settings** ” menu. **2. Helicopter models** In addition to the „Cut-off trim“ function described below in „Winged aircraft models“, C1 trimming also has another characteristic which is made possibleby combining it with a so-called „Throttle limit“ function see page 127. As long as the throttle limit control

– as standard the right-hand propor tional rotarycontrol Lv2 on the right-hand side of the transmitter

– remains in the „rear“ half of its tra vel path, i. e. in the startup range, C1 trimming acts on the throttleservo as idle trim and the indication for idle trim is visible in the screen‘s display:

stop flt

M Current trim position

Trim at motor OFF position Last idle position

Throttle limit control

However, in contrast to winged aircraft models, the position indicator ( ) will be hidden and any preset idle position will be deleted when the throttle limit control is in the „front-side“ half of its travel path.


### Stp Flt

M Throttle limit control

Notice for helicopters: C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo, not the pitch servo. Notice also that the helicopter throttle servo must be connected to receiver output 6, see receiver layout on page 75!71 **For your notes**72 **Winged models** 

# Winged models

Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron servos and four flap servos on normal models or, for V-tail and flying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/ elevator servos plus four flap servos. The majority of motorized and glider models belong to the tail unit type “normal” and are equipped with one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed controller (or for brake flaps in the case of a glidermodel). Beyond this, tail unit type “2 HR Sv 3+8” permits the connection of two elevator servos to receiver outputs 3 and 8. “V-tail” is to be selected from the » **Model type** « menu if the model has a V-tail instead of a “normal” tail. This V-tail option provides coupled control functions for elevator and rudder such that both tail flaps

– each controlled by a separ ate servo

– are able to handle both ele vator and rudder functionality. For delta and flying wing aircraft models, aileron and elevator functionality is affected by way of a common rudder flap on the trailing edge of each side (right and left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate mixer functions for both servos. If ailerons, and conditionally the flaps, are each actuated with two separate servos then settings can be made for differentiated control of all aileron and flap pairs in the » **Wing mixers** « menu, i. e. settings for downward rudder throw independent of upward throw.And finally, the ideal method of controlling flap positions is to use one of the two INC/DEC transmitter controls, which are fitted as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function available for flaps, ailerons and elevators in the

» **Phase trim** « menu. Up to 7 flight phases can be programmed into each of the 20 respectively 24 model memory locations. Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a flight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a carburetor idle setting. Two timers are always available for flight operation. The transmitter operating time expired since the last battery charge is also displayed. All transmitter controls and switches can be assigned in the » **Control adjust** « menu to inputs 5 ... 8 respectively 5 ... 12 with almost no restrictions.The “Dual Rate” and “Exponential” functions for ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately programmable and each are convertible between the two variations on a specific flight-phase basis. In addition to eight freely assignable linear mixers, four curve mixers (» **Free mixers** « menu) and four dual mixers (» **Dual mixers** «

– a vailable as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only; can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT as an extra-cost option), flight-phase specific six-point curves are available for control channel 1 (throttle / brake); see » **Channel 1**

**curve** « menu.Depending on the number of wing servos, fixeddefinition mix and coupling functions can be selected from a list in the » **Wing mixers** « menu.

• Multi-flap menu: control of flaps as ailerons, the influence aileron trim on flaps controlled as ailerons, flap differentiation, flap function throw magnitude for all aileron and flap pairs, ailerons controlled as flaps, elevator mixer  flaps

• Brak e settings: butterfly, differential reduction, elevator curves

• aileron  rudder mixer

• flaps  elevator mixer

E l e v a t o r F

l a p

F l a p E

l e v a t o r

F

l a p A

i l e r

o n A

i l e r o n F l a p A i l e r

o n R u d d e r E l e v a t o r A

l e r o n

left

ri ght E l e v a t o r F l a p

F l a p E l e v a t o r A i l e r o n R u d d e r A i l e r o n F l a p

Air brake Fla p

Air brake El evator Airbrake-Function 1

left
right R ud d er/ Ele vat or V-Tail AI

FL

FL

AI Br ake FL, FL 2

Br ake Elevator Br ake AI , AI2 AI

FL FL2

AI FL FL2

AI2

F L  A

I F L  A I E L  F L

RU  AI

EL  AI E L  F L AI2

A
I  F L A

I  F

L73 **Winged models - Receiver layout Installation notices**  **Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here.**  Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. **Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.**  **Winged aircraft with and without motor having up to 4 aileron servos and up to 4 flap servos ...**  **... and tail plane type “normal” or “2 elevator servos”** 

Receiver power supply

Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function Free or right aileron 2 or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function Free or left flap 2 or aux. function Free or right flap 2 or aux. function **... and tail plane type “V tail unit”**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function Free or left flap 2 or aux. function Free or right flap 2 or aux. function

Left rudder / elevator Right rudder / elevator

**Delta/flying wing aircraft models with and without motor having up to 4 aileron/elevator servos and**  **up to 4 flap/elevator servos**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Left elevon Right elevon Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Free or aux. function Free or left flap / elevator Free or right flap / elevator Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevator Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / elevator

Free or rudder Because of orientation differences for installed servos and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of some servos may be initially backward. The table below provides remedies.

**Model type**  **Servo direction** 

**wrong Remedy** 

V tail Rudder and elevator reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the » **Servo adjustment**  « menu Rudder correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 3 & 4 on the receiver Elevators correct, rudder reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the » **Servo adjustment**  « menu AND swap them on the receiver Delta, flying wing Elevator and aileron reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the

» **Servo adjustment** « menu Elevator correct, aileron reversed Reverse polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the » **Servo adjustment**  « menu AND swap them on the receiver Aileron correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 2 & 3 on the receiver All “program descriptions” for menus relevant to a winged aircraft model are marked with a winged aircraft symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a winged aircraft model.74 **Helicopter models** 

# Helicopter models

Co llective Pi tch Curve

Swashplate Rotation

Ro ll Thro ttle Pi tch-Axis Thro ttle Ch an nel 1 Thro ttle

Ro ll Tail Rotor Pi tch-Axis Tail Rotor Ch an nel 1 Tail Rotor C

h a n n e l 1 T a i l R o t o r

T

a i l R o t o r T h r o t t l e The advanced developments incorporated into the transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models and their components like gyros, speed regulators,rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a helicopter even in 3D acrobatic flight. On the other hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get started with hovered flight training then, step-by-step, takeadvantage of HoTT transmitter features with increasing expertise.All current model helicopters with one to four collective pitch servos can be operated using the programs provided by the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT. Six flight phases plus autorotation are available within a model memory, see menus » **Control adjust** «,

» **Phase settings** « and » **Phase assignment** «. As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the basic screen’s standard timers there are additionaltimers as well as a lap counter with flight-phasedependent stopwatch functionality which are available for selection (menus » **Timers (general)** « and

» **Fl. phase timers**  «). Depending on the transmitter, it is possible to store the digital trims in “flight phase specific” or “global” form

– f or all flight phases; this does not apply to collective pitch / throttle trim. C1 trim permits easy location of an idle setting. The control assignments for inputs 5 ... 8 respectively 5 ... 12 is made separately for each flight phase ( **»Control adjust«** menu).A flight phase copy function is helpful during flight trials (» **Copy / Erase** « menu).“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” functions can be coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable in two variations in every flight phase. There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and these can also be switched on or off, depending on the flight phase, in the » **MIX active/phase** « menu. Four dual mixers are also available (» **Dual mixers** « menu, provided as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked as an extra-cost option in the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter). The **»Helicopter mixer«** menu provides flight-phasedependent 6-point curves for the non-linear characteristics pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer as well as two independent swashplate mixers each for roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve of the channel 1 stick can be defined with up to a total of 6 points in every flight phase. The beginner will initially only adapt the hover flight point to the control middle for the non-linear characteristics. Pre-programmed mixers in the **»Helicopter mixer«**

**menu** : 1. Pitch cur ve (6-point curve) 2. C1  throttle (6-point curve) 3. Channel 1  tail rotor (6-point curve) 4. T ail rotor  throttle 5. Roll  throttle 6. Roll  tail rotor 7. Pitch-axis  throttle 8. Pitch-axis  tail rotor 9. Gyro suppression 10. Sw ashplate rotation 11. Sw ashplate limiter The “Throttle limit” function (input “Lim.” in the **»Con trol adjust«**  menu) allows the motor to be started in any flight phase. The right-side proportional rotaryslider is assigned to input “Lim.” by default. This “throttle limiter” establishes

– depending on its giv en position

– the maxim um possible throttle servo position. This makes it possible for the motor to be controlledin the idle range, if necessary even by the proportional regulator. The throttle curves become effective only when the proportional regulator is pushed toward the full throttle direction.75 **Helicopters - Receiver layout Notice for those transitioning from older Graup**  **ner systems:** In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6 (throttle servo) have exchanged places.

**Installation notices Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the**  **sequence illustrated here.** Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. For more detailed information on each swashplate type please refer to the » **Helicopter type** « menu, described on page 108. **Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.** 
Note: A speed control is also to be connected to receiver output “6” in order to take full advantage of the throttle limiter’s convenience and safety features. See page 193 about this.
**Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 1 to 3 swashplate servos** 

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Collective pitch or roll 2 or Pitch-axis 2 servo Free or aux. function Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function **Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 4 swashplate servos** 

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Roll 2 servo Pitch-axis 2 servo Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

All menus relevant to helicopter models are marked in the „program descriptions“ section with a helicopter symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a helicopter model.76 **Program description - Loading a new memory location** Anyone who has worked through to this part of themanual has certainly already tried out a bit of programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of every menu should not be left out.This section begins with the loading of a “free” memory location, a procedure which would be performed if a new model was being “programmed”:

#01

0:00h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M HoTT

From the basic display, a jump to the “Multi-function list” is made with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. (The center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will cause a jump back to the basic display.) By default, when the multi-function list iscalled for the first time after switching on the transmitter, the » **Model select** « menu option will be active and displayed in inverse video. Otherwise use the  or  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the » **Model select** « menu option, whereby the upper of the two following figures shows a selection list for a fixed-wing model and the lower shows the selection list for a helicopter model.

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type 

# Detail program description Loading a new memory location

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Helicopter type
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

In the transmitter’s delivered state, the first model memory is initialized to the “ **fixed-wing model** ” type and the receiver in the delivery is “bound” to thismodel. This is indicated by the pictogram of a fixedwing model aircraft in the second column from left, and the receiver identification displayed at far right; in the example above this is R12. If the model memory is not “bound”, you will see “---” instead of the receiver identification. The remaining memory locations, marked with

“  free  ”, are still unoccupied and therefore also “non-bound”. If you wish to program a fixed-wing model then, after leaving the » **Model select** « menu with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button, programming of the model can begin right away ... or now use the  or  keys of the left or right four-way button to select one of the free memory locations ... 03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

... and then tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to confirm the choice. Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic model type, i. e. either “winged model” or “helicopter model”: Select model type

Use the  or  keys of the left or right four-way button to select the basic model type then tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button . Thisinitializes the selected model memory with the selected model type and the display will return to the base screen. The memory location is now accordingly occupied. Changing over to another model type is still possible if you first erase this memory location ( » **Copy / Erase** « menu, page 80).

Notes:

• If the currently active model memor y is to be erased then immediately after the erase action one of the two model types, “Winged” or “Heli”must be defined. You cannot avoid this selection even if you switch the transmitter off. Only afterward the undesired occupation of that model memory erase from another memory location. If a non-active memory location is erased, it will77 **Program description - Loading a new memory location** helicopter, (by default this is the right-side rotary slider Lv2) into its idle position. Whether or not this warning appears also depends on the settings selected for the “Motor on C1” and “Pitch min.” options in the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, or » **Helicopter type** « menu, see page 108. For winged aircraft models, select “None” to deactivate this message if you have no motor to enter.

• If the transmitter already has occupied model memories then sub-menus of the » **Copy / Erase**  « menu will display a pictograph of the selected model type at the respective memory location followed by a blank line or the model name which was entered in the » **Basic settings, mod el**  « menu, page 86 or 94.

• If batter y voltage is too low, the model switchovercannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low
As a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake flaps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models, to the two sticks. Just which of these methods is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. This function is set for the currently active model memory in the “ **Stick mode** ” line of the » **Basic settings, model** « menu, page 86 or 94:

1

BD2 BD1 Mod.name Stick mode module n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT subsequently be marked as “  free  ” in the “Model select” menu.

• After the selected model memor y is initialized with the desired model type, the display will switch to the base screen of the freshly occupied model memory. At this time the warning ...
BIND. N/A OK
... will appear for several seconds as notification that a binding connection to a receiver is “ **n** ot
**a** vailable”. A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will cause a direct jump to the appropriate option:

1

BD2 BD1 Mod.name Stick mode module n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Further details about binding a receiver can be found on page 87 or 95.

• The “BIND n/a” warning closes automatically, after which the following warning also appears for a few seconds ...
Fail Safe setup t.b.d.
... will appear (also for just a few seconds) to indicate that no fail safe settings have yet been made. More about this can be found on page 220

.

• If the screen should displa y the warning ...
Thr

too high!
... then move the throttle stick, or the limiter for a If this setting is desired as a default for future models, the setting can also be entered into the » **General basic settings**  « menu, page 269:

1

PPM10 SEL Basic settings Own Stick mode
DSC Output Modulation HoTT

It should be noted here once again that, in the interest of greatest flexibility in combination with the prevention of unintentional operating errors, no controlsare preassigned to control channels 5 ... 8 respectively 5 ... 12 by default. **This means that, in the system’s delivered state, only servos attached to receiver outputs 1 ... 4**  **can typically be operated by the two sticks and that any servos attached to receiver connectors**  **5 ... max. 12 will remain in their middle positions.**  A newly initialized helicopter model is also able to more-or-less move servo 6

– depending on the posi

tion of the right-side proportional rotary slider, which is the default throttle limiter control. With either model type, this situation will only change after appropriate assignments have been made in the » **Control ad just**  « menu.On the other hand, if a newly initialized model memory is to be put into operation then it MUST first be appropriately “connected” with one or more receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s can be operated. More about this can be found in the section “Binding” on page 87 or 95. A fundamental description of programming steps fora winged aircraft model can be found in the programming examples section beginning on 280, or for helicopter models beginning on page 318. The menu descriptions below are arranged in the sequence individual menus are listed in the multi-78 **Program description - Loading a new memory location** function list. However, since the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter types covered by this manual differ in their software structure as well as their hardware features, these instructions always indicate the “soft” differences between the individual transmitter types at the start of a menu description, as they are in the Contents. The key is as follows: 

### mc

  16 20

Key: 

### 16 applicab le to 

### mc-16 HoTT 

### 20 applicab le to 

### mc-20 HoTT 

###  standard option 

###  can be unloc ked as an extra-cost option79 **Program description - Model select** 

# Model select

Call up model 1 ... 20 ( 

### mc-16 ) or 1 ... 24 ( 

### mc-20 ) This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. The basic operation of the transmitters keys was explained on pages 28 and 29 and, on the previous double-page, explanations were provided for navigating to the multi-function list and about how to make allocations for a new model memory. At this point we now wish to begin with the “normal” description of individual menu items in thesequence they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will begin with the menu ...
**Model select**

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Helicopter type
As many as 20 respectively 24 complete model settings, including digital trim values for the trim buttons, can be stored. Trimming is stored automatically such that a switchover from one model to another does not cause a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the model number, each occupied model memory line in this display shows a pictograph of the model type as well as the model’s name entered for the model in its » **Basic settings, model** « menu, page 86 or 94. The code, if present, for the receiver “bound” to the model memory location will appear in right the line. Select the » **Model select** « menu with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button.

Attention! Switch-OFF the Receiver first!

If this message appears, there is a telemetry connection to an operationally ready receiver system. Switch that receiver system off:

01

03 04 05 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G

06 R12 R12 R12

–––  free   free 

Now, with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, select the desired model memory from the list and activate it with a tap on the **SET** key. A tap on the **ESC** key will cause a return to the previous menu page without activating a model change.
Notes:

• If , after a model change, the “Throttle too high” warning appears, the throttle/pitch stick (C1) or the throttle limiter

– by default, the right-side proportional rotary slider

– is too far in the full throttle direction.

• If a model change causes the message ...
Thr

too high!
... to appear, then the throttle / collective pitch stick (Ch1) or the throttle limiter

– b y default theright-hand side-mounted proportional rotary slider

– is too f ar in the direction of full-throttle. • If a model change causes the message ...
BIND. N/A OK
... to appear then binding settings should be checked.

• If a model change causes the message ...
Fail Safe setup t.b.d.
... to appear then respective fail safe settings should be checked.

• If batter y voltage is too low, the model switchovercannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low 

### mc

  16 2080 **Program description - Copy / Erase Copy model**   **model** Select the “Copy model  model” sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tap the **SET** key:

Copy ligh phase Erase model C l l =>

SWITCHING RF OFF OK

If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter’s RF module is still active. You can interrupt the process by pressing the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button. Pressing the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button resumes the process. However, if the receiving system is switched on, you should switch it off before doing this. Choose the model to be copied with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G Copy from model: R12

R12

––– R12

... then, following the change into the “Copy to model” window caused by another tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button, the destination memory can be selected with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Yet another tap on the **SET** key will then confirm the copy process or a tap on **ESC** keywill cause the copy to be cancelled. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten. 01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G model to be erased : R12 R12 R12

–––

... whereby another tap on the **SET** key will cause the confirmation request ...

Model really GRAUBELE to be erased? NO YES 01

... to appear. A **NO** response will cause the process to be canceled and a return to the previous screen. Selecting the YES response with the  selection keyof the left or right four-way button followed by confirmation of the selection with a brief tap on the **SET** key will erase the selected model memory.
**Caution: This erase process cannot be undone. All data in** **the selected model memory will be erased com pletely.** 

Note: If the currently active model memory is to be erased,a model type “Winged” or “Heli” must be defined immediately after the erase process. If, however, an inactive memory location is erased, it will subsequently appear in “Model select” list as “  free  ”. 

# Copy / Erase

Erase model, copy model  model, copy from or to SD card, copy flight phases
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Copy / Erase**  « option in the multi-function menu:

Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase

Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Helicopter type Copy / Erase

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:
**Erase model**

Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model =>
=>
=> Export to SD Import from SD =>
=>

Select the “Erase model” sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tap on the **SET** key. Choose the model to be erased with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ... 

### mc

  16 2081 **Program description - Copy / Erase** 01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G Copy to model:

05  free  R12 R12 R12

–––

After confirming the selected model memory with a tap on the **SET** key, a confirmation request will appear: Modell really

ULTIMATE
to be copied? NO YES 01 03  free 

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  **YES** response is selected and confirmed with a tap on the **SET** key then the selected source model will be copied into the selected model memory destination.
Note: In addition to model data, binding data is also copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated by its copy in the SAME transmitter without establishing the bond again. **Exporting to SD card** Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the “Export to SD” sub-menu then tap on the **SET** key.

=>
=>
=>
=>
=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

Choose the model to be exported with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G export to SD-CARD: R12 R12 R12

–––

After confirming the selected model memory with a tap on the **SET** key, a confirmation request will appear:

modell

ULTIMATE
export ? NO YES 01 SD-CARD

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  **YES** response is selected then confirmed with a tap on the **SET** key, the selected model will be copied to the SD card.
Notes:

• Should the notice ... SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter’s card slot, see page 24.

• In addition to model data, binding data is also copied b y this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original modelmemory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again.

• An expor ted fixed-wing model will be stored on thememory card in the \\Models\mc-16 respectively \\Models\mc-20 folder with a filename format of “aModelname.mdl” and a helicopter model with afilename format of “hModelname.mdl”. On the other hand, if a “nameless” model is exported, its data will be stored on the memory card under “aNo

Name.mdl” or “hNoName.mdl”, as appropriate.

• Some special characters that can be used in model names are subject to specific restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 file system used by the memory cards and these special characterswill be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).

• A model file already on the memory ha ving thesame name as the file to be copied will be overwritten without warning.82 **Program description - Copy / Erase** key, or the process can be canceled with a tap on the **ESC** key. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.

01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G import to model:

05  free  R12 R12 R12

–––

After confirming the selected model memory with a tap on the **SET** key, a confirmation request will appear:

modell

ULTIMATE
import ? NO YES 03  free 

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  **YES** response is selected and confirmed with a tap on the **SET** key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory.
Notes:

• If the message ...
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter’s card slot, see page 24.

• In addition to model data, binding data is also impor ted by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original modelmemory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond **Importing from SD card** Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the “Import from SD” sub-menu then tap on the **SET** key.

Copy ligh phase Erase model C d l d l =>
>
>
>
> SWITCHING RF OFF OK

If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter’s RF module is still active. You can interrupt the process by pressing the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button. Pressing the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button resumes the process. However, if the receiving system is switched on, you should switch it off before doing this. Select the model to be imported from the SD memory card with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button:

EXTRA ALPINA

COBRA BELL47G import from SD-CARD: 11/03/10 11/03/11 11/03/11 11/03/12

Note: The export date posted at the right end of each model name line is represented in the format “year/month/ day”. After another tap on the **SET** key of the right four-waybutton, the “import from SD-CARD” window will appear. Now the destination memory location can be selected with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then confirmed with a tap on the **SET** again.

• In principle the model memor ies of the mx-20 and 

### mc-20 transmitters are compatible, BUT: If you wish to carry out an “Import from SD card” in the other transmitter you must first copy or move the model memory concerned to the appropriate folder on a PC. For example: from \\Models\mc-20 to \\Models\mx-20, or vice versa. **C A U T I O N :** After you have carried out an “Import from SD card” it is absolutely essential to check all the model functions with great care. Note also that the transmitter control and switch functions may need to be adjusted to suit the new transmitter. **Copy flight phase** Select the “Copy flight phase” sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tap on the **SET** key.

=>
=>
=>
=>

= > Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

In the “Copy flight phase” sub-menu ...

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 2 4 6 1

... the flight phase to be copied (1 ... 7 for fixed-wing models or 1 ... 6 for helicopter models) is selected with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then confirmed with a brief tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button. In the next window to83 **Program description - Copy / Erase** appear ...

7 Copy to phase:

3 5 2 4 6 1

... a destination must be selected and it must be confirmed too. Another confirmation request will follow:

Phase to: 1 Normal to be copied?

NO YES 2 Launch

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  **YES** response is selected and confirmed with a tap on the **SET** key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory.84 **Program description - Suppress menus** 

# Suppress menus

Suppression of menus in the multifunction list
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Sup press codes**  « option in the multi-function menu:

Model select Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Base setup model Model type

Model select Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad.

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG Model select

Base setup model Helicopter type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG Model select

In the menu which then appears, menu items which are no longer needed or those which should not bechanged, can be blocked from appearing in the multifunction list. The option to be suppressed/displayed is selectedwith the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then its status is switched over with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

Model select

Base setup model Helicopter type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

This can reduce the multi-function list considerably, in some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially improving clarity of the multi-function list. Options are not deactivated by being suppressed. They will simply no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct access to these functions. Tip: If you do not wish to block access to the multi-function list, in the interests of security we recommend that you use this list to suppress the » **Code lock** « menu from the multi-function list. This menu is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked as an extra-cost option on the 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter. This setting also makes it a little more difficult for any unauthorised person to block access to the transmitter. 

### mc

  16 2085 **Program description - Suppress models** 

# Suppress models

Suppression of model memory locations
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Sup press models**  « option in the multi-function menu:

Model select Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Base setup model Model type

Model select Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad. Model memories which are rarely needed or to whichaccess is to be blocked for other reasons can be hidden from the model selection list. This also clarifies the overview layout for model selection. The model to be suppressed/displayed is selectedwith the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then its status is switched over with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

01

03 04 05 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G R12 R12 R12

–––  free  Suppress: TOG
A model memory which is “stricken through” will no longer appear in the » **Model select** « menu: 03 04 05 STARLET BELL47G

06 R12

–––  free   free  01 GRAUBELE R12

07  free  

### mc

  16 2086 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** 

# Base setup model

Model-specific base settings for winged aircraft models This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Before programming specific parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Use the  selection keys on the left or right fourway button to select the » **Base setup model** « option in the multi-function menu:

Model type Suppress models Base setup model
Servo adjustment
Control adjust Stick mode

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:
**Model name**

Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model’s name. A maxim um of 9 characters can be used to specify a model name

. !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Mod Name GRAU B FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left four-way button. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** will place a space character at the current position. Positioning to any character position within the entry field can be done with the  keys of the right fourway button. A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the » **Model select** « menu and in the sub-menus of the » **Copy / Erase** « menu item.
**Stick mode**

**MODE 2** (Throttle at left stick)

elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleftaileronrightaileron full throttle

idleleft rudderright rudder elev. down

elev. upleftaileronrightaileron

elev. down

elev. upleftaileronrightaileron full throttle

idleleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleftaileronrightaileron elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder **MODE 1** (Throttle at rigth stick)

**MODE 3** (Throttle at right stick) **MODE 4** (Throttle at left stick)

There are four fundamental options for assigning the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle/brake flap) for a winged aircraft model to thetwo sticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the “Stick mode” line. The option field will be framed. Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a

SEL DSC Output PPM10 HoTT GRAUBELE

Tap on the **SET** key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select from among options 1 through 4. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to stick mode “1”. Another tap on the **SET** key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected.
**Module** The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT are fitted as standard with a HoTT RF module. However, it is also possible to switch to a non- Graupner|SJ external RF module by software, if such a module is connected to the transmitter. This is accomplished by using the Select buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the left, to the “Module select” value field:

1 n/a bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

**HoTT** Graupner/SJ HoTT receivers must be “instructed” tocommunicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner/SJHoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as “binding” and must only be done

once for every new receiver/model-memory-location 

### mc

  16 2087 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line . The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. **“Binding” transmitter and receiver** Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to move into the “Module” line: The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label “BD2” because the binding channel in the column labeled “BD1” is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set:

1 n/a bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

If already off, now switch the receiver on:
**Receiver GR-16 and GR-24** The red LED on the receiver will blink.. Hold the SET button on the receiver pressed in for about three seconds while the LED flashes red; it will then flash red / green for a further three seconds. The **SET** button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode. Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called“receiver binding” process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. At this time, the screen’s display will blend in a message window for the duration of the “binding” process. combination (and can be repeated anytime). **Important notices:**

**• During the binding procedure be sure the**  **transmitter’ s antenna is always far enough**  **away from the receiver’s antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart.**  **Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will re**  **sult.**

**• When binding additional receiver**  **s, note that any other** 

**– s**  **witched on**

**– receiver**  **s already bound to the transmitter will fall into Fail safe** **mode during the transmitter-side “binding” pe riod.**  **“Binding” multiple receivers per model** Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up totwo receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter’s 8 or 12 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control.Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below.**When the system is actually in use, the only re ceiver which creates a telemetry link to the trans**  **mitter is either the last receiver to be bound, or the receiver which you selected in the “TEL.RCV.”**  **line of the »Telemetry« menu, for example:**

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver 1 n/a d

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a Mod.name Stic k mode modu Base setup model



### Finding...

If the receiver’s LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfullycompleted. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display “ bind “ (bound) instead of “n/a” (not attached), for example:

1 bind bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiverblink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as “n/a”. If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. **Binding other receivers** The binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the “bind” status). This binding is to be replaced by another. After initiating the RF bind process, instead of displaying “BINDING”, the message shown below appears:88 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** 1 bind

BD1 BELE

BD2 Rcv R08 Mod. Stick modu Base setup model RF must be OFF OK

Press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button to erase the message. Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section “RF module”. Afterward, return again to the “Module” line and restart the binding process as described above. Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off briefly then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears ...

Please select

RF on/off? O N OFF

... with “OFF” ...

Please select RF on/off? O N OFF
... then confirm the selection with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. From the base screen jump again into the “Module” line of the

» **Basic settings, model** « menu and restart the binding process. **Dissolving a bond** Proceed as described above to initiate the bindingprocess but WITHOUT first putting a receiver in binding readiness. **EXT.** (PPM signal at DSC sock et) If your transmitter is fitted with a non- Graupner|SJ external RF module connected to the DSC / Data socket, you can switch between the standard internal HoTT RF module and the external module when youswitch model memories in the “Module” line by choosing either “HoTT”, “EXT.”, or “SP.”, as described in the following section. You can now use the arrow button  of the right-hand four-way button to move to the first Value field in the “Module” line before pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button:

1 bind bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

HoTT

In the active Value field you should now use the Select buttons to choose “EXT.” or

– if appropriate

– the “SP. ” mode (described below) instead of “HoTT”. When you select “EXT.”, the HoTT-specific value fields are replaced by the modulation type already selected in the “DSC output” line; see page 92:

1 PPM10 GRAUBELE

EXT.PPM sig. normal Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

EXT.

The lines of the “Receiver output” and “Range test” options (described below) are also suppressed, as are all the HoTT-specific displays in the base display; “PPM” is also superimposed instead of “HoTT”: GRAUBELE #01

0:12h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

4.0V PPM

Press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button to conclude the Select process.
**SP.** (digital signal at Data sock et) However, if you require a special digital signal instead of the analogue PPM signal for the non- Graupner|SJ external RF module, then connect this to the DATA socket and select “SP.” in the “Module” line:

1

BD GRAUBELE

SP channel 6 SP. BIND 1

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

Once again, press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button to conclude the Select process. The lines of the “Receiver output” and “Range test” options (described below) are also suppressed, as are all the HoTT-specific displays in the base display; “SP.” is also superimposed instead of “HoTT”:

GRAUBELE #01

0:12h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

4.0V SP89 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models “Mode” column** 

1

BD GRAUBELE

SP channel 6 SP. BIND

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1

In this column you select the transmission mode of the external RF module:

• Mode “1”: 2-channel hopping

• Mode “2”: x-channel hopping
**“BIND” column** 

1

BD GRAUBELE

SP channel 6 SP.

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1 BIND

The “BIND” column in the right-hand column canbe used to initiate the “Bind” process of the nonGraupner|SJ system

– **the transmitter’ s RF section**  **must be switched off when the transmitter is first switched on** 

. **Important notes:**

**• The output volta**  **ge of the DATA socket is around 5**  **V, and must be reduced to the pow** **er supply voltage generally required by exter nal digital RF modules (3 to max. 3.3**  **V). This is**  **accomplished using the circuit which is shown here in diagrammatic form:**  **GND Vcc IN = 5 V** 

**DATA + DATA S**  **125000 baud signal**

**Vcc**

**GND DATA -**  **22μF/6.3 V 22μF/6.3 V**  **Vcc OUT = 3 ... 3.3 V Low Drop**  **Voltage Regulator**  **SP.-MODULE with**  **digital input signal**

**• Servo travels must be limited to max. 128**  **%.**
**SP channels**

Note: This men u line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “HoTT” or “EXT.”. If necessary, use the Select buttons  of the left orright-hand four-way button to move to the “SP channels” line, then briefly press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the Value window:

1

SEL GRAUBELE

SP channel SP. Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1 BIND 6

You can now select “6” or “8” channels using the righthand Select buttons. The procedure is concluded by again pressing the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button.At the transmitter this selection only affects the number of control channels transferred to the external RF module via the DATA socket. If you choose “6”, then these are control channels 1 ... 6; if you choose “8”, these are channels 1 ... 8. Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) returns the display to “6”. **EXT. PPM signal**

Note: This menu line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “HoTT”.

1 PPM10 GRAUBELE

EXT.PPM sig. Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

EXT. normal SEL

Some RF modules which can be connected to the DSC connector require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module’s installation instructions for this. The choice of “inverted” instead of the default preset“normal” allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to “normal”. **Receiver channel mapping**

Note: This menu line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “EXT.” or “SP.”.As long as there is at least one “bound” HoTT receiver in the “Module” line, the next line down will be the “Rcv Ch map” line:



### 1 bind bind

SET GRAUBELE

SET Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

As already mentioned in the introduction to the section entitled “Binding receivers”, 

### mc-16 HoTT and90 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters feature a menu point inwhich the transmitter’s control channels can be redistributed in any way you like within one receiver
,and also include an option to distribute the transmitter’s control channels to a maximum of two receivers in any arrangement you desire. These are the eight standard / twelve optional control channels of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, and the standard twelve control channels of the 

### mc-20 HoTT. This redistribution is termed “ mapping ” or “ channel mapping ” (channel assignment) in the following section. Select the receiver to be “mapped” with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. **Channel mapping within a receiver**This menu point provides a simple means of remapping the transmitter’s control channels in anyway you like, in a similar manner to the channel assignment function termed “Channel mapping” in the

» **Tele metry**  « menu, as described on page 244. This means that you can re-distribute the transmitter’s control channels, which are present at the receiverinputs, to the selected receiver’s outputs / servo sockets in any way you like:

Receiver CH – BIND1 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

After selection of the desired output with the selectionkeys of the left or right four-way button, the appropriate value field will be framed. Briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select the desired input channel’s respective transmitter output, see page 230. **BUT CAUTION:** If, for example, “2AIL” has been specified in the “Aileron/camber flaps” line of the

» **Model type** « menu then the transmitter will have allocated control function 2 ( ailerons) to control channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons . The corre

sponding receiver inputs to be assigned in this case would be channels 2 & 5, refer to the example below. Examples:

• Y ou would like to control each aileron of a large model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo con

nections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, depending on left or right wing, as the respective input to one of the two default aileron control channels (2 or 5).

• Y ou would like to control the rudder of a large model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, the default rudder channel (4), see figure right.

Notes:

• The maxim um number of lines (outputs) available corresponds to the maximum number of servoswhich can be connected to the receiver in question.

• If y ou see the warning ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K ... then there is no bound receiver within range. If the case may be, switch your receiving system on.

• With the » **Tx. output swap** « option, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter, and can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitterat extra cost, see page 230, the transmitter’s control functions can be interchanged in any way; it is also possible to assign multiple outputs to one and the same control function. In the interests of clarity however we strongly advise that you use only one of these two options. **Channel assignment on second receiver**As already mentioned, the “Receiver channel mapping” menu point can be used to map (re-distribute) the transmitter’s control channels in any way amongst a maximum of two receivers; these are the eight standard / twelve optional control channels of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, and the standard twelve channels of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. In this case the numbering of the outputs (servo sockets) and the maximum number of lines (outputs) available reflects the maximum number of servos which can be connected to the receiver in question.

Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch 1 In Ch 2 In Ch 3 In Ch 4 8 8 8 8 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 12 12 12 12 1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

Note: The upper screen-shot above shows the screen of the standard 

### mc-16 HoTT eight-channel transmitter; the lower one the screen of the 

### mc-20 HoTT twelve-channel transmitter.
After selection of the desired output with the selectionkeys of the left or right four-way button, the respective input field will be framed. Tap the center **SET** key91 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desiredinput channel with the selection keys of the right fourway button. For example, suitable to the above rudder example:

Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch 4

Note: The maximum number of lines (outputs) available reflects the maximum number of servos which can be connected to the receiver in question.

**RF transmit** This menu line pro vides an option for manually switching the transmitter’s RF transmission on and offto specific models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. **If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.**  **e. set to ON) the next time**  **the transmitter is switched on.** If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move into the “RF transmit“ line then activate the option with a brief tap on the center **SET** button of the right four-way button:



### 1 bind bind

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Stick mode module Base setup model

RF transmit ON

The right selection keys can now be used to choose between **OFF** and **ON** . Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will conclude the entry. **Range test**

Note: This menu line is suppressed if y ou select “EXT.” or “SP.” in the “Module” line. The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m. Perf orm a range test on the Graupner/SJHoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test. 1. Prefer ably, the receiver already bound to the transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position. 2. Switch remote control on and wait f or the green LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo move

ments can be observed. 3. Place the model on a lev el surface (pavement,low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm abov e ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this. 4. Hold the transmitter at hip le vel and at some distance from one’s body. 5. If necessary , use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to reach the “RF range test” line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button:

bind bind

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT module Base setup model

RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec When the range test has been initiated, the transmitter’s transmission power will be significantly reduced and the green LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter’s display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT TEST 76s

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test athree-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test’s 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly. 6. Mov e away from the model while manipulatingthe sticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction. 7

. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessar y to switch it on to further check noise immunity. 8. Continue mo ving away from the model until perfect control is no longer possible. 9. Wait at this distance f or the remainder of the test period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area’s Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner. 10. Perf orm the range test before each flight and, in92 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during flight. The range must always be at 50 m on the g round in order to assure safe model operation.
**Caution: Never start the range test on the transmitter dur**  **ing normal operation of the model.**
**DSC output** If necessar y, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to switch to the “DSC Output” line then, with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, activate the value window:

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 Base setup model

RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation “PPM10”, “PPM16”, “PPM18” and “PPM24”. Touch the center **SET** key of the right four-way button again to complete the entry.This choice primarily influences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to theDSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a flight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting “PPM10” this will be control channels 1 ... 5, for “PPM16” channels 1 ... 8, for “PPM18” channels 1 ... 9 and for “PPM24” channels 1 ... 12.
**Cut off**

Note: This men u line is suppressed if “None” or “None/inv” is selected for the “Motor on C1” line. Depending on the “idle forward or back” choice made in the “Motor on C1” line of the » **Model type** « menu, this motor “cut off” option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to move aservo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF position. This option can be used on the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters as an emergency OFF function as well as an alternative “cut-off trim”, see “digital trims” on page 70. This motor OFF position (Thr. CutOff) is specified in the left column field over the column label **SEL** and its value is to be established through trial and error. However, the speed controller or throttle servo only moves to the selected position when two conditions are fulfilled: a switch is operated, and a particular servo position or switching threshold is exceeded. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column field, directly over the column label **STO** , then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column.

• If the percentage v alue specified for the middle column is greaterthan the current servo position, i. e . the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.

• If the percentage v alue specified for the middle column is less than the current servo position, i. e

. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor’s throttle servo onlyto the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo’s position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the s witch is changed over to its ON position. The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond thepreset threshold with the throttle/brake stick control. The factory setting for the left column is -100 % f or the throttle servo “cut-off” position and a threshold of +150 % ser vo position setting in the middle column.
Base setup model RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 cut off SEL ––– +150%

STO –100%

**Programming procedure**To change the throttle servo’s preset “cut-off” position, tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to set a value at which the motor is reliably “off”. If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, e. g. -125 %:
Base setup model RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 cut off SEL ––– +150%

STO –125%

The

– upper

– preset v alue in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel from +150 % b y placing the throttle servo or speed controller into the desired position with the throttle/brake stick then touch the center **SET** key of the right fourway button.93 **Program description - Base setup models | Winged models** Base setup model RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 cut off SEL ––– +100%

STO –125%

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switchwith which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.
Base setup model RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 cut off SEL +100% STO –125% 8

Notes:

• Be sure the throttle ser vo does not run out mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.

• A threshold o ver +100 % is reached b y tempo r arily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the » **Servo ad justment**  « menu to over 100 % then, after stor ing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.
**Auto timer reset**
Base setup model RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 cut off

SEL +100% –125% 8 Auto timer reset yes

The “yes/no” setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter’s timers (except for “Model time” and “Transmitter operating time”) are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on. In contrast, the “slot time”

– see page 163

– is always reset to the starting value when the transmitter is switched on. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to “yes”.94 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Before programming specific parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Use the  selection keys on the left or right fourway button to select the » **Base setup model** « option in the multi-function menu:

Helicopter type Suppress models Base setup model
Servo adjustment
Control adjust Stick mode

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:
**Model name** 

Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model’s name. A maximum of 9 characters can be used to specify a model name. !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Mod Name STAR L FGHIJK L MNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left four-way button. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** will place a space character at the current position. Positioning to any character position within the entry field can be done with the  keys of the right fourway button. A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the » **Model select** « menu and in the sub-menus of the » **Copy / Erase** « menu item.
**Stick mode** 

**MODE 2** (Throttle at left stick)

pitch axis

pitch axistail rotortail rotor throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchrollroll throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchtail rotortail rotor pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll

pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchtail rotortail rotor throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchrollroll pitch axis

pitch axistail rotortail rotor **MODE 1** (Throttle at right stick)

**MODE 3** (Throttle at right stick) **MODE 4** (Throttle at left stick)

Basically there are four different ways to assign the four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor and throttle/pitch to the two sticks. Just which of these is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the “Stick mode” line. The option field will be framed. Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a

SEL DSC Output PPM10 HoTT STARLET

Tap on the **SET** key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select from among options 1 through 4. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to stick mode “1”. Another tap on the **SET** key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected.
**Module** The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT are fitted as standard with a HoTT RF module. However, it is also possible to switch to a non- Graupner|SJ external RF module by software, if such a module is connected to the transmitter. This is accomplished by using the Select buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the left, to the “Module select” value field:

1 n/a bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

**HoTT** Graupner/SJ HoTT receivers must be “instructed” tocommunicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner/SJHoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as “binding” and must only be done

once for every new receiver/model-memory-location 

# Base **setup model** 

Model-specific base settings for helicopter models



### mc

  16 2095 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** combination (and can be repeated anytime). **Important notices:**

**• During the binding procedure be sure the**  **transmitter’ s antenna is always far enough**  **away from the receiver’s antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart.**  **Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will re**  **sult.**

**• When binding additional receiver**  **s, note that any other** 

**– s**  **witched on**

**– receiver**  **s already bound to the transmitter will fall into Fail safe** **mode during the transmitter-side “binding” pe riod.**  **“Binding” multiple receivers per model** Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up totwo receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter’s 8 or 12 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control.Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below.**When the system is actually in use, the only re ceiver which creates a telemetry link to the trans**  **mitter is either the last receiver to be bound, or the receiver which you selected in the “TEL.RCV.”**  **line of the »Telemetry« menu, for example:**

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line . The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. **“Binding” transmitter and receiver** Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to move into the “Module” line: The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label “BD2” because the binding channel in the column labeled “BD1” is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set:

1 n/a bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

If already off, now switch the receiver on:
**Receiver GR-16 and GR-24** The red LED on the receiver will blink.. Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds, then begins to blink red/green for about another 3 seconds. The **SET** button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode. Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called“receiver binding” process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. At this time, the screen’s display will blend in a message window for the duration of the “binding” process. 1 n/a d

BD1 STARLET

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a Mod.name Stic k mode modu Base setup model



### Finding...

If the receiver’s LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfullycompleted. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display “ bind “ (bound) instead of “n/a” (not attached), for example:

1 bind bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiverblink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as “n/a”. If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. **Binding other receivers** The binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the “bind” status). This binding is to be replaced by another. After initiating the RF bind process, instead of displaying “BINDING”, the message shown below appears:96 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** 1 bind

BD1 ET

BD2 Rcv R08 Mod. Stick modu Base setup model RF must be OFF OK

Press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button to erase the message. Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section “RF module”. Afterward, return again to the “Module” line and restart the binding process as described above. Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off briefly then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears ...

Please select

RF on/off? O N OFF

... with “OFF” ...

Please select RF on/off? O N OFF
... then confirm the selection with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. From the base screen jump again into the “Module” line of the

» **Basic settings, model** « menu and restart the binding process. **Dissolving a bond** Proceed as described above to initiate the bindingprocess but WITHOUT first putting a receiver in binding readiness. **EXT.** (PPM signal at DSC soc ket) If your transmitter is fitted with a non- Graupner|SJ external RF module connected to the DSC / Data socket, you can switch between the standard internal HoTT RF module and the external module when youswitch model memories in the “Module” line by choosing either “HoTT”, “EXT.”, or “SP.”, as described in the following section. You can now use the arrow button  of the right-hand four-way button to move to the first Value field in the “Module” line before pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button:

1 bind bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

HoTT

In the active Value field you should now use the Select buttons to choose “EXT.” or

– if appropriate

– the “SP. ” mode (described below) instead of “HoTT”. When you select “EXT.”, the HoTT-specific value fields are replaced by the modulation type already selected in the “DSC output” line; see page 100:

1 PPM10 STARLET

EXT.PPM sig. normal Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

EXT.

The lines of the “Receiver output” and “Range test” options (described below) are also suppressed, as are all the HoTT-specific displays in the base display; “PPM” is also superimposed instead of “HoTT”: STARLET #02

0:12h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

4.0V PPM

Press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button to conclude the Select process.
**SP.** (digital signal at Data soc ket) However, if you require a special digital signal instead of the analogue PPM signal for the non- Graupner|SJ external RF module, then connect this to the DATA socket and select “SP.” in the “Module” line:

1

BD STARLET

SP channel 6 SP. BIND 1

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

Once again, press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button to conclude the Select process. The lines of the “Receiver output” and “Range test” options (described below) are also suppressed, as are all the HoTT-specific displays in the base display; “SP.” is also superimposed instead of “HoTT”:

STARLET #02

0:12h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

4.1V SP97 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models “Mode” column** 

1

BD STARLET

SP channel 6 SP. BIND

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1

In this column you select the transmission mode of the external RF module:

• Mode “1”: 2-channel hopping

• Mode “2”: x-channel hopping
**“BIND” column** 

1

BD STARLET

SP channel 6 SP.

Mod Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1 BIND

The “BIND” column in the right-hand column canbe used to initiate the “Bind” process of the nonGraupner|SJ system

– **the transmitter’ s RF section**  **must be switched off when the transmitter is first switched on** 

. **Important notes:**

**• The output volta**  **ge of the DATA socket is around 5**  **V, and must be reduced to the pow** **er supply voltage generally required by exter nal digital RF modules (3 to max. 3.3**  **V). This is**  **accomplished using the circuit which is shown here in diagrammatic form:**  **GND Vcc IN = 5 V** 

**DATA + DATA S**  **125000 baud signal**

**Vcc**

**GND DATA -**  **22μF/6.3 V 22μF/6.3 V**  **Vcc OUT = 3 ... 3.3 V Low Drop**  **Voltage Regulator**  **SP.-MODULE with**  **digital input signal**

**• Servo travels must be limited to max. 128**  **%.**
**SP channels**

Note: This menu line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “HoTT” or “EXT.”. If necessary, use the Select buttons  of the left orright-hand four-way button to move to the “SP channels” line, then briefly press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the Value window:

1

SEL STARLET

SP channel SP. Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

1 BIND 6

You can now select “6” or “8” channels using the righthand Select buttons. The procedure is concluded by again pressing the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button.At the transmitter this selection only affects the number of control channels transferred to the external RF module via the DATA socket. If you choose “6”, then these are control channels 1 ... 6; if you choose “8”, these are channels 1 ... 8. Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) returns the display to “6”. **EXT. PPM signal** 

Note: This men u line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “HoTT”.

1 PPM10 STARLET

EXT.PPM sig. Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

EXT. normal SEL
Some RF modules which can be connected to the DSC connector require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module’s installation instructions for this. The choice of “inverted” instead of the default preset“normal” allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to “normal”. **Receiver channel mapping**

Note: This menu line is suppressed in the “Module” line if you select “EXT.” or “SP.”.As long as there is at least one “bound” HoTT receiver in the “Module” line, the next line down will be the “Rcv Ch map” line:



### 1 bind bind

SET STARLET

SET Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

As already mentioned in the introduction to the section entitled “Binding receivers”, 

### mc-16 HoTT and98 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models BUT CAUTION:**  If you wish to operate two servoswith one control function, for example such as transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll servos for the “3Sv(2Roll)” option in the » **Helicopter type** «menu; then “map” the corresponding transmitter outputs, in this case for channels 1 & 2 (= inputs to the receiver) accordingly.

Notes:

• The maxim um number of lines (outputs) available corresponds to the maximum number of servoswhich can be connected to the receiver in question.

• If y ou see the warning ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K ... then there is no bound receiver within range. If the case may be, switch your receiving system on.

• With the » **Tx. output swap** « option, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter, and can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitterat extra cost, see page 230, the transmitter’s control functions can be interchanged in any way; it is also possible to assign multiple outputs to one and the same control function. In the interests of clarity however we strongly advise that you use only one of these two options. **Channel assignment on**  **second receiver**As already mentioned, the “Receiver channel mapping” menu point can be used to map (re-distribute) the transmitter’s control channels in any way amongst a maximum of two receivers; these are the eight standard / twelve optional control channels of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, and the standard twelve channels of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. In this case the numbering of the outputs (servo sockets) and the maximum number of lines (outputs) available reflects the maximum number of servos which can be connected to the receiver in question.

Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch 1 In Ch 2 In Ch 3 In Ch 4 8 8 8 8 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 12 12 12 12 1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

Note: The upper screen-shot above shows the screen of the standard 

### mc-16 HoTT eight-channel transmitter; the lower one the screen of the 

### mc-20 HoTT twelve-channel transmitter.
After selection of the desired output with the selectionkeys of the left or right four-way button, the respective input field will be framed. Tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desiredinput channel with the selection keys of the right fourway button. For example, appropriate for the above example with roll servos:

1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Receiver CH – BIND2 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 1 2 12 12 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters feature a menu point inwhich the transmitter’s control channels can be redistributed in any way you like within one receiver
,and also include an option to distribute the transmitter’s control channels to a maximum of two receivers in any arrangement you desire. These are the eight standard / twelve optional control channels of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, and the standard twelve control channels of the 

### mc-20 HoTT. This redistribution is termed “ mapping ” or “ channel mapping ” (channel assignment) in the following section. Select the receiver to be “mapped” with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. **Channel mapping within a receiver**This menu point provides a simple means of remapping the transmitter’s control channels in anyway you like, in a similar manner to the channel assignment function termed “Channel mapping” in the

» **Tele metry**  « menu, as described on page 244. This means that you can re-distribute the transmitter’s control channels, which are present at the receiverinputs, to the selected receiver’s outputs / servo sockets in any way you like:

Receiver CH – BIND1 In Ch In Ch In Ch In Ch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch Out Ch

After selection of the desired output with the selectionkeys of the left or right four-way button, the appropriate value field will be framed. Briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select the desired input channel’s respective transmitter output, see page 230.99 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** Note: The maximum number of lines (outputs) available reflects the maximum number of servos which can be connected to the receiver in question.

**RF transmit** This menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter’s RF transmission on and offto specific models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. **If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.**  **e. set to ON) the next time**  **the transmitter is switched on.** If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move into the “RF transmit“ line then activate the option with a brief tap on the center **SET** button of the right four-way button:



### 1 bind bind

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT Stick mode module Base setup model

RF transmit ON

The right selection keys can now be used to choose between **OFF** and **ON** . Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will conclude the entry. **Range test**

Note: This menu line is suppressed if y ou select “EXT.” or “SP.” in the “Module” line. The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m. Perf orm a range test on the Graupner/SJHoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test. 1. Prefer ably, the receiver already bound to the transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position. 2. Switch remote control on and wait f or the green LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo move

ments can be observed. 3. Place the model on a lev el surface (pavement,low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm abov e ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this. 4. Hold the transmitter at hip le vel and at some distance from one’s body. 5. If necessary , use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to reach the “RF range test” line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button:

bind bind

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 HoTT module Base setup model

RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec

When the range test has been initiated, the transmitter’s transmission power will be significantly reduced and the green LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter’s display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. STARLET #02

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT TEST 76s

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test athree-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test’s 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the green LED just to the right ofthe main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly. 6. Mov e away from the model while manipulatingthe sticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction. 7

. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessar y to switch it on to further check noise immunity. 8. Continue mo ving away from the model until perfect control is no longer possible. 9. Wait at this distance f or the remainder of the test period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area’s Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner. 10. Perf orm the range test before each flight and, in doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during flight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure saf e model operation.
**Caution: Never start the range test on the transmitter dur**  **ing normal operation of the model.**100 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models DSC output**  If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to switch to the “DSC Output” line then, with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, activate the value window:

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 Base setup model

RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation “PPM10”, “PPM16”, “PPM18” and “PPM24”. Touch the center **SET** key of the right four-way button again to complete the entry.This choice primarily influences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to theDSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a flight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting “PPM10” this will be control channels 1 ... 5, for “PPM16” channels 1 ... 8, for “PPM18” channels 1 ... 9 and for “PPM24” channels 1 ... 12.
**Autorotation** Autorotation is that state of descending flight in which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that the rotor’s speed matches the natural forces of air flowing through, like a windmill. The rotational energy stored in the mass of the rotor by this process can then be converted into upthrust by adjusting blade pitch, in order to halt the descent and “rescue” the model. Autorotation is a means by which real and modelhelicopters are able to land safely in emergency situations, e. g. in the event of a motor failure. However, the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar with the helicopter’s characteristics. Quick reaction and good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor’s inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift.When this technique is evaluated during competitions, the motor must be switched off for autorotation.On the other hand, for training mode it is advantageous to keep the motor at idle for autorotation. The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the autorotation flight phase in which control of “throttle” and “pitch” are separate and all mixers which havean effect on the throttle servo are switched off. Corresponding parameter settings are made in the » **Heli copter mixer**  « (see text beginning page 188); refer also to the “Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos.” topic which follows. The “Autorotation” name is permanently assigned to this phase and it is included in the base screen and the screens of all flight phase dependent menus. Thisname can NOT be changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this option at the right of this display, as described on page 68. **If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute priority over all other flight**  **phase switches:**
Base setup model RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

–––

More about flight-phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 188 in the» **Helicopter mixer**  « section. **Autorotation C1 position** The autorotation flight-phase can alternatively be activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch stick. To do this, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move into the “Autorot. C1-Pos.” line. As soon as this display line has been selected, its value field, located above the column label **STO** will be framed.
Base setup model RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos.

––– 0% STO
Move the C1 stick into the desired threshold switch

o ver position then tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current value will be displayed,

e. g.: Base setup model RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos.

––– –66% STO After this has been done, use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol then assign a switch to this field, as described in section“Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68:
Base setup model RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 STOOnce this activation switch is closed, the first occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the programto switch over to “Autorotation” and then remain independent of C1 position in this flight phase until the activating switch, in this example switch 4, is again “OFF”. “Autorot. C1-Pos.” has precedence over all other101 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** flight-phase switches. Corresponding parameter settings for ...

• pitch ser vos

• throttle ser vo

• tail rotor ser vo

• s washplate rotation, if available

• gyro setting ... are made in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu, page 188.
**Cut off** Within the framework of autorotation settings for the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter’s helicopter program, there are parameters for an emergency “cut off” of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the programming proposal on page 323. However, this option is not available if an idle position is specified in the “Throttle position AR” line of the

» **Helicopter mixer** « menu instead of an (emergency)OFF position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor after every landing during autorotation practice. This option can be used on the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters as an emergency OFF function as well as an alternative “cut-off trim”, see “digital trims” on page 70. Depending on the “forw./rear” choice made for the “Pitch min” line of the » **Helicopter type** « menu, this “cut off” option can be coupled to a switch for thrott

ling do wn a speed controller or a carburetor servo to the motor OFF (or idle) position. This cut-off (or idle) position is specified in the left column’s field, above the **SEL** column label, and its value is to be established through trial and error. However, the speed controller or throttle servo only moves to the selected position when two conditionsare fulfilled: a switch is operated, and a particular servo position or switching threshold is exceeded. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column field, directly over the column label **STO** , then selecting the appropriate ON/ OFF switch function in the right column.

• If the percentage v alue specified for the middle column is greaterthan the current servo position, i. e . the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.

• If the percentage v alue specified for the middle column is less than the current servo position, i. e

. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor’s throttle servo onlyto the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo’s position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the s witch is changed over to its ON position. The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond thepreset threshold with the throttle/brake stick control. The factory setting for the left column is -100 % f or the throttle servo “cut-off” position and a threshold of +150 % ser vo position setting in the middle column:
Base setup model DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 cut off SEL ––– +150%

STO –100%

**Programming procedure**To change the throttle servo’s preset “cut-off” position, tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to set a value at which the motor is reliably “off”. If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, e. g. -125 %:
Base setup model DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 cut off SEL ––– +150%

STO –125%

The

– upper

– preset v alue in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column.However, if you prefer to set a lower switching threshold, i. e . the point below which the throttle servo or speed controller moves to the motor OFF positionwhen the switch is closed, then use the throttle / collective pitch stick and

– if in use

– the throttle limiter (b y default the right-hand side-mounted proportionalrotary control) to move the throttle servo to your preferred position, and then press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button:
Base setup model DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 cut off SEL ––– +100%

STO –125%

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switchwith which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.102 **Program description - Base setup models | Helicopter models** Base setup model DSC Output PPM10 Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 cut off SEL +100% STO –125% 18

Notes:

• Be sure the throttle ser vo does not run out mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.

• A threshold o ver +100 % is reached b y tempo r arily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the » **Servo ad justment**  « menu to over 100 % then, after stor ing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.
**Auto timer**  **reset**
Base setup model Autorotation

––– Auto.C1 Pos. –66% 9 cut off

SEL +100% –125% 18 Auto timer reset yes

The “yes/no” setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter’s timers (except for “Model time” and “Transmitter operating time”) are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on. In contrast, the “slot time”

– see page 163

– is always reset to the starting value when the transmitter is switched on. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display to “yes”.103 **For your notes**104 **Program description - Model type | Winged models** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Model type**  « option in the multi-function menu: Suppress models Base setup model
Servo adjustment
Control adjust Model type

Stick mode.

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad. This “Model type” menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in pre

par ation for subsequent programming of the specified model type.
**Motor at C1** When you open the » **Model type** « menu, the input field of the “Motor at C1” line is generally already framed (selected). If this is not the case, use the Select buttons  of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the “Motor at C1” line:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: The current setting will be displayed in inversevideo. Now use the selection keys of the right fourway button to select from among the following four options: **• „none“**  F or operation of a model without a propulsion. The warning “Throttle too high”, see page 33, is deactivated and the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers** «, beginning page 183, is available without any restrictions.

**• “bac**  **k”** The idle position for the throttle/brake flaps stick (C1) is to the rear, i. e . toward the pilot. The warning “Throttle too high”, see page 33, as well as the “cut off” option in the » **Basic set tings, model**  « menu, see page 92, are activated and the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the

» **Wing mixers** « menu, beginning page 183, will be available if the entry in the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, for the currently active flight phase is “none”.

**• “fr**  **ont”** The idle position for the throttle/brake flaps control stick (C1) is at the front, i. e . away from the pilot. The warning “Throttle too high”, see page 33, as well as the “cut off” option in the » **Basic set tings, model**  « menu, see page 92, are activated and the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the

» **Wing mixers** « menu, beginning page 183, will be available if the entry in the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, for the currently active flight phase is “none”.
Notes:

**• Be sure to pa** **y attention during the program ming procedures that motors do not start up**  **unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before program**  **ming.**

• C1 tr imming will operate according to the choice made between “normal” or only “back” or “front”, that is, either over the control’s entire travel path or only in the respective idle direction. **Tail type** After selecting the “Tail type” line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the corresponding entry field will be framed.

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the type appropriate for the model with the selection keys of the right four-way button.

**• „normal“**  Ele vators and rudder are each operated by a single servo.

**• “V**  **-tail”** Elevator and rudder control is affected by way of two separate, articulated, V-shaped rudders. The coupling function for rudder and elevator control will be automatically taken over by the program.The relationship of rudder-to-elevator proportion is set in the » **Dual Rate / Expo** « menu, page 130, and servo travel in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, page 112. If you also wish to apply differential to the rudder travel, then an alternative method of controlling the V-tail should be chosen. This requires the » **Dual mixer**  « menu

– see page 218

– which is a vailable as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter at extra cost. However, in this case it is essential to set the tail type to “normal”.

**• “Delta/fl”**  If y ou choose “2 AIL” in the “Aile / flaps” line

– see belo w

– then y our model requires one servo in 

# Model type

Establishing winged aircraft model type



### mc

  16 20105 **Program description - Model type | Winged models** each wing panel for aileron and elevator control. If you choose “2/4 AIL 2/4 FL”, then aileron and ele v ator are controlled in accordance with the settings in the “Multi-flap” menu; see page 181.

**• “2ELSv3+8”**  This option is intended f or models with two elevator servos. The servo connected to output 8 willoperate in parallel with servo 3 to actuate elevators. Elevator trim affects both servos.
Note on “2ELSv3+8”: One control, which assigns input 8 by way of the

» **Control adjust** « menu, is then disconnected from servo “8” by software for reasons of safety i. e . it is made ineffective.
**Aileron/camber flaps** After selecting the “Aileron/camber flaps” line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the corresponding entry field will be framed:

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: The current setting will be displayed in inversevideo. Now use the selection keys of the right fourway button to select the number of wing servos to be programmed for the model ... ... on the 

### mc-16 transmitter with the standard eight channels:

No. of wing flaps Control channel used
1AIL 2
1AIL 1FL 2 | 6

2AIL 2 & 5 **Brake offset** This function not only has potential for gliders and electric models but also for models with combustion motors and landing flaps. The mixers described in the “Brake settings” line of the » **Wing mixers** « menu, page 183, can be opera

ted b y the C1 stick (“input 1”) or another transmitter operating element which has been assigned to input 7 or 8 in the » **Control adjust** « menu in the case of the standard 

### mc-16 HoTT eight-channel transmitter. Inputs 7, 8 or 9 are available for the same purpose on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with the optional twelve channels, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. In this latter case, retain the “GL” default setting for the “Type” column in the » **Control adjust**  « menu so the selected control can operate independent of flight phase. In the majority of cases the default setting for “input 1” will remain as it is and the brake will be operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 stick. However, use of input 7, 8 or

– if a valaible

– 9 mak es itpossible to operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to be used for something else. The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired position. This is done by placing the control for input 1, 7, 8 or 9 into the position at which the landing flaps are to be retracted, i. e . closed, then setting this “Offset” point in the column above the column label **STO**

.The selection of this offset point in this context determines not only the control position at which the brake system is to be retracted, i. e . closed, but also the activation direction of the C1 stick for extending the brake system.

• Br ake offset values with a “+” prefix will cause flaps affected by the “Brake settings” option of the

» **Wing mixers** « menu to be extended when the C1 stick is moved from front to rear, in the direction of the pilot. 2AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 6
2AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7
... on the 

### mc-20 transmitter with twelve channels, and the 

### mc-16 transmitter with the optional twelve channels:

No. of wing flaps Control channel used
1AIL 2
1AIL 1FL 2 | 6

2AIL 2 & 5
2AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 6
2AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7
2AIL 4FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10 4AIL 2FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 4AIL 4FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10 Depending on the option selected here, the given mixers needed and their settings will be activated in the » **Wing mixers** « menu, beginning page 183. Tips:

• Settings f or all wing flap pairs (AlL and Al2, FL and FL2) can be trimmed on a flight-phase basis in both the » **Phase trim** « menu as well as in the **Wing mixers** « menu, page 183.

• The functionality of all wing flap pairs (AlL and Al2, FL and FL2) can also be oper ated by way of the “Throttle/brake-flap stick” if this stick has not been assigned to other use, e. g. for certain brake settings, see » **Wing mixers** « menu, page 183 . Toconfigure this it is only necessary to assign “Control 1” to input 6 in the » **Control adjust** « menu, page 118. (If it is preferable to operate flaps withswitches, one of the transmitter’s two or three position switches are good for this purpose.)106 **Program description - Model type | Winged models** • Br ake offset values with a “-” prefix will cause flaps affected by the “Brake settings” option of the

» **Wing mixers** « menu to be extended when the C1 stick is moved from rear to front, in the direction away from the pilot.If the offset point is not set at the far end of control element travel, the remainder of travel to the end point will be “free travel”, i. e . this “free travel” will no longer influence any mixer available for “Brake settings” in the » **Wing mixers** « menu. This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at “neutral”, even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake flap control. Atthe same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %:

+90% SEL STO Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1

Tip:Preferably, the servo intended for operating any airbrake flaps that may be on the model should be connected to the receiver output operated by the brake input channel, e. g. connect airbrake servo onto (free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen for the“brake”, etc. A second airbrake servo is most conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.107 **For your notes**108 **Program description - Helicopter type** 

# Helicopter type

Establishing helicopter model type This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Heli copter type**  « option in the multi-function menu:
Suppress models Base setup model
Servo adjustment
Control adjust Helicopter type

Stick mode

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad. This “Model type” menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates allcharacteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the specified model type. **Swashplate type** Control of the swashplate will require an appropriate program variant which corresponds to the number of servos operating pitch control. In the meantime this selection is also influenced by the type of control exercised on swashplate servos.Since Flybar systems generally do not require transmitter-side swashplate mixers, when such a system is in use, “1 Servo” is generally to be selected as the swashplate type, regardless of the actual number of swashplate servos present. **In this context, be sure the Flybar system complies with the included ad**  **justment instructions as otherwise there is a risk the helicopter will not fly.**  When you open the » **Helicopter type** « menu the input field of the “Swashplate type” line is generallyalready framed (selected). If not, use the Select buttons  of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the “Swashplate type” line: Linear. swashpl. Swashplate
no 1 Servo

Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back SEL

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting for number of pitch servos will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right four-way button.

**• „1 Ser**  **vo“** A Flybar system is in use or the swashplate is tipped with one servo each for roll and pitch-axis. Pitch control will be affected by oneseparate servo. (Since helicopter models, which are operated with only 1 pitch servo, neither need any of the three swashplate servos for pitch, pitch-axis and roll, likeFlybar systems, NOR the transmitter’s mixer functions for pitch, pitch-axis and roll, the **»Swash plate mixer«**  menu option will be suppressed in the Multi-function menu.)

**• “2 Ser**  **vo”**Two roll servos will displace the swashplate axially to affect pitch control; nick control will be decoupled by a mechanical compensation rocker.

**• “3Sv(2Roll)”**  Symmetr ic three-point control of the swashplate with three, radially offset articulation points, each offset by 120 °, connected to one pitch-axis ser vo (front or rear) and two roll servos (left and right).All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control.

**• “3Sv (140°)”**  Asymmetr ical three-point control of the swashplate is affected at three articulation points connected to one nick servo (rear) and two roll servos (front left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control.

**• “3Sv (2Nic**  **k)”** Symmetric three-point control as described above but radially offset by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two pitch-axis servos, front and rear.

**• “4Sv (90°)”**  F our-point swashplate control affected by two roll servos and two nick servos. Simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the option back to “1 Servo”. **Swashplate type: 1 Servo**

2 **Swashplate type: 2 Servos**

2

1 **Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)**

3

1 2 

### mc

  16 20109 **Program description - Helicopter type Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)** 

3

1 2

**Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)**

3

2 1

**Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll**

2 5

1 3

Note: Except for the “1 Servo” choice, swashplate mixer proportions must also be set in the » **Swashplate mixer**  « menu, page 220.
**Swashplate linearization** After selecting the “Linear. swashpl.” line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the entry field will be framed:

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate
no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back The “yes” entry will prevent undesired side effects such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension between swashplate servo rods. This type of tension can arise when effected servos strain for different displacement positions due to travel which deviates from one another. Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the entire rotation travel of the servo arm, servo travel is reduced in small control movements

– similar to a pronounced e xponential setting.
**Rotor direction** After selecting the “Rotor direction” line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the entry field will be framed:

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate
no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back

After a tap on the center **SET** key, the main rotor’s direction of rotation is entered in the “Rotor direction”line with the selection keys of the right four-way button:

**• “right”**  The main rotor tur ns clockwise when viewed from above.

**• “left”**  The main rotor tur ns counter-clockwise when viewed from above. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will set the option to “right”. right-hand rotation left-hand rotation This entry is necessary for the correct orientation of torque and power compensation mixer settings made in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu: Pitch, Channel 1  Throttle, Channel 1  Tail rot., T

ail rotor  Throttle Roll  Throttle Roll  Tail rot. Pitch  Throttle, Pitch-axis  Throttle Pitch-axis  Tail rotor
**Pitch min** After selecting the »Pitch min.« (pitch minimum) line with the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button, the entry field will be framed:

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate
no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back110 **Program description - Helicopter type** The “Pitch min.” line is used to adapt the actuation direction of the throttle/pitch stick to personal control preferences. All other helicopter program options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e. g. throttlecurve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are dependent on this setting. Tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The operating direction of the throttle/pitch stick will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right four-way button. 

### Pitch

These mean:

**• “fr**  **ont”** minimum pitch setting when the pitch stick (C1) is “forward”, i. e . away from the pilot.

**• “bac**  **k”** minimum pitch setting when the pitch stick (C1) is “back”, i. e . toward the pilot. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will set this option to “back”.
Notes:

• The C1 tr im only affects the throttle servo or the collective pitch servos, depending on the settings in the “Tr” column of the » **Stick mode** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.

• The so-called “throttle limit” is set by default, see text beginning page 127, by way of input “Lim.” in the » **Control adjust** « menu with which the throttleservo can be limited, independent of the pitch servo, in the full throttle direction.

• Since a given user’s models will typically be operated with the same pitch-min direction, this spe

cification can be con veniently preselected in the “transmitter-specific” » **Basic settings** « menu, page 268. This specification will then be adoptedautomatically when a new model memory is created in the » **Helicopter type** « menu but, if desired,can be adapted on a model-specific basis as described. **Expo throttle limit** After selecting the “Expo thro lim.” line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the entry field will be framed:

Expo thro lim. 0% SEL Linear. swashpl. no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back

The “Throttle limit” function described in the » **Control adjust**  « menu, see page 127, can be assigned an exponential characteristic curve. A pitch progression rate between -100 % and +100 % can be set with the selection k eys. For example, it is practical to have the throttle limit

– b y default, the right-side proportional rotary slider

– also regulate the idle setting. Further details about the throttle limit can be found in the text for the

» **Control adjust** « menu beginning page 122. An example of two exponential throttle limit curve characteristics for 100 % ser vo travel. continuous line: negative exponential values; dashed line: positive exponential values **  **  **   **  **    **  **  **
****

**            **111 **For your notes**112 **Program description - Servo adjustment** norma l reversed norma l

reversed **Column 3 “cent.”** The servo midpoint (center) setting is intended foradapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse length of 1.5 ms , i. e . 1500 μs), as w ell as for minoradjustments, e. g. for the fine tuning of the neutral position of model rudders. Independent of trim levers and any mixer settings, the neutral point can be shifted in a range of -125 to +125 % within a maximum servo travel of ±150 %. Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this setting is always based directly on the respective

servo. Note that extreme offsets of the neutral point can lead to one-sided restrictions ofservo travel because overall travel is limited by both electronic and mechanical aspects to a maximum of ±150 %. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. lumn then, if desired, move the respective control out of its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting. 3. Br iefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. The corresponding input field is shown highlighted. 4. Use the selection k eys of the right four-way button to set the desired value. 5. Br iefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to complete data entry. 6. A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will any setting made back to its respective default value. Important:Servo designation numerals are based on the respective receiver outputs to which they are connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter and/or receiver outputs has been specified. This means thateven a change of stick mode will not effect the numbering of servos.

**Column 2 “rev”** The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to thepractical reality of the given model so that the assembly of control rods and joints do not need to accommodate a specific servo rotation direction. Rotation direction is symbolized by the “=>” and “<=” charactercombinations. Servo rotation direction must be specified before making settings for the options which follow below. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset rotation direction back to “=>”. This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Use the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the » **Servo adjustment**  « option in the multi-function menu:
Suppress models Base setup model

Control adjust Model type Servo adjustment Stick mode

Suppress models Base setup model

Control adjust Helicopter type Servo adjustment Stick mode

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization, travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo exclusively. Begin setting servo parameters in the left column. **Basic procedure:** 1. Select the desired ser vo, 1 ... 8 or 1 ... 12, with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. 2. If necessar y, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to reach the desired co



# Servo adjustment

Servo direction, midpoint, travel and limit

S e r v o t r a v e l

- 1 2 5 %

C e n t r e a d j u s t m e n t +

1 2 5 % 

### mc

  16 20113 **Program description - Servo adjustment Column 4, “– trv +”** 

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 0 ... 150 % of nor mal servo travel. The values set are based on the settings that have been made for the “midpoint” column. To create a symmetric travel path, i. e . control-sideindependent travel, the respective control (stick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position which covers travel to both sides of the marked frame.
Note: It may be necessary to first assign a control attached to one of the control channels 5 ... 8 or 5 ... 12. If necessary, this is to be done in the » **Control adjust** « menu, see page 118 or 122.
To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (stick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed. The value setting is activated with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The value field is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right four-way button. Complete the entry with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to “100 %”. Impor tant: In contrast to settings made with the » **Control adjust**  « menu, all settings made in this menu affect exclusively the respective servo, independent of how the control signal for this servo is produced, i. e

. directly by a stick or by way of any mixer functions.

The adjacent figure showsand example of a sidedependent servo setting, -50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travelServo travel

**Column 5 “– lim +”** The “– lim +” column is reached by moving the marker frame, with the  selection keys of the left or right four-ay button, to the right beyond the “– travel +” column:

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + lim 0% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% S4 S5

To create a symmetric limit, i. e . control-side independent limit, the respective control (stick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position such that the marker frame covers both sides of the travel setting. To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (stick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side where it is to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed. Note: You may first need to assign a transmitter control to a servo connected to one of the control channels 5 ... 8 or 5 ... 12 in the » **Control adjust** « menu; see the sections starting on pages 118 and 122. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. Example: A ser vo is controlled separately by two controls over a mixer and but, for model-specific reasons, must only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 % because , for example, the rudder would mechanically collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %. As long as only one control is used at a time , this is no problem. But this does become a problem when the signals are summed by the simultaneous use of both controls (e. g. aileron and rudder) to total travel in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be strained excessively ... To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the rudder used in the example, this would be a value slightly less than 100 %

– because it is assumed the

r udder would collide at 100 %.114 **Program description - Stick mode | Winged models** This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.Both sticks are equipped for digital trimming. With each brief push (one “click”) on a trim switch-key it will change its neutral position by one increment. Holding the trim switch-key longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding direction at increasing speed. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made “audible” with acoustic tones. This makes finding the mid-point during flight easy,without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. By default the digital trims of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters always apply to each flight phase separately within a particular model memory

– with the exception of the throttle / br ake stick trim, generally abbreviated to control function “C1” (channel 1). By default this means that the base display of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters looks as follows (assuming “stick mode 1”):

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

If the » **Stick mode** « menu is unlocked, it is possible to convert the digital trims from the default “PH” (phase) setting to “GL” (global), although the C1 trim is always “global”, i. e. it is independent of flight phases. This settings are visualized in the base screen by a “shadow” on trim bars: 

# Stick mode

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

• shadow present = global,

• no shadow = flight phase dependent. In the f ollowing screen-shot of the base display of a transmitter with » **Stick mode** « unlocked (as shown in the screen-shot on the right under the title “”Tr” column”), the aileron trim is shown as “flight phasedependent”; this is the left / right function of the righthand stick, and assumes the default “Mode 1” transmitter configuration:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

**Basic procedure:** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Stick mode** « option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL PH PH PH

StThis menu, which applies to fixed-wing models, provides a means of setting the response of the four digital trim levers individually (within the maximum trim travel of ±30 %), and also of “slo wing” control functions 1 to 4, and choosing “phase” or “global” for the trims.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Once the appropriate function field has been selected and then the center **SET** key of the right four-way button is touched briefly, the field will appear in inverse videoand the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right four-way button.
**Column “Tr”** Except for “Channel 1”, this column can be used to switchover trim effect from “GL(obal)” to “PH(ase)” and vice versa, for example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL

PH

St PH GL Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

**• “Global”**  The position of the respective tr im function is effective “globally” for all flight-phases programmed for the given model, page 150.

**• “Phase”**  The position of the respective tr im function is effective on a phase-specific basis and will be auto

matically stored upon change of flight phase so that the setting is again av ailable following a return to this flight phase. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the option back to “Global”. 

### mc

  16 20115 **Program description - Stick mode | Winged models Column “St”**  The four digital trim switch-keys shift the neutral point of the respective stick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each “click”.This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control tr avel. After selecting the “St” column ((trim) steps) and the desired trim control with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the corresponding entry field will be framed, for example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL PH PH

St Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and10, with the selection keys of the right four-way button, for example:

Tr + 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL PH PH

St 8 Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active field back to “4”. **Column “- time +”** The rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of stick motion can be influenced by the entries made in the “– time +” column. Each stick movement direction, i. e . stick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control function and therefore also any servos controlled by this function. The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s . In the case of side-separate settings, the stick is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video field will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made

– f or example, even to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL PH PH

St 1.1s Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor cut-off should always be “immediate”. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active field back to “0.0 s”.116 **Program description - Stick mode | Helicopter models** This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.Both sticks are equipped for digital trimming. With each brief push (one “click”) on a trim switch-key it will change its neutral position by one increment. Holding the trim switch-key longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding direction at increasing speed. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made “audible” with acoustic tones. This makes finding the mid-point during flight easy,without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. By default the digital trims of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters always apply to each flight phase separately within a particular model memory

– with the exception of the throttle / collectiv epitch stick trim, generally abbreviated to control function “C1” (channel 1). By default this means that the base display of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters looks as follows (assuming “stick mode 1”):

STARLET #02

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

If the » **Stick mode** « menu is unlocked, it is possible to convert the digital trims from the default “PH” (phase) setting to “GL” (global), although the C1 trim is always “global”, i. e. it is independent of flight phases. This settings are visualized in the base screen by a “shadow” on trim bars: 

# Stick **mode**

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

• shadow present = global,

• no shadow = flight phase dependent. In the f ollowing screen-shot of the base display of a transmitter with » **Stick mode** « unlocked (as shown in the second screen-shot on the right under the title ”Tr” column”), the tail rotor trim is shown as “flight phasedependent”; this is the left / right function of the lefthand stick, and assumes the default “Mode 1” transmitter configuration:

STARLET #02

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT

**Basic procedure:** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Stick mode** « option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:

Thr. Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s TL PH PH PH

StThis menu, which applies to model helicopters, provides a means of setting the response of the four digital trim levers individually (within the maximum trim travel of ±30 %), and also of “slo wing” control functions 1 to 4, and choosing “phase” or “global” for the trims.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Once the appropriate function field has been selected and then the center **SET** key of the right four-way button is touched briefly, the field will appear in inverse videoand the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right four-way button.
**Column “Tr”** Except for “Channel 1”, this column can be used to switchover trim effect from “GL(obal)” to “PH(ase)” and vice versa, for example:

Roll Nick

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GA PH PH

St PH Thr.

time Tail

**• „TL“**  (Throttle Limit) C1 tr imming operates as idle trimming when the “throttle limit” function regulates the motor for start

ing, see » **Control adjust**  « menu, page 127.

**• „TA“**  (Throttle Autorotation) C1 tr im operates as idle trim exclusively in the «Autorot» flight phase. This makes it possible to assign a principle (fixed) preset AR throttle position in the » **Helicopter mix**

**er** « menu, page 202, e. g. dur ing autorotation practice with the trim function “varied”.

**• „PT“**  (Pitch) Due to internal coupling, C1 tr imming acts equally on all pitch servos available without influencing the throttle servo. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

### mc

  16 20117 **Program description - Stick mode | Helicopter models** right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the option back to “TL”.On the other hand, the trim effects of respective digital trim controls for the lines “Roll”, “Pitch ax” and “Tail rot.” can be switched over from “Gobal” to “Phase” and vice versa, for example:

Roll Nick

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s PH PH

St GA

GL Thr.

time Tail

**• “Global”**  The position of the respectiv e trim function is effective “globally” for all flight-phases programmed for the given model, page 150.

**• “Phase”**  The position of the respectiv e trim function is effective on a phase-specific basis and will be auto

matically stored upon change of flight phase so that the setting is again a vailable following a return to this flight phase. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the option back to “Global”.
**Column “St”** The four digital trim switch-keys shift the neutral point of the respective stick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each “click”.This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control tr avel. After selecting the “St” column ((trim) steps) and the desired trim control with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button, the corresponding entry field will be framed, for example: Roll Nick

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GA PH PH GA

St Thr.

time Tail

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and10, with the selection keys of the right four-way button, for example:

Roll Nick

Tr + 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GA PH PH GL

St 8 Thr.

time Tail

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active field back to “4”.
**Column “- time +”** The rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of stick motion can be influenced by the entries made in the “– time +” column. Each stick movement direction, i. e . stick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control function and therefore also any servos controlled by this function. The time can be programmed symmetrically for bothsides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s

. In the case of side-separate settings, the stick is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video field will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made. Example: All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate pitch control, e g. a “Pitch” control movement for a“3Sv (2Roll)” swashplate. However, travel for the middle servo is greater than that of the other two servos on the shorter lever. A rash “Pitch” control movement would not operate the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would cause a momentary control motion in the “nick” direction.However, if response time for the “pitch” control function were to be reduced by at least the positioning time for the servo in the middle then all three servos would reach their proper positions at the same time. The necessary delay times typically amount to only a few tenths of a second. For example:

Roll Nick

Tr + 4 4 8 0.0s

4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

0.0s GA PH PH GL

St 0.0s 0.2s 0.2s Thr.

time Tail

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active field back to “0.0 s”.118 **Program description - Control adjust | Winged models** 

# Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Control adjust**  « option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr fr

SEL Although the basic hardware features of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters are the same, i. e. two dual-axis sticks for control functions 1 to 4and the associated trim levers, the standard supplementary controls fitted to the two transmitters are different.

**•** 

### mc-16 **HoTT**

• two 3-w ay switches (SW 5/6 & 11/12)

• two propor tional sliders on the middle console, designated Sl 1 & 2 in the menu

• two side-mounted “rotary sliders”, designated Lv1 and 2 in the menu

**•** 

### mc-20 **HoTT**

• three 3-wa y switches (SW 2/3, 5/6 & 11/12)

• five 2-w ay switches (SW 4, 7, 9, 13 & 15)

• two self-restor ing 2-way switches (SW 8 & 14)

• two unloc kable 2-way switches (SW 1 & 10) • two push-b uttons on the back-side of the transmitter (SW 16 & 17 bzw. 18 & 19)

• two s witch-keys (Gb5 & Gb6)

• two propor tional sliders on the middle console, designated Sl 1 & 2 in the menu

• two side-mounted “rotary sliders”, designated Lv1 and 2 in the menu In contrast to the two sticks which, when initialized for a new model memory as a “Winged aircraft” model type will already be configured to operate the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4, these “other” operating elements initially remain inactive. Thus, at least in the system’s delivered state

– as already mentioned on page 77

– or ev en after initialization of a new model memory with an “aircraft” model type and its “binding” to the receiver intended for installation, only those servos connected to the two sticks by way of receiver outputs 1 ... 4 are able to be operated; any servos which may be connected to receiver outputs 5 and upper will initially remain inactive in their middle positions. While this may appear a bit awkward at first glance ... this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among “additional” operating elementswhile, at the same time, not requiring the “deactivation” of unused operating elements. This is because**the only way to ensure an unused operating ele ment can have no effect on the model, even if**  **operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i. e.**  **not assigned to any function.** All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this » **Control adjust** « menu toany function input, see page 66, just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the » **Timers (gen eral)**  « menu as an “On/Off” switch, etc. Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global or flight-phase specific operation if they have been defined for flight-phases in the » **Phase set tings**  « menu, page 152, and » **Phase assignment** « menu, page 158. The names assigned to given flight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e. g. «Nor mal». **Basic procedure** 1. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the desired input, “In5 ... In8” or “In5 ... In12”. 2. If necessary , use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to change to the desired column. 3. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. The corresponding input field is shown highlighted. 4. Operate the chosen oper ating element or set the desired value with the selection keys of the right four-way button. 5. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to complete data entry. 6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will any setting made back to its respective default value. **Column 2, “Typ”** Similar to the previously described » **Stick mode** « menu, this column can be used to define whether further settings for the given input are to have a “GL(obal)” or a “PH(ase-specific)” effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the desired input 5 through 8 or 5 through 12 in the column labeled “Typ”, for example: 

### mc

  16 20119 **Program description - Control adjust | Winged models** 0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr fr fr

SEL In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ

**• „GL“**  The settings for the input in question aff ect all flight phases programmed (if any) and thus act “globally” on the model memory in question.

**• “PH”**  The settings for this input tak e effect per flightphase and must therefore be configured separately for each flight phase.
Notes:

• See page 150 for more inf ormation about flight phases.

• The current positions of the INC/DEC buttons CTL 5 & 6, which are gener ally assigned to inputs 5 ... 8 or 5 ... 12, are stored in accordance with your chosen entry in the “Type” line, i. e. the settings are not lost when you switch flight phases or change models. The particular advantage of these two transmitter controls

– especially if you select the “PH” setting - lies in the fact that you can use one and the sameINC/DEC button as trim controls in all the programmed flight phases, but

– in contrast to a position-related propor tional control

– the trim v alues are retained even if you switch models.
**Column 3,**  **“Transmitter control and switch assignment”** Select an input, 5 through 12 max., with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. **Transmitter control assignment** Use the selection ke ys to move into the column labeled **SEL** . After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the message shown below will appear in the display:

0% 0% 0% –––

0% GL

normal fr

SEL In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ Move desired control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of theselected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window.

0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr Lv2 fr fr

SEL In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ
**Switch assignment** If the input is to be actuated like a s witch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch. A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off. A 3-way momentary or toggle switch achieves thesame effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to activate the option for assigning a switch: 0%

––– GL

normal fr

SEL In5

offset typ Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its “OFF” to its “ON” position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position , assign a switch direction

– preferab ly the “second” direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i. e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch’s middle position and move the switch away from the pilot.The display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from **SEL** into another switch symbol:

0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr

fr fr 3 In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typNow put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then assign the switch’s other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction. The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction, for example:120 **Program description - Control adjust | Winged models** 0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr

fr fr 3

2 In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ
**Erasing a**  **transmitter control or switch assign ment**  A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) while on an input linewith an active transmitter control or switch assignment

– see abo ve figures

– will reset the giv en input back to “fr” and “---”. Tips:

• When assigning s witches, pay attention to the desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain “free” or are again reset to “free”.This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.

• The travel setting described below allows the appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch.
**Column 4,**  **“offset”** The control center for the given control, i. e . its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr

fr fr 3

2 In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. **Column 5, “– travel +”**  The “-Travel+” column is accessed by using the Select button  of the left or right-hand four-way button to shift the marker frame to the right, beyond the “Offset” column, as indicated by the right-pointing arrow at bottom left of the screen. This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of nor mal servo travel. Select an input, 5 through 8 or 5 through 12, with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. To set symmetric travel, i. e . control-side independent travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the marker frame:

– travel + +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% normal In5 In6 In7 In8

To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed:

+100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% normal – travel + In5 In6 In7 In8

The value setting is activated by briefly touching the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The value field/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right fourway button:

+100%

+100% +100% +100%

+100% +100% normal +111% +111%

– travel + In5 In6 In7 In8

+100%

+100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% normal +88%

– travel + In5 In6 In7 In8

Another brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the entry. Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control’s direction or effect. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to “+100 %”. Important:In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the control travel setting affects all “downstream” mixer and coupling inputs, i. e . any and all servos actuated by the given transmitter control.
**Column 6, “– time +”** Each of the function inputs 5 ... 8 or 5 ... 12 can be assigned a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s

. Move the marker frame to the right beyond the co

lumn labeled “– travel +” with the  selection key of the left or right four-way button.121 **Program description - Control adjust | Winged models** To set a symmetric , i. e . control-side independent,time delay, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the time setting is covered on both sides by the marker frame:

0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal – time + In5 In6 In7 In8

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to the side to be set such that only the value to be changed is covered:

0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal – time + In5 In6 In7 In8

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to activate value setting. The value field will be displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of the right four-way button to change the value in a range of 0.0 to 9.9 s

. Another brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the entry. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0s.122 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** 

# Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Control adjust**  « option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the four-way button pad. On the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this looks as follows:

In5

offset Thro Gyro Lim. ––– ––– –––

Lv2 0% 0% 0% 0% GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr

–––

SEL

On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and on the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, this looks as follows:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% Thro Gyro In8

––– ––– –––

In9 In10 In11 Lim. ––– ––– –––

Lv2 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

––– GL

GL GL

GL GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr fr fr fr fr

–––

SEL Note:To save space the remaining screen-shots in this section are based on the display of the standard eightchannel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter. The pictures also apply in similar manner to the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, since the only difference between the transmitter displays is the lines “In8” to “In11” located between “Gyro” and “Lim.”. Although the basic hardware features of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters are the same, i. e . two dual-axis sticks for control functions 1 to 4and the associated trim levers, the standard supplementary controls fitted to the two transmitters are different.

**•** 

### mc-16 **HoTT**

• tw o 3-way switches (SW 5/6 & 11/12)

• tw o proportional sliders on the middle console, designated Sl 1 & 2 in the menu

• tw o side-mounted “rotary sliders”, designated Lv1 and 2 in the menu

**•** 

### mc-20 **HoTT**

• three 3-w ay switches (SW 2/3, 5/6 & 11/12)

• fiv e 2-way switches (SW 4, 7, 9, 13 & 15)

• tw o self-restoring 2-way switches (SW 8 & 14)

• tw o unlockable 2-way switches (SW 1 & 10)

• tw o push-buttons on the back-side of the transmitter (SW 16 & 17 bzw. 18 & 19)

• tw o switch-keys (Gb5 & Gb6)

• tw o proportional sliders on the middle console, designated Sl 1 & 2 in the menu

• tw o side-mounted “rotary sliders”, designated Lv1 and 2 in the menu In contrast to the two sticks which, even for a newly initialized “Helicopter” model type will automatically use the servos attached to receiver outputs 1 ... 4and 6, the aforementioned “other” operating elements

– e xcept for the standard assignment of servo 6 to the right-side proportional slider, designated in this menu as Lv2 (throttle limiter)

– are initially inactiv e.One of the effects of this is that (as already mentioned on page 77) with a factory-fresh system

– as with a ne wly initialized model memory for a “Helicopter” model type following its “binding” to the intended receiver

– only those ser vos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4 and

– depending on the position of the throttle limiter

– ser vo 6 can be moved by the two sticks. Any servos connected to plug-in locations 5, 7 and 8 or 5, 7 through 12, on the other hand, will simply remain at their center positions. While this may appear a bit awkward at first glance ... this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among “additional” operating elementswhile, at the same time, not requiring the “deactivation” of unused operating elements. This is because**the only way to ensure an unused operating ele ment can have no effect on the model, even if**  **operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i. e** 

**. not assigned to any function.**  All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this » **Control adjust** « menu toany function input, see page 66, just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the » **Timers (gen eral)**  « menu as an “On/Off” switch, etc. Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global or flight-phase specific operation if they have been defined for flight-phases in the » **Phase set tings**  « menu, page 156, and » **Phase assignment** « menu, page 158. The names assigned to given flight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e. g. «Normal». 

### mc

  16 20123 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models Transmitter control assignment** Use the selection keys to move into the column labeled **SEL** . After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the message shown below will appear in the display:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% 0% Th Gy Lim. GL

GL

typ normal fr

L 2

SEL Move desired control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of theselected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window:

0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal Lv1 fr fr

SEL In5

offset Thro

typ Lv2

**Switch assignment** If the input is to be actuated like a s witch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch. A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off. A 3-way momentary or toggle switch achieves thesame effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to activate the option for assigning a switch: Note: As a rule, input 6 must kept “free” for a helicopter model. On this, see “Throttle” on the next double page. **Basic procedure** 1. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the desired input: In5, Thro, Gyro or Lim. respectively In5, Thro, Gyro, In8 ... 11 or Lim. 2. If necessary , use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the desired co

lumn. 3. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. The corresponding input field is shown highlighted. 4. Operate the chosen oper ating element or set the desired value with the selection keys of the right four-way button. 5. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to complete data entry. 6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will any setting made back to its respective default value. **Column 2, “typ”** Similar to the previously described » **Stick mode** « menu, this column can be used to define whether further settings for the given input are to have a “GL(obal)” or a “PH(ase-specific)” effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the desired input In5, Thro, Gyro or Lim. respectively In5, Thro, Gyro, In8 through In11 or Lim. in the column labeled “typ”, for example: In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Thro Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal fr fr fr Lv2

SEL

**• „GL“**  The settings for the input in question aff ect all flight phases programmed (if any) and thus act “globally” on the model memory in question.

**• “PH”**  The settings for this input tak e effect per flightphase and must therefore be configured separately for each flight phase.
Notes:

• See page 150 for more inf ormation about flight phases.

• The current positions of the INC/DEC buttons CTL 5 & 6, which are gener ally assigned to inputs 5 ... 8 or 5 ... 12, are stored in accordance with your chosen entry in the “Type” line, i. e. the settings are not lost when you switch flight phases or change models.The particular advantage of these two transmitter controls

– especially if you select the “PH” setting

– lies in the fact that y ou can use one and the same INC/DEC button as trim controls in all the programmed flight phases, but

– in contrast to a position-related propor tional control

– the trim values are retained even if you change models. **Column 3, “Transmitter control/switch assignment”**  Using the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select an input: In5, Thro, Gyro or Lim. respectively In5, Thro, Gyro, In8 ... 11 or Lim.124 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** 0%

––– GL

normal fr

SEL In5

offset typ Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its “OFF” to its “ON” position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position , assign a switch direction

– preferab ly the “second” direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i. e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch’s middle position and move the switch away from the pilot.The display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from **SEL** into another switch symbol:

0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr 3 In5

offset Thro

typ Lv2

Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then assign the switch’s other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction. The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction, for example: 0% 0% 0% 0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr 3

2 In5

offset Thro

typ Lv2

**Erasing a**  **transmitter control or switch assign ment**  A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) while on an input linewith an active transmitter control or switch assignment

– see abov e figures

– will reset the given input bac k to “fr” and “---”. Tips:

• When assigning switches , pay attention to the desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain “free” or are again reset to “free”.This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.

• The tra vel setting described below allows the appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch.
**Column 4, “Offset”**  The control center f or the given control, i. e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

0% 0% 0% 0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr 3

2 In5

offset Thro

typ Lv2

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. **Column 5, “– travel +”**  The “- travel +” column is accessed by using the Select button  of the left or right-hand four-way button to shift the marker frame to the right, beyond the “Offset” column, as indicated by the right-pointing arrow at bottom left of the screen. This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal ser vo travel. Select an input, In5, Thro, Gyro or Lim. or In5, Thro, Gyro, In8 through 11 or Lim., with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. To set symmetric travel, i. e. control-side independent travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the marker frame:

– travel + +100% +100% +100% +100% Gyro Lim. +100% +100% +100% +100% normal In5 Thro

To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed:

+100% +100% +100% +100% Gyro Lim. +100% +100% +100% +100% normal – travel + In5 Thro

The value setting is activated by briefly touching the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The value125 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** field/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values canbe changed with the selection keys of the right fourway button:

+100% +100% +100% Gyro Lim. +100% +100% +100% normal +111% +111%

– travel + In5 Thro

+100% +100% +100% Gyro Lim. +100% +100% +100% +100% normal +88%

– travel + In5 Thro

Another brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the entry. Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control’s direction or effect. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to “+100 %”. Important:In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the control travel setting affects all “downstream” mixer and coupling inputs, i. e . any and all servos actuated by the given transmitter control.
**Column 6, “– time +”** Each of the function inputs In5, Thro, Gyro or Lim. or In5, Thro, Gyro, In8 ... 11 or Lim. can be assigned a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s. Move the marker frame to the right beyond the co

lumn labeled “– travel +” with the  selection key of the left or right four-way button. To set a symmetric , i. e . control-side independent,time delay, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the time setting is covered on both sides by the marker frame:

0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Gyro Lim. 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal – time + In5 Thro

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to the side to be set such that only the value to be changed is covered:

0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Gyro Lim. 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal – time + In5 Thro

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to activate value setting. The value field will be displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of the right four-way button to change the value in a range of 0.0 to 9.9 s

. Another brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the entry. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0s. **“Thro(ttle)”**

0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr fr Lv2

SEL In5

offset Thro

typ In principle, the helicopter program also permits theindividual inputs to be assigned to any existing transmitter control (proportional controls and switches). However, please note here that some of the inputs available on this menu are already assigned to helicopter-specific functions, and therefore cannot be re-assigned in this way.Nevertheless, the receiver layout on page 75 indicates that the throttle servo or the speed controller of an electrically-powered helicopter must be connected to receiver output “6”, since control channel “6” is reserved for motor power regulation. Unlike a fixed-wing model aircraft, the throttle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by thestick or other transmitter control but rather by a complex mixer system, see » **Helicopter mixer** « menu beginning page 188. Furthermore, the “Throttle limit function” described on the next page also influences this mixer system. Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the “Throttle” line, or to its supplementary control signal, would unnecessarily “confuse” this complex mixer system. **For this reason the “Throttle” input MUST be left “free”.** 126 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models “Gyro”** 

0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL normal fr fr fr

SEL Lv2 In5

offset Thro

typMost of the latest gyro systems not only feature infinitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use also has this feature then this menuoption provides the opportunity to specify both a “normal” gyro effect as well as a “heading-lock mode” in the “Offset” column within a range of ±125 %. Such a specification can include a certain effect to fly normal, slow flights with maximum stability or the reduction of the gyro effect for fast circuit flights and aerobatics. To proceed as described above, use flight phase switching to enter different settings on the “Gyro” line. **Important notice: The value of this option is identical to the offset** **value set in the “Gyro offset” option of the »Heli copter mixer« menu, page 196. For this reason,**  **any changes made always affect the other menu directly, and vice versa.**  Beginning with these preset

– static

– flight phasespecific settings, a transmitter control assigned to the “Gyro” line, for example one of the middle console sliders, can be used to vary the gyro effect around therespective “offset point”. The center point of the control corresponds to the setting specified by the offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain increasesproportionally; it diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and straightforward method of adjusting gyro effect even in flight

– e

. g. to suit changing weather conditions

– or to test-fly opti

mal settings. Furthermore, the range of the gyro’s effect within transmitter control travel in both directions can be restricted by software. **In this context, be sure to comply with the instruc**

  ** tions accompanying the gyro, otherwise there is a** **risk the helicopter will be impossible to fly.** On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter the obvious choice as transmitter control for the gyro is one of the two sliders on the centre console, or alternatively to install one of the optional INC/DEC buttons on the 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter, as fitted to the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter as standard. These buttons are virtually ideal for this type of task, since

– in contr ast to a position-related proportional control

– their current position is automatically stored, and is theref ore reproducible at any time, even after you change models:

0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gyro Lim.

––– ––– ––– GL

PH GL

GL normal fr fr Cn6

SEL Lv2 In5

offset Thro

typ
**Adjusting the gyro sensor** To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following:

• The controls should ha ve as little friction and “play” as possible.

• There should be no “spring” in the control linkage.

• Use a strong and

– in par ticular

– a f ast servo. When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response

– a corresponding correctiv e change to tail rotor thrust

– tak es effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causingthe tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model’s stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model’s tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made

– either b y using the default value under “Gyro” or the associated transmitter control

– to eliminate the oscillation. If the model is flying f orward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fin combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, make use of the option to adapt gyro effect with one of the transmitter’s proportional controls.127 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** just imagine what could happen if, while carrying the helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running, the C1 stick were to be inadvertently operated ... If the carburetor or speed controller is open too farwhen the transmitter is switched on, an audible warning will be sounded and the basic display will show the message:
Thr too high!

Tip: Take advantage of the » **Servo display** « to observe the influence of the throttle limit control. The » **Servo display**  « screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left four-way button, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters!
**Basic idle setting** Put the throttle limit into its “full throttle” position by pushing the throttle limit regulator

– b y default, the right side proportional slider Lv2

– all the w ay to its forward position limit. Set the throttle/pitch stick to the maximum pitch position and also check the sub-menu “C1  Throttle” of the menu ... **»Helicopter mixer«** (beginning page 188) ... to ensure that a standard throttle cur ve is active. If, for example, the standard throttle curve has already been changed following the initialization of a model memory then this must be at least temporarily reset to the values “Point L = -0 %”, “Point 1 = +50 %” and “Point H = +100 %”: **“Lim.”** The proportional slider Lv2, mounted on the right side of the transmitter, is assigned by default to input “Lim.”:

In5

offset Thro Gyro Lim. ––– ––– –––

Lv2 0% 0% 0% 0% GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr

–––

SEL
This pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to program the two flight phases as may be familiar from use of other remote control systems

– one “with idleup” and one “without idle-up”

– because the giv en options of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20HoTT offers a much more flexible approach to finetuning and optimizing increases to system rotationalspeed below the hover point than the so-called “idleup”. If it is nevertheless preferable for the helicopter to be programmed “with idle-up”, then deactivate the “throttle limit” function described below by setting input “Lim.” to “fr”. **Meaning and application of “throttle limit”**As already mentioned under “Throttle”, and in contrast to fixed-wing models, the power output of a helicopter’s drive system is not controlled directly with the C1 stick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu or

– if the model f eatures a speed controller

– via that mecha

nism.
Note: Of course for different flight phases, flight phase programming can be used to set individual throttle

curves. Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto result in the helicopter carburetor never approachinganything near its idle speed under “normal” flight con

# Throttle limit function

ditions, and that the motor can therefore neither be started or stopped cleanly without some other means of intervention. The “throttle limit” feature resolves this problem ele

gantly b y using a separate transmitter control

– b y default the Lv2 proportional slider mounted on the right side of the transmitter

– to limit the throttle servo or the output level of a speed controller. In this way, it is possible to “throttle back” with the throttle limit control, even as far as the idle setting, at which point the trim control for the throttle/pitch stick takes over or directly shuts off an electric drive. Conversely, the throttle servo or speed controller can only open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control has also released the full servo travel path. The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the “travel” column must therefore always be set high enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle position achievable with throttle curve settings

– which typically means setting a v alue in the range +100 % to 125 %.

– travel + +100% +100% +100% Gyro Lim. +100% +100% +100% +100% normal +125% In5 Thro

The value on the (left-hand) minus side of the “travel” column should be set so that the throttle limit controlcan safely cut off an electric drive or close a carburetor sufficiently to cut off a combustion motor in conjunction with

– digital

– C1 tr im. Because of this, leave this value (initially) at +100 %. Fur thermore, this variable “limitation” of throttle travel not only provides a convenient means to start and stop the motor but may also prove to be more than an insignificant safety improvement! For example,128 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** Input Output Point ? +50% +50% +50% C1

normal Thro Curve off

Note: Since throttle trim has no effect if the throttle limiter is open, its position here is meaningless.
Now

– without starting the combustion motor

– adjustthe throttle servo, preferably mechanically and, if necessary, also by way of the servo 6 travel adjustment option in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, so that the carburetor is completely open. Now close the throttle limiter completely by moving the side proportional slider all the way to its rear limit. Use the trim lever of the Throttle/Pitch stick to place the trim position marker into the motor OFF position or actuate the “Thr. CutOff” option, see page 101.
Note: In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, theposition of the throttle/collective pitch stick is meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum collective pitch position so that, when adjusting carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter open) and “Motor OFF” (throttle limiter closed).Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just) completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that the throttle servo does not become mechanically blocked in either of its end positions (full throttle/motor OFF). To complete this basic configuration, the idle trim adjustment range must now be matched against point “L” on the throttle curve. Do this by setting Point “L” of the “C1  Throttle” mixer, in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu, to about +15 to +18 %. L 0% +16%

normal +16% Input Output Point C1 Thro Curve off

To configure a smooth transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve exactly , the collective pitch stick should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve must of course be made later in flight. The engine or motor is always started with the throttle limiter completely closed; the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick trim only affects the idle range, and the motor engine is stopped using the “cut-off trim” function of the digital trims; see page 70.
Notes:

• T ake advantage of the » **Servo display** « to observe the influence of the throttle limit control. The

» **Servo display** « screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left four-way button, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT!

• A ser vo connected to output 8 or 12 can be used, independently of this, for other purposes by means of mixers, provided that this servo is decoupled from the operating element specified by input function “Lim.” via the » **Mix only channel** « menu; see page 216. On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this option can be unlocked at extra cost.

• The throttle restr iction set by the throttle limiter isshown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve diagram on the second display page of the “C1  Throttle” option in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu(see page 191). The output signal for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the level set by the horizontal bar:

2 +50% +50% +50% normal

Throttle limiter position Input Output Point C1 Thro Curve off

The above diagram shows precisely this scena

r io: in the above example, the throttle limit control is set to about +20 % and thus restricts the movement of the throttle servo to about +20 % of full tr

avel. **Time delay for the throttle limiter** To safely prevent the carburetor from opening too rapidly, assign the throttle limiter input “Lim.” to a time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full throttle. This applies especially if the throttle limiter is controlled by a switch rather than, as preset, with the right-side proportional rotary slider. To set a delay time, push the throttle limit control to its forward limit or move the switch into its full-throttle position then use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the “– time +” column:

In5

– time + 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Thro Gyro Lim. 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal

After a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the selection keys of the left or right four-way button can be used to select the desired time delay, e. g. 5 seconds:129 **Program description - Control adjust | Helicopter models** In5

– time + 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Thro Gyro Lim. 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s normal 5.0s

A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or the **ESC** key of the left four-way button will complete the entry. As already described on page 116, the digital trim of the throttle / collective pitch stick is only active in the “Auto-rotation” flight phase, assuming that you have selected “AR” in the “Throttle” line of the following

menu ...
**»Stick mode«** (page 116)

Thro Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL

St AR

.... which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. This means that the idle of the motor or engine cannot be controlled in the “normal” flight phases using the C1 trim lever. To ensure that adequate adjustment is still available, we recommend that you use “Expo throttle limit”.
Note: On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter the » **Stick mode** « function can be unlocked as an extra-cost option. The exponential curve characteristic offered by the ... **»Helicopter type«** (page 108)

Expo thro lim. 0% SEL Linear. swashpl. no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back

... menu’s sub-menu can be used to alter the control behavior of the throttle limit control such that the latter provides sufficiently sensitive regulation of the idle setting and can also stop the motor.In this case, with a completely closed throttle limiter

– in contr ast to the previously described set

# Throttle limit in combination with “AR” in the » **Stick mode** « menu ting

– use the » **Control adjust** « menu set the “-” side of the column labeled “- travel +” for the “Lim.” linesuch that the throttle limiter fully closes the carburetor, i. e . the motor is safely switched off at this control position. Following this, move the throttle limit control to its center point and change the % value of the “Expo thro lim.” line in the » **Helicopter type** « menu, page 110, until the carburetor is in a position suitable for starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this throttle limit control position. The value for the plus side of the “- travel +” column should be increased, as described before, to +125 % so that the full-throttle position of the throttle ser vo is also reliably released from the throttle limiter. Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say 4.0 seconds, so the motor also picks up speed gradually even if the side proportional slider is pushed forward too quickly. Select the time preset to correlate to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimumcollective pitch position. The value set is to be optimized by testing.130 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models** 

# Dual **Rate / Expo**

Configurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Dual Rate / Expo**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick mode.

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust. Dual Rate / Expo

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL

The Dual-Rate-/Expo function permits flight-phase dependent switching and control over the deflection and characteristics of the aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 ... 4) by way of switches. It is possible to set up an individual curve for control function 1 (throttle / brake) using a maximum of six separately programmable points. This is carried out in the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu, which is available on the 

### mc-16 HoTT and the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter as standard; see the section starting on page 138. Similar to control travel settings in the » **Control ad just**  « menu, **Dual Rate** operates directly on the respective control function , independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of nor mal full travel. **Expo** , on the other hand, enables finer-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the pr imary control function (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of stick travel. For values less than 0 %, the re verse is true: control increases aroundthe neutral position and diminishes towards the endpoints. The degree of “progression” can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the nor mal, linear control characteristics. Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actualcontrol surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkagecontinually decreases. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle tr avel increases over-proportionally with increasing stick throw. The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos

– via an y number of mixer and coupling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages

– par ticularly for very high-speed models. The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. After selecting the appropriate line, the dotted vertical line will follow the movement of the respectivestick so a better evaluation of the transmitter-controltravel dependent curve value can be made. **Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo set tings**  If flight phases are set up in the » **Phase settings** «, page 152, and » **Phase assignment** « menus, page 158, and each assigned a name, e. g. “Normal”, the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. Just actuate the respective switch to switch between flight phases. **Basic procedure** 1. Switch to the desired flight phase then use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the desired line: “Aileron”, “Elevator” or “Rudder”. 2. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the right column or the as-yet invisible column for Expo values, see page 31. 3. T ap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The corresponding input field is shown highlighted. 4. Use the selection k eys of the right four-way button to set the desired value. 5. T ap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to complete the entry. 6. A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will any setting made back to its respective default value.
**Dual Rate function**If a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68): 

### mc

  16 20131 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models** ly change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions:

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 111% Ail Ele Rud

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 88% Ail Ele Rud

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “100 %”.
Caution: F

or safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.
Some examples of Dual Rate v alues:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20% 100% Ail

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 ... C4 or C1i ... C4i or one of the logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of “expanded switches”.The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch’s switching direction. In the case of “C” or “L” switches, the stick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defined in the

» **Control switch** « menu, see page 145, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defined in the » **Logical switch** « menu, see page 148

– provided that this men u point is unlocked (available) on the transmitter concerned.Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch will appear in the display together with aswitch symbol indicating the switch’s direction if actuated, e. g. in the «Nor mal» flight phase.

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

Once the value field has been activated with a brief tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button, use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled **SEL**at the bottom edge of the display in order to separate**Exponential function** If you wish to program the Expo function, use the  button of the left or right-hand four-way button tomove to the right, beyond the Dual Rate value column, until the word “EXPO” is displayed in the centre of the screen instead of “DUAL”:

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Ail Ele Rud

Normal

If a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68):

0% Ail

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 ... C4 or C1i ... C4i or one of the logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of “expanded switches”.The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch’s switching direction. In the case of “C” or “L” switches, the stick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defined in the

» **Control switch** « menu, see page 145, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defined in the » **Logical switch** « menu, see page 148

– pro-132 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models** vided that this menu point is unlocked (available) on the transmitter concerned.Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch will appear in the display together with aswitch symbol indicating the switch’s direction if actuated, e. g. in the «Nor mal» flight phase.

0%

0% 0% Ail Ele Rud EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value field with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the selection keys on the left or right four-way button can now be used to alter the EXPO value shown in the highlighted field, separately for each of the two switch positions. Now, for example, there is an opportunity to fly with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the other s witch direction:

33%

0% 0% Ail Ele Rud EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.
**Combining Dual Rate and Expo** If v alues have been entered for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effects of both functions will overlap, for example, as follows:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

**Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo** To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective stick, first access the » **Control switch** « menu and assign one of the C1 ... C4 control switches

– “C3”, for e xample

– to the desired transmitter control, e

. g. control 3 f or the elevator function. Do not change the switching point for the stick’s neutral position (0 %). No w return to the » **Dual Rate / Expo** « menu and select the corresponding control function (“Elevator” in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously defined “C3” control switch:

100% Ail

–––

SEL normal Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1 C3

A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will confirm the assignment of this switch:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal

Now use one of the selection keys to move into the right column then move the elevator stick into its appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e. g. f or “Up elevator” ...

100%

100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal 77%

... and “Down elevator”:

100%

100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal 111%

The vertical dashed line shows the current elevator stick position.133 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models**Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.134 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopter models** 

# Dual Rate / Expo

Configurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Dual Rate / Expo**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick mode.

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust. Dual Rate / Expo

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

100%

100% 100% Roll Nick Tail DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL

The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or controlling of control travels and characteristics for the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i. e . control functions 2 ... 4; it is switch-driven and flight-phase independent. It is possible to set up an individual curve for control function 1 (throttle / collective pitch) using a maximum of six separately programmable points. This is carried out in the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu, which is available on the 

### mc-16 HoTT and the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter as standard; see the section starting onpage 141. It can also be set up for throttle and collective pitch separately in the » **Helicopter mixer** ” menu, which is available on both transmitters; see the sections starting on pages 188 and 322. Similar to control travel settings in the » **Control ad just**  « menu, **Dual Rate** operates directly on the respective control function , independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of nor mal full travel. **Expo** , on the other hand, enables finer-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the pr imary control function (roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of stick travel. For values less than 0 %, the re verse is true: control increases aroundthe neutral position and diminishes towards the endpoints. The degree of “progression” can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the nor mal, linear control characteristics. Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actualcontrol surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases

– depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle tr avel increases over-proportionally with increasing stick throw. The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos

– via an y number of mixer and coup ling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages

– par ticularly for very high-speed models. The graphic screen displays the curve characteristicsdirectly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical line follows the movement of the respective stick, so you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value on the transmitter control.**Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo set tings**  If flight phases are set up in the » **Phase settings** «, page 156, and » **Phase assignment** « menus, page 158, and each assigned a name,e. g. “Normal”, the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. In this scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch to switch between flight phases. **Basic procedure** 1. Switch to the desired flight phase then use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select the desired line: “Roll”, “Pitch ax” or “Tail rot”. 2. Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the right column or the as-yet invisible column for Expo values, see page 31. 3. T ap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The corresponding input field is shown highlighted. 4. Use the selection k eys of the right four-way button to set the desired value. 5. T ap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to complete the entry. 6. A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will any setting made back to its respective default value.
**Dual Rate function**If a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68): 

### mc

  16 20135 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopter models Exponential-Funktion**  If you wish to program the Expo function, use the  button of the left or right-hand four-way button tomove to the right, beyond the Dual Rate value column, until the word “EXPO” is displayed in the centre of the screen instead of “DUAL”:

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Roll Nick Tail

normal

If a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68):

0% Roll

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 ... C4 or C1i ... C4i or one of the logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of “expanded switches”.The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch’s switching direction. In the case of “C” or “L” switches, the stick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defined in the

» **Control switch** « menu, see page 145, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defined in the » **Logical switch** « menu, see page 148

– pro100% Roll

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 ... C4 or C1i ... C4i or one of the logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of “expanded switches”.The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch’s switching direction. In the case of “C” or “L” switches, the stick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defined in the

» **Control switch** « menu, see page 145, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defined in the » **Logical switch** « menu, see page 148

– provided that this men u point is unlocked (available) on the transmitter concerned.Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch will appear in the display together with aswitch symbol indicating the switch’s direction if actuated, e. g. in the «Nor mal» flight phase.

100%

100% 100% Roll Nick Tail DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

Once the value field has been activated with a brief tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button, use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled **SEL**at the bottom edge of the display in order to separately change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions:

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 111% Roll Nick Tail

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 88% Roll Nick Tail

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “100 %”.
Caution: F

or safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.
Some examples of Dual Rate v alues:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%136 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopter models** vided that this menu point is unlocked (available) on the transmitter concerned.Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch will appear in the display together with aswitch symbol indicating the switch’s direction if actuated, e. g. in the «Nor mal» flight phase.

0%

0% 0%

EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value field with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the selection keys on the left or right four-way button can now be used to alter the EXPO value shown in the highlighted field, separately for each of the two switch positions. Now, for example, there is an opportunity to fly with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the other s witch direction:

33%

0% 0%

EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed entry field value displayed in inverse video back to “0 %”. Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.
**Combining Dual Rate and Expo** If v alues have been entered for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effects of both functions will overlap, for example, as follows:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

**Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo** To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective stick, first access the » **Control switch** « menu and assign one of the C1 ... C4 control switches

– “C3”, for e xample

– to the desired transmitter control, e

. g. control 3 f or the nick function. Do not change the switching point for the stick’s neutral position (0 %). No w return to the » **Dual Rate / Expo** « menu and select the corresponding control function (“Nick” in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously defined “C3” control switch:

100% Roll

–––

SEL Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1 C3

A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will confirm the assignment of this switch:

100%

100% 100%

DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

Now use one of the selection keys to move into theright column then move the nick stick into its appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e. g. f or “Nick back” ...

100%

100% DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail 77%

... and „Nick forward“:

100%

100% DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail 111%

The vertical dashed line shows the current nick stick position.137 **Program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopter models**Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.138 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models** 

# Channel **1 curve**

Control characteristics for throttle/spoiler stick
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Channel 1 curve**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick mode

Switch display Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve Curve off

Since the carburetor response or the effect of the airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables you to change the control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake stick

, regardless of whether this control function affects theservo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers. If flight phases have been specified in the » **Phase settings**  « and » **Phase assignment** « menus (see pages 152 and 158) this option can be adapted on a flight-phase basis. The given flight phase name,

e. g. «nor mal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen. The control cur ve can be defined by up to 6 points (termed “reference points” below) placed anywhere along the path of stick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifies the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with. In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points

– namely the end-points at the bottom end of stick tr avel (“L”, low = -100 % tra vel) and the top end of stick travel (“H”, high = +100 % tra vel)

– define a linear character istic curve. First, switch to your chosen flight phase, if necessary. **Setting reference points** By moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points “L” and “H”.The current stick position is also displayed in numerical form on the “Input” line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the “Output”, and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The controlsignal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the stick is at 0 % of control tra vel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the character istic curve is linear. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points “L” and “H”, although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. If necessary , use the left or right-hand arrow button  to move the marker frame down to the “Point” line:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve

normal Curve off

Move the stick. If a question mark can be seen in the “Point” frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-waybutton. Simultaneously, the “?” is replaced by a number and the value field to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video.

1 +50% +50% +50% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points “L” and “H” is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. **Erasing reference points** To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the stick to move the vertical line into the vici nity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and the associated value are superimposed in the “Point” line, you can activate the Value field by pressing the central **SET** button of theright-hand four-way button, then erase it by simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the righthand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). A brief press of the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button concludes the procedure. **Changing reference point values** Move the stick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: “L” (low), 1 ... 4 or “H” (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button to activate the Value field. The reference point value displayed in inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to +125 % without influencing the neighboring ref erence points. 

### mc

  16 20139 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models** Example:

2 +50% –75% –75% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

In this sample screen image, reference point “2” has been set to -75 %.

Note: If the stic k does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the“Output” line always relates to the current stick position.
**Trim point function** Alter natively, jumping through active reference points, in ascending or descending order, can be done with the  selection keys of the left four-way button. Note that “active” reference points are those which have already been set. When a jump is made from one to another, the point value field for the jump’s destination reference point in the screen’s Point line will be displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph will be marked (L, 1 ... max. 4 and H) in inverse video and with a small triangle. The selection keys on the right four-way button can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.

2 +50% –75% –75% Trim point

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

One touch on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button terminates this trim point function.
**Trim offset function** When a v alue field is active, i. e . in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the  selection keys of the left four-way button but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys of the left four-way button within a range of ±25 %:

1 0% +50% +50% Trim offset

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

1 0% 0% 0% Trim offset

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

A tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will also terminate this function.
**Trim x-axis function** This function is activ ated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) selection key of the right four-way button with an active (i. e . inverse video) value field. You canthen use the selection keys on the right four-way button to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish: ? 0% –33% 0% Trim X-axis

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned hor izontally further away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a “?” sign will reappear in the line Point.This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifies that afurther point can be set at the current control position.

• Please note that the percentage v alue on the “Out

put” line always relates to the current stick position and not to the position of the point. **Smoothing the Channel 1 curve** In the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %, ref erence point 2 to +25 % and ref erence point 3 to -75 % as descr ibed in the last section:

1 –50% 0% 0% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

This “jagged” curve profile can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Starting from the situation in the previous illustration, first press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button to conclude the procedure. Use the Select but-140 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models** ton  of the right-hand four-way button to move up to the Value field of the “Curve” line, then press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button once more:

1 –50% 0% 0% off

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

Now press one of the Select buttons of the right-hand four-way button in order to switch from “(Curve) off” to “(Curve) on” (or vice versa).

1 –50% 0% 0% on

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle or airbrake curves. A specific application example can be found in the programming examples on page 285.141 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopter models** 

# Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stick
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Channel 1 curve**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick mode

Switch display Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve Curve off

Since the carburetor response or the effect of collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables modification of the control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch stick

, regardless of whether this control function affects theservo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers. If flight phases have been specified in the » **Phase settings**  « and » **Phase assignment** « menus (see pages 156 and 158) this option can be adapted on a flight-phase basis. The given flight phase name,

e. g. «nor mal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen. The control cur ve can be defined by up to 6 points (termed “reference points” below) placed anywhere along the path of stick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifies the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with. Please note that the curve characteristic you set here acts as the input signal for specific mixers in the

» **Helicopter mixer** « menu, page 188. 

### »Helicopter mixer«

Ch1 
Ch1  Tail rotor Ch1-

curve Pitch
Thro Pitch stick

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points

– namely the end-points at the bottom end of stick tr avel (“L”, low = -100 % tra vel) and the top end of stick travel (“H”, high = +100 % tra vel)

– define a linear character istic curve. First, switch to your chosen flight phase, if necessary. **Setting reference points** By moving the transmitter control (motor/collective pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points “L” and “H”. The current stick position is also displayed in numerical form on the “Input” line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the “Output”, and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the stick is at 0 % of control tra vel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the character istic curve is linear. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points “L” and “H”, although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. If necessar y, use the left or right-hand arrow button  to move the marker frame down to the “Point” line:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve

normal Curve off

Move the stick. If a question mark can be seen in the “Point” frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-waybutton. Simultaneously, the “?” is replaced by a number and the value field to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video:

1 +50% +50% +50% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points “L” and “H” is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. **Erasing reference points** To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the stick to move the vertical line into the vici nity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and the associated value are superimposed in the “Point” line, you can activate the Value field by pressing the central **SET** button of theright-hand four-way button, then erase it by simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the righthand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). A brief press of the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button concludes the procedure. 

### mc

  16 20142 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopter models Changing reference point values**  Move the stick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: “L” (low), 1 ... 4 or “H” (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button to activate the Value field. The reference point value displayed in inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to +125 % without influencing the neighbor ing reference points. Example:

2 +50% –75% –75% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

In this sample screen image, reference point “2” has been set to -75 %.

Note: If the stic k does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the“Output” line always relates to the current stick position.
**Trim point function** Alter natively, jumping through active reference points, in ascending or descending order, can be done with the  selection keys of the left four-way button. Note that “active” reference points are those which have already been set. When a jump is made from one to another, the point value field for the jump’s destination reference point in the screen’s Point line will be displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph will be marked (L, 1 ... max. 4 and H) in inverse video and with a small triangle. The selection keys on the right four-way button can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.

2 +50% –75% –75% Trim point

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

One touch on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button terminates this trim point function.
**Trim offset function** When a v alue field is active, i. e . in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the  selection keys of the left four-way button but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys of the left four-way button within a range of ±25 %:

1 0% +50% +50% Trim offset

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

1 0% 0% 0% Trim offset

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

A tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will also terminate this function.
**Trim x-axis function** This function is activ ated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) selection key of the right four-way button with an active (i. e . inverse video) value field. You can then use the selection keys on the right four-way button to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish:

? 0% –33% 0% Trim X-axis

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned hor izontally further away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a “?” sign will reappear in the line Point.This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifies that afurther point can be set at the current control position.

• Please note that the percentage v alue on the “Out

put” line always relates to the current stick position and not to the position of the point. **Smoothing the Channel 1 curve** In the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %, ref erence point 2 to +25 % and ref erence point 3 to -75 % as descr ibed in the last section:

1 –50% 0% 0% normal off Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

This “jagged” curve profile can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.143 **Program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopter models** Starting from the situation in the previous illustration, first press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-waybutton to conclude the procedure. Use the Select button  of the right-hand four-way button to move up to the Value field of the “Curve” line, then press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button once more:

1 –50% 0% 0% off

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

Now press one of the Select buttons of the right-hand four-way button in order to switch from “(Curve) off” to “(Curve) on” (or vice versa).

1 –50% 0% 0% on

normal Input Output Point

Ch1 curve Curve

Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle or airbrake curves. A specific application example can be found in the programming examples on page 285 and 323.144 **Program description - Switch display** 

# Switch display

Displaying switch positions This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Switch display**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Switch display Control switch Channel 1 curve

Phase settings Phase assignment Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Switch

Control Switch

C1 C3 C4 5 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 11 4

C2

This feature is used to check the functions and givean overview of switches 1 ... 15 and the programmable control switches C1... C4. If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed by one of the display items changing from an OFF to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the legibility of this screen, a closed switch field is also shown in inverse video (i. e . on a dark background).For control switches C1 ... C4, activation of the corresponding transmitter control

– which m ust have been previously assigned on the » **Control switch** «
menu

– will re veal the control switch number and direction.
Note: Switch numbering 1 to 15 as shown here correspondsto the labeling of switch plug-in locations on the transmitter’s circuit board and not necessarily to the numbering of the transmitter’s switch board. The numbering of the switches has no effect on the programming of the transmitter, however. 

### mc

  16 20145 **Program description - Control switches** 

# Control switches

Programming the control switches This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Control switch**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Switch display Channel 1 curve

Phase settings Phase assignment Logical switch Control switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Gb1 0%

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL With many functions, it makes sense not to trigger their actuation by using one of the normal switches, but to trigger them automatically by the specific, freely programmable position of a transmitter control or stick. Typical applications:

• On/Off switching of an on-board glo w plug in conjunction with the carburetor setting and/or motor speed. (The glow plug heater switch for this will be controlled by a transmitter-side mixer.)

• Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the simple r unning time of electric motors

• Automated s witch-off of a combi “aileron  rudder” mixer when extending the airbrakes, e. g. so as to match the bank attitude of the model to the g round slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction of flight also being affected by the rudder (if the mixer were active).

• Low ering landing flaps, adjusting elevator trim and/or executing specific Dual Rate, Exponential and Differential switchings when coming in to land, as soon as the throttle stick is moved beyond the switching point. If required, a control switch can be overridden using a separately assigned switch in the 5th column. The programs of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT are equipped with a total of four socalled control switches (“C1” to “C4”).Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be assigned you have the option not only of using the maximal 19 possible transmitter switches, but also ofchoosing and assigning one of the “C1” ... “C4” control switches from the list of expanded switches

– as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68.Furthermore, combining a control switch with an additional switch (as described later) also permits more complex switching permutations. **Basic procedure:** 1. If no transmitter control is assigned, the corresponding input field of the column labeled **SEL** (second column from the left) will be empty. 2. Use the selection ke ys of the left or right four-way button to select the line for the desired control switch (1 to 4). 3. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button . 4. Mov e your selected transmitter control.The associated transmitter control number appears in the input field of the column above the left **SEL**

. 5. Use the selection ke ys on the left or right four-way button to move to the right into the column labeled **STO**

. 6. Mov e the transmitter control to the desired switching point then briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to save the switching point. 7. Complete the remaining settings such as switching direction, etc. 8

. Exit from the menu with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button . **Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch**  Using the selection keys on the left or right four-way button, select your chosen line (1 to 4). Following a final tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-waybutton to activate the control assignment, the message shown below will appear in the display:

SEL 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL Move desired control adj.

For example, the right-side proportional slider is now to be assigned to control switch “C1”, the default throttle limiter for a helicopter model memory. So just move this control in any direction. As soon as this is detected, the control name appears on the display:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 0%

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL

**Resetting a control switch back to “free”** To reset a control switch back to “free”, make sure the display is as below ... 

### mc

  16 20146 **Program description - Control switches** SEL 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL Move desired control adj.

... then, with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the entry for a control will be erased. **Defining the switching point** Using the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame into the column labeled **STO** (store). Move the selected transmitter control to the position at which the switching point, i. e. the switch between OFF/ON, should trigger and briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The current position is displayed, for example “+85 %”:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 +85%

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL The switching point can be altered at any time with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button.
Note:Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control’s travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. If a 2-way or 3-way switch is used to operate a control switch, the switch point should be programmed in advance with one of the transmitter’s proportional controls. First, assign the corresponding proportional control in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such a way that will ensure the subsequent configuration for the 2-way or 3-way switch will reliably exceed this value. If you do not, the switching function will be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds the value set! To complete the procedure, cancel the transmitter control assignment then assign the 2-way or 3-way switch.
**Setting the switching direction** The switching direction of the control switch is changed as required in the 4th column. Use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame into the column labeled **SEL** (select). Following a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the switch direction can by changed back-and-forth between “normal” and “reversed” with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 +85%

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 +85%

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL
A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the switch direction back to “=>”. The current switch position of the control switch is displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon next to the number of the control switch. Notes:

• In this example control s witch ”C1” is open as longas transmitter control “Lever 2” (the throttle limiter for a helicopter) is less than +85 % of control tra vel. It closes once the switching point is excee

ded, i. e. by a value over +85 % and up to the upper limit.

• In the abov e example with the switching direction reversed, control switch “C1” remains closed while the transmitter control is at less than +85 % of full tra vel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded, in this example a value between +85 % and the upper tra vel end-point, “C3” will open.

• If a control switch

– e

. g. “C1”

– has multiple assign

ments, you should bear in mind that the switching direction set here applies to all C3 switches.

• The switch state can also be in verted by reversing the control in the » **Control adjust** « menu. **Combining a control switch with a switch** The control switch can be overridden by a further switch, so that e. g. in cer tain flight situations the function to be triggered can be activated independently ofthe control position and thus the position of the control switch.Change to the value field in the 5th column, the column above the rightmost switch symbol. In the simplest case, select one of the switches mounted in thetwo switch panels, as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. The number of this switch, e. g. “10”, appears on the display in the next-to-the last column at the right, together with a switch icon indicating the switch’s current state.147 **Program description - Control switches** SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 +85%

STO ––– –––

SEL 10

While this switch is open, the “C1” control switch is active, i. e. it triggers at the switching point; if theswitch is closed, the control switch now remains permanently closed as well, independently of the control position and switching direction:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch Lv2 +85%

STO ––– –––

SEL 10

**Combining two control switches** For more complex applications, however, it can provenecessary to override this control switch with a second control switch. Example: Control switch “C1” will now be assigned to control function 3 (= control 3) instead of its pre vious assignment “Lever2”. The switching point is at its center point, i. e. at 0 %. The switch chosen in the next-tothe-last right column is “C2” from the list of expandedswitches. This “C2” control switch will now be allocated in its own line to the right proportional slider “Slide2”, whose switch-point is +50 %: SEL 0%

0% +50% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch

STO –––

––– Cn3 C2 Sl2

0% SELThe switching directions indicated in the fourth column from the left will now show control switch “C2” as being closed as long as stick (control 3) and/or “Slide 2” are located on the other side of their switch-points.
**Application** In order to make these control switches usable, they can be specified in those menus which use switches by calling them up via the additional “expanded switches” selection menu:
Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)
A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will afford access to the expanded switches: Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control switch “C1 ... C4”, fixed switch “FX” or logical switch “L1 ... L8” or the respected inverted switch “C1i ... C4i”, “FXi” or “L1i ... L8i”, for example, “C3”:
Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1 C3

A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will adopt the selected switch into the menu: 8 7

15 VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

Note regarding the inverted switches: If you select an inverted switch during the assignment process

– e

. g. “G3i” instead of “G3”

– the only differ

ence is that the switching direction is simply reversed, i. e. if a particular switch is intended to activate a function

– e. g. a mix er

– when turned on, then the

same s witch with the “i” suffix (= inverted) activates this function when it is turned off. Typical applications might be a need for one and the same switch to turn one function on, and simultaneously to turn a secondfunction off, and vice versa. These facilities, especially when used in conjunction with logical switches (described in the following section) can be exploited to cope with extremely complex switching systems.148 **Program description - Logical switches** 

# Logical switches

Programming logical switches This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Logical switches**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Switch display Channel 1 curve

Phase settings Phase assignment Control switch Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

AND AND AND L1 L2 L3

––– L4 Logical switch AND

––– ––– –––

SEL L1 L2 L3 L4

––– ––– ––– –––

This function, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT and can be unlocked on the 

### mc16 HoTT as an extra-cost option, can be used to link together two switches, control switches and / or logical switches, or any combination of the above, inan “AND” or “OR” arrangement. A total of eight logical switches “L1 ... L8” can be programmed in every model memory. The result of such a logical switch function

– shown in the displa y’s rightmost column

– can be used as another switch function. Allocation of a switch to a logical function is done in the familiar manner in thecolumns labeled by the two switch symbols, as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. That is, by moving the respective switch from OFF to ON or, after a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, by selecting one of the expanded switches with the selection keys:

AND L4 Logical switch

SEL L4 Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

Logical switch

SEL Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Potential applications for this: Multiple functions, which are normally independent of one another, are to be put into a defined state by way of an »Emergency switch«.

**“AND” / “OR”** Once a given value field has been activated in the column labeled **SEL** , the “AND” and “OR” logic operator can be selected with the selection keys.

**• “AND” function**  The logical s witch is only closed when both input switches are closed.

**• “OR” function**  The logical s witch is closed when at least one of the input switches is closed.
Note: The difference between AND and OR logic switches is made clear by the settings and input states of the display figure below. OR AND AND L1 L2 L3

––– L4 Logical switch AND 4 2 L1 L2 L3 L4

–––

3 1

SEL L1 L2

“L3” is only closed when both the “L1” and “L2” switches are closed. This means that both switches, 1 and 2, must be closed and, at the same time, either 3 or 4.
**Anwendung** In order to make these logical switches usable, they can be specified in those menus which use switches by calling them up via the additional “expanded switches” selection menu:
Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)
A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will afford access to the expanded switches: Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control switch “C1 ... C4”, fixed switch “FX” or logical switch “L1 ... L8” or the respected inverted switch “C1i ... C4i”, “FXi” or “L1i ... L8i”, for example, “L3i”: Control/Logic/fix sw C2i C3i C4i L1i L2i L4i L3i L5i L6i L7i
A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will adopt the selected switch into the menu: 

### mc

  16 20149 **Program description - Logical switches** Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s 0s Stop L3I L3I

SEL

Remark about inverted switches:Selection of an inverted switch for a switch assignment, e. g “L1i” instead of “L1”, simply specifies the opposite switch direction (state), i. e . non-invertedusage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-on state but inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-off state. Such applications arise when, for example, one and the same switch is to switch one function on but, at the same time, it is to switch a second function off, and vice versa. Logical switches permit other, quite complex, switching options to be created.150 **How is a flight phase programmed?**  

# How **is a flight phase programmed?** The concept of flight phase programming

**General information on flight phase programming** During a flight, you will often want to apply different settings

– e

. g. flap or trim settings for a fixed-wing aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings for a helicopter

– at par ticular times in the flight (e. g. take-off, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically using switches or control switches. Flight phases are also of great utility during flight testing. You can configure various set-ups and then switch between them during the flight: this enables you to identify the most appropriate program set-up for your model quickly and easily.**The basic programming procedure is a three stage process**  1. First, y ou have to set up the different flight phases, i. e . you assign names to phases 1 ... max. 7. Each name is then shown in all phase-specific menusand also on the basic display. To avoid abrupt transitions when switching between the various phases, you can also program a period of time during which a “soft” transition to the next phase takes place.For fixed-wing aircraft programs, these settings are made in the » **Phase settings** « menu.The programming of helicopters begins with either the » **Basic settings, model** « menu, if you wish to set up autorotation or, otherwise, with the

» **Phase settings**  « menu. 2. In the second stage , you use the » **Phase assign ment**  « menu to set up the required “phase switches”. 3. Once these are set, y ou can then move to theflight phase-dependent menus (see the tables below) to start programming the settings for the individual flight phases. **List of the flight phase relevant menus which are available as standard (**   **) and as extra-cost op tions (**   **) in the fixed-wing program of the ...**

**... transmitter** 

### mc-16 **HoTT:**

 **Menu Page**   » **Control adjust** « 118  » **Dual Rate / Expo** « 130  » **Channel 1 curve** « 138  » **Phase settings** « 152  » **Phase assignment** « 158  » **Phase trim** « 160
 » **Non-delayed channels** « 161  » **Flight phase timers** « 166  » **Wing mixers** « 170
 » **Mix active / phase** « 215  » **Trim memory** « 236

**... transmitter** 

### mc-20 **HoTT:**

 **Menu Page**   » **Control adjust** « 118  » **Dual Rate / Expo** « 130  » **Channel 1 curve** « 138  » **Phase settings** « 152  » **Phase assignment** « 158  » **Phase trim** « 160  » **Non-delayed channels** « 161  » **Flight phase timers** « 166  » **Wing mixers** « 170  » **Mix active / phase** « 215  » **Trim memory** « 236 **List of the flight phase relevant menus which are available as standard (**   **) and as extra-cost op tions (**   **) in the helicopter program of the ...**

**... transmitter** 

### mc-16 **HoTT:**

 **Menu Page**   » **Control adjust** « 122  » **Dual Rate / Expo** « 134  » **Channel 1 curve** « 141  » **Phase settings** « 156  » **Phase assignment** « 158
 » **Non-delayed channels** « 161  » **Flight phase timers** « 166  » **Helicopter mixer«** 188
 » **Mix active / phase** « 215  » **Trim memory** « 238

**... transmitter** 

### mc-20 **HoTT:**

 **Menu Page**   » **Control adjust** « 122  » **Dual Rate / Expo** « 134  » **Channel 1 curve** « 141  » **Phase settings** « 156  » **Phase assignment** « 158  » **Non-delayed channels** « 161  » **Flight phase timers** « 166  » **Helicopter mixer«** 188  » **Mix active / phase** « 215  » **Trim memory** « 238 All other menus are model-specific and thus cannotbe programmed separately for each flight phase. Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus apply151 **How is a flight phase programmed?**  uniformly to all flight phases for that specific model. In some cases it may be desirable to use the » **Sup press**  **codes** « menu (see page 84) to remove non-alterable menus from the multi-function list while programming flight phases. Two examples of flightphase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 298.152 **Program description - Phase settings | Winged models** 

# Phase settings

Setting up flight phases **Setting up flight phases** When you set up flight phases for fixed-wing aircraftmodels, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that

– depending on y our model and your settings

– switch times

m uch longer than the default 0.1 s hav e proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don’t currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the “occupied” phases you activate is made only on the

» **Phase assignment** « menu, page 158, when setting “phase switches”. Whether or not one of the phases 1 ... 7 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the “status” column second from left:

**Symbol Meaning** – No switch assigned
+ Phase can be accessed via switch
 Indicates the phase currently active
Note: The “Copy flight phase” option on the » **Copy / Erase** «menu is a useful aid when programming the various flight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specific flight phase; these are then copied to the next flight phase, where they can then be modified as appropriate.

**“Name” column** Briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then assign the needed phases (phase 1 up to maximum of 7 phases) by picking their names from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button

. The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Phase settings**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Phase settings Phase assignment Phase trim Logical switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Within one model memory, the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT lets you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the flight. The grouped settings are typically termed “flight phases” and are programmed in the corresponding menus. Depending on the setting in the “Motor at Ch1” line of the » **Model type** « menu (“Throttle min. forward/back” or “none”), your transmitter’s screen will offer you the additional columns “Motor” and “Sw.time” (transition time) or just the column “Sw. time” (transition time) for your settings to the right of the “ph. Tim” (flight phase timers) when you call up the » **Phase settings** « menu point ...

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Pha5 –

– – –  “Phase 1”, the “Normal phase”, which is always active if ...

• ... no phase switch is set in the » **Phase assign ment**  « menu or if

• no phase has been assigned to specific combinations of s witches. The definition of the phase name “Normal” could therefore be a useful one to adopt for “Phase 1”. The names themselves have absolutely no technical significance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all flight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter’s basic display. **Column “ph.Tim.”** In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are configured in the » **Flight phase timers** « menu, page 166. **Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2** The flight phase timers “Clk 1 ... 3” plus “Time1” and “Time2” run only in the flight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other flightphases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any flight phase via the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. While you can obviously record lap times using “Lap” and a switch, the two timers “Time1” and “Time2” have the following meaning:

**• Time1**  This timer will only measure time during which the

s witch or control switch assigned in the “Lap time/ Tim tab” line of the » **Flight phase timers** « menu, page 166, is “closed”. The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. 

### mc

  16 20153 **Program description - Phase settings | Winged models** This counter field is highlighted as soon as the switch for the “Time1” timer is “opened”, i. e. the timer is stopped:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V 0:00.0 M Time1 00

When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times. Application: Measurement of e. g. motor s witch-on times, if the same switch also actuates the motor.

**• Time2**  This timer stores both the “off ” and the “on” periods for the associated switch, i. e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by “1” again as time passes.Each time count can be suspended with the center **ESC** key of the right four-way button, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the “Time2” timer.In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the “Time2” timer must first be suspended by using the **ESC** key of the right four-way button. Application: In addition to the motor runtimes, for example, the unpowered glide times between these could also be recorded. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display.
**Column “Motor”**

Note: This column is only available if “forward/back” is present in the “Motor on C1” line of the » **Model type** «
menu.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5 
+
+ Normal Launch Dist.

–

– yes yes yes yes yes

**• “yes”**  The motor connected to receiv er output 1 will be controlled by the C1 stick (throttle/brake stick). The brake system to be set up on the » **Wing mix**

**ers** « menu is deactivated:
Brake settings

normal OFF

**• “no”** The motor connected to receiver output 1 is decoupled from the C1 stic k (throttle/brake stick) and is held in its OFF position

– as specified by the setting “Throttle min. forward / back”

– automatically. The br ake system to be set up in the » **Wing mix**

**ers** « menu is activated and is actuated by the C1 stick: Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0%

normal

Note: The settings available depend on the number ofcontrol surface servos selected on the line “Ailerons/Camber-changing flaps in the » **Model type** «
menu.

**Column “Sw. time”**When you switch between flight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a “soft” transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accord

ingly, there is also an option for specifying a differenttime for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1. Use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled “Timer” and, if applicable, also the column labeled “Motor”.



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 


### +
+ Normal Launch Dist.

–

– 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

0.1s 0.1s

Following a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the switchover time value in the field displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9.9 s:154 **Program description - Phase settings | Winged models** Example:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Pha4 Pha5 


### +
+

–

– 3.0s 2.0s 0.1s 0.1s Sw.time Normal Launch Dist. 4.0s

The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 4,0 s. The time for a switchover from, for example, Phase 1 to Phase 3, is set to 2,0 s and the time for a switchover from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 “Launch” is 3,0 s

. Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when,

e. g. switching between extremely different flight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal flight. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time in the currently active value field back to 0,1 s

. Note: The “switch time” set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specific to flight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the » **Wing mixers** « menu, see page 170. Accordingly, the transition between flightphase-specific mixers does not occur abruptly. However, if individual servos are to be switched without a delay then these can be defined accordingly in the

» **Non-delayed chan** « menu, see page 161.155 **For your notes**156 **Program description - Phase settings | Helicopter models** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Phase settings**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Phase settings Phase assignment Logical switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan

Fl. phase timers
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

Auto Pha1 Pha2

Name ph.Tim. Pha3

–

– – –

Pha4  Autorot

Within one model memory, the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT lets you program up to 6 discrete groups of settings for various conditions metduring the flight. These are in addition to the autorotation flight phase that can be set up in the » **Basic settings, model**  « menu. The grouped settings are typically termed “flight phases” and are programmed in appropriate menus. **Setting up flight phases** When you set up flight phases for helicopter models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that

– depending on y our model and your settings

– s witch times much longer than the default 0.1 s ha ve proven useful. Youcan also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don’t currently have a use for 

# Phase settings

Setting up flight phases them, since the decision as to which of the “occupied” phases you activate is made only on the » **Phase as signment**  « menu, page 158, when setting “phase switches”. The “Status” column, second from the left, showswhich one of the phases 1 ... 6, including the autorotation phase this is 7, has already been assigned to a switch, plus the current status of that switch:

**Symbol Meaning** – No switch assigned
+ Phase can be accessed via switch
 Indicates the phase currently active
Note: The “Copy flight phase” option on the » **Copy / Erase** «menu is a useful aid when programming the various flight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specific flight phase; these are then copied to the next flight phase, where they can then be modified as appropriate.

**Column “Name”**The first line, and thus the first flight phase, is reserved for autorotation flight, see » **Basic settings, model**  « menu. Accordingly, the predefined name cannot be changed. Use the selection keys to move to the line “Phase 1”. Briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then assign the needed phase (phase 1 up to maximum of 6 phases) by picking the respective name from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button. The order in which phases 1 to max. 6 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with “Phase 1”, the “Normal phase”, which is always active if ...

• ... no phase s witch is set in the » **Phase assign ment**  « menu or if

• no phase has been assigned to specific combina

tions of switches. The definition of the phase name “Normal” could therefore be a useful one to adopt for “Phase 1”. The names themselves have absolutely no technical significance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all flight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter’s basic display. **Column “ph. Tim.”** In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are configured in the » **Flight phase timers** « menu, page 166. **Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2** The flight phase timers “Clk 1 ... 3” plus “Time1” and “Time2” run only in the flight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other flightphases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any flight phase via the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. While you can obviously record lap times using “Lap” and a switch, the two timers “Time1” and “Time2” have the following meaning:

**• Time1**  This timer will only measure time dur ing which the switch or control switch assigned in the “Lap time/ Tim tab” line of the » **Flight phase timers** « menu, page 166, is “closed”. The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. This counter field is highlighted as soon as the switch for the “Time1” timer is “opened”, i. e . the timer is stopped: 

### mc

  16 20157 **Program description - Phase settings | Helicopter models** STARLET #02

2:22h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V 0:00.0 M Time1 00

When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times. Application: Measurement of (e. g.) flight phases with increased motor speed, if the same s witch is used to actuate flight phase switching.

**• Time2**  This timer stores both the “off ” and the “on” periods for the associated switch, i. e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by “1” again as time passes.Each time count can be suspended with the center **ESC** key of the right four-way button, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the “Time2” timer.In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the “Time2” timer must first be suspended by using the **ESC** key of the right four-way button. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display.
**Column “Sw. time”**When you switch between flight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a “soft” transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accord

ingly, there is also an option for specifying a differenttime for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1. However, for reasons of safety, transition into the autorotation flight phase should **ALWAYS** be set to switch without any time delay. The arrow “->” in the column labeled “Sw.time” at the end of the “Autorot” line indicates that a delay can be set when transitio

ning FROM (!) autorotation INT O (!) another phase. Use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the right beyond the “ph.Tim.” column:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 


### +
+ Normal Hover

–

– 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

0.1s 0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

Following a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the switchover time value in the field displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9,9 s. Example:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 


### +
+ Normal Hover

–

– 3.0s 2.0s 5.5s

4.0s 0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

A delay of 5,5 s applies when switching FR OM autorotation into any other phase. A delay of 0,0 s alwa ys applies when switching TO auto-rotation. The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 3,0 s. When switching from e. g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the

s witch time is set to 4,0 s. Such asymmetr ic transition times can be useful when,

e. g. s witching between extremely different flight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal flight. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time in the currently active value field back to 0,1 s.
Note: The “switch time” set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specific to flight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the » **Helicopter mixer** « menu, see page 188. Accordingly, the transition between flight phase-specific mixers does not occur abruptly. If you want individual servos to be switched without a delay, however, define these accordingly in the

» **Non**

**- dela**  **yed channels** « menu, see page 161, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.158 **Program description - Phase assignment** 

# Phase assignment

Setting up flight phases
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Phase assignment**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Phase settings

Phase trim Logical switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase assignment

Fl. phase timers Phase settings Logical switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase assignment

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

Phase assignment prior. A B C D E F

1 combi

Note: A phase name appears to the right of the phase number at the bottom right of the display only if you have assigned the name beforehand on the » **Phase settings**  « menu. In the » **Phase settings** « menu, described above separately for fixed-wing and helicopter models, you will have set up names for your phases. On this

menu

– which is identical for both model types

– you
m ust now specify the switches or switch combinations that you want to use to trigger each phase. Oneexception for helicopter menu: one of the two autorotation switches must be set on the menu » **Basic settings, model**  «. **Please note the following priorities:**

• If no flight phase switches nor these names have been assigned in this menu, the model is in flight phase “1”. Accordingly, by the time you start programming flight phases, you should therefore have already given this flight phase the phase name “Normal”.

• Independent of the phases with allocated switch settings made in this menu , the autorotation phase (only present for the “Helicopter” model type and to be assigned a switch in the » **Basic settings, model**  « menu) always (!) takes precedence. Accordingly, as soon as the auto-rotation switch inquestion is activated, the following warning appears:

A B E F

1 Phase assignment prior. combi Autorot

• Phase switch “A” is given priority over all subsequent s witch positions, from “B” to “F”

• Phase switch “B” is given priority over all subsequent switch positions, from “C” to “F”

• 3-wa y switches should always be assigned from the middle position. Therefore use switch “A” and/or switch “B” only if you wish to change from any other flight phase

– apart from the helicopter’ s autorotation phase

– directly into the phase that is assigned to this switch. **Programming flight phase switches**Once you have configured your desired switch position, “A” to “F”, using the selection keys on the left or right four-way button, a switch (whether a “normal” switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant: you must ensure only that you assign what are, for you, the “correct” switches. (In the helicopter program, for example, you should also take care to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the » **Basic settings,**  **model** « menu.) Example: 4 flight phases with phase priority

A B C D E F

1 normal 2 6 5 Phase assignment prior. combi

**Assigning flight phases to switch positions** Now that names have been assigned to the flight phases (1 ... max. 6) in the » **Phase settings** « menu and also programmed switches in this menu, but ... at the bottom right of the display screen, you only see <1 Nor mal >

– regardless of the positions the switches are in!? Use the selection k eys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame down and to the right and then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: 

### mc

  16 20159 **Program description - Phase assignment** A B C D E F 2 6 5

1 normal Phase assignment prior. combi

Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches that you have assigned, and assign one of the flight phase names from the list you selected beforehand on the » **Phase settings** « menu to this switch position or combination. Here, for example, we assign the “Launch” phase to the closed (“I”) priority switch “A” ...

A B C D E F 2 6 5

2 Launch Phase assignment prior. combi

... if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase regardless of the “C” ... “F” switch positions, because the same switch activates an electric motor, etc. Use the same approach to set the other switches or combinations of switches. Theoretically

– f or the situation where all three are closed

– y ou could use the three single switches shown in the example to define an additional fifth flight phase on the » **Phase settings** « menu. How

e ver, since this example assumes just four flight phases, you can leave the default phase name as «1 Normal» for this switch position. Leave this menu in the familiar way, with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. Tips:

• If you have named more phases than you currently have switches defined for then this is not really problematic. You can repeat and change your switch assignment as you wish at any point in time. And you can also name additional phases at any time and then assign switches to them.

• When assigning s witches, check whether the switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure that you avoid duplicate assignments. **Important notice: Before a phase switch is assigned, the model set**  **tings configured are now to be found in the flight phase «1 Normal», i.**  **e . all flight phase-dependent**  **menus are reset to the standard configurations for all other flight phases.**  **To avoid having to start from scratch in every flight phase, you can copy over these standard**  **settings by using the command “Copy flight phase” on the “Copy / Erase” menu to replace**  **them with flight data obtained from the «Normal» flight phase. You then need only to make further**  **flight phase-specific changes to the settings.**160 **Program description - Phase trim | Winged models** 

# Phase trim

Flap settings specific to flight phases This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Phase trim**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Phase settings Phase assignment Logical switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase trim

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

 0%

ELEV
Depending on the settings made on the “Aileron/camber flaps” line of the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, and in the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, this menu offers at least one control function for ELEV ...

Normal  0%

ELEV normal
... on the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter up to three control functions (ELE, AIL and FLAP) for flight phase specific trim settings. On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with optional twelve channels, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, up to five control functions (ELE, AIL, AIL2, FLAP and FLAP2) for flight phase specific trim settings. The setting of the flight phase switches, to be defined beforehand in the » **Phase assign ment**  « menu, determines the line that is chosen. An asterisk marks the flight phase currently active. At the same time, the name of the respective flight phase is also shown at the bottom left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the currently active flight phase, e. g.:

Normal  0%

ELEV Launch 0%

AI Launch Thermal Dist. 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Column **“ELEV”**In the column labeled “ELEV” a phase-specific elevator trim setting can be stored. **Important notice:**

• Settings made in this column hav e an immediate effect on elevator trim and, accordingly, the trim setting display.

• Please note in this context that the “elevator”, “aileron” and “rudder” trims are defined by default as “flight phase specific” on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter. However, this standard setting can be changed to “global” using the optional » **Stick mode**  « menu, page 114, which can be unlocked as an extra-cost option.

• Please note in this context that the “elevator”, “aileron” and “rudder” trims are defined by default as “flight phase specific” on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. However, this standard setting can be changed to “global” using the » **Stick mode** « menu, page 114. Column **“AI”** and **“FL”**

... ... on the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter.
Column **“AI”, “AI2”, “FL”, “FL2”**

... ... on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with optional twelve channels, as well as the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, which has twelve channels as standard:The values in these columns (max. 4) are identical to those in the “Fl.pos” (flap position) line on the “Multi-flap men u” within the » **Wing mixers** « menu, see page 181. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly

– and vice versa. After selecting the appropr iate column with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button and a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, these values can be entered, independent of one another, with the selection keys within a range of ±150 %. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in the currently active value field back to 0 %. 

### mc

  16 20161 **Program description - Non-delayed channel** 

# Non-delayed channel

Channel-dependent delays to switching
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Non delayed channel**  « menu option in the Multi-function

menu:

Phase settings

Phase trim Logical switch

Timers (general) Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan

Phase settings Logical switch

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Phase assignment Non-delayed chan

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.
Non-delayed channels
non-delay normal

normal 1 2 3 4 5 6

On the » **Phase settings** « menu, you will have set the necessary switch times for flight phase transitions. In this menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, you can now disable the transition delay set previously, per flight phase and for individual control channels

– e

. g. for the motor channel for electric models or heading-lock systems for helicopter gyros, etc. Switch over to the corresponding flight phase. This is shown at the bottom left of the display.Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move the “  ” onto the corresponding channel then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. The switch icon changes from “normal” to “non-delay” and vice versa:
Non-delayed channels
non-delay normal

normal 7 8 9 10 11 12

Note: If you have an eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with the » **Non-delayed channels** « menu point unlocked, this display will only show control channels 1 ... 8, reflecting the reduced number of channels. 

### mc

  16 20162 **Program description - Timers (general)** 

# Timers (general)

Timers on the basic display This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. The default transmitter display shows atotal of three timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on the left of the display, plus a “Top” and a “Centr” timer on the right of the display:

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M HoTT

Another, flight-phase specific timer can also be configured with settings in the two menus » **Flight phase timers**  «, page 166, and » **Phase settings** «, pages 152 and 156. This optional flight phase timer

– such as the lap time timer

– appears underneath the “Centr” (flight time) timer:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V 0:00.0 M Time1 00

To configure the “Top” and/or “Centr” timer, use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to access the menu option » **Timers (general)** « in the Multi-function menu:
Non-delayed chan Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase Non-delayed chan Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 0:00 0:00

**“Model time”** This timer shows the currently registered total access time to the currently active model memory location. If necessary, this automatic time acquisition can also be influenced by assigning an on/off switch to this “Model time” timer in the rightmost column labeled with the switch symbol. This timer can then be switched on and off as desired. This switch is assigned (and erased again as required) as described in the section„Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time back to “0:00 h”.
**“Batt. time”** This oper ating hours timer records the transmitter’s total switch-on time since the last time the battery was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. A switch cannot be assigned to this function. This timer is automatically reset to “0:00 h” when the tr ansmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is significantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process or the installation of a replacement batter y. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will also reset this time back to “0:00 h”.
**“T op” and “Centr”**  These two timers are located at the top right of the basic display (see the screen image immediately to the left) and can be assigned a different name; their function and mode of operation varies according to the name you give them. Independently of the name each is given, the “Top” and “Centr” timer can be programmed to run any length of time forwards or backwards

– see further below. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to select your desired timer and complete your selection with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 0:00 0:00 Stop

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

**“Stop** (watch) **”** or **“Motor** (runtime) **”** Both of these two timer variants can be started and stopped using any of the available switches. The timer defined as “Stopwatch” or “Motor runtime” sums the “ON” times continually, so that once your aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all switch “ON” times since the timer was last reset. **“Flight** (time) **”** This timer is especially for measuring flight time: it can be started with an assigned switch and stopped (once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic display with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left 

### mc

  16 20163 **Program description - Timers (general)** four-way button. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ). If you wish to assign a control switch, you must first define the switch on the » **Control switch** « menu and specify the switching point along the travel of the transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then be started by “opening the throttle” or by opening the throttle limiter for helicopter models.
Note:The combination of the flight time timer and stopwatch means that you can glance at the display at any time and see how long you have been flying since the timers were started, plus the total motor runtime within this particular period of flight time.

**“Frame** (time) **”** The time frame timer is intended primarily for use bycompetition pilots, who are frequently given a timeframe within which they must complete certain tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way as the flight time timer. To stop the timer, first ensure the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then touch and hold the  or  selection keys then touch the center **ESC** key. **Switch assignment**
Use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame next to the triangle as shown in the screen image shown below to the rightmost column of the relevant line:

Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s 0s –––

–––
SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight Here, you assign a switch as described in the section„Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68. Typical application: The “stop watch” and “flight timer” are both to be started simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as a user-defined switching point is exceeded. For this purpose, define a control switch, e. g. “C1”, in the » **Control switch** « menu, page 145 . To complete the procedure, you select this from the expanded switches (see the section „Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68) and assign it to both these lines:

Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s 0s C1

SEL C1 Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the switching point and resume running above the switching point. The same is not true for the flight time timer, however, which also starts the first time the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped (with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ).

**Switchover between “forward” and “backward”**
**Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)** Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown on the basic display is started with the initial value of “0:00”, then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 59 s and then restar t from 0:00. **Timer runs backwards (countdown function)** In the

– left

– min utes field, select a start time between 0 and 180 min ...

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0:00 180 :00

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

... and in the

– r ight

– seconds field, select a star t time between 0 and 59 s (or an y combination of these):

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 180: 59 0:00

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

**Procedure** 1. Select the desired input field with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. 2. No w tap on **SET** in the center of the right touch pad. 3. Mak e a time selection in the inverse video minutes or seconds field with the selection keys of the right four-way button. 4. Complete the entr y with a tap on the center **SET** key. 5. A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any setting made back to “0” or “00”. 6. F ollowing a switch back to the basic display (by tapping the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button as many times as required), make sure the stopwatch is stopped then simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) to switchover the stopwatch to the “tim-164 **Program description - Timers (general)** er” function. Look at the top right in the following figure.

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stp Flt 10:01 0:00

0.0V 4.1V M HoTT

After the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch starts at the initial value set and runs backward (“countdown clock function”). Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown highlighted.
**“Alarm” timer** The “Alarm” column is accessed by moving the marker frame to the right with the  selection key of the left or right four-way button until it is over the column labeled “Alarm”. In the “Alarm” column a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) can be defined. This is the amount of time the timer is to count down before issuing an acoustic signal. This eliminates the need to repeatedly check the display continually during the flight, for example:

Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s –––

–––
SEL 30s Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any settings made back to “0 s”. **Audible signal sequence** 30 s before z ero: Tr iple beep Single beep every two seconds 20 s before z ero: Double beep Single beep e very two seconds 10 s before z ero: Single beep Single beep e very second 5 s before z ero: ev ery second a single beep at a higher frequency

zero: longer beep signal and changeov er of display presentation to inverse video **Resetting suspended**  **timers** In the case of timers which were previously halted, they are reset to the programmed Start value in the base display by simultaneously pressing the 

or  buttons of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ).

Notes:

• Timers that are running bac kwards are shown on the basic display with a flashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fields.

• A typical application, “Timer activ ation via the C1 stick”, can be found on page 294.

• An interim timer function change becomes activ eafter timer/s have been suspended and subsequently reset by a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ).

• Remember that the timer switches also remain activ

e during programming.165 **For your notes**166 **Program description - Flight phase timers** 

# Fl. phase timers

Selecting and setting
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. A description of how timers are assignedto a flight phase has already been provided in the text for the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152 and 156. The same section has also described the properties of “Time1” and “Time2”. This section now proceeds to describe “Timer 1, 2 and 3” and the “lap counter/time table” timer variants. The additional, flight phase-specific timer selected is displayed on the basic display underneath the “cen

ter” timer , as shown below:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V HoTT M Clk1 0:00

Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Fl. phase timer** « menu option in the Multi-function menu:
Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers

On this menu you can now program “Clks 1 ... 3” as stopwatches (i. e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm timers (i. e. timers that run backwards). You can assign any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the “lap counter/timetable” timer:

Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/Tim tab

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00
Lap Display 0s 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL
The flight phase timers “Timer 1 ... 3” and the “Time1”/”Time2” timers (described in the » **Phase settings**  « section, pp. 152 and 156) run only in the flight phase to which they have been assigned. They are also shown as appropriate on the basic display.During other flight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase (as discussed further below), however, although it can be stopped during any flight phase via the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. **Clks 1, 2 and 3** These timers are started and stopped via a switch or control switch. To do so, first use the selection keys to select the appropriate column via the switch icon at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want by briefly tapping the center **SET** key of the rightfour-way button, as described in the section „Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68. Here, too, a control switch offers you the option of activating the timer via one of the sticks or proportional controls. The switching point along the transmitter control travel is set on the » **Control switch**  « menu, page 145. Remember that the timer switches also remain active in programming mode. **Switching between “forwards” and “backwards”**
**Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards)** In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value “0:00” (min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it will re-star t at “0:00”. **“Countdown” (timer runs backwards)** Following the activation of the corresponding value fields (by tapping the center **SET** key of the right fourway button), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, r ight field) is set, then the timers will run backwards from this initial value following the activation of the assigned switch (see section „Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68), i. e. a “countdown” function will apply. Once the timer reaches zeroit does not stop, however, but continues to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time elapsed after reaching zero.
Note: Timers that are running backwards are shown on the basic display with a flashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fields. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset entry values in the currently active field back to zero.
**“Alarm” timer**

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/Tim tab Lap Display

The input field in the “Alarm” column is activated with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. In this field, use the selection keys on the left or 

### mc

  16 20167 **Program description - Flight phase timers** right four-way button to define a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero isreached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates the need for you to check the screen continually during the flight. **Audible signal sequence** 30 s before z ero: Tr iple beep Single beep ev ery two seconds 20 s before z ero: Double beep Single beep ev ery two seconds 10 s before z ero: Single beep Single beep e very second 5 s before z ero: ev ery second a single beep at a higher frequency

zero: longer beep signal and changeov er of display presentation to inverse video A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset entry values entered in the currently active field to “0 s”.
Note: If timer functionality has been changed at any point, then the ne w changes to settings are made active only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the basic display then making a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) to reset them. Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this third, phase-specific timer is reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). It is stopped in all flight phases at the same time, even if it has not been stopped separately in the other flight phases. **Lap counter/timetable**

––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/Tim tab Lap Display

On the “Lap time/tim tab” line, assign a switch only as described in the section „Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68. Preferably, make use of a momentary switch, which are included as standard equipment only in the switch panels of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters. The lap count is incremented each time by one lap while simultaneously (and automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse counter is shown highlighted:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M Lap 2:33.4 11

“Time1” and “Time2” operate in the same manner; for more details please read the section on the » **Phase settings**  « menu option on page 152 or 156. Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed, each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and 59.9 seconds. To stop the timer in question, tap the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button on the basic display after the flight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now shown in “normal” mode: GRAUBELE #01

2:24h Stp Flt «Speed » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M Lap 4:33.2 22

A simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the counter to “00” **and deletes the stored times**  . However, the timers must have been stopped before this

. Notes:

• If you ha ve selected a normal switch to operate the lap counter , take care to ensure that this switch is set to “OFF” before touching the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button.

• If you should f orget to switch off the lap counter in a phase which is now not currently active, simply touch the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. To swap between the basic display and the “Lap Displa y” ...

01 02 03 04 01:23.4 02:34.5 03:45.6

05 04:56.7 05:67.8 07 08 09 10 00:00.0 00:00.0 00:00.0

11 12 00:00.0 00:00.0 00:00.0 06 06:78.9
... go to the line ...168 **Program description - Flight phase timers Lap display** 

––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/Tim tab Lap Display

... and use the switch assigned. You assign this switch as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68.169 **What is a mixer?** 

# What is a mixer? Basic functionality

With many models, a mix of the model’s functions is often desirable, i. e. coupling aileron to rudder or coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder control surfaces with the same functionality are to be controlled together using a single servo. In all cases, the signal flow at the “output” of the control function on the transmitter control-side “branches”

– , this also

means: “downstream” of transmitter control options such as e. g. » **Dual Rate / Expo** «, » **Control adjust** «,

» **Channel 1 curve** « etc.

– in order for the signal to ha ve its predefined effect on the “input” of another control channel and thus on another receiver output. Example: V-tail mixer

3 3

4Servo4 8 V**C 577**Bes Nr 101Se vo4 8 V**C 577**Bes Nr 410 4 V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs) Elevator stick

Rudder stick Right rudder / elevator Left rudder / elevator Rudder Elevator Elevator
Rudder Rudder Elevator

The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter software contains a large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, which are designedto mix together two (or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer named in the example just above can be activated in the “Tail type” line of the » **Model type**  « menu by selecting “V-tail”, see page 104. In addition, for each model memory in the fixed-wingand helicopter programs, the software makes available a total of eight freely programmable linear mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and four dual mixers; these are available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT only, but can also be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. Also be sure to read the general remarks about “free mixers” in this manual, beginning on page 204.170 **Program description - Wing mixers** control function input 1 (throttle/brak e stick) on the

» **Mix-only channel** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, see page 216, and use it for another purpose with the help of a “free mixer”, see page 205. On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this option can be unlocked as an extra-cost option.

• If “2AIL ” is set in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, then flight-phase dependent flap functio

nality can be achieved with appropriate offset settings for input 5 in the » **Control adjust** « menu, page 160, or alternatively can be achieved by setting appropriate values in the “Offset” column for Input 5 in the » **Control adjust** « menu, see page 118. However, in the interests of clarity youshould always make use of only one of the two facilities.

• For almost an y menu option, you have the optionof checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left f our-way button. **Caution:** With aileron actuation the bars of the » **Servo dis play**  « move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing flap actuation.

• Note that if two flap ser vos have been selected, any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the flaps. The same applies to input 10 if you select “2/4AIL 4FL” on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, as well as the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter.

• A range of options are a vailable for positioning flaps. You can ... a) ... simply accept one position per flight phase, b

y setting only the corresponding trim values. b) ... vary the flaps positioned by a) with a transnames will appear along the bottom display edge,

e. g. «Normal»:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

normal
All options can then also be programmed specific to a flight phase.
Comments:

• In the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, the airbrake mixer control can be re-programmed fromcontrol input 1 to 7 or 8 on the standard eightchannel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, and from 1 to 7, 8 or 9 on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. In allthree variants it is also possible to define the associated Offset point.

• Braking with raised ailerons and, if present, lowered flaps (crow system) can be implemented by making appropriate settings on the “Crow” line of the “Brake settings” sub-menu.

• If you w ould like to alternate between the C1 stick controlling an electric drive system and a butterflysystem, then you can use the options in the “Motor” column on the » **Phase settings** « menu

– see page 152 or ref er to the example on page 291.

• You can also use the oppor tunity to set switch times for a “soft” transition from flight phase to flight phase on the » **Phase settings** « menu, see page 152.

• If your model f eatures multiple wing flaps and a “crow / butterfly system” (see below), but withoutadditional airbrakes, then you can separate output 1 (usually freed up by the above system) from 

# Wing mixers

Calibrating the wing flap system
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
Within the menu tree of the menu » **Wing mixers**  « ...

Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer
... the sub-menus and options available depend entirely on the number of aileron and flap servos set up on the » **Model type** « menu, page 104 ...

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 2AIL Model type

Brake Off 1 In +100% SEL
... which means that the only settings listed are the ones that can actually be configured. The resultingmenu structure gains not only in clarity but also prevents potential programming errors. For example, if “2AIL” has been preset, display of the

» **Wing mixers** « menu would appear (without camber flaps) as shown below:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

If various flight phases are envisioned in the settings of the » **Phase settings** «, page 152, and » **Phase assignment**  «, page 158, menus, and these flight phases have been given names, the flight phase 

### mc

  16 20171 **Program description - Wing mixers** mitter control assigned to “Input 6” in the » **Con trol adjust**  « menu, page 118, and if desired by also selecting flight-phase dependency “PH” in the “Type” column.The selected transmitter control directly controls the two flap servos located on receiver outputs 6 and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos connected to outputs 9 and 10

– as
suming that corresponding flaps have been specified on the “Aileron/camber flaps” line in the » **Model type**  « menu. This transmitter control indirectly controls the flap position of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the “AILE” (and “AIL2”) column on the “FLAP” line of the multi-flap menu.The two INC/DEC buttons, CTL 5 or 6, are virtually ideal for this type of task, since their position is automatically stored. These buttons are fitted as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, but can be fitted to the 

### mc-16 HoTT at extra cost.The particular advantage of these two transmitter controls

– especially if y ou select the “PH” setting

– lies in the f act that you can use one and the same INC/DEC button as flap trim controls in all the programmed flight phases, but

– in contrast to a position-related proportional control

– the tr im values are retained even if you switch models. Ho wever, in order to improve control sensitivity for flap settings, travel should be reduced to about 25 % in “Input 6” line of the » **Control ad just**  « menu. c) ... alter natively, you can also leave the default entry of “0 %” in the “AILE” (and “AIL2”) column on the “FLAP” line of the multi-flap menu, and use the » **Control adjust** « menu to assign both input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter control. You can then set the degree to which both **Assigning switches** Wing mixers “AI  RU” and “FL  EL” can be made optionally on/off switchable by way of a switch or expanded switch. Accordingly, when the respective line is selected, the familiar switch symbol ( ) will appear on the lower edge of the screen. A switch can be assigned as described in the section entitled “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. **Switching delays** The delay time or switch time configured on the

» **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, for the respective flight phase also affects all wing mixers and thus avoids abrupt changes to flap configurations when switching between the flight phases. **Mixer neutral points** (Offset)
F or all mixers on the “Brake settings” sub-menu, the “brake offset” to be set on the » **Model type** « menu is to be configured to the transmitter control position at which the airbrakes are retracted. For this reason you should define which of the inputs 1, 7 or 8 you wish to use as the brake control, and enter the appropriate offset, in the “Brake offset” line of the » **Model type** « menu on the standard eightchannel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, corresponding to your personal preference; see page 105. The same procedure is used with the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, with theexception that Input 9 is also available as an alternative. When selecting “input 1”, please note also that you may need to specify your desired “Throttle min” position “forward/back” before establishing the offset point in the “Motor at C1” line.

Note:If the offset is not set right at the end of the transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a “dead zone”, i. e

. flap pairs are affected, optionally making this flight phase-dependent by selecting “PH” in the “Type” column, with the respective travel adjust

ment. **Basic programming procedure** 1. Select the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of the display will either show the “Next page” ( ) icon or a switch icon. 2. Depending on the line selected, y ou will either switch to the next page

– on which y ou carry out the same procedure as below

– or the desired v a
lue field is activ ated by tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. 3. Use the selection k eys to set the mixer ratio or degree of differential. To configure symmetrical mixer values, move the transmitter control or stick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fields.To configure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control/stick to the corresponding side.Negative and positive parameter values are possible, in order to be able to adjust the respective function to the direction of servo rotation or flap orientation. 4. A sim ultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry value in the given active (inverse video) field back to its default value. 5. Complete the entr y with a tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button or the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.172 **Program description - Wing mixers** gener ally have relatively short moment arms. For the former, it must normally be compensated for bymaking a simultaneous rudder deflection in the opposite direction. However, this rudder deflection also generates drag and therefore further degrades flight characteristics. If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented downwards a smaller deflection than the aileron oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can be reduced

– and possib ly entirely negated. However, the basic precondition for this is that each aileron must have its own servo present, which can thereforealso be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an additional benefit: reproducible aileron configurations that also exhibit less “play”.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

10 0% (s plit )

Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only commonly need to be designed and built in when constructing the model but also produce a slightly increased “play”in the control system for strong differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically used today offers considerable benefits. The degree of differential can be changed at any time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, the downward deflection of an aileron, in what is termed a “split” position, can be suppressed entirely. Thisapproach not only reduces or even suppresses “adverse yaw”, but can, in certain circumstances, even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an aileron command will generate a yaw about the vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large glider models in particular, this approach lets such aircraft fly “clean” turns using just the ailerons, which is not otherwise possible unaided. The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % mak es it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While “0 %” corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e . no differential, “-100 %” or “+100 %” represents the “split” function. For aerobatic flying, low absolute values are requiredto ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical f or facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fliers , where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.
Note: Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. the transmitter control does not influence any mixers on the “Brake settings” sub-menu. Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to 100 % automatically

. All other mixers in the » **Wing mixers** « menu have their neutral point with the control at its center, i. e

. they have no effect at this control position. The value set is mixed in at full travel.
**Mixer functions** The individual options in the » **Wing mixers** « menu are discussed below, separately for single-, dual- andmulti-flap models. Before we start, a number of remarks on the differentials for ailerons and flaps:
**Aile. diff. or Diff.** (Aileron-Differential)

0% 0%0% –––

––– normal 0% Aile.diff. Brake settings

AI Wing mixers

EL AI RU

0% fl.pos

AILE normal Diff. AiI-tr AI +100% +100% 0%

For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that generated by the same aileron when it is oriented upwards by the same amount. One effect of thisunequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a “turning away” from the intended direction of flight, which is why this undesirable side effect is also termed “adverse yaw”. This effect is naturally greater on thecomparably long aerofoils possessed by model gliders, compared to e. g. powered aircraft models, which173 **Program description - Wing mixers Diff.**  (Flap differentiation **)**

0% fl.pos

FLAP normal Diff. Ail-tr AI 0% 0% 0%

0%

FLAP2 0% 0% 0% fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

The “  AI  ” (topmost) line in the Multi-flap menu, description starting on page 181, can be used to set the extent to which the flaps act as ailerons and followthe aileron stick.; this value is entered as a percentage. The flaps differential

– to be set on the line “Diff .” (two lines below)

– wor ks in a similar way to the aileron differential, i. e. where an aileron command acts on the flaps, the respective deflection downwards can be reduced. The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possib le to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos. A value of 0 % is equal to normal linkage , i. e. the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel upwards. A value of -100 % to +100 % means that tra vel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron commands affecting the flaps (“split” mode). A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.
Note: Negativ e values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake Ele Curve off

normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you willneed to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu option text beginning page 138.

**AI**  **RU** (Aileron  Rudder)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

––– RU

normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fly “clean” curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ±150 % lets you set the direction of deflection as appropr iate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with one of the switches that is not self-restoring or a control switch so the mo del can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired.Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deflected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will find that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate

. **Model type: “1AIL”** If you have entered “1AIL” for the “Aileron/camber flaps” line on the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the “Wing mixers menu” on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

––– RU

normal
From the first line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ... **Brake settings**

Note: The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings**  « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Switch the flight phase if required:

Elevat curve Bake settings

normal

Since you cannot set up a butterfly or aileron differential in a model with only a single aileron servo, this menu offers no further configuration options withthe exception of a “pointer” to the “Elevat curve” submenu. Therefore, move ahead from here with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:174 **Program description - Wing mixers Model type: “1AIL 1FL”**  If you have entered “1AIL 1FL” for the “Aileron/camber flaps” line on the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the “Wing mixers menu” on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

From the first line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ... **Brake settings**

Note: The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings**  « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Switch the flight phase if required:

Elevat curve Brake settings Crow

normal 0%

FLAP
Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now enter a suitable value in the “Crow” line to lower the flap when you activate the brake control

– which is typically the C1 stick. T

o configure the setting, first position the brake control in the brake position at full travel (i. e. its endpoint). Then, briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button and enter a suitable value using the selection keys on the left or right four-way button. To ensure a sufficiently strong braking effect, notethat you should try to lower the flap as low as is mechanically possible. From the second line on this display screen, you canswitch to the sub-menu “Elevat curve” by briefly tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake Ele Curve off

normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the flaps and/or airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu option text beginning page 138.

**AI**  **RU** (Aileron  Rudder)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fly “clean” curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ±150 % lets you set the Settings are alw ays made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron stick. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.175 **Program description - Wing mixers** direction of deflection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with one of the switches that is not self-restoring or a control switch so the mo del can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deflec

ted to the same side as the upward-or iented aileron, and you will find that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate

. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron stick. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.

**EL**  **FL** (Ele vator  Flap)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the flap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the flaps are deflected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator

– i. e. in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches that is not self-restoring or a control switch. To configure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator stick to its center position, so that the markerframe surrounds both value fields. To configure asymmetric values, move the stick to the corresponding side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible , so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of flap deflection. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. The “typical” values configured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values.

**FL**  **EL** (Flaps  Elevator)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) compensation when a flap command is given. This typicallyenables you to adjust the model’s airspeed automatically when flaps are lowered. If you have used the » **Control adjust** «, page 118, to assign Input 6 to a transmitter control or switch then this also affects this mixer. To configure symmetrical mixer values, move the flap control to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fields. To configure asymmetric values, move the stick to the corresponding side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible , soas to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of elevator movement. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. If required, the mix er can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column. The values configured for this mixer are typically in the single-digit range. **Model type: “2AIL”** If you have entered “2AIL” for the “Aileron/camber flaps” line on the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the “Wing mixers menu” on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

normal
From the first line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ... **Brake settings**

Note: The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings**  « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Switch the flight phase if required:

Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0%

normal

Depending on the model type selected, setting options will now be available in the “ **Crow** ” and

“ **D** (ifferential) **red(** uction **)** ” lines for the column labeled

“ **AILE** ”. These options should be utilized by ...

• ... putting the transmitter control f or “Brake” (refer to the » **Model type** « menu description on page 104)

– typically the C1 stick

– in its limit176 **Program description - Wing mixers** position in the brake direction. Switch to the “Crow” line, briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button and use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to set a value that moves the aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the model or, if you are using airbrakes as the main braking system, the aileron should be setto elevate only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.
Note:To reliably prevent the servos mechanically striking their end-stops

– which dra ws a heavy current

– you can set an appropr iate limit value in the column labeled “– limit +” in the » **Servo adjust ment**  « menu, page 112.

• ... then finally, mo ving to the “D.red” line, set a % value there which is greater than or equal to that value set (or to be set) in the “Aileron differential” line of the display screen “before” this one.In this way, you can suppress the aileron differential when braking, thus ensuring that you can count on sufficient aileron response despite your ailerons being deflected upwards. From the lowest line, “Elevator curve”, you can switch to setting the “Elevator curve” mixer by briefly tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake Ele Curve off

normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the flaps and/or airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu option text beginning page 138.
**Aile.diff.** (Aileron differentiation)

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

normal
The adjustment range of ±100 % makes it possib le to set the correct direction of differential, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While “0 %” corresponds to a nor mal linkage, i. e. no transmitter-side differential, “-100 %” or “+100 %” represents the “split” function. For aerobatic flying, low absolute values are requiredto ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical for f acilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fliers, where ailerons alone are often used f or turning the model.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

10 0% (s plit )

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.
Note: Negative v alues are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.

**AI**  **RU** (Aileron  Rudder)

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fly “clean” curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ±150 % lets you set the direction of deflection as appropr iate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with one of the switches that is not self-restoring or a control switch so the mo del can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deflec

ted to the same side as the upward-or iented aileron, and you will find that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate

. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron stick. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.177 **Program description - Wing mixers EL**   **AI** (Elevator  Aileron)

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

normal
To provide support for the elevator for tight turns andaerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the aileronsare deflected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator

– i. e . in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches that is not self-restoring or a control switch. To configure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator stick to its center position, so that the markerframe surrounds both value fields. To configure asymmetric values, move the stick to the corresponding side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possib le, soas to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of aileron movement. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. The “typical” values configured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values. **Model type: “2/4AIL 1/2/4FL”** If you have entered “2AIL 1FL” for the “Aileron/camber flaps” line on the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the “Wing mixers menu” on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

FL EL 0%0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

normalHowever, if you have entered “2AIL 2FL” in the “Aileron/ flap” line of the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, of the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, or “2/4AIL 2/4FL” on the 

### mc-16 transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT, then your transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” should look like this:

0% 0%0% –––

––– Brake settings AI Wing mixers

FL EL RU Multi-flap menu

normal
Regardless of the combination of aileron and flap servos you choose, all of the parameters available can be adjusted separately for each flight phase.
Note: For almost any menu option, you have the option of checking your settings by switching to the servodisplay screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left four-way button. If you do, note however that the bars on the

» **Servo display** « move in the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite direction for flaps. Before we address the details of this menu we wouldlike to provide a brief explanation of the different display modes for the multi- fl ap menu: **Model type: “2 AIL 1 FL”**If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 73 and selected accordingly in the

» **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the abbreviations “AILE” and “FLAP” refer to the following flaps:

AI left FL FL AI right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of aileron and flap servos specified on the » **Model type**  « menu, page 104, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal EL FL Off. 0%

–––

Therefore, with a preset to “2AIL 1FL”, the options for setting aileron functions to flaps will be suppressed, and it will only be possible to shift to the right by one column

– to the “FL” column:178 **Program description - Wing mixers** FL +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

In addition, the settings for “Aile(ron) diff(erential)” are not found on the “multi-flap menu”, as with “2AIL 2/4FL”, but one level higher in the “Wing mixers” menu, see the screenshot on start of this section. **Model type: “2AIL 2FL“**If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 73 and selected accordingly in the

» **Model type** « menu, page 104, then the abbreviations “AILE” and “FLAP” refer to the following flaps:

AI left FL left FL right AI right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of aileron and flap servos specified on the » **Model type**  « menu, page 104, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model. This means that if values are preset to “2AIL 2FL”, then all configuration options for the aileron pair ... FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are shown, and

– one “step” to the right

– all options f or the flap pair as well:

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

Moving one further column to the right, however

– to the “FLAP2” column

– is not possib le. **Model type: “2AIL 4FL”** If you have connected the servos to the receiver as described on page 73, and selected them for the appropriate tasks in the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter withtwelve channels unlocked, or the standard twelvechannel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, then the abbreviations “AIL”, “FL” and “FL2” refer to the following control surfaces:

AI left FL left FL2 left FL2 right FL right AI right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of aileron and flap servos specified on the » **Model type**  « menu, page 104, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model. This means that if values are preset to “2AIL 4FL”, then all configuration options for the aileron pair ...

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are shown, and

– one “step” to the right

– all options f or the first flap pair ...179 **Program description - Wing mixers** FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are shown, and

– one fur ther “step” to the right

– all options f or the second flap pair as well:

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

––– **Model type: “4AIL 2FL”** If you have connected the servos to the receiver as described on page 73, and selected them for the appropriate tasks in the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter withtwelve channels unlocked, or the standard twelvechannel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, then the abbreviations “AIL”, “AIL2” and “FL2” refer to the following control surfaces:

AI left AI2 left FL left FL right AI2 right AI right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of aileron and flap servos specified on the » **Model type**  « menu, page 104, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model. This means that if values are preset to “4AIL 2FL”, then all configuration options for the first aileron pair

...

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are shown, and

– one “step” to the right

– all options f or the second aileron pair ... FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE2 normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are shown, and

– one fur ther “step” to the right

– all options f or the flap pair as well:

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––180 **Program description - Wing mixers Model type: “4AIL 4FL”**  If you have connected the servos to the receiver as described on page 73, and selected them for the appropriate tasks in the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104, of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter withtwelve channels unlocked, or the standard twelvechannel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, then the abbreviations “AIL”, “AIL2”, “FL” and “FL2” refer to the following control surfaces:

AI left AI2 left FL left FL2 left FL2 right FL right AI2 right AI right

Since selecting “4AIL 4FL” means choosing the maximum number of control surface servos, the columns “AILE” ...

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... and “AILE2” ... FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE2 normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... are supplemented by the columns “FLAP” ...

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

–––

... and “FLAP2”:

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI 0% 0%

EL FL Off. 0%

––– **Delta/flying wing type models with more than two wing flaps** If you have selected the “Delta/fl“ tail type and selected the number of wing flaps in the “Aile/flaps” line on the » **Model type** « menu (following the instructions given in that section on page 104), then the two ailerons will normally not move when you move the elevator stick

– and the same will be tr ue for the inner flaps (FL) and FL2 (if present). The reason for this is the default mixer ratio of 0% for all wing flaps, set for the “EL  FL” mixer that is to be found on the multiflap menu:

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

Accordingly, you must first specify your desired elevator control on the “EL  FL” line. Take care to ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right sequence.

Note: The “Brake settings” sub-menu (see page 181) isalso suitable for setting up the butterfly (crow) function with delta and flying wing models. In fine-tuning the deflection of the flap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) AIL2 and/or FL2, however, ensure that the moments created by one pair of flaps compensate the moments created by the other pair of flaps in each case. For example: the “up” effect of ailerons when deflected up should be compensated by a “down” effect from flaps when they are lowered.181 **Program description - Wing mixers Multi-flap menu**  **Important notice:** Depending on the flap pairs specified in the » **Model type**  « menu, page 104, this menu will present the column “AILE2” and/or the columns “FLAP” and “FLAP2” in addition to the “AILE” column. Since both the columns “AILE” and “AILE2” and the columns “FLAP” and “FLAP2” are identical except for the label shown at the bottom right, further display of the columns “AILE2” and “FLAP2” is avoided below for reasons of saving space.

 **AI**  ( Aileron  Flaps )

Note: Suppressed by “2AIL 1FL”.

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

The “  AI  “ line can be used to make flight-phasedependent settings for the percentage of aileron action to result for the camber flap pair “FLAP” and, if present, also “FL2” when aileron control is exercised. (In the “AILE” and, if present, “AILE2” column it is also possible to adjust the deflection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, however, the flaps should follow the ailerons with less of a deflection, i. e . the mixer ratio should be smaller than 100 %. The adjustment range of -150 % to +150 % means the direction of deflection can be adjusted, depending on the direction of rotation of the ser vos, to suit the ailerons. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figure.
**Ail-tr** (Aileron tr im)

Note: Suppressed by “2AIL 1FL”.

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which aileron trim is to affect “AILE”, “FLAP” and

– if present

– “AILE2” and/or “FLAP2”. The available range of values is -150 % to +150 %, relativ e to the adjustment range of the trim lever. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figure. **Diff.** (Diff erential for aileron function)

Note: With “2AIL 1FL”, at one level higher in the » **Wing mix** 

**** **ers** « menu, see figure on page 177.

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing flaps

– if the latter are being activ ated as ailerons.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split) AI FL FL2 FL2 FL AI

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 172. The setting range of -100 % to +100 % per mits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the182 **Program description - Wing mixers** direction of rotation of aileron and flap servos. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figure. **fl.pos.** (Flap position)

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%
fl.pos normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

Here, you set the flight phase-specific wing flap positions for all of the flaps present on the model in question. In this way, you can specify the flap positions that apply to each flight phase. The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % mak es itpossible to set the correct direction of travel regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and flap

servos. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figures.
 **FL**  (Eff ect of flap control) This line specifies the percentage of effect produced on aileron and flaps by the settings (if applicable, also flight-phase dependent settings) made for Input 6 in the » **Control adjust** « menu, page 118. 0% 0% 0%

AILE 0% +100%

FL fl.pos

normal Diff. Ail-tr

0% +100% +100%

FLAP 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

normal Diff. Ail-tr

For each flap pair, you can define either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly

– either centr ally or to the relevant side. If each travel adjustment is left at +100 % on the

» **Control adjust** « menu, page 118, then values between 5 % and 20 % should gener ally be sufficient here. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figures.
Note:

• By def ault, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 6 on the » **Control adjust** « menu. However, you can assign a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time

– also in a flight phase-de

pendent way

– thus enab ling different flap settings within a flight phase; see also example 2 on page 302.

• As already mentioned in the remarks in the section starting on page 170, the two INC/DEC buttons (CTL 5 or 6) are virtually ideal for this purpose, as their position is automatically stored. They are fitted as standard to the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, and available as an extra-cost option on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter.

**EL**  **FL** (Ele vator  flaps) To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the flap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the flaps are deflected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator

– i. e. in opposite directions.For each flap pair, you can define either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly

– either centr ally or to the relevant side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are pos

sible:

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILE 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL normal Diff.

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL normal Diff.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figures.The “usual” values for this mixer are in the low twodigit range. If a switch is assigned in the next line, **“EL**  **FL”** then the effect produced on flaps can be switched on and off with the elevator.183 **Program description - Wing mixers Important general notice:**  **Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their mechanical end-stops when large deflections are**  **set! This is especially relevant in relation to the functions “**   **AI**  **” and “**  **FL**  **”. Use the “- limit +”** **option (travel limit) available in the “Servo adjust ment” menu (page**  **102), as required.**

**EL**  **FL Off.** (symm. elevator offset)

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

STO normal EL FL Off. 0%

–––

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

STO normal EL FL Off. 0%

–––

A value entered into the **“EL**  **FL”** line offers support to the elevator during tight curves and aerobatics. This **“EL**  **FL Offset”** line determines the offset value introductory point where this percentage of effect on flaps is to take place for elevator action.

• With an offset v alue of 0 %, flaps will be aff ectedby elevator action beginning with the neutral position of the elevator stick by the percentage set in the **“EL**  **FL”** line.

• With an offset v alue other than 0 %, flaps will be aff ected by movement of the elevator stick, in either the “up” or “down” direction, only after rea

ching the preset offset point. T

o set this offset point, put the elevator stick at the off

set point to be set (in either of the two possible directions). A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will store this position. Tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button with the elevator stick in its centered position to set the offset value back to 0 % again. If a switch is assigned in column “Switch”, the effect produced with the elevator on flaps can be switched on and off. **Brake settings**
Notes:

• The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the

» **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Switch the flight phase if required:

• The “brake mixers” described below can also

– and should also

– be configured to be specific to indi

vidual flight phases.
**Crow** (Butterfly)

Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2 normal

The “Crow” mixer function is actuated by control function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input assigned on the “Brake Offset” line in the » **Model type** « menu, see page 104.

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 2AIL2FL Model type

Brake off +90% SEL STO In 1

Note: The Offset, i. e . the activation direction, is also set in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104 . This offset should be set to about +90 % of stic k travel (if the C1 stick is used, this is generally located at the forward position of the stick). To extend the flaps, the stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The remaining stick travel of around 10 % then has no ef

-184 **Program description - Wing mixers •**  **“FLAP” and** 

**– if present** 

**– “FLAP2”**  **column** As the model is braked on the landing approach, both pairs of flaps can be set to deflect by different amounts, e. g.:

AI FL FL2

FL2

FL

AI
AI FL FL2

FL2

FL

AI

**• Combining AILE(2) and FLAP(2) f**  **or “Crow”**

AI FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

Though the airbrake mixers are set as described above, there is a special flap constellation, called “crow position” or “butterfly” , that can also be set. This airbrake setting causes both ailerons movemoderately upward while the flaps move downward as far as possible. Another mixer

– see be

low, under the section “Elevat. curve”

– is then used to tr im the elevator such that the flight speed doesnot change significantly in comparison to the normal flight position. Otherwise, there is a dangerthat the model loses too much speed and then, after the braking system is retracted (e. g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example), pancakes or even stalls. A tip for “seeing” the effect of brakes: Lift the flaps and look over and under the surface from the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted flap, the greater the braking effect achieved.
Tips for activating airbrakes:

• When, in addition to aileron and camber flap ser

vos, there is also a built-in servo for actuating wing airbrakes, it can be most simply connected to that receiver output

– if free

– whose input has been se

lected for the brake function, i. e . either on 1, 7, 8

or

– if present

– 9. If this is not possible then, as an alternative, use a free mixer to connect the selec

ted br ake control channel with the airbrake servo.

• To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect the second servo to a free output of your choice

– for example, output 9. You then also assign this output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the » **Control adjust** « menu, page 118, see figure.

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal fr

fr fr

SEL Cn1

As you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, etc. at their default values. Also leave the default “GL” value in the column labeled “TYP” so that the se

cond airbr ake, like the first, operates in the same way across all flight phases. fect, although it is not “lost”, since the control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %.
Use the select fields of the columns labeled “AILE”, “AILE2”, “FL” and, if present, “FL2” to specify the extent and the direction that corresponding flap pairsare to follow when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or

– if present

– 9) is oper ated. If the model has no airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output free or set it to “Mix-only” in the » **Mix-only channel**  «, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, so that you can use it for other purposes. On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this option can be unlocked as an extra-cost option. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possib le. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the given active (inverse video) field to its default value shown in the figure.

**• “AILE”**  **and**

**– if present** 

**– “AILE2”**  **column** When braking the model as it comes in to land,neither of the aileron flaps should ever be deflected more than half of the possible travel upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available to controlthe model along its longitudinal axis (aileron function).

AI FL FL2

FL2

FL

AI185 **Program description - Wing mixers** AI FL

FL

AI Servo 1

Servo 9

You can assure yourself that this works as stated by accessing the » **Servo display** « menu, accessible from almost any menu level with a brief simultaneous tap on the  keys on the left four-way button, see page 274:

1 3 5 7 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0%

0% +100%

+100%

If this relatively simply variant should prove impossible for whichever reasons, then the alternative is a solution with two free mixers

– and potentially inv

olving the » **Mix-only channel** « menu, see page 216, which is available as standard on the 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter only. and potentially involving
Note: On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this feature can be unlocked as an extra-cost option. In either case, however, the airbrake travels must then be fine-tuned on the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, page 112. **D.red** ( Differential reduction)

Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2 normal

Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterfly (crow) configuration. Namely: that with the use of aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly (negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is firstly because further deflection of the one aileron upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly because the downward-deflected aileron

– depending on the ele vation and degree of differential configured

– is often unable to achie ve even its “normal” position. To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered in this way as far as possible, you should ensure thatyou make use of the automated “Differential reduction” feature. This feature continuously reduces the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake system is extended. The feature is configurable and can even be set to suppress differential entirely. A value of 0 % means that the “aileron diff erential” set at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that equals the % value set for aileron differential means the differential is fully eliminated once the butterfly function is at maximum travel, i. e. with flaps fully extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the aileron differential configured will eliminate the latter even before the full travel of the airbrake stick. Values can be set in the range 0 to 150 %. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. **Elevat curve** (Brak e  elevator)

Elevat curve Brake settings Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

normal

If the airbrake control

– to be set to 1, 7, 8 or

– if present

– 9 on the “Br ake Offset” line of the » **Model type**  « menu, page 105

– is used to extend the flaps as descr ibed previously for the “Brake settings” menu, this will often have a negative effect on the aircraftmodel’s airspeed. This mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by applying a corrective value to the elevator. A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will switch to the display screen shown below:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake Ele Curve off

normal

**Setting notices for “Elevat curve”** The offset set in the » **Model type** « menu, page 105, affects this mixer:The vertical line on the display that indicates the position of the airbrake control only moves from the edge of the graph when the configured offset is exceeded. In doing so, airbrake control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %, as described in the » **Model type**  « menu. Accordingly, the mixer’s neutral point always lies on the left edge, independently of the offset configured. Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the opposite end-point in accordance with requirements.186 **Program description - Wing mixers** Note that this method f or setting the 6-point curve mixer follows the same principles that are applicable to the curve mixers, already described on page 138 in the context of the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu.

Input Output Point 1 –19% –6% –7% Brake

normal EL Curve on

The selected setting should certainly be tried out in sufficient altitude and, if necessary, readjusted. When doing this, be sure to pay attention that the model does not slow down too much while the brake system is extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the braking system is retracted, e. g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example, your model pancakes or even stalls. **Display “Wing mixer**
**Aile.diff.** (Aileron d ifferential)

Note:Only for “2AIL 1FL”. For the “2/4AIL 2/4 FL” selection, this is included on the Multi-flap menu, see page 181.

Aile.diff Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

––– RU Multi-flap menu

normal
On this line you can set the aileron differential for the two aileron servos. If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 172. The setting range of ±100 % per mits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of aileron and flap servos. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.

**AI**  **RU** (Aileron  Rudder)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

FL EL 0%0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fly “clean” curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is deflected upwards. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron stick. The adjustment range of ±150 % lets y ou set the direction of deflection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. A v alue of around 50 % is gener ally an excellent starting point.

**FL**  **EL** (Flaps  Elevator)

Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixers

FL EL 0%0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

normal
When setting camber-changing flaps, one side-effect can be to generate moments causing movement around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may also be desirable that e. g. your aircraft model opts for a more pacey flight style with the flaps slightly raised. This mixer can be used to achieve both results. With this mixer, the extension of the flaps

– depending on the v alue configured

– automatically ensures the ele vator position follows suit. Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the flap control are possible. If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by as-187 **Program description - Wing mixers** signing a s witch in the right column. Values can be set in the range ±150 %. The “typical” values configured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %.188 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** 

# Helicopter mixer

Flight phase-specific setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
In this menu » **Helicopter mixer** « all of the flight phase-specific helicopter mixers are described, with the exception of the mixers forauto-rotation flight (discussed from page 202 onward.) These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model helicopter:

Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

MIX-only channel Dual mixer
For flight phase programming, see the menus:

• » **Basic settings, model** «, page 94

• » **Phase settings** «, page 156

• » **Phase assignment** «, page 158 When the switch for a specific flight phase is actua

ted, then the name of the giv en flight phase, e. g. «Normal», will be displayed at the lower left edge of the display screen:

C1 C1 Pitch Throttle Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle

Roll Throttle Tail Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter 0% 0% 0%

0° OFF normal Gyro suppress 0% Gyro gain 0%

In each of these flight phases

– with the e xception of the auto-rotation phase

– the typical helicopter mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-shotabove are available for setting up the model helicopter. These functions are described in the first part of this comprehensive chapter. **General information on mixers, (see also pages 169 and 204)**  An arrow “  ” indicates a mixer. A mixer “branches off” the signal flow of a control function at a particularpoint, in order to use this flow to cause a predetermined effect on a further control channel and, ultimately, the receiver output. “C1  Tail” mixer means,for example, that when the pitch-axis stick is actuated, the tail rotor servo must also react within the scope of its setting. **Basic programming procedure:** 1. Select the mix er by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button.Depending on the mixer involved, the bottom display line will show either **SEL** or the (indicating a change to a second page is necessary). 2. A br ief tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button will permit direct settings for linear mixer ratios. Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio. Otherwise you will need to switch to the second screen page where you can set up the appropriate curve mixer. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. 3

. Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the entry. 4. A tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will cause a return to the previous display page. **Description of helicopter mixers**To set collective pitch curves as well as the two mixers, “C1  Throttle” and “C1  Tail”, there are curve mixers available in all flight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along the path of stick travel, if required. Switch to the display screen for curve settings with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, see description below. The curve is set up basically in the same way as the Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe it again here in detail using pitch configuration as an example, to save you having to leaf through the manual. In the remaining lines, first activate the value field and then use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to set a mixer value in the value field (inverse video). The settings available are rounded off with the “Swashplate limiter” option: This option can be set to restrict maximum deflection of the swashplate servoin the sense of a limiter. Together, these settings configure the basic set-up of the helicopter model. In the “Autorotation” flight phase as described on page 202, however, the mixers “C1  Throttle” and “C1  Tail” are not needed and therefore switched to a configurable default value. Changed parameters can be reset to their respective default values at any time with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). 

### mc

  16 20189 **Program description - Helicopter mixer Pitch**  (Pitch cur ve (C1  Pitch) ) If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to move to the “Pitch” line then tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

normal Curve off

Unlike the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu, this display isonly associated with the control curve of pitch servos, whereas the “Channel 1 curve” affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch stick. **Note that the output signal of the “Channel 1 curve” option thus functions as an input signal**  **for the collective pitch curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with** **the throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore fol lows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.**  The control curve can be defined (separately per flight phase) by up to 6 points, termed “reference points”, placed at any point along the stick travel. Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequatefor setting up the collective pitch curve. We recommend beginning with three reference points to start with. These three points, namely the two end-points “Pitch low (L)” (= -100 % control tr avel) and “Pitch high (H)” (= +100 % control tr avel) plus a point at the center of control travel still to be set, define an initially linear profile for the pitch curve. **Programming details** First, switch to your chosen flight phase, e. g. «Normal». The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points “Point L” (minimum pitch at -100 %) and “Point H” (maximum pitch at +100 % control tr avel): at the same time, the current stick position is shown numerically on the “Input” line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which the vertical line crosses the curveis termed the “Output”, and can be varied at the maximum of 6 reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. A control signal modified in this way affects only the collective pitch servos. In the example to the left, the stick is at exactly 0 % of control tr avel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the char acteristic curve is linear.Up to six additional reference points can be set between the two end-points “L” and “H”, although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. **Setting ref erence points**  If necessary, use the left or right-hand arrow button  to move the marker frame down to the “Point” line:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

normal Curve off

Move the stick. If the display shows a framed question mark, then you can set the next reference point with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Simultaneously, the “?” is replaced by a number and the value field to the right of the reference point number is highlighted: 1 0% 0% Pitch

normal 0% Input Output Point Curve off

The order in which up to four reference points aregenerated between the end-points “L” and “H” is irrelevant since these reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. **Configuring reference points** To configure a point, use the stick to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change. The number and current curve value of this point are displayed on the left side of the display, on the “Point” line. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Use the selection keys on the right four-way buttonto change the current curve value shown in the highlighted field. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not aff ect neighboring reference points.

+75% +75% 1 0% Pitch

normal Input Output Point Curve off

In this sample screen image, reference point “1” has been set to +75 %. If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At -50 %, f or example ...190 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** –50% –12% 1 Pitch

normal –12% Input Output Point Curve off

... and/or a further point at +50 %:

+50% +88% 3 Pitch

normal +88% Input Output Point Curve off

This point can now be adjusted as previously described ...

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

normal Input Output Point Curve off

... or reset again with a simultaneous tap on the 

or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). **Trim point function** Alternatively, you can skip reference points L, 1 ... max. 4 and H in the active (i. e . highlighted) Value field using the Select buttons  of the left-hand four-way button in the ascending or descending direction. The selection keys on the right four-way button can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position, for example: 2 –50% –25%

normal Pitch

+50% Trim point Input Output Point

In this simple example, the pitch stick

– represented b y the vertical line

– is halfw ay between “Pitch minimum” and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). However, “Point 1” will be relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, resulting in a mo

mentary output value of -25 %. One touch on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button terminates this trim point function.
**Trim offset function** When a value field is active, i. e . in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the  selection keys of the left four-way button and to make a change with the selection keys of the right four-way button, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the  keys on the left four-way button. Starting with a point value for “Point 1” at 0 %, the control cur ves in both of the following figures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % r ange by the trim offset function:

1 0% +25%

normal Pitch

+25% Trim offset Input Output Point 1 0% –25%

normal Pitch

–25% Trim offset Input Output Point

A tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will also terminate this function.
**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) selection key of the right four-way button with an active (i. e . inverse video) value field. You canthen use the selection keys on the right four-way button to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the figure below, “Point 1” which was just shifted to +25 % with the tr im point function, will now be shifted to the left:

? 0% +57%

normal Pitch

+25% Trim X-axis Input Output Point

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned hor izontally further away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a “?” sign will reappear in the line Point.This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifies that afurther point can be set at the current control position.

• Please note that the percentage v alue on the “Out

put” line always relates to the current stick position and not to the position of the point.191 **Program description - Helicopter mixer Smoothing the collective pitch curve**  In the example below, sample reference points have been set ... reference point 1 to +50 %, reference point 2 to +75 % and reference point 3 to -50 % ... as described in the last section:

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

normal Input Output Point Curve off

This “jagged” curve profile can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.Starting from the situation shown in the previous illustration, disable the Value field by pressing the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button, or the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button. Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move the marker frame up to the “Curve” line, and press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button once more to activate the Value field of the “Curve” line:

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

normal Input Output Point Curve off

Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to set the Value field from “off” to “on”, and then briefly press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button, or the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button, to conclude the procedure: +50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

normal Input Output Point Curve on

Notes:

• If the stick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the “Output” line always relates to the current stick position.

• The figures on these pages show control cur ves created only for the purpose of illustration. Pleasenote, therefore, that the curve characteristics displayed do not in any way represent real-life collective pitch curves. A specific application example can be found in the programming examples on page 322. The following three graphs show typical 3-point pitch curves for various flight phases, such as hovering, aerobatics and 3D flight. The vertical bar depicts the current stick position. Please note that trim values greater than +100 % and less than -100 % cannot be presented in the display

. Sample collective pitch curves for various flight phases:

**+100% +100%**  **+100%**

**100% 100%**  **100% Output** **Output Output** 

**2 3 4 5 1**  **2 3 4 5 1**  **2 3 4 5 1**  **Control travel Control travel**  **Control travel**

**Hover Aerobatics**  **3D Erasing reference points**  To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the stick to move the vertical line into the vici nity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the “Point” line (see screen image above), following activation of the value field on the “Point” line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) it can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key **ESC** of the left fourway button. The “L” and “H” points, on the other hand, CANNOT be deleted.
**C1**  **Throttle** (Throttle curv e)

+50% +50% +50% C1 Thro

normal ? Input Output Point Curve off

Unlike the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu, this display is only associated with the control curve of the throttle servo, whereas the the “Channel 1 curve” affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch stick. **Note that the output signal of the “Channel 1 curve” menu thus functions as an input signal for**  **the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/**  **collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.**  The throttle curve can also be defined (separately per flight phase) by up to 6 points, termed “reference points”, placed at any point along the stick travel. The reference points are defined, adjusted and erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous section on the collective pitch curve. Start by defining192 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** the throttle curve with three points, namely the points “L” and “H” at the extremes, plus the Point “1” still tobe set in the control center in order to match the motor power curve to the collective pitch curve.**Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive sys tem with speed CONTROLLER**  This setting relates only to the control curve of the throttle servo or the speed controller. Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped with a speed governor is discussed in the following section. As with the configuration of the collective pitch curve (see previous page), the throttle curve can also be defined by up to 6 points.

• In each case, set the control cur ve so that whenthe throttle/collective pitch stick is in its end position, the carburetor is fully open or the controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is set to maximum (except for auto-rotation flight, see page 202).

• For the ho ver point, which is normally at the control center, the carburetor setting or power control for the speed controller must be matched to the collective pitch curve so that the correct system rotational speed is obtained.

• At the minimum position of the throttle/collectiv epitch stick, the throttle curve must first be configured so that a glow motor runs at a speed considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch is firmly engaged. **Starting and stopping of the motor**

**– whether**  **combustion or electric drive**

**– alwa**  **ys takes place within the given flight phase as a consequence of**  **the throttle limiter and the “Cut Off trim” option of the digital trim (see below).**  This makes it unnecessary to program the two flight phases that may be familiar to you from using other remote control systems

– namely “with idle-up” and “without idle-up”, and with the associated “waste” of a flight phase for this purpose

– since the progr am of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT offers a much more flexible approach to fine-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the “idle-up” approach taken by older mc remote control systems.Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before starting a motor with carburetor, i. e. so that the carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range only with trim. Ensure that you follow the safety instructions on page 200 at all times. If the throttle is set too high when switching on the transmitter, you will receive audible and visible warnings!

STARLET #02

2:22h Stp 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9 «norm

M Throttle too high !

The following three graphs show (typical) 3-pointthrottle curves for various flight phases, such as hovering aerobatics and 3D flight. Sample throttle curves for various flight phases:

**+100% +100%**  **+100%**

**100% 100%**  **100% Output** **Output Output** 

**2 3 4 5 1**  **2 3 4 5 1**  **2 3 4 5 1**  **Control travel Control travel**  **Control travel**

**Hover Aerobatics**  **3D** Notes on using the “throttle limit” function:

• The throttle limit function should be used in any case (» **Control adjust** « menu, page 127). At the rear limit of the default transmitter control, the right-side throttle limit proportional rotary slider, the throttle servo is completely decoupled from the throttle curve, the motor is at idle and will respond only to C1 trim. This option permits the motor to be started in any flight phase and to shut the motor off with the “Cut Off trim” option of the digital trim. See below and/or page 70.Once the motor has started, push the throttle limiter s l o w l y in the direction of the oppositeend-point to put actuation of the throttle servo fully under the control of the throttle/collective pitch stick once again. In order to prevent the throttle servo from being restricted by the throttle limiter in the full throttle direction, set control travel on the plus-side of the column labeled “travel” to +125 % in the “Lim. ” line of the » **Control adjust** « menu.Leave the default value of “GL” in the “Type” column alone, however, to configure this setting globally for all flight phases. For a more finely-tuned control travel curve for the throttle limit control, you can also use the “Expothrottle limiter”, page 110. This gives you the option of defining the idle setting at the throttle limit control’s center position, as readily determined both visually and audibly.Set the throttle limiter to its center position and adjust the “EXPO thro lim.” value as far as is needed until the motor is idling smoothly with the throttle limit control set at its center point. In this position, the motor will then start without any problems.To switch off, turn or push the throttle limit control

– that is, without C1 cutoff tr im

– to its rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically. The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:193 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** 2 +50% +50% +50% normal

Throttle limiter position Input Output Point C1 Thro Curve off

The output signal for the throttle servo can never be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In this example, about a maximum of +25 %.

• Since electr ic drive systems have no need for an idle setting, the basic configuration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involvesmaking sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, adjust the “travel” setting of the throttle limiter as appropriate on the “Lim.” line of the » **Control adjust**  « menu. Leave the default value of “GL” in the “Type” column alone, however, to configure this setting globally for all flight phases. Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, must take place in flight

– as with a glo w-powered helicopter.

• If you wish to record the flight time of a (glow-powered) helicopter, you can assign a control switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer on and off; see page 145. **For auto-rotation flight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a configurable default**  **value; see page 202. Helicopter with speed REGULATOR**  Unlike speed controllers , which merely adjust output level in a manner similar to a carburetor, a speedregulator keeps speed in the system it monitors constant by regulating its output autonomously. In the case of combustion motor powered helicopters, the regulator therefore controls the throttle servo itselfas appropriate or, for an electric helicopter, the motor’s speed controller. Therefore, speed regulators do not need a traditional throttle curve but rather only a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed will therefore only take place if the level of output required exceeds the maximum level available.Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a speed regulator ; refer to the receiver layout on page 75. However, if this connection is used there will be no throttle limit function because the throttle limit function can only be implemented via the “C1  Thro” mixer which is on the

– then un used

– output 6. T

o make the comfort and safety features of a throttlelimiter available, a speed regulator should be connected to receiver output 6 (contrary to the general connection notices) and only requires appropriate adaptation to the throttle curve so it can take over the task of the “conventional” transmitter control. Since in this case the “throttle curve” only regulates the target speed of the motor controller and this target motor speed should typically remain constant over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the “C1  Thro” mixer must be used to set a horizontal line

– i. e . every (pitch) input value will result in the same (“throttle”) output value

– whose “height” is defined by the target motor speed. First, therefore, the reference points “1” to “4”

– if present and set

– are er ased. Following this, the reference points “L” (input = 0 %) and “H” (input = +100 %) are then each set to the same v alue, for example: 0% +65% +65% C1 Thro

normal L Input Output Point Curve off

The value to be set depends both on the speed controller used and on the target motor speed that is desired, and can, of course, be varied according to the flight phase. **For auto-rotation flight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a configurable default**  **value; see page 202.**
**C1**  **Tail** (Static torque compensation)

0% 0% 0% Tail C1

normal ? Input Output Point Curve off

The default approach here is to preset a torque compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a uniform 0 %, as is required f or a gyro sensor working in “heading lock mode”

– see the screen image abo ve. **Important notice: In this context, ensure that you comply with the**  **instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicop**  **ter impossible to fly.** If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in the “normal” operating mode, or if it only has what is termed “normal mode”, then configure the mixer as follows: As with the configuration of the collective pitch curve (see page 189), the control curve of the tail rotor can also be defined by up to 6 points. If required,194 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer ratios both above and below the hover point. Before you do,however, ensure you have entered the correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the » **Helicopter type**  « menu.

+100% +30% Tail C1

normal H +30% Input Output Point Curve off

Starting with values of -30 % f or point “L” and +30 % f or point “H”, the mixer is to be configured in such away that the helicopter, even during prolonged vertically ascending or descending flights, does not deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main rotor’s altered torque while hovering. For hovered flight, trim should only be affected by way of the (digital) tail rotor trim lever.For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i. e . that the rotor speedremains constant over the collective pitch’s full adjustment range. This third curve mixer applies only to the controlcurve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the “Channel 1 curve”, see page 141, acts on all servos that are affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal of the “Channel 1 curve” option also functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic from the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu.**In the auto-rotation flight phase this mixer is auto matically switched off.**  **Roll**  **Throttle and Nick**  **Throttle**

0% 0%

SEL

0% 0% normal C1 Tail Tail Roll Throttle

Roll Throttle Tail Nick Throttle

Increasing collective pitch is not the only change that requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control movements also require this, i. e . if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. The program of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT lets you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for roll and pitch-axis controls. This offers particular advantages in aerobatic flying,

e. g. when flying a roll: here, with moderate collective pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open, cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that require much higher performance from the motor. The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %. The correct mixer direction is automatically taken into account. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. **In the auto-r otation flight phase this mixer is auto**  **matically switched off. Tail**   **Throttle**

Pitch

0% 0% SEL normal C1 C1 Throttle Tail Tail Roll Throttle Throttle

While the tail rotor normally compensates for the effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis. Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-off in system rotational speed. This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is increased. The setting range is therefore 0 to +100 %. The direction depends on the main rotor’s direction of rotation (left or right), and this must first be set correctly on the » **Helicopter type** « menu. For left-hand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail rotor stick is moved to the left, and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) field back to 0 %. **In the auto-r otation flight phase this mixer is auto**  **matically switched off.** Set-up notes: To set the mixer value accurately you should either first fly several high-speed pirouettes against the direction of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind isblowing, hover at right angles to the wind with a sufficiently large tail rotor deflection. Set the mixer value so that there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.195 **Program description - Helicopter mixer Roll**   **Tail and Nick**  **Tail**

0% 0%

SEL

0% 0% 0%

normal Roll Roll Throttle Tail Nick Nick Throttle Tail Gyro suppress

Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor: major cyclic control movements also require this, e. g. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too, the program of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT lets you configure settings for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis) separately. For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involvevery large control deflections in the pitch-axis controls, e. g. the “Bo-turn” (vertical pull-up followed by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops, the uncompensated torque present in these flightscauses the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of the maneuver. These two mixers permit static torque compensationto be activated by the swashplate tilting in any direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll and pitch-axis sticks, i. e . they always generate a tail rotor deflection in the same direction regardless of the direction of the command. The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %. The mixer direction is determined automatically by your definition of the direction of main rotor rotation on the » **Helicopter type** « menu, page 108.**In the auto-rotation flight phase this mixer is auto matically switched off.**  Depending on the transmitter control’s position, the gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor stick is: **“current control position minus**  **gyro suppression value”.** Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100 %, the gyro gain is reduced to z ero as the tail rotor deflection increases. For values between 100 % and the maxim um value of 199 %, the gyro can be fully suppressed

– de

pending on the transmitter control position

– w ell before full deflection of the tail rotor; see the diagram on the next page. For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. **3277** , both the upper and the lower values are set via rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition between these two values occurs roughly in the middle of the slider travel.In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, infinitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical diagrams.As an example, the option to configure flight phasespecific

– and static

– gyro gain giv es you the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow flying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics. Samples of various gyro settings and configuration notes

• Linear gyro suppression: 0 % to 199 %. With the tail rotor stick in the center position,the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected transmitter control. Using a proportional rotarycontrol or slider, the effect is infinitely variable between zero (“min”) and maximum (“max”), provided transmitter control travel is not restricted. With **Gyro suppress**

0% 0%

SEL

0%

0° normal 0% Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Gyro suppress Gyro gain

**Important: in normal situations, this function should not be used if your model is fitted with a**  **modern gyro system. In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting**  **your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicopter impossible to fly.**  This menu has nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full range of requirements and flying habits. With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor (“gyro”) can be varied according to the tail rotor stick position; this assumes the use of a gyro system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will be channel 7 for Graupnerremote control systems. The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor deflection. Without gyro suppression

– i. e. when set to 0 %

– thegyro effect is constant, regardless of the stick position. With a transmitter control assigned on the “Gyro” line on the » **Control adjust** « menu, page 126, e. g. oneof the proportional sliders mounted in the middle console; as applicable, also made flight-phase dependent and/or with infinitely variable gyro effect between minimum and maximum. In this case, gyro gain is maximum at full deflection of the slider, and zero at the opposite end-point. Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gainrange on both sides by altering the transmitter control travel.196 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** full tail rotor deflection, the effective gyro gain is as follows: **“current control position minus**  **gyro suppression value”.**
This means that at 0 % gyro suppression, gyro gain is constant for tail rotor stic k movement; at 50 % suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half if the assigned transmitter control is mo ved to the +50 % position (as shown here); and only at >150 % suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider at this position, w ell before full tail rotor deflection.

Exemple: +50 %Gyro gain

left Stick deflection tail rotor centre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7

• Linear gyro suppression with reduced control tra vel, e. g. -50 % to +80 % of full tra vel.Gyro gain is infinitely variable within these transmitter control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor deflection for various parameter values of gyro suppression. input “7”, in connection with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB. Further notes on gyros with configurable multilevel gyro gain (e. g. NEJ-120 BB) Since y ou cannot specify the gyro gain from the transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, the gyro’s own control 1 must be used to set the (weaker) gyro gain (e. g. f or aerobatics) and control 2 the stronger gyro gain (e. g. f or hovered flight). Eventhough a proportional control is used for control function 7, only a switch-over between these two valuestakes place and the setting is therefore not proportional. You should therefore advance control 2 to the point where the model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to the point where the model does not oscillate with its tail even when flying at maximum speed into a strong headwind. Depending on the state of the weather and the flight program planned, you can also switch over the gyro gain from the transmitter

– also with gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor deflection if required.
**Gyro gain** (Gyro Offset) **Important notice: The v**  **alue of this option is identical to the offset value set in the “Gyro” line of the »Control adjust«**  **menu, page 126. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly** 

**– and**  **vice versa.** Most of the latest gyro systems not only f eature infinitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use has at least one of these featuresthen this alternative offset setting provides an opportunity to preset both “normal” gyro gain as well Exemple: +80 %Gyro gain

left Stick deflection tail rotor centre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7

**Adjusting the gyro sensor** To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following:

• The controls should hav e as little friction and “play” as possible.

• There should be no “spr ing” in the control linkage.

• Use a strong and comparab ly fast servo. When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response

– a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thr ust

– takes eff ect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model’s stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model’s tail will startto oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is flying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fin combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to197 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** as, as appropriate, to specify a “heading-lock mode” whereby, even within this pre-selection, gyro gain can be reduced by a particular gain type for normal, slow flight with maximum flight stabilization, fast circuit flights and aerobatics. To proceed as described above, use flight phase switching to enter different settings on the “Gyro offset” line. Values between -125 % and +125 % are possib le:

0% 0%

SEL

0%

0° normal 0% Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Gyro suppress Gyro gain

Based on these flight-phase specific (offset) settings,gyro gain can also be infinitely varied by a transmitter control assigned in the “Gyro” line of the » **Control adjust**  « menu, page 126.
**Swash rotation**

0% 0%

SEL

0%

0° normal 0% Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Gyro suppress Gyro gain

Some rotor head control systems make it necessary to incline the swashplate in a different direction from the intended inclination of the rotor plane when acyclic control command is given. If your model features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you may need to use this menu to set up a software-driven 45 ° rotation of the control linkage to the r ight, so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works correctly, without unwanted differential The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 100 % setting. The cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a “dead zone”.. If this function is used, “Dual Rate” should be set to 100 % and Dual Rate v alues above 100 % should also not be used. Ifnot, and you set a swashplate limit of 100 %, f or example, then swashplatemovement will be restricted even if roll and pitchaxis commands are given separately. Setting range: 100 ... 149 % and “off”.You can reset an altered value to “OFF” by simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the righthand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) in the active (highlighted) field.effects. This eliminates the need to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation to the right.
**Swash limiter**

0% 0%

SEL

0% 0°

normal Nick Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter OFF Gyro suppress Gyro gain

This function works like a circular mechanical surround acting upon the stick which controls the swashplate, restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is set up insuch a way that the deflections for roll and/or pitchaxis exploit the maximum travel mechanically possible, e. g. for 3D helicopters, then the total tilt applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously will be considerably greater (141 % in n umerical terms). The swashplate mechanism may then strike its end-stops and, in the worst case, the ball-links could even be disengaged. The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter contains a configurable software function for limiting the total swashplate travel, i. e . it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100 % (the tr avel is limited to the value obtainable either with roll or pitch-axis alone) to 149 % (no eff ective limit). In addition, the function can be set to “Off” and hence completely deactivated. The swash limiter can also be configured per model and per flight phase. This software solution is therefore much more flexible than a physical circular surround attached to the stick unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common stick unit.198 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** 

# Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve Practical approach

Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems are based on separate servos, they are always operated together by the throttle/pitch stick (except during autorotation flight). This coupling is performed by the helicopter program automatically. In principle, the trim lever for control function 1 only affects the throttle servo in the programs of the 

### mc16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters

– with the

e xception of the choice of “PT” in the “Throttle” line of the » **Stick mode** « menu, page 116, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. This » **Stick mode** « menu, which can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extracost option, also enables you to define whether the trim lever of control function 1 is to be used as part of the throttle limiter function (“GA”), or for idle trimming during auto-rotation exercises (“AR”). The process of fine-tuning throttle and collective pitch, i. e . setting the motor power curve to match the collective blade pitch setting, is the most important aspect of setting up a model helicopter. The software of the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT provides for independent configuration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control curve (» **Channel 1 curve**  « menu, page 141). While these curves can be modeled using up to six points, fewer points are generally sufficient. We re

commend star ting with three-point curves to begin with. This involves setting individual values for the center point and other (optional) reference points, and for the two end-points (“L”, “low”, and “H”, “high”) ofthe throttle/collective pitch stick: together, these define the control curves.Before setting the throttle and collective pitch function, the rods of all servos should be mechanicallypre-adjusted correctly according to the set-up instructions for the given helicopter. **Note: The hover point should normally be set to the**  **center position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. In special cases, e.**  **g. for “3D” flight, de**  **viating hover points can also be programmed. For example, one point for normal flight attitude**  **above the center and one point for inverted flight attitude below the center.** 
**Idle setting and throttle curve**

Note: Since electric drive systems have no need for anidle setting, motor idling does not need to be calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective pitchcurve(s), however, must take place as for glow-powered helicopters. The idle setting, whose detailed description begins on page 127, always takes place with the throttle limiter closed

– nor mally with the trim lever of the C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the right-sided proportional rotary slider (Lv2)). The programming of a corresponding value for the “L” point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed of the motor, without influencing the hover configuration. Here, for example, flight phase programming can be used to set different throttle curves. This increased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances, e. g. for fast,steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics. The figure depicts a curve with a slightly changeable throttle setting below the hover point at the control center. **+100%**

**0% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5**

**1 Control travel** Different throttle curves are programmed to be flightphase dependent in order to achieve the given optimal adaptation to hovering flight as well as aerobatics:

• Lo w system rotational speed with smooth, gentle control response and low noise when hovering

• Higher rotor speed f or aerobatics with motor power set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle curve must also be adjusted in the hover range. **Basic set-up procedure** Even though pitch and throttle curves can be set elec

tronically over a wide range with the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, all linkage in the model should already be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the instructions for the given helicopter. Experienced helicopter pilots will be glad to help with this basic set-up. The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch set to maximum or, for electric helicopters, with the speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is closed, however, it must be possible to just close off the carburetor using the C1 trim lever (rapid throttle setting of the “digital trim”, see page 58), without the servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric helicopters, it must be possible to cut the electric motor’s speed controller safely with the throttle limiter closed. Take great care when configuring these settings, by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or alter-199 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** the collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to the hover configuration, motor speed should remain unchanged. If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the drive system working at full power and therefore nofurther power increase is possible, then reduce maximum blade pitch angle at full deflection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. the value of point “H”. Conversely, the attack angle should be increased if motor speed is to increase while climbing. Therefore, on the “Pitch”graph page, put the vertical line on Point “H” by moving the pitch stick then change this point’s value appropriately with the  selection keys of the right four-way button.

This diagram shows only the changes when setting the maximum collective pitch value. **+100%**

**100% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

Then bring the model back to hover, which should, in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center point.If the hover flight point is now achieved only by moving the pitch stick away from its center point toward“higher” values then this deviation should be compensated by increasing the hover-flight pitch value

– i. e. for point “1”

– a little until the model once again hov ers with the stick at its center point. Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing the angle of attack appropriately. It may also be necessary to correct the carburetor opening for the hover point (point “1”) with “C1  throttle”. ing the linkage point on the servo or carburetor lever. Only then should the throttle servo’s fine-tuning be electronically optimized.
**Caution: Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and**  **safety precautions applicable to handling motors and helicopters before starting the motor for the**  **first time!** With this basic set-up complete, the motor should be started in accordance with the motor operating instructions: idling can then be configured using the trim lever of the throttle/collective pitch stick. Thepreset idle position will be displayed on the transmitter’s basic display by a horizontal bar next to the C1 trim lever position indicator. Refer to the description of digital trim on page 70 of this manual.The model should lift off the ground with the collective pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not the case, proceed as follows: **1. The model does not lift off until the collective**  **pitch stic k is above the center point:**  a) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: On the graph page for “ C1  Throttle” increase the value for point “1”. **+100%**

**0% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5**

**1 Control travel**  Hover point

b) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Increase the b lade angle of attack pitch by increasing the value of point “1” on the “ Pitch ” graph page. **+100%**

**0% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5**

**1 Control travel**  Hover point **2. The model lifts off before the center point is** 

**reac hed:**  a) Rotational speed is too highRemedy: Decrease the carb uretor opening by reducing the value of point “1” on the graph page for “ C1  Throttle”

. **+100%**

**0% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5**

**1 Control travel**  Hover point

b) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: Decrease the b lade angle of attack pitch by reducing the value of point “1” on the graph page for “ Pitch ”. **+100%**

**0% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5**

**1 Control travel**  Hover point

Important: These settings must be reconfigured until the model hovers at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick at its center point. The configuration of all other model parameters depends on these settings being made correctly!
**Standard set-up**Standard set-up is completed on the basis of the basic set-up described above, whereby the model hovers in normal flight at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center point: This means a set-up with which the model is capable of both hovering and flying circuits in all phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed. **Climb settings** The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collectivepitch setting (point “H”) now permits, in a simple manner, a means of attaining a constant rotational speed from hovering right through to maximum climb. First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving200 **Program description - Helicopter mixer** Therefore, after the motor is started, system rotational speed should be increased s l o w l y by way of the throttle limiter. If a switch has been assigned to the throttle limiter, always ensure the » **Control adjust** «“menu, page 122, is used to program a time constant of about 5 seconds to run up system rotational speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave the default value of “GL” in the “Type” column alone, however, to configure this setting globally for all flight phases. a visual and an acoustic warning if the carburetor is open too wide when the transmitter is switched on. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger that the motor will run up to speed immediately afterstarting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage immediately. Accordingly, **always hold the rotor head firmly when starting.**  Nevertheless, if the motor is accidentally started with the carburetor too wide open, the golden rule is this: **Don’t panic! Hold the rotor head securely!**  **Don’t let go!** Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst case scenario). **YOU must ensure the helicopter never moves**  **in an uncontrolled manner.** The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the motor itself are negligible in comparison to theinjuries and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter can cause if it is allowed to thrash about with spinning rotor blades. **Always make sure no other person is present in the**  **helicopter’s hazard area.**The switchover from idle to a flight setting with increased system rotational speed must not take place abruptly. This will cause the rotor to accelerate very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; they will respond by swinging far out of their normal position and may even cause a boom strike. This diagram shows only the change to the hover point, i. e. collective pitch minimum and maximum are both left at -100 %

or +100 %. **+100%**

**100% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5 1**  **Control travel** Modify these settings until they really result in a constant rotational speed over the full control range between hovering and climbing flight. **Descent setting** The descent setting should now be configured by placing the model in a steady descent from forwardflight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (point “L”) so that the model descends at an angle of 60 ° ... 70 °. Therefore, on the “Pitch” graph page, put the vertical line on Point “L” by moving the pitch stick then change this point’s value appropriately with the selection keys of the right four-way button.

This diagram shows only the changes when setting the minimum collective pitch value. **+100%**

**100% OUTPUT** 

**2 3 4 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

Once the model can fly this maneuver properly, set the value for “Throttle min”

– the value f or point “L” on the graph page for “C1  Throttle”

– so that the rotational speed neither increases nor decreases . Thiscompletes the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch. **Some important closing remarks** Before starting the motor, ensure that the throttle limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor now responds only to the C1 trim lever. There will be201 **For your notes**202 **Program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation setting** 

# Helicopter mixer Auto-rotation setting

Auto-rotation permits both full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motorshould fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is alsothe only possible way to avoid a high-speed, uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis and a resulting catastrophic crash

– which is wh y a switchover TO the auto-rotation phase takes place immediately. When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as follows:

Pitch

0%

0°

Autorot –90% 0%
Gyro gain 0% Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress

Swash rotation OFF Swash limiter

During auto-rotation flight, the main rotor is no longer driven by the motor but only by its own momentumand the airflow through the rotor plane during descent. Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter flares, pilots must not only have experience in hand

ling helicopter models b ut must also consider carefully how the relevant functions should be configured.The advanced pilot should therefore practice autorotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if themotor should fail. For this purpose, the program provides a range of adjustment options designed to help the pilot fly a motorized model in its unpowered state.Note that the auto-rotation settings comprise a complete seventh flight phase, which provides access to all the flight phase-specific configuration options, and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc., in particular. The following functions have special features not present in the powered flight phases:
**Pitch** (Collectiv e pitch curve (C1  Pitch)) In powered flight, the maximum blade pitch angle is limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation, however, it is limited only by the point at which airflowceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure sufficient thrust when flaring the helicopter even as rotational speed is falling off. To do so, briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to switch to the “Pitch” graph page and then use the stick to move the vertical line to point “H”. Start by setting a value that is about 10 to 20 % greaterthan your “normal” maximum value for collective pitch. Initially, however, do NOT set a value that is considerably greaterthan for normal flight, since, if this is done, the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed, there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during the flare and the model will balloon: this will case the rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and the model will then crash to the ground. The value can always be readjusted later after flying some test auto-rotations. The minimum value for collective pitch can differ from that set for normal flight. This depends on the pilot’s usual style for normal flight. For auto-rotation, how

e ver, always set a sufficiently generous minimum value for collective pitch at point “L” to ensure the model can be brought out of forward flight at mo

der ate speed into a descent at an angle of around 60 ... 70 degrees when collective pitch is reduced to a minimum. If, like most helicopter pilots, you have used this kind of setting for normal flight anyway, then this value can simply be transferred. If, however, you normally let your model “fall” at a shallower angle, then you should increase the value at point “L”, and vice versa. Approach angle for various wind conditions Approach angle

in moderate wind

no wind

45 ° 60 ° 75 ° in strong

wind

As a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not positioned right at the bottom of its travel for auto-rotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover position andthe bottom end-point. This offers the pilot an option for further adjustment, e. g. via pitch inclination through pitch-axis controls. The approach can be shortened by pulling back slightly on the pitch-axis stick and gently reducingpitch or by extending the approach by pushing forward on the pitch-axis stick and carefully increasing pitch. **Throttle setting AR** Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow motorcompletely during competitions, This is rather inconvenient during training sessions because the motor must be restarted after every practice auto-rotation landing. Therefore, for training sessions, set this line’s value such that a combustion motor is held at a safe idle without the clutch engaging during the auto-rotation phase; electric drive systems should be set safely to “Off”.

Note: The “Motor Stop” option in the » **Base setup model** «menu offers an alternative “Emergency STOP” function.203 **Program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation setting Tail rotor AR** In normal flight, the tail rotor is set so that it compensates for motor torque while the model is hovering. It therefore generates some a certain amount of thrust even in its normal position. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used tocompensate for varying weather conditions, fluctuations in system rotational speed and other influences.For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not driven by the motor, but by the “windmill” principle. Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque for whichthe tail rotor must compensate, all corresponding mixers are switched off automatically. Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also means the above-mentioned thrust is superfluous, however, a different tail rotor configuration is also required: Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receivingsystem switched on, select the flight phase “Autorotation” and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now change the value on the “Tail rotor” line until the tail rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to one another. Depending on the friction and running resistance of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, however. This relatively slight torque must then be corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a figure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the pitch angle in normal flight.204 **General notes on freely programmable mixers** The previous pages have described a wealth of ready-to-use built-in coupling functions, in the context of the two menus » **Wing mixers** « and » **Helicopter mixers**  «. The fundamental significance of mixers and the principle by which they work are described on page 169. The following section provides information about the so-called “free mixers”. In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned above, the transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT also offers a number of freely programmablemixers in every model memory location, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can be defined to meet one’s own requirements. These include:

• 8 linear mix ers, numbered 1 through 8

• 4 cur ve mixers, numbered 9 through 12 These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most applications and are certainly sufficient when the potential of the pre-programmed coupling functions are utilized. The » **MIX act. / phase** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, see page 215, also provides a means of activating or disabling any of these twelve mixers separately for each flight phase. For the “free mixers”, the signal present at any control function (1 to 8 or 1 ... 12) can be assigned as the input signal or, for a so-called “switch channel” (seefurther below), the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal that is present at the control channel and passed to the mixer input is always influenced byits own transmitter control and by any control characteristic that may have been set, e. g. those specified by the » **Dual Rate / Expo** «, » **Channel 1 curve** « and

» **Control adjust** « menus. The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 to

– de

pending on transmitter and receiver type

– a maxi

mum of 12) that can also be assigned freely. Before this channel routes the signal to the servo, it can only still be influenced by the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, i. e . by the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo travel and servo travel limit functions, and possibly by the » **Tx. output swap** « option, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. One control function can be used for any number of mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several mixers are to be switched to act in parallel. Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in the latter case, however, it is very important to ensure that the servo concerned does not strike itsmechanical end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate excessively. For safety’s sake, it may therefore be necessary to set an appropriate travel limit in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, page 112. For more complex applications, mixers can be switched in sequence. In this case, it is not the(transmitter) signal at the “output” of a control function which forms the input signal of the “series-wired”mixer, but the (mixed) signal “further back” at the “input” of a control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes several examples of this type.In the software, a “free mixer” is always initially activated. Optionally the mixer can also be assigned toan ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions to which switches can be assigned, be careful to avoid (undesired) multiple assignments to a single switch. **The two key mixer parameters are:**

• ... the **mixer ratio** , which defines the extent to which the input signal acts on the output of the control channel connected to the mixer output. The mixer ratio for linear mixers can be set as symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also be configured with up to 6 points to suit one’s ownapplication and even implement extremely non-linear curves. •

... **the neutral point** of a mixer, which is also referred to as the “offset”.The offset is that specific point along the movement of a transmitter control (stick, proportionalcontrol or switch) at which the mixer no longer influences the control channel connected to its output. Normally, the neutral point is the center point of the transmitter control. However, the offset can also be set at any other point along the controltravel. Since there are no restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for the 8 linear mixers. **Switch channel “S” as a mixer input**Occasionally, however, only a constant control signal is required at the mixer output, e. g. for a slightlyincreased “up-elevator” trim when the aero-tow release is closed

– fully independently of its nor mal trim setting. In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open and close the release, but also to pass the desiredtrim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the program is designated “S” for “Switch channel”. In addition, if the corresponding “target channel” should now no longer be influenced by its “normal” transmitter control, separate its transmitter control from the function input of the associated control channel in the » **Mix-only channel** «, see page 216, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Here too, for clarification of this there is an example of the function provided in the following menu description. 

# General notes on freely programmable mixers205 **Program description - Free mixers** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Free mix**

**ers** « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers

MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Regardless of the model type selected, each of the 20 ( 

### mc-16 HoTT) or 24 ( 

### mc-20 HoTT) model memory locations offers eight linear mixers (M1

... 8)

...

fr M1 M2 M3 ?? ?? ?? ??

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

... and 4 curve mixers (C9 ... 12), which also offer non-linear control characteristics: fr M8 C9 C10 ?? ?? ?? ??

C11 C12 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

The » **MIX act. / phase** « menu, see page 215, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked at extra cost on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, also provides a means of activating and disabling specific mixers separately for each flight phase. **On the “Free mixers” menu, the blocked mixers are then suppressed in the**  **corresponding flight phase. If you are hunting for a mixer that is not shown, you should therefore**  **switch to the appropriate flight phase!** In this first section, however, we will concentrate onhow to program the first screen page of the “free mixers”. We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of this

menu. **Basic programming procedure** 1. Select the mixer y ou want by using the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button. 2. Tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The input field on the column marked “fr” atthe lower edge of the screen is now shown highlighted. 3. Use the selection ke ys on the right four-way button to select the “fr” mixer input.Additional column names now appear in the bottom line of the screen. 4. Tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button; using the  selection key of the left or right four-way button, switch to the column marked “to” at the lower edge of the screen then tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button once again. The input field “to” is shown highlighted. 5. Use the selection ke ys on the right four-way button to select the “to” mixer output. 6. Tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Optionally use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to switch to the columnmarked “ty” at the lower edge of the screen in order to include the trim of the respective stick in the mixer input signal (“Tr” for trim or “P” for phase) and/or to add series switching (“  ”) for mixers ... ... and/or use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to change into the column marked with the switch icon (“ ”) on the lower edge of the screen. To do this, tap the center **SET**key of the right four-way button once again and assign a switch as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. 7. Using the  selection key of the left or right fourway button, switch to the column (“ ”) then tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. 8. Define the mixer r atios on the second screen page. 9. Return to the first page b y using the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. **“fr(om)”** After selecting a mixer line and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, select one of the control functions, 1 ... 8 respectively 1 ... 12 or S, for the value field now in inverse video with the selection keys of the right touch. For the sake of clarity, control functions 1 ... 4 are

mar ked as follows when setting wing mixers:
C1 Throttle/airbrake stick
AI Aileron stick
EL Elevator stick 

# Free mixers

Freely-programmable linear and curve mixers



### mc

  16 20206 **Program description - Free mixers Mixer switches**  In the sample screen image shown above, switches “4” and “2” have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch “C4”. The switch symbol to the right of the switch number shows the current switch state. **Any mixers not assigned to a switch, as indicated by an empty cell for the column marked by the**  **switch icon (“ ”) on the screen’s bottom line,**  **are fundamentally active!**
A switch must be assigned to LinearMIX 4 if you wish to switch between two fixed mixer values (still to beset) that correspond to the two end-points of a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the “switch channel” mixer cannot also be switched “on” or “off” as with the other mixers. If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 ... G4) or a logical switch (L1 ... 8) as the mixer switch, then please remember that you also must define the switch as such in the » **Control switches** « menu, or in the » **Logical switches** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked in the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. If you do not, you will assign an undefined control or logical switch and therefore one that functions as a fixed switch. **“Ty(pe)” Including the trim** For control functions 1 ... 4, you can also allow trimming of the digital trim lever for the given stick effect the mixer’s input. In this case, briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then use the selection keys to select “Tr” in the inverse video field: RU Rudder stick ... and, for the helicopter program: 1 Throttle/collective pitch stick
2 Roll stick
3 Pitch-axis stick
4 Tail rotor stick

Note: If you select any of the control functions 5 ... 12 max. for fixed-wing models or 5, 7 ... 12 max. for helicopter models, do not forget to assign a transmitter control for each of these in the » **Control adjust** « menu!

**“S” as switch channel** Selecting “S” (switch channel) in the “ fr” column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e. g. in order to add a little more “upelevator” trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on the previous page. After assigning a control function or the “S” switchchannel in the “fr” column, the following is also displayed ...
**“to”** ... on the lower edge of the screen. Use this column’s input field to specify the destination of the mixer, i. e. assign mixer output, to one of the control channels. At the same time, additional fields will appear in the bottom line of the screen:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 Tr

In this example, four mixers have already been defined. The second mixer is already familiar in principle as “Elevat curve” from the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers** « menu and the third is familiar from the line “Tail” (“2ELSv3+8”) of the » **Model type** « menu. As a general rule, however, you should first make use of the pre-programmed mixers. However,if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want to program non-linear curves or need to offset the mixerneutral point, then you should set or leave the preprogrammed mixers at “0 %” and replace these with free mix ers. **Erasing mixers**To erase a previously-defined mixer, select the appropriate line with the  selection keys on the left orright four-way button, switch to the “fr” column, if necessary, with the  selection keys then briefly tap the center **SET** button on the right four-way button:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2 3

The field in the “fr“ column for the mixer you want to delete will now be shown in inverse video: tap both  selection keys or  on the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ):

fr M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 ?? S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 ??207 **Program description - Free mixers** ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 7 7 8

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

Example: Two mixers (MIX 6  7 and 7  8): a) WITHOUT series s witching:

6 6

7Servo4 8 VC 577Bes -Nr 4 01Se vo4 8 VC 577Bes Nr 410 7

8Servo4 8C 577Bes -Nr 410 MIX 1

MIX 2

b) The same mixers WITH series switching:

6 6

7Servo4 8 VC 577Bes Nr 410Servo4 8 VC 577B s -Nr 4101 7

8Se vo4 8 VC 577Bes Nr 410 MIX 1

MIX 2

In this highly simplified example, if mixer 2 is switchedin series, then it does not “take over” solely the transmitter signal of control function 7

– as shown under a)

– but, instead, the entire (mix ed) signal present at the servo side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then directs this in accordance with its confi

gured mixer r atio forwards to control channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter control “6” extends as far as output “8”. This kind of serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish. For example, another mixer “8  12” can be used to route the control signalfrom “6” as far as output “12”, taking into consideration the associated mixer ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, each separate mixer can still be controlled via the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-wing and helicopter mixers alsowork in the same way, when set up to switch “in sequence”. **Including phase trim** If you wish to apply the FLAP channel (“6”) or FLAP2 channel (“9”) trim values stored in the » **Phase trim** «
menu

– flight phase dependent

– then first tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button and use its selection keys to select “P”:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 11

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? P ?? ??

Depending on the mixer value configured, a mixer can, as shown in the example above, route the signal from a flap control present (e. g.) on input 6 to control channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim v alue set on the » **Phase trim** « menu, page 160, for the respective flight phase. **Other special features of free mixers**
**Mixer input = mixer output** If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e. g. “C1  C1”, you can achieve some very special effects in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like. A typical application of this can be found at the end of this section, as Example 2 on page 213. ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 Tr

The effect of the C1 trim lever on mixer output will depend on the function assigned in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, in the “Motor on C1” column for fixed-wing models ... **Trim Effect on mixer output**
None linear over full trim lever travel Forward Only effective if C1 stick is forward Back Only effective if C1 stick is back

... or

– in the case of model helicopters

– in the “Thr .” line of the » **Stick mode** « menu, which is available on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only: **Trim Effect on mixer output**
TA (Thr-AR) linear over full trim lever travel to output 6 (throttle servo)
TL (Throttle limit) only effective at minimum position of the assigned throttle limit control (the right side proportional rotary control as standard)
PT (Pitch) linear over full trim lever travel to control function “Pitch”
**Switching mixers in series** As already explained on page 204, you can also switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched in “sequence”, the “input signal” of a control channel already on its way to the servo “branches off” and is directed to a further channel. In the “ty” column, select the right angle bracket “ ” or “Tr ”, if the trim should also act simultaneously on the mixer input:208 **Program description - Free mixers Mixer Effect** 
N.N.*  2 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  5 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a flap function
N.N.*  6 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a flap function
N.N.*  7 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  9 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a flap function
N.N.*  10 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  11 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a flap function
N.N.*  12 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with an aileron function

**• Model helicopter**  **s:** With helicopter mixers, collective pitch control maybe provided by up to 4 servos connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on helicopter type. The software links these together to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis. Other than within the » **Helicopter mixers** « menu, it is **not** advisable to mix a free mixer into these channels because this can lead to very complexinteractions. One of the few exceptions is “Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter control”

– see e xample 3 on page 213. **Important notices:**

**• With serial links in par**  **ticular, remember that the travels of the individual mixers are cumu** **lative if multiple stick commands are made si multaneously: there is a risk that the servo(s)**  Tip: If you separate a control function

– f or example ,“9”

– in the » **Mix-only channel** « menu, see page 216, then the servo’s response is determined exclusively by the mixer input of a mixer programmed from “9  9”. This menu is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked as an extra-cost option on the 

### mc-16 HoTT. Thus, with linear mixers M1 ... 8 or curve mixers C9 ... 12, 6-point control curves can be defined for any transmitter control in a manner analogous to that described in the » **Channel 1 curve**  « menu and these can also be used in flight phase switching if needed. This method of “linking” is not only also switchable but can even be subject to a delay by assigning an appropriate delay in the “– time +” column of the » **Control adjust** « menu. **Mixer output affecting default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing flap or collective**  **pitch servos** Before we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must first give some thought to what happens if we permita mixer to affect the default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing flap or collective pitch servos:

**• Fix**  **ed-wing models:** Depending on the number of wing servos available on the “Aile/flaps” line of the » **Model type** « menu,control channels 2 and 5 are connected via special mixers for the “aileron” function, 6 and 7 for the “flap” function, outputs 9 and 10 (if present) for the FLAP2 servos and 11 and 12 for AILE2 servos. If mixer outputs are programmed to affect thesekinds of couplings, then their effect on the respective flap pair derived from the “receiving” control channel must be accounted for: **may strike a mechanical end-stop. If neces sary, reduce “servo travel” to avoid this; alter** **natively, set “Travel limit” on the “Servo adjust ment” menu and/or reduce mixer values.** 

**• T**  **ake advantage of the ever-present option to switch over to the transmitter’s »Servo dis**  **play« menu, see page 274. This menu is reached from almost any menu with a brief, si**  **multaneous tap on the**  **keys of the left four-way button. This menu gives you the op** **portunity to check the effects of all of your set tings on a single screen.**  **Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point** Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, the following section describes how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves. For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the selection keys  on the left or right four-way button to select the desired mixer line. If necessary, use the four-way button’s selection keys to move to the right column (“ ”) then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to access the graph page

**. M1 ... 8: Setting linear mixer values**  As a practical example, we will now define a linear mixer curve to resolve the following problem:For a motorized aircraft model, the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7

– defined on the “Aile/flaps” line of the » **Model type** « menu as “... 2FL”

– are to be used f or actuating landing flaps. That is; when a transmitter control is moved, theymust deflect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous elevator trim, however. First allocate, for example, input 6 to the left slider control Sl1 located in the middle of the console by making settings in the » **Control adjust** « menu. A transmitter control on input 6,

– as sho wn in the * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (der zu nennende Name)209 **Program description - Free mixers** above table

– will control the tw o servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 by default as flaps. Leave the default value of “GL” in the “Type” column alone, however, to configure this setting globally for all flight phases

– as is the case f or the free mixer. **»Control adjust«** menu

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal fr Sl1 fr fr

SEL

Note: Note that if two flap servos have been selected, anytransmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the flaps. However, in the interests of safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs not currently required to “free”, or of resetting these back to “free”! Start by moving this transmitter control to its forward limit and adjust the landing flaps so that they are retracted or closed in this position. If you now move the dial to the rear, the flaps should move downward; if not the direction of servo rotation must be adapted. We now turn our attention to the first mixer shown in the screen image on page 206 (“6  EL”), to which switch 4 was assigned:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 ?? ??

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open the second screen page: OFF L.Mix 1 6 EL

If this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been activated in combination with the assigned toggle switch

– “4”, in this e xample. If so, operate the switch:

L.Mix 1

0% 0%

0% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

The continuous vertical line represents the current position of the transmitter control linked to input 6.(However, it is not visible in the above graphic because it is at the left edge since slider control Sl1, in this example assigned to input 6 (see previous page), is at its forward limit.) The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point

– see under “Offset”, below. Thesolid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value zero over the entire stick travel;accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the movement of the flaps. First, the ...
**Offset** (mixer neutral point) ... should be defined. This is accomplished by using the Select button  of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the line below “Offset”: L.Mix 1

0% 0%

0% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagramindicates the position of the mixer neutral point (“Offset”), i. e . the specific point along the control travel atwhich the mixer does NOT influence the control channel connected to its output. The default position for this point is at the control center. However, since in our example the flaps should beclosed or retracted with the slider control at its forward limit and therefore the elevator should not be further influenced in this position, the mixer neutral point must be relocated to precisely this point. To do so, push the slider control used (in this example, slider control Sl1) to its forward limit if you have not already done so, then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point, the new mixer neutral point, which by definition always retains the “initial” value of zero. **However, to better illustrate our example, we now wish to set this “Offset” value to only -75**  **%:**

L.Mix 1

0% 0%

+75% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

Notes:

• By selecting **SET** with the  selection key of the left or right four-way button followed by a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ...210 **Program description - Free mixers** * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (der zu nennende Name) L.Mix 1

0% 0% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

+75%

... the offset value can be set manually or adjusted in 1 % increments with the selection keys on the left or right four-way button.

• By selecting **SET**

... L.Mix 1

0% 0% Offset

STO 6 EL Mix input

+75% SET

• ... set the mix er’s neutral point automatically back to control center with a simultaneous tap on both the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). **Symmetrical mixer ratios** The next task is to define the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point

– star ting from its current position. If necessary, use selection keys  on the left or right four-way button to select the **SYM** field in order to establish a mixer value which is symmetric to theoffset point just set. Following a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, set both **SYM** fields (now in inverse video) via the selection keys of the right four-way button to values between -150 % and +150 %. Note that the mixer value set always refers to the input signal of the respective transmitter control (control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the direction of the mixer. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will erase the mixer ratio in the inverse video field. The “optimum” value in our example will certainly need flight-testing.

L.Mix 1

+75% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+20% +20%

Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75 % of con

trol travel: as a result, the elevator (“EL”) will exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the neutral point of the landing flaps and this is naturally undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the mixer neutral point to -100 % of control tr avel, as described earlier:

L.Mix 1

+20% +20%

+100% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

If the offset, now -100 %, is reset to 0 % of control tr avel by using selection key  on the left or right four-way button to select the **SET** field then tapping either the selection key combination  or  on the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the following screen will appear:

L.Mix 1

+20% +20%

0% Offset

STO 6 EL Mix input

SET **Asymmetric mixer ratios** In many cases, however, we require different mixer values on each side of the mixer neutral point. Do this by first resetting the offset of the mixer used in the example, “6  EL” again to 0 %, if necessar y, refer to the figure above. Now select the **ASY** field with the selection key  on the left or right four-way button then tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button. If slider control Sl1, assigned to input 6 in this example, is now moved in each corresponding direction, the mixer ratios for each of the two control directions, i. e . left and right of the established offset point, can be adjusted with the selection keys of the right four-way button:

L.Mix 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+55% +20%

Note: If you are using a type “S  N.N.*” switch channel mixer you will need to actuate the assigned switch. The vertical line then jumps between the left and right side.
**Setting curve mixers C9 ... 12**These four curve mixers allow the definition of extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up tofour freely positionable points between the two endpoints “L” (low = -100 % control tr avel) and “H” (high = +100 % control tr avel) along the control travel. If you have already read the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu description or about programming 6-point curves in the » **Helicopter mixers** « menu, you can safely skip the following description.211 **Program description - Free mixers Programming details**  The control curve is defined by up to 6 points, knownas “reference points”. In the default software configuration, 2 reference points are already defined, namely only the two end-points, “L” and “H”; see the next screen image. The following section applies to “any” mixer to which we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic. **The examples shown in the following section are merely illustrative, however, and they do not rep**  **resent real-life mixer curves. Setting reference points**  When you move the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input

– here control function 8

– a ver tical line in the graph follows the movement between the two end-points. The current control position is also shown numerically on the “Input” line. The point at which this line intersects with the curve in question is named the “Output” and can be varied between -125 % and +125 % by setting ref erence points; see further below. This control signal acts on the mixer output. In the above example, the transmitter control is on input 8 at -50 % of control tra vel. The output signal continue to show 0 %, how ever, since no value has yet been entered. Up to four additional reference points can be set between the two end-points “L” and “H”, although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. Mov e the transmitter control of the control channel you have selected

– in this example the left of the tw o proportional sliders fitted to the centre console (“Sl1”). While a question mark is displayed in the Point line, you can set the next reference point by pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button: –45% 0% 0% Input Output Point ? C.Mix 9 Curve off 8 10

When you now briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the “?” is replaced by a point number and the value field to the right is activated, i. e. presented in inverse video:

–45% 0% 1 8 10

0% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve off

Using the selection keys on the right four-way button you can now change the point value within a range of ±125 %, e. g.:

–45% +50% 1 8 10

+50% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve off

Note: If the stick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the“Output” line always relates to the current stick position. Continue in this way to set other reference points.Note that the order in which you generate the (maximum) four reference points between end-points “L” and “H” is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered:

+35% –55% 2 8 10

–55% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve off

**Erasing reference points** To erase one of the reference points between “L” and “H”, use the transmitter control in question to movethe vertical line onto or into the vicinity of the reference point in question. The reference point number and associated reference point value are shown on the “Point” line. If necessary, activate the Value field by pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button. With the Value field now highlighted, press the two Select buttons  or  of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) simultaneously.The selected reference point is erased, and the numbering of the remaining reference points is updated as required. Briefly tap the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button to complete the procedure. Note that the reference points “L” and “H” cannot be erased. **Changing reference point values**To change reference point values, use the associated transmitter control to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change: “L”, 1 ... 4 or “H”. Thenumber and current curve value of this point are displayed. After activating the value field on the “Point” line by briefly tapping the center **SET** key, use the selection keys on the right four-way button to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted field. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not affect neighbor ing reference points. Briefly tap the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button to212 **Program description - Free mixers** complete the procedure.
Note: If the stick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the“Output” line always relates to the current stick position.
**Trim point function** Alternatively, with the Point value field active (i. e. highlighted) you can use the Select buttons  of the left-hand four-way button to skip reference points L, 1 ... max. 4 and H which you have already set, in the ascending or descending direction. The selection keys on the right four-way button can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.

+35% –55% 2 8 10

–55% Trim point Input Output Point C.Mix 9

In this simple example, slider control Sl1

– represented b y the vertical line

– is halfwa y between the backward limit and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). Ho wever, “Point 2” will be relocated to control center at a point value of -55 %, resulting in a momentary output v alue of -55 %. One touch on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will terminate this trim point function.
**Trim offset function** When a value field is active , i. e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the  selection keys of the left four-way button and to make a change with the selection keys of the right four-way button, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the  keys on the left four-way button. Starting with a point value for “Point 1” at -55 %, the control curv es in both of the following figures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % range b y the trim offset function:

+35% –30% 2 8 10

–30% Trim offset Input Output Point C.Mix 9

+35% –80% 2 8 10

–80% Trim offset Input Output Point C.Mix 9

You can also exit this function by tapping the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button.
**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) selection key of the right four-way button with an active (i. e. inverse video) value field. You canthen use the selection keys on the right four-way button to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the figure below, “Point 2” which was just shifted to -55 % with the trim point function, will no w be shifted to the left, from input value +35 % to 0 %: 0% –55% ? 8 10

–55% TrimmX-axis Input Output Point C.Mix 9

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned horiz ontally further away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a “?” sign will reappear in the line Point.This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifies that afurther point can be set at the current control position.

• Please note that the percentage value on the “Out

put” line always relates to the current stick position and not to the position of the point. **Smoothing the curve** This “angular” curve profile created in the example can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Starting from the situation in the previous illustration, first press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button to conclude the procedure. Now use the Select button  of the right-hand four-way button to move up to the Value field of the “Curve” line, and press the **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button once

more:

0% –12% ? 8 10

0% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve off

Now press one of the Select buttons of the right-hand four-way button in order to switch from “off” to “on”,213 **Program description - Free mixers** then briefly press the central **SET** button of the righthand touch-button, or the central **ESC** button of the left-hand touch-button, to conclude the procedure:

0% –12% ? 8 10

0% on Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve

Note: The curves shown here are for demonstration purpos

es only and are not at all representative of real mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 285 and 323.
**Examples**
1. To open and close an aero-to w, a switch, e. g. SW 2, has already been assigned to control channel 8 in the » **Control adjust** « menu:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr 2

–––

Subsequent aero-tow flying has proven that youalways have to fly with the up-elevator held slightly in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the ele

vator ser vo connected to receiver output 3 when the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar from page 206: here, the fourth linear mixer has been set up for this function, with the switch channel “S” as mixer input: Move the selected switch to the OFF position and then switch ... ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 Tr

... to the mixer configuration page. Here select **STO** under “Offset” then tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button briefly ... depending on the selected travel setting in the » **Con trol adjust**  « menu and the switch setting, the offset value will jump to +X % or -X %, for e xample:

L.Mix 4

0% 0%

+100% Offset

SET

STO S EL Mix input

Now use the Select button  of the left or righthand four-way button to move to the line below “Mix input”. Select **SYM** if appropriate, then press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-waybutton. The value fields are now highlighted. After you have moved the selected switch to the mixer ON position, use the selection keys on the right four-way button to set the required symmetrical mixer ratio, for example:

L.Mix 1

+100% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+10% +10%

2. If a multi- flap wing featuring a “crow or butterfly system”with (additional) airbrakes is intended, and this brake system is to be tested with and without airbrakes, then move to the » **Mix-on ly channel**  « menu, see page 216. This menu is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter at extra cost. Simply set Channel 1 to “MIX-only” ...
MIX-only channel

only normal 1 2 3 4 5 6

... and follow this by programming a free mixer “C1  C1” to restore control over the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please. 3. The final example applies to model helicopters: In the helicopter prog ram, if you wish affect pitch trim with a proportional control, e. g. one of the slider controls in the middle of the console , then assign one of these controls to this function in the

» **Control adjust** « menu; for example the “In9” input. (However, leave the default value of “GL” in the“Type” column as it is so this configuration, analogous to the free mixer yet to be programmed, willbe applicable globally for all flight phases.) Finally, simply define a LinearMIX “9  1” with a symmetric mixer ratio of, for example, 25 %. Due to the inter nal coupling, this transmitter control then acts equally on all of the model’s collective pitch servos without affecting the throttle servo.214 **Program description - Free mixers** L.Mix 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM 9 1 Mix input

+25% +25%

However, you should also de-couple the assigned transmitter control from control channel 9, so that any servo which may be connected to receiveroutput 9 can no longer be operated by this transmitter control. This is accomplished in the » **Mix only channel**  « menu, see page 216, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter at extra cost.215 **Program description - Mix active / phase** 

# MIX active / phase

Selecting free mixers for flight phases
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **MIX ac tive / phase**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:
Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase

Helicopter mixer Fl. phase timers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

LinearM1 LinearM2 LinearM3 6 EL C1 EL

LinearM4 3 8 S EL yes

SEL yes yes yes Mix act. in phase

The “free mixers” on the previous menu can be enabled and disabled for specific flight phases. You therefore have complete freedom in assigning specific mixers only to specific flight phases.Switch to your chosen flight phase and use the selection keys to page through this menu. The mixers on the » **Free mixers** « menu are displayed in the center column. Following the activation of the value field by briefly tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, if the respective mixer is set to “no” by using the selection keys on the left or right four-way button, then this mixer is deactivated in the flight phaseshown at the bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed from the » **Free mixers** « menu list:

LinearM1 LinearM2 LinearM3 6

LinearM4 3 8 S SEL Speed no EL C1 EL

EL yes

yes yes Mix act. in phase

If a mixer is “lost” in the » **Free mixers** « menu ...

ty fr to M1 M3 6 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? 4

2

M6 ?? ??

... then you should either switch through the flight phases until it appears again ... or, alternatively, switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the mixer you are looking for:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2 

### mc

  16 20216 **Program description - MIX-only channel** 

# MIX-only channel

Separating control functions from control channels for all flight phases
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **MIX-only channel**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:
Fl. phase timer Wing mixers

Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Fl. phase timer Helicopter mixer

Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:
Mix-only channel

only normal 1 2 3 4 5 6

This menu can be used to interrupt the normal signal flow between the input side control function and the output side control channel , therefore the “classic” control-to-servo connection is actually separated. Use the potential offered by this flight phase independent menu, particularly to keep one of the control channels “free” in all flight phases from assignment toa transmitter control or switch for specific flight phases in the » **Control adjust** « menu. Conversely of course, such a stick, transmitter control or switch “robbed” of its servo can still be used freely as a control in other way

– indeed e ven in flight phase dependence

– , ref er to the programming examples at the end of this section. A stick, transmitter control or switch robbed of its servo by setting the channel to “MIX only” will then namely affect mixer inputs only ... ... and the servo connected to a channel set to “MIXonly” is then also only accessible from the mixers programmed to its control channel, i. e . “(with) MIX(ers) only”. Accordingly, for any channel set to “MIX only”, you can utilize both its control function and its control channel entirely independently of one another for any special functions you need; see the examples at the end of this section. A further option provided by a channel set to “MIX-only” status is the facility to program timed sequences using a mixer programmed to the same channel, and set up using the “- Time +” option of the » **Control adjust** « menu; see pages 118 and 122. See page 308 for a programming example. **Basic programming procedure**Use the Select buttons of the left or right-hand fourway button to select the desired channel 1 to 8 (  ) on the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter

... Mix-only channel

only normal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mix-only channel

only normal 7 8

... or 1 to 12 (  ) on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to select the desired channel to switch at will between “normal” ( ) and “MIX only” ( ) modes:

normal 7 8 9 10 11 12 Mix-only channel

only

Examples:

• For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the butterfly function, page 183, is generally used as a landing aid. Just as with “normal” airbrakes, this is generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the (airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 1 is still not “free”, since the control signal of the brake stick is still present at this location. Its control signal

– which in this specific case is not desired

– can be decoupled from control channel “1” to thus “free up” this channel from the C1 stick signal by setting channel 1 to “MIX only” in the

» **MIX-only channel** « menu. This makes it possible to use control channel “1”, together with receiver connection “1”, at any time for other purposes, via freely-programmable mixers

– e

. g. to connect up a speed controller. 

### mc

  16 20217 **Program description - MIX-only channel** Mix-only channel

only normal 1 2 3 4 5 6

• If y our model has built-in airbrakes, however, and you would like to perhaps test the performance ofa butterfly system with and without airbrakes, simply set channel 1 to “MIX only” and program a free mixer “C1  C1”, so as to restore your ability tocontrol the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please.218 **Program description - Dual mixers** 

# Dual mixers

Same-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channels
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Dual mi**

  ** xe** **rs** « menu option in the Multi-function menu:
Fl. phase timers Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Helicopter mixer Fl. phase timers

Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Diff. Dual mix er Mixer1 Mixer2 ?? ??

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% 0%

Similarly to a V-tail mixer, the four flight phase independent dual mixers couple ... 3 3

4Servo4 8 V**C 577**B s Nr 410Servo4 8 V**C 577**Bes Nr 101 4 V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs) Elevator stick

Rudder stick Right rudder / elevator Left rudder / elevator Rudder Elevator Elevator
Rudder Rudder Elevator

... a same-sense “   ” and an opposite-sense “ 

 ” control function, although they permit any channel to be used and offer differential travel for the opposing function. Important notice: Since the same and opposite sense influences of the given input on the two servos or rudder flaps

– coupled to one another b y the dual mixer

– are determined b y, among other things, their installation situa

tion and the direction of rotation specified in the

» **Ser vo adjustment**  « menu, the symbols “   ” and

“   ” are to be perceived more as synonyms ratherthan as consistently appropriate definitions! Accordingly, if wing flaps are deflected in the wrong direction, simply swap the two inputs or use the “servo reverse” option in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu; see page 112

. In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is supplemented by other “dual mixers” for realization of the two aileron servos on receiver outputs 2 and 5 and for the flap pairs on outputs 6 and 7, possibly also 9 and 10. These are activated via the aileronstick and the transmitter control that has been assigned to input “6” on the » **Control adjust** « menu. In the same way, the four freely-programmable dualmixers on this menu can be used to couple two further control functions, a feature that would otherwise only be possible with time-consuming programming of free mixers. Here, we will use a “V-tail with rudder differential” as our example to explain the programming of a dual mixer (see also the examples on page 296):Use the Select buttons of the left or right-hand fourway button to select the column you wish to access. Press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button to activate the Value field, and then set the desired value using the Select buttons:

Diff. Mix er1 Mixer2 EL

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% RU +25% Dual mixer

In the dual mixer shown in our example the two servos connected to receiver outputs 3 and 4 move inthe same or opposite direction depending on the direction of movement of the associated stick, and thus operate as elevators or rudders. The differentiation, according to dual mixer configuration, is only effective for rudder activation.In this case, both corresponding trim lever are effective. No additional free mixers are required for this arrangement. **When using this mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as “normal” on the “Model type”** 

**menu.** Tip: All settings can be checked directly in the » **Servo display**  « menu, which can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously tapping the  keys on the left four-way button.
Example: Model with two rudders, with differential travel and outward movement (e. g. s wept-back flying wing): 

### mc

  16 20219 **Program description - Dual mixers** Diff. Mix er1 Mixer2 8

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% RU +75% Dual mixer

When a rudder command is given, the second servo connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of programming, differential travel can be configuredfor the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the rudder stick affects both servos. If the rudders are also required to deflect outwards when the airbrakes areactivated, then you should assign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the » **Control adjust** «“ menu. Afterwards, change to the “Offset” column then modify the offset value until both rudders are again in their neutral positions. It may be necessary to “play” a bit with the offset and travel adjustments.220 **Program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safe** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.

Note:If “1 servo” is selected on the “Swashplate” line of the » **Helicopter type** «“ menu, this option is not shown on the multi-function menu.Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Swashplate mixer** « menu option in the Multi-function menu:
Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer Swaschplate mixer
Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: Swashplate mixer Pitch Roll Nick +61% +61% +61%

SEL
The number of servos installed in your helicopter for pitch control was established in the “Swashplate” line of the » **Helicopter type** « menu, see page 108 . This information is used to automatically couple together the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch, so that you do not need to define any other mixers yourself. For helicopter models with only a single collective pitch servo , this » **Swashplate mixer** « menu option is of course superfluous because the software controls a total of three swashplate servos for pitch, nick and roll independently of one another, i. e . without a mixer. In this scenario, this menu option is therefore no 

# Swashplate mixer

Collective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixer longer available to you from the multi-function menu. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 ... 4 pitch servos, mixer ratios and mixer directions are set up by default as shown above. The default is +61 % in each case b ut the value can be varied from -100 % to +100 % if required b y briefly tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button and its selection keys. Simultaneously tapping both  or  selection keys on the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the mixer ration in inverse video again to the +61 % def ault value. If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, rolland pitch-axis) does not respond to the sticks properly, you should alter the mixer directions (“+” or “-”) before trying to correct the directions of servo rotation.
Note: Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the servos mechanically striking their end-stops. This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Fail-safe adjust**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:
Fail-safe adjust

Pos hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 DELAY : 0.25s STO
The higher level of operating safety exhibited by the HoTT system when compared to traditional PPMtechnology results from the fact that the microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only exclusively processes the signals of “its” transmitter, but can also clean up “dirty” control signals that it receives. Only when these signals become too error-prone orgarbled due to outside interference does the processor automatically replace the disrupted signals with the last received correct signal, temporarily stored in the receiver. This feature is configured by thesettings as described below. This feature also suppresses brief interference caused by e. g. local drops in field strength, which otherwise result in the familiar “glitches”. In this case, the red LED lights up on the receiver.If you have not already programmed Fail-Safe settings in the currently active model memory, the follow

# Fail-safe

Fault condition setpoints



### mc

  16 20 mc

  16 20221 **Program description - Fail-safe** ing message will appear in the base display for a few seconds when you switch the transmitter on:
Fail Safe setup t.b.d.

**Programming procedure** The “Fail Safe” function determines the behavior of the receiver if communication between the transmitter and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 ... 8 on the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, or 1 ... 12 on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitterwith twelve channels (unlocked as an extra-cost option) or the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter can optionally ... 1. preser ve the current position (“hold”):If communication is disrupted, all servos programmed to “hold” mode remain at the positions judged to be the last valid positions by the recei

v er until the receiver picks up another valid control signal, or 2. mo ve to a freely selectable position (“Pos”) if interference should occur, following the expiry of the “time delay”. Use selection keys  on the left or right four-way button to select the desired servo connection 1 ... 8 (  ) or 1 ... 12 (  ) then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to freely switch between “hold” ( ) and “Pos” mode ( ):

1 2 3 4 5 6 STO Fail-safe adjust

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s
Following this, use the selection keys  on the left or right four-way button to select the “DELAY” option shown at the bottom of the display ...

7 8 9 10 11 12 STO Fail-safe adjust

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s
... and then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the rightfour-way button. Now use the four-way button’s selection keys to make your choice from the four possible time delays (0.25 s , 0.5 s , 0.75 s and 1 s) off ered. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the inverse video field to its default value 0.25 s

. Afterwards, select the **STO** field at the bottom right of the display with the  selection keys on the left or right four-way button. Now put the servos which have been switched into position mode into their desired positions SIMULTANEOUSLY with the respective operating elements. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to store these positions as the fail-safe setting for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if interference is experienced. Successful storage of the positions is confirmed briefly on the screen:

7 8 9 10 11 12 STO Position stored Fail-safe adjust

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s

**Attention:**

**• Please note that decisive fail-saf**  **e settings are stored in the receiver! Therefore, following a**  **change of receivers, these fail-safe settings should be renewed and in the previous receiv** **er they should be erased, if necessary per Re set, see page 60.** 

**• Ensure y**  **ou make use of this safety net by at least programming the following for a fail-safe** **incident: for glow-powered models, set the mo tor throttle position to idle; for electric mod**  **els, set the motor function to stop, or “Hold” for helicopter models. If interference should**  **occur, the model is then less likely to fly off on its own and cause damage to property or even** **personal injury. Consider asking an experi enced pilot for advice.** 222 **Program description - Teacher/pupil** 

# Teacher/pupil

Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer lead
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
The transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT are equipped as standard

– as view ed from the front, under the left front flap

– with a DSC sock et. This is not only usable for connecting flight simulators

– as described on page 22

– but also to integ rate the transmitter into a cable-coupled teacher/pupil system. To accommodate the settings necessary for this,scroll with the selection keys on the left or right fourway button to the » **Teacher/pupil** « menu option in the Multifunction menu:

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory Teacher / pupil

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

Note: The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned (“SW: ---” bottom left in the screen image).When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed: **Channel Function** 1 Motor throttle/collective pitch
2 Aileron/roll 3 Elevator/pitch-axis
4 Rudder/tail rotor

**Teacher-pupil settings** Up to eight function inputs (see “Definitions of terms” on page 66) of an 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter setup as Teacher transmitter can be transferred individually, or in any combination you wish, from the Teacher transmitter “L” to the Pupil transmitter “S”. The same applies with a maximum of twelve function inputs (see “Definitions of terms” on page 66) of an 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked and set up as Teacher transmitter, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. The lower display line, designated with “Teacher”, therefore indicates the **function inputs** with which control functions 1 ... 4 (stick functions for fixed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 ... max. 12, which can be freely assigned in the **»Control adjust«** menu.
Note: Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turnedover to the pupil is basically of no consequence. However, their assignment in the » **Control adjust** « menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.
Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the function inputs 1 through max. 12 for transfer to the pupil (  ) then briefly tap center **SET** key of the right four-way button for each switch to be switched between “Teacher” ( ) and “Pupil” ( ): Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display. Do this by placing the marker just to the right of the “SW” at the bottom left of the screen display by usingthe selection keys of the left or right four-way button then assign a switch as described in the section“Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. Preferably you should utilize a momentary switch to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time:

Teacher / Teacher

Pup Teac 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: n/a 12 8 N o

pupil signal –

Since at this early stage of programming a trainersystem it is unlikely that an operational pupil transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closedduring the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:

Teacher / Teacher

Pupil Teacher 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 n/a 12 8  

### mc

  16 20223 **Program description - Teacher/pupil** Note:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. **The header line therefore also switches from “Teacher / Pupil” to “Teacher / Teacher” once**  **a switch has been assigned.** The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely

– i. e . with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions

– in one of the model memor ies of the 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be “bound” to the teacher transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the model, even in pupil mode. **ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE PLUGGING THE CON**  **NECTION CABLE INTO THIS UNIT. Otherwise the RF module will not be activated.**  The 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter can be connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even transmitters using the “traditional” 35/40 MHz range. This means, for example, that a 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter can indeed also be connected to a mc-24 pupil transmitter. However, if the pupil-side connection is NOT made via a two-pole DSC socket but rather via a three-pole trainer socket (for example, out of the Graupnerproduct line), **then the basic prerequisite for a correct connection to a pupil transmitter** 

**– whic**  **h is com pletely independent of the type of modulation**  **used in the teacher transmitter**

**– m**  **ust ALWAYS be set to modulation type PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) in**  **the pupil transmitter. Pupil transmitter set-up**  The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely , i. e . with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one of the model memories of the teacher transmitter and, if applicable, the HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be “bound” to the teacher transmitter. In principle,

a 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT pupil transmitter can also be connected to a teacher transmitter operating on the “traditional” 35/40 MHz bands. This is possible because the PPM signal required by theteacher transmitter is available in the (pupil) transmitter’s DSC socket.Almost any transmitter with at least four control functions from previous and current Graupner series canbe used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed information can be found in the RC main catalogue and on the www.graupner.de/en website. If required, the pupil transmitter should be fitted with the connection module for pupil transmitters. This is to be connected to the transmitter board in accordance with the supplied installation instructions. Information on the pupil modules required in each case can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website. The connection to the teacher transmitter is madeusing the appropriate lead; see the following double page. **The control functions of the pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control channels, i.**  **e . the**  **receiver outputs, without intermediary mixers.** If you are using an “ mc ” or “ mx ” series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type (“Fixed-wing” or “Heli”). Assign the model name “Pupil” and set up the stick mode (mode 1 ... 4) and “Throttle min. forward/back” to suit the pupil’s preferences. All other settings are left at their default values, however. If you have selected the“Helicopter” model type, you must also set the throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer and coupling functions, are configured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model. If the pupil transmitter is a mx-20 HoTT, 

### mc-16 HoTT, 

### mc-20 HoTT or 

### mc-32 HoTT series model then it may also be necessary to adapt the type of modulation in the “DSC output” line of the

» **Base setup model** « menu in order to accommodate the number of control channels to be transmitted. For example, the signal packet for modulation type “PPM10” contains only control channels 1 ... 5 but not channel 6 and upper. However, if this channel is to be used by the pupil then a modulation type must be selected in which it is included. A further point is that “HoTT” must be entered in the “Module” line of the » **Base setup model** « menu if you wish to set up one of the transmitters in Pupil mode, but using an existing model memory rather than a newly initialised memory. If you neglect this it is possible that the PPM signal present at the DSC socket will be inverted. For transmitters of

– older

– type “ **D** ” and “ **FM** ” it is necessary to check servo operating directions and their control correlations. It may be necessary to reconnect cables appropriately. All mixers must also be switched off or set to “zero”.When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:

**Channel Function** 1 Motor throttle/collective pitch
2 Aileron/roll 3 Elevator/pitch-axis
4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the » **Control adjust** « menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs which correspond to enabled function inputs 5 ... max. 12 as shown in the » **Teacher/pupil** « menu of224 **Program description - Teacher/pupil**the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately. **Important:**

**• If y**  **ou should forget to assign a transmitter control on the pupil side, then the affected ser**  **vo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil trans**  **mitter.**

**• The pupil transmitter m**  **ust always be operated in PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection**  **type used between the teacher transmitter and the model.** 

**• If the transmitter is connected using a DSC** 

**soc ket on the pupil side,**  **ALWAYS leave the pu**  **pil transmitter’s On/Off switch in the “ OFF**  **” po**

  ** sition: this is the only way to guarantee that no** **RF signal is sent from the pupil transmitter’s transmitter module, even after the DSC lead**  **has been plugged in. Trainer mode operations**  Both transmitters are connected to one another using a suitable lead (see summary on next page): The plug marked “ **M** ” (master) must be inserted into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the plug marked “ **S** ” (student) into the pupil transmitter’s socket. (Note that not all leads may have such “M” and “S” labeling.) **Important notices:**

**• Chec**  **k that the model aircraft is operational and check that all functions issue the correct**  **commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.**

**• The ends of the trainer lead,**  **usually marked as either “S” or “M”, terminate in a three-pole TRS** **jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC sys tem socket, as it is not suitable for this appli**  **cation. The DSC socket is exclusively designed for cables with 2-pole TRS jacks.**  **Checking functionality** Activate the assigned trainer mode switch:

• The tr ainer mode system is working properly if the display now changes from “  Teacher” to “  Pupil”.

• Ho wever, if the 

### WARNING LED at the right, next to the transmitter’s On/Off switch, blinks and an acoustic signal sounds off at the same time, then the connection between pupil and teacher transmitters is faulty.The basic display also displays the following warning notice ...

N o pupil signal

... and the left side of the screen display for the

» **Teacher/pupil** « menu will change to show “-Pupil”. In this case, all control functions are retainedby the teacher transmitter automatically, regardless of switch position: this ensures the model is always under control.
**Possible faults:**

• Pupil tr ansmitter not ready

• Interf ace in pupil transmitter not correctly connected in place of the RF module

• Cab les connected wrongly: see right for cable connections

• Pupil tr ansmitter not switched over to PPM (10, 16, 18, 24) mode **Other possible faults:**

• T eacher transmitter not properly “bound” to HoTT receiver in training model **Trainer cables 4179.1**  f or trainer operation between any two Graupner transmitters equipped with DSC sockets

– distinguished b y a two-pole TRS jack at both ends. **3290.7** tr ainer cable for connecting a teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12

... 

### mc-32 HoTT) or a transmitter retrofitted with an optional DSC module, order no. **3290.24** ) to a Graupner pupil transmitterwith an opto-electronic system pupil socket

– identifiab le by the mark “ **S** ” on the side of the three-pole TRS jack. **3290.8** tr ainer cable for connecting a pupil transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12

... 

### mc32 HoTT or a transmitter retrofitted with an optional DSC module, order no. **3290.24** ) to

a Graupnerteacher transmitter with an opto-electronic system teacher socket

– iden

tifiable by the mark “ **M** ” on the side of the three-pole TRS jack. Further details about the cables and modules mentioned in this section for teacher and pupiltransmitters can be found in the respective transmitter handbook, in the GraupnerRC main catalogue or in Internet at www.graupner.de.225 **Program description - Teacher/pupil** 

# Trainer mode with the transmitters 

# mc-16 HoTT and 

# mc-20 HoTT

Due to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest information

Teacher transmitter

with DSC socket Teacher transmitter with teacher module, order

no. **3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22** Teacher/pupil cable, order no. **3290.8** 

## M Pupil transmitter 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT 

### mc-16 HoTT 

### mc-20 HoTT 

### mc-32 HoTT mc-19 through mc-24

, mx - 2 2 (iFS), mx-24 s Pupil transmitter with DSC socket Pupil transmitter with pupil module, order no. **3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33** 
D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10

... mc-24

, mx-22 (iFS), mx-24s 

## S Teacher transmitter 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT 

### mc-16 HoTT 

### mc-20 HoTT 

### mc-32 HoTT

Note: The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter combinations at the time of going in revision. Teacher/pupil cable, order no. **4179.1**

Teacher/pupil cable, order no. **3290.7** Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 4179.1226 **Program description - Teacher/pupil** 

# Wireless HoTT system

Wireless operation of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT trainer mode system is also possible. To do so, the teacher transmitter must be “connected” to a pupil transmitter as described below. Prior to this, however, the training model’s receiver must be boundto the PUPIL transmitter. This configuration is possible between transmitters which have the “BIND:” option in the » **Teacher/pupil** « menu. **Preparing for training mode**

**Teacher transmitter** The training model must be programmed completely, i. e . with all of its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one model memory of the HoTT teacher transmitter. **The model to be used for train ing must therefore be under the complete control** **of the teacher transmitter. The final step in prepa ration, however, is to bind the training model to**  **the pupil transmitter. For a detailed description of the binding process, please consult pages 87**  **and 95. Pupil transmitter**  If you are using an “ mc ” or “ mx ” series transmitter, itis best to activate a free model memory with the required model type (“Fixed-wing” or “Heli”). Assign the model name “Pupil” and set up the stick mode (mode 1 ... 4) and “Throttle (or collective pitch) min. forward/back” to suit the pupil’s preferences. All other options are left at their default values. All other settings, including all mixer and coupling functions, are confi

gured e xclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model.When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:
**Channel Function** 1 Motor throttle/collective pitch
2 Aileron/roll 3 Elevator/pitch-axis
4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the » **Control adjust** « menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs which correspond to enabled function or transmitter control inputs 5 ... max. 12 as shown in the » **Teach er/pupil**  « menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately. **Important: If you should forget to assign a transmitter con**  **trol on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the**  **transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.**
**Preparing the teacher and pupil transmitters** Once you have bound the training model to the pupil transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On both transmitters, use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button, to page to the » **Teacher/pupil** « menu option on the multi-function menu:

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory Teacher / pupil

Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option: Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6 Note: The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released to the pupil ( ) and no switch has been assigned (“SW: ---” bottom left in the screen image).
**Pupil transmitter** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the “BIND” input field. If there is a switch shown at the right of “SW:” then this must first be erased, see screen image:

Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

**Teacher transmitter** Up to eight function inputs (see “Definitions of terms” on page 66) of an 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter setup as Teacher transmitter can be transferred individually, or in any combination you wish, from the Teacher transmitter “L” to the Pupil transmitter “S”. The same applies with a maximum of twelve function inputs (see “Definitions of terms” on page 66) of an 

### mc16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked and set up as Teacher transmitter, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. The lower display line, designated with “Teacher”, therefore indicates the **function inputs** with which control functions 1 ... 4 (stick functions for fixed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 ... max. 12, which can be freely assigned in the **»Control adjust«** menu.
Note: Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. How-227 **Program description - Teacher/pupil** ever, their assignment in the » **Control adjust** « menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.
Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the function inputs 1 through max. 12 for transfer to the pupil (  ) then briefly tap center **SET** key of the right four-way button for each switch to be switched between “Teacher” ( ) and “Pupil” ( ): Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now assign a trainer mode switch. Do this by placing themarker frame just to the right of the “SW:” at the bottom left of the screen display by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then assign a switch as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. Preferably you should utilize a momentary switch to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time:

Teacher / Teacher

Pup Teac 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 n/a 12 8 N o

pupil signal –

Since at this stage of programming the wireless trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:

Teacher / Teacher

Pupil Teacher 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 n/a 12 8 

Note:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. **The header line therefore also switches from “Teacher / Pupil” to “Teacher / Teacher” once**  **a switch has been assigned.** Using the selection keys on the left or right four-way button, now move the marker frame to the right, to “BIND: n/a”:

Teacher / Teacher

Pupil Teacher 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 n/a 12 8 

**Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher trans mitter** 
Note: The distance between the two transmitters should not be too great during the binding process. If necessary, change the positions of the transmitters and initiate the binding process again.Initiate the “BINDING” process from the pupil transmitter by tapping the center **SET** key of the right fourway button ... Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 Binding 6

... and repeat this immediately on the teacher transmitter:

Teacher / Teacher

Pupil Teacher 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 Binding 12 8 

As soon as this process is complete, both screens will show “ON” instead of the flashing “BINDING”:
Teacher / Pupil

Pupil Teacher 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 ON 6

Teacher / Teacher

Pupil Teacher 8 9 10 11 BIND: SW: 7 ON 12 8 

You can return to the basic display on both screens and start the training session after carefully checking all of the relevant functions. If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays

“ **ON** ”, this means the binding process has failed: try changing the positions of both transmitters and then repeat the entire procedure.228 **Program description - Teacher/pupil Important notice:**  **Check that the model aircraft is operational and check that all functions issue the correct com**  **mands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.** During the ... **Training session**... the teacher and pupil can maintain a variable distance from one another. But you should stay “within earshot” (max. 50 m) under any circumstances

, however, no one else should be standing between the teacher and the pupil since these persons could reduce the connection range of the return channel used by the two transmitters.In this operating mode, the basic display of the teacher transmitter is as shown below ...

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stp Flt «normal » 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V P HoTT RFC –Teach

... and the pupil transmitter’s display will look something like this:

ELEVE #01

3:33h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

3. 8V HoTT RFC –Pupil

If, however, the connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters should be lost during the trainingsession, then the teacher transmitter will automatically assume control of the model. If the trainer mode switch is in the “Pupil” position when connectivity is lost, the 

### Warning LED on the teacher transmitter will blink and audible warning signals will also be sounded for as long as the signal is lost. The basic display also displays the following warning notice:

N o pupil signal

However, if only the character string “HF –” blinks on the transmitter’s basic display accompanied by the audible warning signals, the pupil signal has been lost but the trainer mode switch is set to the “Teacher” position. In both cases, your first step should be to reduce the distance between the two transmitters. If this does not help, then you should land immediately and establish the cause. If both transmitters are operational and the receiversystem is switched off, then the teacher transmitter’s basic display will show the icons instead of the “familiar” . The antenna icon will also flash and an audible warning signal will sound twice per second. **Resuming trainer mode** If you switch off one or both transmitters during the session

– for whate ver reason

– then the basic display of the tr ansmitter(s) shows the following question after being switched back on:

Please select Trainer link? ACT INH

If “ **INH** ” (set) is confirmed by tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or, alternatively, by waiting for approx. two seconds until the message disappears. then you will reset the transmitter in question back to its “normal” operating mode. You will then have to re-establish a connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters. If, on the other hand, the selection keys on the left or right four-way button are used to select “ **ACT** ” ...

Please select Trainer link? ACT INH

... and this selection is confirmed by tapping the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, then the existing teacher connection is restored. The same approach is used if the transmitter is configured as a pupil transmitter.229 **For your notes**230 **Program description - Tx. output swap** This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Tx. out put swap**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory Teacher / pupil

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:To ensure that receiver channel assignment is as flexible as possible, the software of the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter includes the facility to swap over any of transmitter outputs 1 to maximum 12 as a standard feature. On the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter this option can be unlocked as an extra-cost option. **Programming procedure** This option lets you distribute the transmitter’s 8 or 12 “ control channels ” to any of the transmitter outputs 1 ... 8 or 12. If you do, you must remember that the

» **Servo display** « screen

– accessib le from almost any menu option by simultaneously tapping the  and  keys on the left four-way button

– ref ers exclusively tothe “control channels” as preset by the receiver socket assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output swaps into account.

Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Output Output Output Output Tx. output swap

SEL

Use the  selection keys on the left or right four

# Tx. output swap

Swapping the outputs on the transmitter way button to select the channel/output combination to be changed then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. You can now use the rightselection keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the desired output, confirming this with the **SET** key ...

2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SEL

6 Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Output Output Output Output Tx. output swap

... or, by tapping the  or  selection keys on the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), you can restore the original assignment. Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., **must always be performed in accordance with the origi**  **nal receiver socket assignment!** Example: In the helicopter program of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters, the outputs for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped around, compared to some older GRAUPNER/JR mc units. The throttle servo now occupies transmitter output “6” and the collective pitch servo output “1”. Perhaps, however, you wish to retain the previousconfiguration? In this case, you will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and vice versa

– as sho wn above:

Note: “Channel Mapping” (channel assignment) is the receiver-side channel correlation function integrated into the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter’s telemetry menu. With channel mapping, the transmitter’s control channels (12 maximum) can be freely distributed to multiple receivers or receiver outputs having the same control function, for example to operate two servo controls per aileron surface instead of just being able to control one servo, etc. To keepcontrols manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time. 

### mc

  16 20231 **For your notes**232 **Program description - Profi trim | Winged models** 

# Profi trim

Flaps and aileron trimming This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
The transmitters 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT has an integrated software function for direct trimming of all flaps and ailerons. This feature, named » **Profi trim** « because of its functional similarity to the Profi-Trim module for the mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a re

trofit option. Select this feature from the multi-functionmenu with the selection keys of the left or right fourway button ...

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory Teacher / pupil

... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

Profi trim AI AI FL FL TR CTL ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

––– ––– ––– –––

––– SET SET SET SET

**Programming procedure** To set the desired option, move the marker frame onto the desired line or column with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Select the desired entry in the field now displayed in inversevideo with the selection keys on the left or right fourway button or move the desired transmitter control. Conclude the procedure with a tap on the **ESC** key. Programming is done in three steps: First of all, in the “TR” line it will be established just which flap pair is to be trimmed as “AI” and/or “FL”. The “CTL” line specifies the control channel over which the given trim function is to be performed and, finally, a switch is defined in the “ON/OFF” line by which this profi-trim function can be switched on or off globally.

**TR**

Notes:

• Please note that, depending on the n umber of aileron and flap servos specified in the » **Model type**  « menu, page 105, some settings cannot be used. For example, with only 1 aileron and/or 1flap servo there is no aileron flap activation possible, and the opposite is also true. Since this is thecase, a number of settings in various columns remain ineffective.

• P ay attention to potential double-assignments when making trim control choices. The trim functions which can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) on the first line of this menu, eitherindividually or in any combination, make pre-flight corrections to aileron and flap settings quick and easy, without the complexity of having to call up individual setting options. Individually, these are functions for ...

• T rim of the aileron function for aileron (“  AI  ”) • T rim of the flap function for aileron (“  AI  ”)

• T rim of the aileron function for flaps (“  FL  ”)

• T rim of the flap function for flaps (“  FL  ”)

Tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) to reset the value of the field displayed in inverse video back to “OFF”.

Note: Regardless of a switch’s ON/OFF setting (see further below), the reset of a value field in the “Trim” line has the effect an immediate return of the affected trim function to its original reference point. 

### mc

  16 20233 **Program description - Profi trim | Winged models CTL** 

Profi trim AI AI FL FL TR CTL ON/OFF ON ON OFF OFF

––– ––– ––– –––

––– SET SET SET SET
The second line of this menu is for selecting transmitter control assignments which appear advantageous from the many controls available on the transmitter. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired column then tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ...:

Profi trim FL TR CT ON/OFF OFF

–––

––– SET SET SET SET Move desired control adj.

... and move the desired transmitter control:

Profi trim AI AI FL FL TR CTL ON/OFF ON ON OFF OFF Lv1

––– ––– –––

––– SET SET SET SET
The mid-point position of enabled proportional controls corresponds to the programmed flap setting. The trim range for a given transmitter control is about ±25 %. Ho wever, these “trim” controls are only effective when, as described in section “ON/OFF” further below, has been assigned a profi-trim switch and switched on. An active transmitter control assignment can be erased with a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ). Note: Trim values retain their settings until the next closureof the ON/OFF switch, even then when the trim functions in the “Control” line have been temporally reset to “free”.

**ON/OFF** The “ON/OFF” line is used to assign a switch which permits the profi-trim function to be switched on/offglobally. This assignment is done in the manner described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. Another option is to select an “FX” switch from the range of expanded switches, if you wish the “Profi-Trim” option to remain switched on permanently. In this context, pay attention to the following depen

dencies:

• Only when the ON/OFF switch in the “Trim” line is set to “ON” will the trim functions assigned to trim controls in the “TR” line be able to affect trim within a range of ±25 %.

• As soon as the ON/OFF switch is opened or

er ased, the current trim positions will be stored and the selected trim controls become ineffective. A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) when a switch assignment is active will reset a field’s value back to “---”:

Profi trim AI AI FL FL TR CTL ON/OFF ON ON OFF OFF Lv1 Lv2

––– ––– FXI SET SET SET SET234 **Program description - Profi trim | Helicopter models** 

# Profi trim

Pitch, throttle, tail-rotor, and C1 curve trimming
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
The 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter’s software has an integrated function for additional trimming of 6-point curves; in Heli programs » **Channel 1 curve** « page 141, and

» **Helicopter mixer** « page 188. These are intended for “Pitch”, “C1  Throttle” and “C1  Tail” curves. This feature, named » **Profi trim** « because of its functional similarity to the Profi-Trim module for the mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a re

trofit option. Select this f eature from the multi-functionmenu with the selection keys of the left or right fourway button ...

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Trim memory Teacher / pupil

... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.

SEL –––

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None None PH 1 L

P L L L 1 1 1 **1. Column “Trim control”**

Note: Pay attention to potential double-assignments when making trim control choices. This menu’s first line is for assigning those transmitter controls (from the available on the transmitter) which appear most advantageous for this purpose. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired line then tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button ...

SEL –––

Mixer –– –– –– None

PH 1 L

P 1 1 1 Move desired control adj.

... then move the desired transmitter control:

SEL Lv1

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None None PH 1 L

P L L L 1 1 1

**Erase trim control**Select the transmitter control assignment in the appropriate line as already described, e. g.:

SEL Lv1

Mixer –– –– ––– None

PH 1 L

P 1 1 1 Move desired control adj.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will now reset the field’s value back to “free”.
**2. Column “Mixer“** This column contains a total of four Value fields, in which you can select one of the mixers “Collective pitch”, “Ch1  throttle” and “Ch1  tail” as well as “Channel 1 curve” from a list, either individually or in any combination. To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to change to the desired value field. Then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button ...

SEL Lv1

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None PH 1 L

P L L L 1 1 1 None

... and select the desired mixer with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button, for example:

SEL Lv1

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None PH 1 L

P L L L 1 1 1 Pitch

Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button or the **ESC** key of the left four-way button will conclude the entry. This procedure is the same for the other lines. A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset a field displayed in inverse video back to “None”. 

### mc

  16 20235 **Program description - Profi trim | Helicopter models 3. Column “P”**  (Point) The lines of the column “Mixer” were used to selectone or mixers. Now, in the “Point” column, the reference points to be trimmed will be set. To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move to the desired value field. Then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right fourway button

...

SEL Lv1

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None PH 1

P L L L 1 1 1 Pitch 1

If a undefined point is selected

– in the basic v ersion, only points “L” and “H” are set

– the respectiv e regulator will remain ineffective. The point offset (in a maximum range of about ±12 %) f or the selected mixer will simultaneously be displayed in the curve diagrams of the respective » **Heli copter mixer**  « or » **Channel 1 curve** « menu so that the offset can also be checked visually.
**4. Column “PH”** (Phase) The r ightmost column is used, if desired, to determine which programmed flight phase the given regulator is to be active. The number preceding flight phase names, in the example “1” (Normal)”, are based on the phase numbers as found in the » **Phase assign ment**  « menu on page 158:

SEL Lv1

Mixer ––– ––– ––– None None None PH P L L L 1 1 1 Pitch 1 2

However, the current position of the regulator will be

– contr ary to the corresponding fixed-wing program

– set to a ne w zero point when ...

• ... b y a change of flight phase, individual or all trim controls become active or

• ... the giv en trim control is erased or

• ... meanwhile the function assigned in the “Mixer” column is to be changed. In all of these cases, the current regulator position will be stored and automatically overridden, i. e . adopted into the curve characteristic, by the pre-programmed curve points specified by the » **Channel 1 curve** « and

» **Helicopter mixer** « menus. In this manner it is possible to simultaneously optimize up to four arbitrary curve points during the flight. The memory storage option described here is, for example, useful during the first test flights of a new model as this permits the “flown” flight corrections to be immediately recorded in the program. However, in order to have a clearly defined referencepoint prior to the first time a store is done, it is important to put all regulators into their middle positions. But always be careful that, after repeated stores, servo travel is not too severely restricted on one side. Check and correct the control linkage if necessary. Sometimes, despite an optimal basic setting for the model, it becomes necessary to temporarily change reference points, for example, when the weather haschanged and the motor requires a short-term correction or even when the muffler gets a leak unexpec

tedly, etc. Of course, in all of these cases, the corrected settings should not be stored via the Profi trim option. Storage can be prevented by ensuring that the regulator is in its middle position before activation or deactivation.
Note:Yet another point, independent of this, can be regulated via the “Trim point function” through use of the selection keys. This is described in detail along with the programming of 6-point curves in section » **Chan nel 1 curve**  « on page 141.236 **Program description - Trim memory | Winged models** 

# Trim memory

Storing the current trim position
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Trim memory**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Teacher / pupil

Trim memory

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:
Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0%

This menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim levers for control functions 1 ... 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long flight pauses. This memory store process is effective on a flightphase specific basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally

.Therefore, as soon as flight phases have been defined in the » **Phase settings** « and » **Phase assign ment**  menus, the given active flight phase will be displayed on the screen’s bottom line. For example: Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal

**Storing trim positions**The model has been flight tested and trimmed during the test flights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column “POS” located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control tr avel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently filled uniformly with 0 % because v alues have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears like as follows:
Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD +5% 0% +3% 0% –7% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal
Now use the selection keys on the left or right fourway button to move to the line where a trim value is to be written into trim memory, e. g. the elevator trim value:
Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD +5% 0% +3% 0% –7% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal
The trim value is stored in the trim memory when you press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button; the setting is displayed in the right-hand column: Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD +5% 0% 0% +3% –7% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal
Now, if desired, change the flight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary. **Erasing stored trim positions** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e. g.: Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD +5% 0% 0% +3% –7% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal
Simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) reset the value field again back to “0 %”.
Trim memory

AILE ELEV RUDD +5% 0% 0% 0% –7% POS SET CH1 0% 0%

0% normal
**However, if you do not erase a trim memory be fore storing a new value, the new value will be**  **added to the stored value.** Although this an “elegant” way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do k eep in mind that excessive offsets forservo travel can lead to anomalies including one

### mc

  16 20237 **Program description - Trim memory | Winged models** sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.238 **Program description - Trim memory | Helicopter models** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Trim memory**  « menu option in the Multi-function menu:

Tx. output swap

Telemetry Fail-safe adjust

Profi trim Teacher / pupil

Trim memory

Open this menu option with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:
Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0%

This menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim levers for control functions 1 ... 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long flight pauses. This memory store process is effective on a flightphase specific basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally

.Therefore, as soon as flight phases have been defined in the » **Phase settings** « and » **Phase assign ment**  menus, the given active flight phase will be displayed on the screen’s bottom line. For example: Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal

**Storing trim positions**The model has been flight tested and trimmed during the test flights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column “POS” located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control tr avel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently filled uniformly with 0 % because v alues have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears like as follows:
Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail +5% 0% +3% 0% –7% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal
Now use the selection keys on the left or right fourway button to move to the line where a trim value is to be written into trim memory, e. g. the elevator trim value:
Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail +5% 0% +3% 0% –7% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal
The trim value is stored in the trim memory when you press the central **SET** button of the right-hand fourway button; the setting is displayed in the right-hand column: Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail +5% 0% 0% +3% –7% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal
Now, if desired, change the flight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary. **Erasing stored trim positions** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e. g.: Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail +5% 0% 0% +3% –7% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal
Simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) reset the value field again back to “0 %”.
Trim memory

Roll Nick Tail +5% 0% 0% 0% –7% POS SET PT/thr 0% 0%

0% normal
**However, if you do not erase a trim memory be fore storing a new value, the new value will be**  **added to the stored value.** Although this an “elegant” way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do k eep in mind that excessive offsets forservo travel can lead to anomalies including one

# Trim memory

Storing the current trim position



### mc

  16 20239 **Program description - Trim memory | Helicopter models** sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.240 **Program description - Telemetry** 

# Telemetry

Read-in and settings for telemetry data This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. The receiver’s settings, as well as optional telemetry sensor settings, can be called up and programmed in real-time by way of the » **Te**

  ** lemetry** « menu. Communication with the transmitter is accomplished over the return channel built into the HoTT receiver. A maximum of four sensors can be connected to the Telemetry sockets of the following receivers, using Y-leads where necessary: GR-12S HoTT (Order No. **33505** ), GR-12 HoTT (Order No. **33506** ), GR-16 (Order No. **33508** ), GR-24 HoTT (Order No. **33512** ) and GR-32 DUAL (Order No. **33516** ), provided that they feature the current firmware. The update capability of these and future receivers, which can be performed by the user, will keep the respective » **Telemetry** « menu up to date with the latest version and ensure enhancement with future functions or languages.
Note:After registering your product at https://www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx you are automatically informed of new updates.
**Important notices:**

• This man ual is based on the functions available at the time of revision of this manual.

• As already mentioned in the section entitled “Binding multiple receivers” on pages 87 and 95, it is also possible to bind more than one receiver per model if required. The software of 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters is capable of directly managing a maximum of two receivers, and the menu system can also be used to distribute up to twelve transmitter control channels between these two receivers in any configuration you wish. **However, only the receiver selected in the line “TEL.RCV” of the “Telemetry” menu is able to** **establish a telemetry connection to the trans mitter!** 

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

However, that also means the inverse, that only this receiver can be addressed through the » **Te**

  ** lemetry«**menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must be changed before settings can be made on a specific receiver.

**• When adjusting the settings of the remote con** 

**** **trol, make absolutely sure that the transmitter antenna is always far enough away from the**  **receiver antennae! To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there**  **is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.** 

**• When operating a po**  **wered tug for aero-to wing,**  **ensure that the receiving systems and the aerials in the two models are always at least**  **50 cm apart; we recommend the use of satel**  **lite receivers in such situations. If you neglect this, there is a chance of interference from the**  **downlink channel.**

• Since the telemetr ic data between transmitter and receiver is only exchanged after the fourth data package, the data transmission requires a certainamount of time for technical reasons, so the reaction to the operating keys and changes to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the delay is not due to an error.

• Prog ramming on the model or on sensors may only take place if the model is on the ground. Only carry out the settings with the motor switched off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise, undesired programming cannot be ruled out.For example, a servo test initiated accidentally could cause the model to crash and cause personal injury and/or property damage. Observe the safety instructions on pages 4 ... 9 of this manual and the respective separate manuals.

• All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc.) made through the » **Telemetry** « menu are stored only in the receiver and therefore are adopted along with it if it is implemented as a receiver in another model. Therefore, to be on the safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you want to use the receiver in a different model; see “Reset” on page 54.

• Only prog ram the servo direction reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings through the respective transmitter’s standard menus » **Ser vo adjustment**  « page 112, » **Dual Rate / Expo** « page 130 or page 134, » **Channel 1 curve** « page 138 or 141, and so on. Otherwise, the settings superimpose one another, which can lead to complexity or even problems in the later operation.

• The channel assignment function, called “Channel mapping”, integrated into the » **Telemetry** « menu of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters can also freely distribute control functionsover multiple receivers or even distribute a single control function over multiple receiver outputs, such as two servos per aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc. **We also recommend exer cising extreme during the programming.**  

### mc

  16 20241 **Program description - Telemetry Telemetry**  The menus gathered under the heading » **Telemetry** « can be called up from the 

### mc
- 16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter’s basic display with a tap of about one second duration on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. The same menus can, likeother transmitter menus, also be opened in the multifunction menu with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

Tx. output swap Profi trim Teacher / pupil

Trim memory Telemetry Channel sequence

**Basic operation** Operating the » **Telemetry** « menu is essentially the same as for the remaining 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter menus. The few differences are described in the following: The  selection keys of the left or right four-way button can be used to switch between individualpages of the Telemetry menu. Corresponding directional indicators can be found at top right of each display page in the form of angled brackets ( ), refer to the fi gures belo w. If only one angled bracket is visible, you are on either the first or last respective page. In this case, changing pages is only possible in the indicated direction. Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are identified with the aforementioned angled bracket ( ). The “ ” pointer will jump a line forward or back with a tap on the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button. Lines to which a jump cannot be made

are unalterable. In order to change a parameter, briefly touch the center **SET** key of the right four-way button (the parameter will be displayed in inverse video), change the value within the permissible adjustment range via the selection keys of the right four-way button and adopt the value with another tap on the **SET** key. A brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will cause a return to the starting position again. Now use the  selection keys of the left or rightfour-way button to pick the desired sub-menu. However, if the message ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE DATA

O K ... appears instead of the desired sub-menu after touching the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then no connection has been established with a receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as described on page 87 or 95 or activate it as described under “Important Notices” on the previous page. On the first display page of the sub-menu “SETTINGS & DATAVIEW” of the » **Telemetry** « menu, overwritten with ...

**RX DATAVIEW**

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

... no settings can be made. This page is only provided for information:

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C L PACK TIME 00010msec R-VOLT :05.0V L.R-VOLT:04.5V S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C
**Value Explanation** S-QUA Signal quality in % S-dBm Reception po wer in dBm S-STR Signal strength in %
R-TEM. Receiv er temperature in °C
L P ACK TIME Indicates the time in ms in which the longest data package is lost during the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver R-VOLT Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts L.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the receiver since it was last turned on, in volts SENSOR1 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 1, in volts and °C 

# SETTINGS & DATAVIEW242 **Program description - Telemetry** SENSOR2 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 2, in volts and °C **Signal quality (S-QUA)** The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent “live” over thereceiver’s return channel to the transmitter and indicates the signal quality in %. **Reception power (S-dbm)** Reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative values, which means a value of zero is the maximum value (= best reception) and the lower the values are, the poorer the reception power! The range test before operation, among other things, is important for this.
Note: With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is reversed: The higher the number following the minus symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception power of -80 dBm, f or example, is poorer than one of -70 dBm. Perform the range test as described on page 91 or 99 before each flight and, in doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during the flight. The range must be at least 50 m on the g round with the range test activated. At this distance, the value shown under “S-dBm” in the “ **RX DATAVIEW** ” display may not be greater than -90 dBm in order to guar antee safe operation. The model should never be operated with a lower value (e. g. -95 dBm). Check the installation of the receiver system and the position of the antenna. The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is tr iggered beforethis value is reached in order to guarantee safe operation. **Signal strength (S-STR)** The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In ge

ner al, an acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiv er signal becomes too week in the return channel. However, since the transmitter has a significantly higher transmission power than the receiver, the model can still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the distance to the model should be reduced until the warning tone goes silent again. **Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)** Make sure the receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all flight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C). The receiv er temperature limit, at which a warning is issued, can be adjusted in the sub-menu » **RX SERVO TEST**  « under “ALARM TEMP+” (50 ... 80 °C and “ALARM TEMP-” (-20 ... +10 °C). When the value is under-run or over-run, an acoustic signal sounds (continuous peep tone) and “ **TEMP.E** ” will appear atthe top right of all “RX” receiver sub-menus. Additionally, the parameter “ **R-TEM** ” will be displayed in inverse video on the » **RX DATAVIEW** « display page. **Data packages (L PACK TIME)** Indicates the longest time span in ms in which datapackages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the longest time span in which the remove control system has entered into fail-safe mode. **Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)** Always check the operating voltage of the receiver.Never operate or even start your model if the operating voltage is too low.The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted between 3.0 and 7.5 volts in “ALARM VOLT” of the » **RX SERVO TEST**  « sub-menu. If this range is under-run, an acoustic signal is sounded (repetitive double peep tone (long/short)) and “ **VOLT.E** ” will appear at the top right of all » **RX** ...« receiver sub-menus. In addition, the parameter “ **R-VOLT** ” will be displayed in inverse video in the » **RX DATAVIEW** « sub-menu. The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed in the main display, see page 28. **Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)** “L.R-VOLT” indicates the minimum operating voltage of the receiver since the last time it was switched on. If this voltage should deviate significantly from thecurrent “R-VOLT” operating voltage, the receiver battery may be too heavily encumbered by the servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to achieve maximum operational safety.
**Sensor 1 + 2** Indicates the values of optional telemetric sensors 1 and 2, if present, in volts and °C.
**RX SERVO**

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500μsec TRIM : –000μsec LIMIT– : 150% OUTPUT CH: 01

LIMIT+ : 150% PERIOD : 20msec It is very important that you read the notices on page 240 before doing any programming on this display page. **Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** OUTPUT CH Channel selection 1 ... depending on receiver REVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ON243 **Program description - Telemetry Value Explanation**  **Possible settings**  CENTER Servo center in μs if active (inverse), dependent on control position TRIM Trim position in μs deviating from the CENTER position -120 ... +120 μs

LIMIT– T ravel limit on the "–" side of servo travel in % servo travel 30 ... 150 %

LIMIT+ T ravel limit on the "+" side of servo travel in % servo travel 30 ... 150 %

PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 ms **OUTPUT CH (c hannel selection)**  If applicable, select the line “OUTPUT CH” with the selection keys. Touch the **SET** key of the right fourway button. The value field is shown highlighted. Now set the desired channel (e. g. 01) with the selection keys on the right four-way button. **The following parameters are always based on the channel set**  **here. Reverse (servo reversal)**  Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to the selected servo channel: ON / OFF **CENTER (servo center)** For the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line, the “CENTER” line displays the currently stored pulse width for “servo centre” in μ s. The default channel pulse width of 1500 μ s represents the standard centre position, and corresponds to the usual servo centre setting. In order to change this value, select the “CENTER” line then tap the **SET** key of the right four-way button. The Value field is highlighted. Now move the respective transmitter control, stick and/or trim lever to thedesired position and store the current control’s position with another tap on the **SET** key. This position is saved as the new neutral position. The

– ne w

– v alue now displayed varies according tothe current setting of the transmitter control which affects this control channel, and the position of its trim. **TRIM (trim position)**In the “TRIM” line” you can carry out the fine adjustment of the neutral position of a servo connected to the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line using the selection keys of the right four-way button in 1 μ s increments. The value in the “CENTER” line can be adjusted by the TRIM value set here in a range of

± 120 μs. Factory setting: 0 μ s. **LIMIT–/+ (side dependent travel limit –/+)**This option is provided for the adjustment of a sidedependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder throw) of the servo connected to the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line. The settings for both directions are separate but both are in a range of 30 ... 150 %. F actory setting: 150 % each. **PERIOD (c ycle time)** In this line you determine the time interval of the individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for all control channels. With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 10 ms can be set. In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos, 20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter can otherwise be “over-strained” and react with “shaking” or “quivering” as a result. **RX FAIL SAFE**

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : HOLD F.S.POS. : 1500μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1500μsec The description of this menus necessitates a few words of warning in advance: “Do nothing” is the absolute worst thing to be done in this regard. “HOLD” is prescribed in the base setup model of the HoTT receiver. In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the model flies straight ahead for an indefinite amount of time and then hopefully “lands” somewhere without causing significant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and “tear” across the flight field completely out of control, putting the pilot and spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be beneficial to program the the function “Motor off” at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of an experienced pilot in order to find a “logical” setting for your model. And then another brief notice regarding the three possible versions of the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters for the setting of Fail Safe:The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe settings is the use of the » **Fail Safe** « menu, which can be reached from the multifunction menu, see page 220.Similarly, in order to achieve the same result somewhat more laboriously, the “FAIL SAFE ALL” option described on the following pages is also available.In addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods of the individual adjustment using the options244 **Program description - Telemetry** “MODE”, “F.S.Pos.” and “DELAY”. The description of these variants begins with the “MODE” option further below. **Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** OUTPUT CH Output channel (servo connection of the receiver) 1 ... depending on receiver

INPUT CH Input channel (channel coming from the transmitter) 1 ... max. 12

MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLD FAIL SAFE OFF F.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 ... 2000 μs DELA Y Reaction time (delay) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.00 s FAIL SAFE ALL Save of the Failsafe positions of all control channels NO / SAVE

POSITION Display of the saved Fail-safe position Between approx 1000 and 2000 μs

**OUTPUT CH (ser vo connection)**  In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) to be set. **INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)**As already mentioned on page 240, the eight control functions of the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter, the twelve control channels of the 

### mc-16 HoTT with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmit

ter can be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver outputs with the same control function. For example, this might be used in order to be able to control two servers for each aileron flap or an oversize rudder with linked servos instead of an individual servo.Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers the advantage of not having to use a long servo cable, e. g. for large models. In this case, bear in mind that only the receiver selected in the line “TEL.RCV.” through the » **Telemetry** « menu can be addressed! The 8 respectively 12 control channels (INPUT CH) of the 

### mc
- 16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter canbe appropriately managed through so-called “Channel Mapping” (channel assignment) whereby a different control channel is assigned to the servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for the receiver in the INPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: If, for example, “2AIL” is specified in the transmitter on the “Aileron/camber flaps” line of the » **Base setup model** « menu then control function 2

( Aileron) will already be assigned in the transmitter to control channels 2 and 5 for distribution to the left and right ailerons. The receiver’s corresponding INPUT CH , which must also be mapped, would be the channels 02 and 05 in this case; see the following example. Examples:

• Y ou would like to control each aileron of a large model with two or more servos. Assign one of the two standard aileron controlchannels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections) depending on the left or right bearing surface.

• Y ou would like to control the rudder of a large model with two or more servos. Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) tothe corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections). In this case, this is the standard rudder channel 4. **MODE** The settings of the options “MODE”, “F.S.Pos.” and “DELAY” determine the behavior of the receiver in the event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter to receiver. The setting programmed under “MODE” is always based on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line. The factory setting for all servos is “HOLD”. For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) you can choose between:

• F AI(L) SAFEWith this selection, in the event of a failure the corresponding servo moves to the position shown inthe “POSITION” line for the remainder of the failure until the “Delay time” set in the “DELAY” line has lapsed.

• HOLD With a setting of “HOLD”, in the event of a failurethe servo maintains the last correctly received servo position for the duration of the failure.

• OFF With a setting of “OFF”, in the event of a failure thereceiver discontinues the retransmission of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the respective servo output for the duration of the failure. In other words, the receiver switches the impulse line “off”. BUT CAUTION: Analog servos and even some digital servos no longer put up any resistance against the previous control pressure during the failure of the control impulse and are more or less pushed out of their position as a result. **F.S.POS. (Fail-safe position)** For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection), set the position the given servo should assume in “FAI(L) SAFE” mode, i. e . in the event of a failure, via the “F.S.POS.” line. This is done by first activating the value field (inverse representation) with a tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button then using the245 **Program description - Telemetry** selection keys of the right four-way button to choose the servo position. The adjustment takes place in 10- μ s increments. Factory setting: 1500 μ s (servo center). **Important notice:** The function “F.S.POS.” has an additional meaning in all three modes, “OFF”, “HOLD” and “FAI(L) SAFE” in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) does not receive a valid signal.The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position predefined in the “Position” line. In doing so, the landing gear, for example, is prevented from retrac

ting of the receiv er is accidentally switched on while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo behaves in accordance with the set “MODE” in the event of a failure.
**DELAY (fail-safe reaction time or delay)** Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos should move to their predetermined positions in the event of a signal interruption. This setting is adoptedfor all channels and only pertains to the servos programmed to the “FAIL SAFE” mode. Factory setting: 0.75 s

. **FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)** This sub-menu allows servo fail-safe positions to be established at the “push of a button” in a similar manner to that described on page 220 for the » **Fail Safe**  « menu. Switch to the “FAIL SAFE ALL” line and activate the value field by touching the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. “ **NO** ” will be displayed in inverse video. Then adjust the parameter to “ **SAVE** ” with one of the selection keys of the right four-way button.Now, using the operating elements of the transmitter, move all servos to the desired fail-safe position you assigned or want to assign in the line “MODE” “FAI(L) SAFE”. The current position of the control for the channel which was just set is shown in the bottom “Position” line:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE

After a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the display will change again, from “ **SAVE** ” to

“ **NO** ”. The saved the positions of all servos affected by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the line “F.S.Pos.” and the display then immediately showsthe following for the current OUTPUT CH (servo connection):

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

Switch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe positions based on the servo throws.**“Fail Safe” in combination with “Channel Map ping”**  In order to ensure that the mapped servos

– that is to

sa y servos which are controlled from a common control channel (INPUT CH)

– react the same w ay even in the event of a failure, the corresponding settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of the mapped servos!!! Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a receiver are mapped, for example, with one another, whereby the OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective control channel “04” ...

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.POS. : 1670μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 06

POSITION : 1670μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.POS. : 1230μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 07

POSITION : 1670μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : HOLD F.S.POS. : 1770μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 08

POSITION : 1670μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

... the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behaviorof these three servos connected to the control channel 4 completely independently of the individual settings of the respective OUTPUT CH:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

This is also the case, for example, if this is mapped with INPUT CH 01:246 **Program description - Telemetry** RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500μsec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500μsec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

In this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn, react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01. The reaction or delay time set in the “DELAY” line, onthe other hand, always applies uniformly for all channels set to “FAI(L) SAFE”.

**RX FREE MIXER**

RX FREE MIXER

MASTER CH: 00 SLAVE CH : 00 S–TRAVEL–: 100 S–TRAVEL+: 100 MIXER : 1

RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE: NORMAL
**Value Explanation Possible**  **settings**
MIXER Mixer selection 1 ... 5 MASTER CH Signal source or source channel 0, 1 ... depending on receiver SLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 ... depending on receiver S-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 ... 100 % S-TRA VEL+ Admix positive 0 ... 100 % RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE tail type NORMAL, V-TAIL, ELEVON (vertical/horizontal mixer for delta and flying wing)

**MIXER** Up to five mixers can be programmed simultaneously. Use “MIXER” to switch between mixers 1 ... 5. The following settings in this display always for just the mixer selected in the “MIXER” line. **Important notice: If you have already programmed mixer functions**  **in the »Wing mixer« or »Free mixer« menus, make absolutely sure that these mixers do not overlap**  **with those in the menu “RX FREE MIXER”!**
**MASTER CH (“from”)** According to the same principles described in the section “Free mixer” on page 204, the signal applied at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel) is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target channel). Select “00” if no mixer should be set. **SLAVE CH (“to”)** The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) ismixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target channel). The mix ratio will be determined by the percen

tages entered in the lines “TRAVEL–” and “TRA

VEL+”. Select “00” if no mixer should be set. **TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)** With the settings of these two lines the percentage of the admix is specified in relation to the MASTER signal separately for each direction. **RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)** The following model types are also available in the “Tail” line of the » **Model type** « menu, on page 104 and should, preferentially, be preset there. In this case, always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.However, if you would prefer to use the mixer integrated in the receiver, you can select the already pre-adjusted mixer functions for the corresponding model type:

**• NORMAL**  This setting corresponds to the classic aircr aft type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and elevator. No mixer function is necessary for this model type.

**• V**  **-TAIL (V-tail unit)**With this model type the elevator and rudder control functions are connected, so that each of the two tail unit flaps

– each controlled with a separ ate
servo

– assume both the ele vator and rudder function. The servos are normally connected to the recei v er as follows: OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servo OUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servo If the servo’s direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 73.

**• ELEV**  **ON (delta/flying wing models)**The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume the aileron and elevator function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows: OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical OUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/vertical If the servo’s direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 73. **RX CURVE (EXPO)**

RX CURVE

TYPE : B CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

**Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** CURVE1, 2 or 3 CH Channel assignment of the respective curve setting 1 ... depending on receiver247 **Program description - Telemetry Value Explanation**  **Possible settings**  TYPE Curve type A, B, C see figure

Expo = +100%–100%+100%0

–100% +100% 0 Expo = –100%

TYPE **A**–100%+100%0

–100% +100%

0 linear–100%+100%0

–100% +100% 0 TYPE **B** TYPE **C**

DR = 125% DR = 70%Servo travel

Control travelServo travel

Control travelServo travel

Control travel Normally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also correspond to the factory settings. BUT CAUTION: This assignment only applies when,on the transmitter side, neither “2HRSv3+8” is specified in the “Tail type” line nor is “2AIL” or “2AIL 2FL” specified in the “Aileron/camber flaps” line of the

» **Model type** « menu, page 130. Otherwise, assignments will have already been made in the transmitter for control function 3 (elevator) , which will then be split between control channels 3 & 8 , or control function 2 ( aileron) , which will then be split between control channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding control channels (INPUT CH) in the receiver would in both cases be channels 03 & 08 or 02 & 05. Therefore if, for example, “2AIL” has been specified on the transmitter side and the intent here is to utilize the RX CURVE option instead of the 

### mc-16 HoTT

or 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter’s individually adjustable

» **Dual Rate / Expo** « menu, see page 130 or 134, then two curves must be set. Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different control characteristics: RX CURVE

TYPE : A CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

With the RX CURVE function you can manage the control characteristics for up to three servos:

**• CUR**  **VE 1, 2 or 3 CH** Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of the first servo. The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the channel selected here. **TYPE** Select the servo curve: **A** : EXPO = -100 % and DU AL RATE = 125 % The ser vo reacts strongly to movements of the stick around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes flatter. **B** : Linear setting. The servo follows the stick movement linearly. **C** : EXPO = +100 % and DU AL RATE = 70 % The ser vo reacts weakly to the stick movements around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes steeper.
Note: The control characteristics programmed here also affect the mapped receiver outputs.

**5CH FUNCTION: “SERVO” or “SENSOR”**

RX CURVE

TYPE : B CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SERVO Some receivers have a specific servo connection which has been made switchable rather than an independent telemetry connection. Thus, for example, on the GR-12 receiver included with the mx-12 HoTT set, order no. **33112,** servo connector 5 has an extra “T” mark and can be alternatively connected ...

Servo Sensor OR

... not only via an order no. **7168.6A** adapter cable to upgrade the receiver but also connected to a tele

metr y sensor. However, in order for the receiver to correctly recog

niz e the given connected device correctly, servo connection 5 (in this case) MUST be appropriately set for either “SERVO” or “SENSOR”. This switchover is accomplished by moving the  with the selection key of the left or right four-way button until the “ ” symbol is at the left margin of the bottom line then tapping on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

RX CURVE

TYPE : A CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION: SERVO
Now use one of the  selection keys on the rightfour-way button to select the alternative setting “SENSOR”.248 **Program description - Telemetry** RX CURVE

TYPE : A CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION: SENSOR Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button will close the selection and, with appropriate repetitive taps on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button, a return to the transmitter’s basic display is accomplished.
**RX SERVO TEST**

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
**Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** ALL-MAX Servo travel on the "+" side for all servo outputs for the servo test 1500 ... 2000 μs

ALL-MIN Ser vo travel on the "-" side for all servo outputs for the servo test 1500 ... 1000 μs

TEST T est procedure START / STOP
ALARM VOLT Alarm threshold of the receiver undervoltage warning 3.0 ... 7.5 V factory setting: 3.8 V ALARM TEMP+ Alarm threshold for excessively high temperature of the receiver 50 ... 80 °C

F actory setting: 55 °C

ALARM TEMP– Alarm threshold for excessively low temperature of the receiver -20 ... +10 °C

F actory setting: -10 °C

CH OUTPUT TYPE Channel sequence ONCE, SAME, SUMI, SUMO and SUMD
**ALL-MAX (servo travel on the “+” side)** In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the plus side of the control travel for the servo test. 2000 μ s corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μ s corresponds to the neutral position.Make sure that the servos do not overrun mechanically during the test routine. **ALL-MIN (servo travel on the “-” side)** You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus side of the control path for the servo test in this line. 1000 μ s corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μ s corresponds to the neutral position.
**TEST** You start and stop the servo test integrated in the receivers in this line. A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will open the entry field:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : STOP

Now, with one of the selection keys of the right fourway button, select **START** :

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : START

A brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will now start the test run. The input field is shown as “normal” again:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : START

To stop the servo test, reactivate the entry field as described above, select **STOP** and confirm this selection with the **SET** key of the right four-way button. **ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)** The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and 7.5 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/ short) and “ **VOLT.E** ” blinks in the top right of all » **RX**

**...** « displays:

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500μsec TRIM : –000μsec TRAVEL– : 150% OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150% PERIOD : 20msec VOLT.E

The parameter “ **R-VOLT** ” is also represented inversely in the » **RX DATAVIEW** « display:249 **Program description - Telemetry** S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C L PACK TIME 00010msec

L.R-VOLT:03.5V S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C R-VOLT : 03.7 V

RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E

**ALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature monitoring)**  These two options monitor the receiver temperature. A lower threshold “ALARM TEMP-” (-20 ... +10 °C) and an upper threshold “ALARM TEMP+” (50 ... 80 °C) can be prog rammed. When these specifications are exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous peep tone) sounds and “ **TEMP.E** ” ap

pears in the top right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter “ **R-TEM** ” is shown inversely on the “» **RX DATAVIEW** «“ display page.Make sure that your receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all flight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).
**CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)** Here you select how the receiver outputs are controlled.

**• ONCE** 

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: ONCE
The servo connections of the receiver are controlled successively. This is recommended for analog servos. This setting automatically operates servos in a 20 ms cycle

– or in a 30 ms cycle f or a 12 channel receiver (order no. **33512** )

– , regardless of what is set or displa yed in the “PERIOD” line of the » **RX SERVO**  « screen!

**• SAME** 

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SAMEThe signals are passed to the receiver servo sockets in parallel blocks. For example, the control signals are sent simultaneously to the servos connected to sockets 1 to 4 and 5 to 8 of the GR-16 receiver, and the servos connected to sockets 1 to 4, 5 to 8 and 9 to 12 of the GR-24 receiver.This is recommended for digital servos when multiple servos are used for one function (e. g. aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely synchronized. When only using digital servos, we recommend setting the “PERIOD” line of the » **RX SERVO** « to 10 ms in order to be ab le to utilize the fast reaction of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or in mixer mode, 20 ms m ust be selected! **With this setting, pay particular attention to the sufficient dimensioning of the receiver current**  **supply.** Since up to four servos can always operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher.

**• SUMO**  (sum signal OUT) A HoTT receiv er configured as SUMO permanently generates a so-called sum signal from the control signals of all of its control channels and provides this by default in the case of the receivers supplied as standard in the sets: GR-16 at servo socket 6 GR-24 at servo socket 8 On receivers whose right of “SUMO”, an additional two-digit number in the display appears ...

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMO 08 ... after confirmation of “SUMO” with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button,the active field changes to the right for channel selection. With this selection you specify the highest of the transmitter channels contained in the SUMO signal:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMO 08 Either confirm the default with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or usethe selection keys to pick another channel between 04 and 16 and confirm that with **SET**

. Receiver outputs will be controlled successively in a 20 ms cycle (30 ms with the GR-32 DU AL receiver, order no. **33516** ), even if 10 ms is set in the “PERIOD” line of the the » **RX SERVO** « screen. Primarily intended for the “Satellite mode” of twoHoTT receivers, as described below, the sum signal generated by the SUMO-designated receiver can also be used, for example, to control of Flybar systems (provided they have an appropriate input) or to control flight simulators via an adapter cable, order no. **33310**

. In ...250 **Program description - Telemetry Satellite mode** ... two HoTT receivers are connected to one another through a three-wire connecting cable (order no. **33700.1** (300 mm) or **33700.2** (100 mm)) at receiver-type-specific servo connections. Type GR-16 and GR-24 receivers, for example, are to be connected with one another at servo output 6 respectively 8. More detailed information can be found on the Internet at www.graupner.de. All the channels of the HoTT receiver configured as SUMO (or the channels selected in the “CH OUT TYPE” line) and designated satellite receiver,are passed constantly to the second HoTT receiver via this connection; this is the primary receiver, which is designated ...

**• SUMI**  (sum signal IN) ... the designation f or the main receiver. Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMI The receiver defined as SUMI, however, only uses the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI is programmed to fail-safe. If the receiver programmed as the SUMO satellitereceiver has a reception outage, the servos connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe positions which were programmed into the satellitereceiver, completely independent of the main receiver.On the other hand, if two receivers have a reception outage simultaneously , the fail-safe settings inthe current receiver software at the time this manual went to revision (in principle, the SUMO’s failsafe settings) become effective. In the individual case, however, interactions cannot be ruled out,**which is why we urgently recommend perform ing an appropriate test BEFORE commission**  **ing a model.** This receiver combination is recommended if, for example, one of the two receivers is installed in the model at an unfavorable position for recei ving or as a result of nozzles , carbon fiber material orthe like, there is the danger that the receipt signal is weakened due to the flight position, so thatinterruptions of the range must be taken into account.Therefore, make sure to connect the most important control functions to the main receiver programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of a failure, the model remains controllable when theSUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a signal.Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the onboard electricity supply, on the other hand, is onlysent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver configured as SUMO. For this reason telemetry sensors must be connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO), and this receiver must also be defined as such in the “TEL.RCV.” line of the » **Telemetry** « menu (Bind 1 ... 2); see “Important notes” on page 240. Each receiver should be connected with its own supply line from the common voltage supply. With receivers with a high current load, it mayeven be beneficial to connect them with two supply lines to the same current supply. . On the other hand, if each of the two receivers should be supplied from its own voltage source, the center cable must be removed from one of the two plugs of the satellite red
1

2 3 cable; see figure.If you would like to carry out additional programming, such as fail-safe settings, disconnect thethree-pole satellite connection between the two receivers and switch on only the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also change the connection sequence.

**• SUMD**  (digital sum signal) A HoTT receiv er configured as SUMD, as described above, constantly generates a digital sum signal from the control signals of a (user-defined) number of its control channels, and makes thisavailable at the following receiver outputs (receivers supplied in the sets as standard): GR-16 at servo socket 6 GR-24 at servo socket 8 At the time these instructions were revised this type of signal is exploited by a few of the latest electronic developments in the fields of flybarless systems, high-capacity power supply systems, etc.**However, if you wish to use this facility it is es sential to read and observe the set-up notes** **supplied with the device connected to the re ceiver, otherwise there is a risk that your mod**  **el will be uncontrollable.**

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMD HD12 When you confirm “SUMD” by briefly pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button, the active Value field moves to the right,where you can select one of three possible receiver responses in the case of reception failure (FailSafe):251 **Program description - Telemetry** RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMD HD 12

**• HD**  **(„hold“)** The signals last detected as correct are “held” at the output.

**• FS**  **(F ail Safe)**  The signals stored previously as the Fail-Safepositions are passed to the output; see the section entitled “Fail Safe” on page 220.

**• OF**  **(OFF)** No signals are passed to the servos during the period of interference. When you again press the central **SET** button ofthe right-hand four-way button, the active field finally moves to Channel Select: at this point you can determine the highest transmitter channel which is to be included in the SUMD signal:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMDHD 12

Note: In most cases a value higher than “12” is not required by devices likely to be connected to the system. **SETTING & DATAVIEW sensor(s)** If, in addition to a “receiver”, at least one sensor is selected in the » **Telemetry** « menu’s » **SENSOR SE LECT**  « sub-menu (described below) then its settingscan be read in and changed in addition to the previously described receiver screens. However, to actually gain access to this data, the selected sensor/s must be connected to the receiver system and this receiver system must have an active telemetry connection. If, as described in the next section, there is at least one sensor activated which has the support of current firmware, then it is possible to directly switch between individual modules. However, if sensors with older firmware are in use, it may be necessary to select “etc.” instead of the direct sensor selection. In either case, tap the  or  selection key of the left four-way button ...



# RECEIVER VARIO

etc.

... then use the same keys to select up or down for the desired module, for example:



# VARIO GPS

RECEIVER

If the selected module, in this case a Vario module, is active then on the last receiver screen (“RX SERVOTEST”), at the top right there will also be an additional “ ” symbol pointing to the right. This symbol is located just to the right of the left-pointing “ ” symbol and is the visible indicator that additional display screens can be accessed:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 55°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
Now use one of the  selection keys on the left orright four-way button to switch to the selected sensor’s displays and check or change its settings as described in the manual delivered with the sensor.252 **Program description - Telemetry** 

# SENSOR SELECT

Selecting sensors
After selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

... and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the selected sub-menu will open.

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

This menu option can be used to determine which of the graphic displays described on page 38, as well as those described previously for sub-menu » **SET TING & DATAVIEW**  «, can be selected and which remain hidden. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of respective sensors by selecting the desired lines with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tapping on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button, e. g.:

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

You must make this selection in order to include thecorresponding sensor in the “SELECT VOICE MESSAGE” sub-menu, see page 254, and to display telemetry data in the respective data displays, starting on page 38.253 **Program description - Telemetry** After selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

... and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will open the selected sub-menu.This provides a visualization of the quality of the connection of transmitter and receiver:

R100%

T –40

E 10 R –51 5.2VC S 90%

4.9VM 0123456789ABCDE Top row: Reception po wer of the channels 1

...75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the receiver to the transmitter.
Bottom row: Reception po wer of the channels 1 ... 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the transmitter to the receiver.

Comments:

• Since reception po wer is measured and presented in dBm, reception power is increasingly worse thehigher the bar is and vice versa; refer also to “Reception power (S-dBm)” on page 242 about this.

• The points abo ve the bars mark the poorest reception since switching on the transmitter or the last reset of the display with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** )

**.** 

# RF STATUS VIEW

Additional figures are shown to the left of the graphic representation of the reception power. These mean: **Value Explanation** R Signal quality in % of the signal received from the receiver S Signal quality in % of the signal received by the receiver T Reception power in dBmE Number of lost data packages of the receiver R Reception power in dBM of the signal received by the receiver VC Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts VM Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts254 **Program description - Telemetry** After selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV. RCV CH1

... and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will open the selected sub-menu.

–––

–––

–––

AIR ESC VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

GENERAL MODULE ELECTRIC AIR.MOD VARIO MODULE GPS

Note: The sensors displayed here vary according to theinformation you have entered in the “SELECT SENSOR” sub-menu; see page 252. The screen-shotabove shows the maximum number of options, corresponding to “all sensors selected”.

**REPEAT**

–––

–––

––– VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

In order to be able to start the voice output throughthe headphone connection, at the very least the “REPEAT” line must be assigned to a switch. The takes place as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68:

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

–––

––– VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO 7

With this switch you can have the last respective voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned switch is closed. Simultaneously pressing the Select buttons  or  of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) resets the time value to “1 SEC.”.
**TRIG**With a switch assigned to this line, preferably a pushbutton, switch the selected voice messages in rotation on to the next voice message for the below-described “TRANSMITTER”, “RECEIVER” and “SENSOR” op

tions.

8 7

––– VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO **VARIO** If the “VARIO MODULE” line is activated ( ) in the

» **SENSOR SELECT** « sub-menu, as described on page 252, a switch assigned to one of these lines can be used to call up vario-specific voice messages for the headset connection which are completely independent of other voice messages, i. e. voice messages triggered by altitude changes, such as the message “slowly ascend/descend”:

8 7

15 VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

**TRANSMITTER** After selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

8 7

15 VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

... and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will open the selected sub-menu.

TX VOLT: MODELTIME: BATTERYTIME:
TIMER(GE.)CENTER: TIMER(GE.)TOP:

PHASE TIMER: TIME:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right 

# VOICE TRIGGER255 **Program description - Telemetry** four-way button, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ).

TX VOLT: MODELTIME: BATTERYTIME:
TIMER(GE.)CENTER: TIMER(GE.)TOP:

PHASE TIMER: TIME:

**RECEIVER** After selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button ...

8 7

15 VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 10SEC TRIG

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER VARIO

... and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will open the selected sub-menu:

TEMP: STRENGTH: RX VOLT: LOWVOLT:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button and a subsequent tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ). **“Sensors”** These lines only appear if you have already activatedat least one sensor in the “SELECT SENSOR” submenu of the » **Telemetry** « menu; see page 252. The method of selecting corresponding voice messages is as described in the previous sections.
Note: The points you select here are entirely independent of the “VARIO” messages.256 **Program description - Channel sequencer** 

# Channel sequencer

Programming the motion sequences of up to 3 servos This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Channel sequence**  « menu option in the multi-function menu:
Tx. output swap Profi trim Trim memory Telemetry Channel sequence Multichannel
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

Channel Channel

Channel Channel sequenzer

channel SET 9 10 11 INACT INACT INACT

The » **Channel sequence** « menu option can be used to execute up to 9 exactly coordinated steps for up to three servos over a period of up to 30 seconds. Such a sequence can be triggered by a single switch andbegin at an initial servo position which is freely adjustable. For example, this makes the opening of undercarriage doors, complete with subsequent extension of the retractable gear, just as simple to program as opening a wheel well with renewed closing of one undercarriage door once the landing gear has been lowered or to program the raising of a cockpit canopy with subsequent head turns and waving performed bythe pilot. However, the prerequisite for all these actions is the “parsing” of the desired motion sequence into practical, individual steps. **Programming procedure** On this menu option’s first display page, see figure below left, either accept the three preset channels, 9, 10 and 11, or select an available channel, 5 ... 12, for each line to form any other desired combination, e. g.:

Channel Channel Channel sequenzer

channel SET 10 11 INACT INACT INACT Channel 12

With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** , the given channel is reset back to 5, 6 or 7. The next step makes the control channels needed for the channel sequence available. This is done in the

“ **SET** ” column by changing settings from “INACT” to“ACT” and thus making the individual channels “available” to the program for sequencing. Conversely, this also means that channels defined as “active” in the

» **Channel sequence** « menu are not available for other purposes:

Channel Channel Channel sequenzer

channel SET 10 11 ACT ACT Channel 12 ACT

With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** , the given channel is reset back to “INACT”. Once control channels and their activity statuses have been set, switch to the right column then tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to reach the second page, the » **Channel sequence** « menu’s choreography page. Since the call-up of the second page in this example was issued from the “Channel 12” line, this servo remains the object of focus after the page change:

TIME POS ST 11

0 0% ––– 10

12

The previous display page permitted the selection of participating servos and their incorporation into thesequence. This display page will now be used to establish the sequence of steps for participating servos, beginning with initial positions yet to be defined. The step number, from “0  ” to a maximum of “  9”, will be shown in the column labeled “ST” near the bottom left of the display. **Step 0: Setting initial position** Keep the focus of attention on “(Cchannel) 12” or change to any other of the three servos by using the  keys of the left four-way button, e. g. upw ard to “(Cchannel) 10”:

TIME POS ST 11

0 0% ––– 10

12

Use one of the  selection keys of the rightfourway button, as necessary, to shift the marker frame to the right from the column “TIME” to the value field above the column labeled “POS” then, after a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, alter this value within a range of ±100 % until the serv o is in the desired initial position. For example: 

### mc

  16 20257 **Program description - Channel sequencer** TIME POS ST 11 12 0

––– 10

+90%

Repeat this procedure as necessary for the other two

servos. With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** , the given position value will be reset back to”0 %”. **Step**  **1**  **(first event)** Now that initial positions have been established, the first step can be set. This is a matter of defining what is to be done, or not done, first, following a certain span of time. Do this by first using the  selection keys of the left four-way button to select one of the servos. Now tap the  key of the leftfour-way button. The step number, which was previously indicated by a “0  ” is now replaced by a “  1” and the value “0.0s” will appear in the field above “TIME”. Use the selection keys of the right four-way button as ne cessary to shift the mar ker frame to the “TIME” column:

POS 11 12 1 +90% ––– 0.0s 10

TIME ST Now briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the rightfour-way button to set the activation time into the value field for the “TIME” column, e. g. 1.5 s. The current position in time is represented in the graphic by the dotted vertical line. It will move to the right according to the time setting and, at the same time, the course of servo positions will be presented as dotted lines between time-point “0  ” and time-point “  1  ”:

POS 11 12 1 +90% ––– 10

1.5s TIME ST Now set the desired servo positions for the end of the first time span (with the same procedure as already described for “Step 0”) or leave one or more of theseservos in the same position they were in for the previous step. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR)** will reset the inverse video value displayed if the TIME field back to “blank” and erase the current sequence, in this example only Step “  1  ”:

POS 11

0 +90% ––– 10

12

TIME ST

**Step**  **2** 

**...** Repeat the previously described procedure for every other step to be defined until the servos have reached their terminal positions. **Switch assignment** In conclusion, assign the sequence of events createdto a switch (as described in the section “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68) with which the servos can be switched between their initial and terminal positions: POS 11 12 8 0% 10

0.0s 2 TIME ST
As soon as this switch is closed, the servos’ sequence of movements can be followed in the graphic. The servo curves will be shown in inverse video according to the preset time windows. All movements will sequence in reverse when the switch is opened again. **Important notices:**

• The sequence shown is only f or demonstration purposes and is not at all representative of a real sequence of servo movements.

• The settings made in the “POS” value field replace the otherwise “conventional” transmitter controlsignal. Therefore it is necessary, before programming such a sequence, to check in the » **Servo display**  « menu to make sure none of the channelsplanned for the sequence are actuated by any other transmitter operating element. If this were to be the case, it could lead to unpredictable excursions in the motion sequence.

• The settings made in the » **Ser vo adjustment**  « and » **Tx. output swap** « menus are not affected by settings in this menu.When preparing and creating a sequence, be absolutely sure the servos do not collide mechanically. If necessary, use the “Travel limit” option in the » **Servo adjustment**  « menu.258 **Program description - Multichannel** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the menu option » **Multichannel** « menu option in the multi-function menu:

Profi trim Trim memory Telemetry Channel sequence Multichannel Ring limiter
... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Here, in the second column from the left, each of the two multi-channel functions can be activated (“ACT”) or deactivated (“OFF”) as desired and in the third co

lumn the giv en function can be assigned to one of the transmitter channels, 5CH through 8CH, in a list:

MC1 MC2 Multichannel

SET SEL OFF OFF MUL4CH MUL4CH 5CH

SEL 6CH

Note: When a changeover is made to the » **Servo dis play**  « or if » **Servo adjustment** « is used to select the
“- travel +” or “- lim +” columns for these previouslyset channels, their respective cells will flash to indicate that these channels have been activated in the

» **Multichannel** « menu. The preset values of 100 % or 150 % should not be changed.
Pr ior to channel selection, please observe the following notices: 1. Switch to the “SETTINGS/DISPLA YS” line of the

» **Telemetry** « menu and tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

• on the “RX SERVO” page, select the “20 ms” setting in the last line “PERIOD”, see page 243.

• On the “RX SERVO TEST” display page, select the “SAME” option for the last line “CH OUT TYPE”, see page 249. 2. The control channel used ma y not be used as an input nor as an output channel for any mixer! For example, if 5CH is selected, be sure that the “Aile/ flaps” line of the » **Model type** « menu is preset to “1AIL” or that the “Swashplate type” line of the

» **Helicopter type** « menu is preset to “1 servo”. 3. The channel settings intended f or NAUTIC control channel purposes in the » **Control adjust** « and

» **Servo adjustment** « menus are to be left as they are or reset back to their original settings. Do notassign any transmitter control or switch to the respective input either. Also be sure that the servo’sdirection of rotation is not reversed. Leave the servo middle at 0 %. In the ne xt column to the right, make a separatechannel count specification for each of the two multichannels; “MUL4CH” for the NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini decoder, order no. **4142.N** or “MUL8CH” for the NAUTIC-Expert switching module, order no. **4159** , for example:

MC1 MC2 Multichannel

SET SEL OFF OFF MUL4CH 5CH

SEL 6CH MUL8CH

Afterward, use the right arrow symbol at the bottom line’s right end to switch over to the second page of settings for the » **Multichannel** « menu. On this second page you can now enter the individual settings separately for “MC1” (Multichannel 1” ... 

# Multichannel

Channel multiplier for special functions
This option is available as standard on both transmitter types.
The transmitter 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT has an integrated multi-function channel built into the transmitter’s software. This faci

lity per mits up to two control channels to be used for up to four or eight special functions. Every available switch (including the so-called expansion switches,see page 68) or transmitter control can be assigned on the transmitter side.On the receiver side, the following modules are available as accessories, whereby at one time a maximum of two modules can be operated via the » **Multi-chan nel**  « menu. **NAUTIC-Expert, switching module,** order no. **4159** The NAUTIC-Expert switching module expands a servo’s functionality to 16 switched functions. By appropriately wiring the connecting cable, loads can either be operated from a common power supply or also separately by multiple power sources. **NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder** order no. **4142.N** The 1/4 C-NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder expands a proportional function to four proportional functions. **Light module** order no. **2381** A module for switching the light signals of rail, road and airborne vehicles with true authenticity.
**Sound switch for vehicle models** order no. **2382.F**start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical vehicle signals **Sound switch for ship models** order no. **2382.S**start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical ship signals Further information can be found in Internet at www.graupner.de. Use the search mask by entering the respective order no. Alternatively, contact or visit your local dealer. 

### mc

  16 20259 **Program description - Multichannel** INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 1

SEL offset INPUT1

INPUT4 ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% fr fr fr fr

... and „MC2“ (Multichannel 2) ...

INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 2

SEL offset INPUT1

INPUT4 ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% INPUT5 ––– 0% INPUT6 ––– 0% INPUT7 ––– 0% INPUT8 ––– 0% fr fr fr fr fr fr fr fr

**Column 2 “Control”**

INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 1

SEL offset INPUT1

INPUT4 ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% fr fr fr fr

Use the arrow keys to move to the column over **SEL**

. After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center **SET** key of the rightfour-way button, the message shown below will appear in the display:

IN IN Multichannel 1

SEL offset IN

INPUT4 0% 0% 0% ––– 0% fr Move desired control adj. **Erasing transmitter controls or switches** With transmitter control / switch assignment active, simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** )

– see screenshots above

– resets the corresponding input to “fr” and “---”.
**Column 4 “offset”**

INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 1

offset INPUT1

INPUT4 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% fr fr fr 2

3

The control center for the given control, i. e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -100 % and +100 %. Simultaneously tapping on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the value displayed in inverse video back to its “0 %” v alue.
Note: Leave the offset setting at 0 % while making switch assignments

. **Column 5 „– travel +“** To adjust servo travel, move to the right, beyond the “Offset” column, following the right-pointing arrow in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen:

INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 1

– travel + INPUT1

INPUT4 +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100%

Finally, transmitter control travel is set for both sidesin the column “-travel+”. The range for this lies between -100 % and +100 %. This is accomplished by Now operate the transmitter control you wish to use: the information window closes, and instead the Value field displays the name of the transmitter control you have chosen.
Note: If you are using the Nautic-Expert switch module, Order No. **4159** , any proportional controls you assign act like switches when close to their end-points.

**Column 3 “Switch”**

Multichannel 1

SEL offset INPUT4 ––– 0% fr Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

This column is used to assign each of the inputs used, 1 through 8 (maximum), to any switch available on the transmitter. These assignments are done as described in the section „Physical control, switch and control switch assignments“ on page 68: Any controls which were previously assigned in the second column will be erased. In this case, instead of **SEL** , the switch symbol will be displayed at the bottom of the 2nd column such that now a second “normal” switch, or even a transmitter control switch, logical switch, ... can be assigned as needed fromthe group of “expanded switches”. In general it is sufficient to assign a simple switch or transmitter control.

INPUT2 INPUT3 Multichannel 1

offset INPUT1

INPUT4 ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% ––– 0% fr fr fr 2260 **Program description - Multichannel** M 6 (output: 5 ... 8)5 (output 5 ... 8) (Receiver power supply to the „B + -“ marked terminals)

**Best. Nr. 4159 Max. 8 x 0,7 A**  Batt 3 30V

**NAUTIC - Expert Schaltbaustein**  

### 2 - 16 K **Empfänger**

**1 H 2**
**1 G 2 1 F 2**  **1 E 2 1 D 2** 
**1 C 2**

**1 A 2 1 B 2**  Best Nr 4142 N 1/4 K NAUTIC**Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder**  **RX**

**S 4 S 3** 
**S 2 S 1** 

**external power supply 3 ... 30 V** 

- + +

-

Current consumption of directly connected consumer units (but no electric motors) max. 0,7 A (total max. 8 x 0,7 A). **Wiring for direct connection of two consumer units at one output** 3-pole cable with flat connector Order No. **3941.6**

red brown

orange consumer unit max. 0,7 A

consumer unit max. 0,7 A additional modules e.g. ... Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. **3970** Switching module multi function SXM Order No. **3971** Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. **3970** Switching module SXH

Switching module SXM Switching module multi function SXM Order No. **3971** Soundswitch Order No. **2382** Light module Order No. **2381** 7 (output: 5 ... 8)

8 (output: 5 ... 8)

additional servos, speed controller, sail winch, ... also on this side

The figure shows an example of the connectivity of the " 2-16 C NAUTIC Expert Switch building block ", " 1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder ", " light module " and " sound switch ". Two of these modules in parallel can be operated using the menu » **Multi channel** « on output 5 ... 8. Before first time operation of the NAUTIC modules make the above described settings. **Receiver Graupner|SJ**  **HoTT GR-32 attachment example** moving the associated transmitter control to the cen- tre

– if you wish to set symmetr ical travels

– or in one direction or the other in order to set “tr avel” separately for each side of centre. If the assignment is for a switch, leave the setting at the default value of 100 %.
Note: Due to technical reasons, ser vos connected to a 1/4 C NAUTIC Multi-Prop mini decoder may operate somewhat hesitatingly. This is not a fault.

**Connection notes for the Nautic-Expert switching module,**  order no. **4159** As many as 16 switched functions can be controlled per switching module. Eight loads, like lamps, LEDs, etc.

– but not electr ic motors

– , with a load current of up to 0.7 A each can be connected directly.Two switch functions per connector socket are possible via the three conductor cable, order no. **3941.6**
, see bottom right figure. Electric motors and loads drawing substantial current should be connected by other means, e. g. via s witching modules. Ask your dealer about this.261 **For your notes**262 **Program description - Ring limiter** 

# Ring limiter

Control of Voith Schneider propellers in model ships
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to the menu option

» **Ring limiter** « in the multi-function menu:
Trim memory Telemetry Channel sequence Multichannel Ring limiter MP3 player
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

4 4

4 Ring limiter

Input SET 3 9 11 OFF OFF OFF
Output X 3 3 3 Y Y 4 10 12

X

This » **Ring limiter** « menu point is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, and is primarily intended for controlling a maximum of three Voith-Schneider power systems as employed in model boats. These are positioned beneath the ship where they are exposed to a free flow of waterin all directions. The control of these drives and turning their vertically oriented propeller blades is done with two servos per Voith Schneider propulsion unit whereby, for mechanical reasons, the propellers of this type offered by Graupner under order nos. **2358** and **2358.BL** have a maximum control travel limitation of 4 mm each. As long as the sticks for forward/reverse and left/ right are operated individually (see section “Column Input”) this is no problem because travel for the twoservos can be appropriately adjusted, both mechanically as well as in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu. However, this becomes problematic when, for example, one stick is 100 % f orward and, at the same time , the other stick is pushed completely to the right to arithmetically produce a 141 % sum f or the two servo travel vectors. The mechanical controls of the Voith Schneider propellers will collide with their limits; in best case only drawing an unnecessary amount of electric current, in worst case causing damage or even bursting the linkage.. This problem can be circumvented by using “ring limiters”, which are featured as standard on the 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter, and can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. There are a maximum of three “ring limiters” available in the “ **SET** ” column of this option’s first display page (see figure at left) that can be switched “ON” or “OFF” individually. In the first line on the setting page for a given “ring limiter”, its maximum travel can then be set for a range of between 25 and 125 %. The secondline provides a setting for the size of limitation of overall deflection between: 0 % circular limit (  ) 100 % no limit (  ) (limitation is strictly a matter of the given stick’s mechanical stop) **Important notice: When this function is used, leave the respective**  **setting values in the »Dual Rate / Expo« and »Servo adjustment» menus at 0 and 100**  **% or reset them bac**  **k to their default values.** The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 0 % setting. The cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a “dead zone”. **Column, “Input”** With the standard preset control mode 1, all threering limiters are pre-assigned to inputs 3 (forward/reverse) and 4 (left/right) which are actuated by the left stick. However, this pre-assignment can be replaced anytime by any other transmitter control combination. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the desired value field then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

4

4 Ring limiter

Input SET 3 9 11 OFF OFF OFF
Output X 3 3 3 Y Y 4 10 12

X 4

Select the desired control channel (1 ... 12 max.) for the value field now displayed in inverse video by using the  or  selection keys. However, do not forget that if a control channel in the range of 5 ... 12max. is selected, it must also be assigned to a control in the » **Control adjust** « menu, see page 118

. Briefly tap the center **ESC** of the left four-way button or the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to conclude your entry. In principle, the other inputs are to be handled in the

same manner. A tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR)** will reset the active value field back to its given default value. **Column, “Output”** The three ring limiters are pre-assigned to receiver outputs 3/4, 9/10 and 11/12 by default, whereby theoutputs in column “X” are for the forward/reverse function and the outputs in column “Y” are for the left/right function. However, this preset combination of receiver outputs can be replaced as necessary by any other 

### mc

  16 20263 **Program description - Ring limiter** combination at any time. This is essentially done in the same manner as described previously under “Input”, for example:

4

4 Ring limiter

Input SET 3 9 7 OFF OFF OFF
Output X 3 3 3 Y Y 4 10

6 X 4

Note: Watch out for undesirable overlaps if you use one of the outputs within a mixer.
**Column, “SET”** The **SET** column is used to determine just which of the ring limiters is to be “OFF” and which are to be “ON”, i. e . active. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the desired value field in the **SET** column then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

4

4 Ring limiter

Input SET 3 9 7 OFF OFF OFF
Output X 3 3 3 Y Y 4 10

6 X 4

In the value field now displayed in inverse video, make a choice between the two options, “ON” and “OFF”, with the  or  selection keys then conclude the entry with a brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button or on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. A tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the active value field back to its “OFF” default value. **„Settings page“**

4

4 Ring limiter

Input SET 3 9 7 ON ON ON
Output X 3 3 3 Y Y 4 10

6 X 4

Following a selection of one of the three lines with the selection keys, switch to the settings page for the selected ring limiter (1 ... 3) with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:

0% R.

max-X 0% CH 4 100% 100% CH 3 1 lim.

If, however, the small diamond at the center of thecircle in the figure above (which represents the current stick position) is not visible ...

0%

max-X 0% 100% 100% R. CH 4 CH 3 1 lim.

... then the respective ring limiter is still switched “OFF”. In this case, switch back to the previous page with a brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left fourway button then switch the respective ring limiter “ON” as previously described. **Programming procedure** The two upper value fields

– labeled at the bottom left of the displa y as “max-X” or “max-Y”, depending on the position of the marker frame

– are used to specify separ ate settings for each of the two control functions, “left/right” and “forward/reverse” within a range of 25 ...

0%

max-X 0% 100% 25% R. CH 4 CH 3 1 lim.

... and 125 %:

0%

max-X 0% 100% 125% R. CH 4 CH 3 1 lim.

In practice, the setting is made by changing the given value until the respective servos in the model just reach the point where they no longer move. A tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR)** will reset the changed value in the active value field back to its “100 %” default value. In the next line down

– labeled at the bottom left of the displa y as “  <=>  -X” or “  <=>  -Y”, depending on the position of the marker frame

– the setting v alues, in a range from 0 % and a maxim um of 125 %, aff ectthe form of limitation between “circular” and “rectangular”, whereby a setting value here may never be greater than the value of the field above it.

0%

  -X 0% 100% 100% R. CH 4 CH 3 1 lim.264 **Program description - Ring limiter**   -X 0% 100% 100% 100% R. CH 4 CH 3 1 lim.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button at the same time ( **CLEAR)** will reset the changed value in the active value field back to its “0 %” default value. When finished with these settings, switch back to thefirst display page for this option then repeat this procedure, as applicable, for the lines of ring limiter 2 or 3.
Final note:This option can, of course, also be used as necessary and applicable for fixed-wing models.265 **For your notes**266 **Program description - MP3 player** 

# MP3 player

Replay program for MP3 files, such as music files This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only. Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to the menu option

» **Ring limiter** « in the multi-function menu:
Telemetry Channel sequence Multichannel Ring limiter MP3 player Basic settings
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

Vol:15 A00/00 T00/00 **A** File not found

If the message “File not found” appears near the middle of the display when this menu option is called then the transmitter has been unable to find any sui

tab le MP3 files on the SD card. If this should happen, use a PC or laptop to check the content of the “MP3” directory on the SD card and copy suitable MP3 files into this directory if it is empty. Therefore, insert a SD card containing MP3 files in adirectory named “MP3” and, after switching the transmitter on, open the » **MP3-Player** « menu option:

Vol:15 A00/00 T00/00 **A** Briefly tap the  key of the left four-way button to start replay of the first MP3 file of album 1. The replay will start immediately, however, the display of data about the number of albums and titles as well as playing time for the current MP3 file

– depending on the siz e of the MP3 file

– will only appear after some dela y.

Vol:15 A01/04 T01/04 **A** 

# Tra c k 0 1.

The automatic replay of album 1 will continue to run until it is stopped with a tap on the  key of the left four-way button ...

Vol:15 A01/04 T01/04 **A** 

# 01.mp3

... or the transmitter is switched off. During ongoing replay, the menu can be exited at anytime and the transmitter can be used without restriction.
Note: If voice output is activated it will be blended in with the playing MP3 file.

**Volume**You may need to use the Select buttons of the righthand four-way button to move to the left-hand Value field in the bottom line. Activate the Value field by pressing the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button, then use the Select buttons of the right-hand four-way button to adjust the playback volume in the range “0” (muted) to “30” (very loud):

A01/04 T03/04 **A** 

# .mp3

Vol:15

**Album** Use the Select buttons of the right-handfour-way button to select the central Value field in the bottom line, and then press the central **SET** button of the righthand four-way button:

T05/21 **A** 

# ack05.mp

Vol:15 A02/04

Use the  selection keys of the rightfour-way button to select the desired album number (from 1 to a maximum of 10) in this value field. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to confirm the selection.
Note:The number of albums right of the slash (“/”) is a consequence of the number of files present in subdirectories of the “MP3” directory on the SD card, not thesum of album names which may be stored in identically named meta-data fields of the MP3 file.

**Titel** Use the Select buttons of the right-hand four-waybutton to select the right-hand Value field in the bottom line, and then press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button: 

### mc

  16 20267 **Program description - MP3 player A**  

# 05.mp3

Vol:15 A02/04 T05/21
Now select the desire title by using the  selection keys on the right four-way button. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to start this selection.

**A** 

# Tra c k 0 9.

Vol:15 A02/04 T09/21

Notes:

• The title display ed will be the filename of the MP3 file, not any identically named title which may be stored in the MP3 file as a meta-data field.

• The number of the title per alb um is a consequence of the number of MP3 files per directory. **MP3 player operator field**

**A**

Vol:15 A02/04 T09/21

• Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, jump one title forward or back for each tap on one of the  selection keys of the left four-way button.

• / Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, start and stop the MP3 player with a tap on the  selection keys of the left four-way button.

• **A** / 1 / 1 Switch between these three options with the  selection keys of the left four-way button:

**A** Replay of the selected album will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the tr ansmitter is switched off.

1 Replay of the current title will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the tr ansmitter is switched off.

1 Replay will stop automatically at the end of pla y for the current title. A tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will exit the menu option without stopping any replay that may be running.268 **Program description - Basic settings** This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the » **Basic settings**  « menu option in the multi-function menu:
MP3 player Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock Info display
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

Battery type Battery warning

Touch Sense Top LCD Contrast

Lith. Display light

Region 2 3.60V 0

Euro

unlim. Basic settings

Vario Vol Beeps Vol

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

BT Headset OFF 0/0 ID PAIR OFF BT Volume 8 Voice Vol

––– 5

––– 7 ––– 7

Own Stick mode 1 Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Bottom LCD Contr. 0

SEL SEL fr fr fr Basic settings are made in this menu. Transmitterspecific settings, such as volume regulation for acoustic signals and voice messages output via the built-in speaker or headset connector, the owner’s name, country setting and even specifications for new model memories. The settings made in this menu on the lines ...

• “Stic k mode”,

• “Modulation”,

• “DSC Output” and

• “Pitch min” ... theref ore have no influence whatsoever on already existing model memories; instead, they are only defaults which are automatically adopted into newly initialized model memories and can be changed there individually at any time in the » **Basic settings, model**  « and » **Helicopter type** « menus. A change to the “Pre-set” settings in value fields of this menu therefore only affects those model memories created new at a later time

. Note: The settings in this menu are only specified once in the entire transmitter. Therefore, after opening thismenu in another model memory, the last valid settings always appear.
**Programming procedure** Select the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The value in the field now displayed in inverse video can be changed. After a change has been made, the entry can be concluded with another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. **Voice volume / Vario volume / Beeps volume**

––– 7

––– 3 ––– 7

SEL SEL fr fr fr Basic settings

Vario Vol Beeps Vol Voice Vol

Own

These three lines can be used to individually set the volume of the three groups of acoustic signals and voice messages. This involves selection from among a total of three variants, whereby the variants two andthree offers option for individually regulating the volume even after leaving this menu. **Pre-setting a value** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the desired value field in the column above the left **SEL** at the display’s lower edge then briefly tap the center **SET** key of theright four-way button. The desired volume for the selected group can be specified in increments between 0 and 10 in the value field now displayed in inverse video by using the selection keys of the left or right four-way button. Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button or the **ESC** key of the left four-way button will conclude the process. Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the display will return to its “7” default value. **via proportional control** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the desired value field in the column above the right **SEL** label at the display’s lower edge then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The message shown below will then appear in the display: 

# Basic settings

Basic transmitter settings



### mc

  16 20269 **Program description - Basic settings** –––

––– –––

SEL SEL Basic settings

Va Be Vo

Own Move desired control adj.

Now move the desired control, for example, the right proportional slider Sl2. Afterward, this slider can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10. Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the display will return to its “fr” default value. **via three position switch** Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to move the marker frame to the column above the switch symbol at the display’s lower edge then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The message shown below will then appear in the display:

SEL SEL Basic settings

Own Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET)

Now, assign a switch as described in the section“Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68. Ideally a self-neutralizing three position switch, e. g. lik e that offered by Graupner under order no. **33001.5** . Afterward, this switch can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10. Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the display will return to its “---” default value. **Own(er)**

––– 7

3 ––– 7 Cn5 Cn6 Basic settings

Vario Vol Beeps Vol Voice Vol

Own 2 3

Up to 15 characters can be used to specify the owner’s name. Change to the next screen page ( ) with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Owner H-J San d b FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`a b cdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

Select the desired characters with the selection keys of the left four-way button. With a brief tap on the  selection key of the right four-way button or its center **SET** key, move to the next position in which a character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the 

or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry field can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad. A br ief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will cause a return to the previous menu page. (Pre-set) **Stick mode** As a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake flaps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models to the two sticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot: **Winged model stick mode**

**MODE 2** (Throttle at left stick)

elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleftaileronrightaileron full throttle

idleleft rudderright rudder elev. down

elev. upleftaileronrightaileron

elev. down

elev. upleftaileronrightaileron full throttle

idleleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleftaileronrightaileron elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder **MODE 1** (Throttle at rigth stick)

**MODE 3** (Throttle at right stick) **MODE 4** (Throttle at left stick)

**Helicopter model stick mode**

**MODE 2** (Throttle at left stick)

pitch axis

pitch axistail rotortail rotor throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchrollroll throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchtail rotortail rotor pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll

pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchtail rotortail rotor throttle/pitch

throttle/pitchrollroll pitch axis

pitch axistail rotortail rotor **MODE 1** (Throttle at right stick)

**MODE 3** (Throttle at right stick) **MODE 4** (Throttle at left stick)

Use the  selection keys of the left or right fourway button to select the “Stick mode” line. The option field will be framed.270 **Program description - Basic settings** 3 ––– 7 Cn6 Basic settings Vario Vol Beeps Vol Own 2 3 H-J Sandbrunner 1 SEL Stick mode

Tap on the **SET** key briefly. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select the variant, from 1 to 4, you most frequently use. In the future this will be used for newly initializedmodel memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 20 respectively 24 model memories. Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ), the display will return to stick mode “1”. With another tap on the **SET** key, the selection fieldwill be deactivated again to permit a change to another line. (Pre-set) **Modulation** Standard equipment for the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc20 HoTT transmitters includes a HoTT transmitter module and, under the left front cover

– as vie wed from the front

– a DSC jac k and a DATA jack, see page 22.It is also possible to switch between three RF module variants in the “Module” line of the » **Base setup model**  « menu

– see pages 86 and 94

– b y selecting “HoTT”, “EXT.” or “SP.” for each model memory separately. The most frequently used variant should logically be selected for the “Pre-set modulation” line in the » **Basic settings** « menu. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 20 respectively 24 model memories. Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: 3 Basic settings Beeps Vol Own 2 3 H-J Sandbrunner 1

SEL Stick mode Modulation HoTT

Now use the selection keys of the right four-way button to select the variant from among “HoTT”, “EXT.” and “SP.”. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will return the display back to modulation “HoTT”. With a brief tap on the **SET** or **ESC** key, the selected field is deactivated to permit a switch to another line. (Pre-set) **DSC Output** In the line with the same name in the » **Basic set tings, model**  « menu, page 92 or 100, a separatespecification can be made from among the four available modulation types which is specific to each model memory and will then provided at the DSC socket.This choice primarily influences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to theDSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a flight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting “PPM10” this will be control channels 1 ... 5, for “PPM16” channels 1 ... 8, for “PPM18” channels 1 ... 9 and for “PPM24” channels 1 ... 12:

SEL Rcv Ch Map R12 R08 Base setup model

RF transmit ON RF Range Test 99sec DSC Output PPM10

In a manner similar to “(Pre-set) Stick mode”, in this

» **Basic settings** « menu the selection made for the “(Pre-set) DSC Output” line will determine which of the four possible modulation types will be adopted as the default variant for a newly initialized model memory. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button to switch to the “DSC Output” line then, with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, activate the value window:
Basic settings Own H-J Sandbrunner 1

SEL Stick mode Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10

Now a choice can be made from among the four possible modulation types: “PPM10”, “PPM16”, “PPM18”and “PPM24”, with the selection keys of the right fourway button. Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will conclude the entry. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset this option back to “PPM10”. (Pre-set) **Pitch min** (only rele vant to helicopter models)In a manner similar to the previously described options “Stick mode” and “DSC Output”, enter the preferred actuation direction for the throttle/pitch stick on this line so the choice will already be present by default for model memories newly initialized in the future. The functionality of all other helicopter program options (to the extent they affect throttle and/or pitch) are dependent on this setting; in other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1  tail rotor mixer, etc. This means:

**• “f**  **orwrd”** minimum front pitch setting, the pitch stick (C1) points away from the pilot.271 **Program description - Basic settings •**  **“back”** minim um rear pitch setting, the pitch stick (C1) points towards the pilot. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will set this option to “back”.
Note: The C1 stick’s control direction for “Throttle min front/rear” in the fixed-wing program can be changed individually in the » **Model type** « menu. **LCD Contrast (upper display / lower display)** In assure optimal legibility of the transmitter 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT displays under all weather and temperature conditions, their contrast settings can be adjusted separately.



### mc-16 **HoTT** The contrast of the front screen of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter

– located between the switch boards

– can be adjusted as f ollows: select the “LCD Contrast” lineusing the Select buttons of the left or right-hand fourway button, and then briefly press the central **SET** button of the right-hand four-way button:
Basic settings

SEL Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10

LCD Contrast 0 Pitch min back

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value field displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20by using the selection keys of the right four-way button: Basic settings

SEL Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10

LCD Contrast Pitch min back –15

Basic settings

SEL Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10

LCD Contrast Pitch min back +15



### mc-20 **HoTT** Contrast for the forward display of the transmitter 

### mc-20 HoTT, located between the switch panels, is adjusted by selecting the “Top LCD contrast” line with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tapping on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.
Basic settings

SEL Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10
Top LCD Contrast 0 Pitch min back

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value field displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20by using the selection keys of the right four-way button:

RX–S QUA: 100% RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: –33dBm RX–dBm: –33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8V TMP L–PACK: 10ms

R-LOW V:4.6V +22°C RX–S QUA: 100% RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: –33dBm RX–dBm: –33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8V TMP L–PACK: 10ms

R-LOW V:4.6V +22°C Contrast for the rear display, located between the four-way buttons, is adjusted by selecting the “Bottom LCD contrast” line with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tapping on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.
Basic settings

SEL DSC Output PPM10
Top LCD Contrast 0 Pitch min back 0 Bottom LCD Contr.

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value field displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20by using the selection keys of the right four-way button:
Basic settings

SEL DSC Output PPM10
Top LCD Contrast Pitch min back

–15 0 Bottom LCD Contr.

Basic settings

SEL DSC Output PPM10
Top LCD Contrast Pitch min back

+15 0 Bottom LCD Contr.

Simultaneously tapping the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the272 **Program description - Basic settings** inverse video field back to “0”. **Display light**This line determines how long the transmitter display’s backlight illumination is to remain on after switching the transmitter on or after the last activation of a transmitter operating element. Available options are “unlim(ited)”, “30 s”, “60 s”, “120 s” and “off”. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the inverse video field to “unlimited”. **Power on/off beep** A power on/off beep for the transmitter can be switched on (“yes”) and off (“no”) in this line. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to “yes”. **Battery type**
Basic settings

SEL 0 Bottom LCD Contr.

Battery type Lith. Display light unlim. Power-on beep yes

This line specifies whether transmitter power is provided by a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery. As a consequence of this setting, the next line will offer a suitable voltage range for the “Battery warning” threshold. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to “Lith.”. **Battery warning** (threshold)
Basic settings

SEL Battery type Lith. Display light unlim. Power-on beep yes
Battery warning 3.60V

You can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for the display ...

Batt. must be re- charged!!

... – contingent on the batter y type selection in the line above

– in increments of 0.01 v olt between 4.50 and 5.50 V (NimH batter y) or 3.40 and 4.20 V (LiIo/ LiP o battery). Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have sufficient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will switch the field shown in inverse video back to its factory setting, 4.70 V (NiMh) or 3.60 V (Lith.).

**P ower on warning** 
Basic settings

SEL Battery type Lith. Power-on beep yes
Battery warning 3.60V Power on warn. unlim

In this line you can determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until the activation of an optical and acoustic power-on warning ... Power on warning is active!

... before the transmitter switches off automatically one minute later. The values “unlim(ited)”, “30 s” and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 and 60 minutes are optional selections. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the inverse video field to “unlimited”.
**Touch Sense**
Basic settings

SEL Battery type Lith. Battery warning 3.60V Power on warn. unlim Touch Sense 2

In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the four-way buttons in a range from 1 to 10. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the four-way button will be to taps and vice versa. A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button **(CLEAR)** will reset the field shown in inverse video back to “2”. **Region**
Basic settings

SEL Battery warning 3.60V Power on warn. unlim Touch Sense 2 Region Euro

The region is needed for compliance with variousregulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for example, the operation of a remote control is only permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore, region273 **Program description - Basic settings MUST**  **be changed to “France” for the transmitter whenever it is operated in France**  . In no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in France! A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the field shown in inverse video back to “Euro”.
Note:In July 2012 a new list of “Class 1 Devices” was published by the appropriate EU Commission, and at the same time the approved upper limit of the frequency band pertaining to 2.4 GHz radio control systems (“sub-class 22”) was extended from 2.400 to 2.485 GHz, thereby eliminating the legal requirement for the earlier “France mode”. See also http://ec.europa.eu/ enterprise/sectors/rtte/files/rtte_subclass_july2012_ en.pdf.
**BT headset and following lines**

Notes:

• This men u point, and the menu points which followit, are only relevant if you have installed the optional Bluetooth module, Order No. **33002.5** , in your transmitter, and have initialised it as described on page 37.

• A detailed descr iption of the Bluetooth module, Or

der No. **33002.5** , and the method of operating thefollowing menu points, can be found in the instructions supplied with every BT module, and also on the Internet at www.graupner.de. For this reasonthe following section only includes a brief description of the individual options: The option ... Basic settings

SEL Power on warn. unlim Touch Sense 2 Region Euro BT Headset OFF

... is used to detect and couple Bluetooth devices. The same line can be used to select one of the two available transmission processes. It is also possibleto remove all coupled BT devices again by simultaneously pressing the select buttons  or  of the right-hand four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) when the Value field is active. The number of Bluetooth devices detected during a coupling procedure is displayed at far right in the next line down. You can select the BT device (1 ... max. 9) you wish to use in the Value window to the left of this; its name is then displayed on the left of the same line; for example:
Basic settings

SEL Touch Sense 2 Region Euro BT Headset 1/3 BTH002 A2DP

In the line ...
Basic settings

SEL Region Euro BT Headset A2DP 1/3 BTH002 ID PAIR ON OK

... you can start and stop the connection to the selected BT device, and in the line ... Basic settings

SEL BT Headset 1/3 BTH002 ID PAIR BT Volume 8 A2DP

ON OK

... you can adjust the volume of your BT device using the same procedure described earlier for adjusting volume for the “Speech volume”, “Vario volume” and “Button volume” options.274 **Program description - Servo display** 

# Servo display

Display of the servo position This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys on the left or right four-way button to scroll to the menu option » **Servo display** « menu option in the multifunction menu:
MP3 player Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock Info display
Briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option. The screen of the standard eight-channel 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter looks as follows:

1

3

7 2

4

8 0%

0% –100%
0%

0% +100%

5 6 0% +100%

... while the screen of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with twelve channels unlocked, and the standard twelve-channel 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, looks like this:

1 3 5 7 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% –100%

+100% +100%

However, the visual display of current servo positions can not only be opened by selecting this menu, but also

– directly from the transmitter’ s base screen as well as nearly all other menu positions

– with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left four-way button. A brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will cause a return to the respective point from which it was called. The current position of each servo is displayed in a bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of normal tr avel with consideration for the control and servo settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % corresponds precisely to the serv o center position. This way, you can quickly check your settings without having to switch on the receiver. However, this does not absolve you from first carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the first operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!**For winged models the display takes place ac cording to the following scheme:** 
Bar 1 Throttle/brake servo Bar 2 Aileron or left aileron Bar 3 Elevator Bar 4 Rudder Bar 5 Right aileron Bar 6 Camber-changing flap (left) / free channel Bar 7 Camber-changing flap (right) / free channel Bar 8 Free channel / second elevator servo

Bar 9 Free channel / Left FL2 Bar 10 Free channel / Right FL2 Bar 11 Free channel / Left AI2 Bar 12 Free channel / Right AI2
**... and for helicopter models::** Bar 1 Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servo Bar 2 Roll (1) servo Bar 3 Nick (1) servo Bar 4 Tail servo (gyro) Bar 5 Nick (2) servo / free channel Bar 6 Throttle servo or speed controller Bar 7 Gyro sensitivity / free channel Bar 8 Speed controller / free channel

Bar 9 Free channel Bar 10 Free channel Bar 11 Free channel Bar 12 Free channel

Notes:

• However, please note that the servo display always refers to the original servo sequence, i. e. it does not take into account any changes you may have made to the output sequence in the » **Tx. output swap**  « menu (which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitteras an extra-cost option), or in the “Receiver output” sub-menu of the » **Base setup model** « menu.

• Please also note that, by def ault, bar diagram tracking is opposite to the left/right movements of a stick.

• The number of channels sho wn in this menu correspond to the control channels available in the respective transmitter. However, the number of actually usable channels depends on the receiver type as well as the number of servos connected to it and, therefore, may be considerably lower under certain circumstances.

• Use this display dur ing the model programming, because you can immediately check all settings on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve you from first carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the first operation of the model in order to eliminate errors! 

### mc

  16 20275 **Program description - Servo test** 

# Servo test

Function test of Servo 1 ... 8
This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter only. Use the selection keys on the left or rightfour-way button to scroll to the menu option » **Servo test** « menu option in the multi-function

menu: MP3 player Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock Info display
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

Servo test

act off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s
Any of the inputs 1 ... 8 can be activated for the servo test by selecting with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button and then briefly tapping the **SET** key of the right four-way button. As soon as you have set only one of the inputs 1 ... 8 to “active”, the following notice appears at the bottom of the display

screen:
Servo test

act off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s CLR=act./deact.
A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) would now start and stop, for example, a servo test of input “1” with a cycle time of 0.5 s

. To change cycle time, select the loop symbol at the bottom right of the display with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s Servo test

act off

CLR=act./deact.

Once this value field has been activated with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button

...

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s Servo test

act off

CLR=act./deact.

... the motion cycle can be changed for the value field shown in inverse video within a range of 0.5 s and 3.0 s in 0.5 s increments . Briefly tap the center **SET**key of the right four-way button to finish time selection. **Important notice: The shut-off of the transmitter does not automati**  **cally end an active servo test. Therefore, always stop a servo test manually BEFORE SHUTTING**  **OFF the transmitter, because the servo test is other**  **wise restar ted after switching on the trans**  **mitter again.** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.5s Servo test

act off

CLR=act./deact.
As soon as the servo test has been started by a simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) a window will open:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.5s Servo test act.

Servo test

act off

CLR=act./deact.
The “servo test” function automatically operates theservos as though the corresponding transmitter controls were being simultaneously and continuously moved back and forth between -100 % and +100 % dur ing the preset time. All active mixing and coupling functions in the respective model memory, therefore, are effective and the servos move within the specified servo paths and servo delimitations. Another tap simultaneously on the  or  selection keys of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will terminate the test. 

### mc

  16 20276 **Program description - Code lock** 

# Code lock

Locking the multifunction menu This option is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 transmitter only. Use the selection keys on the left or rightfour-way button to scroll to the menu option » **Code lock** « menu option in the multi-function

menu: MP3 player Basic settings Servo display Servo test
Info display Code lock

Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

Code lock Desired (new) secret number (_ )

SET 2 1 3 4

Access to the multifunction menu can be locked against unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code comprised of the numbers 1 to 4. This code lock isentered by way of the selection keys of the left fourway button according to the scheme shown in the display, for example:

Code lock Desired (new) secret number (123_)

SET 2 1 3 4

As soon as another tap of a left four-way button selection key occurs after the fourth number has been entered, the message shown below will appear in the display: Code lock De i

r )

CLR 2 1 3

Memorise secret number carefully

A brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button will confirm the entered secret code and exit the menu

. On the contrary, a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will confirm the currently active **CLR** field at the bottom right of the display and thus erase the entered digits

. **Make note of the secret code and keep it safe. Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to**  **Graupner service for decoding.**  The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter is switched on. However, the control remains ready for operation. However, a call-up of the multi-function menu, and thus also a model change, can no longer be accomplished without entering the correct number combination:

Code lock Desired (new) secret number (_ )

SET 2 1 3 4

A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only possible after the lapse of a time-out:

Code lock De i

r )

CLR 2 1 3 Input error Time lock **Deletion of the secret code** If the secret code is to be erased later on, tap twice on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button right after calling up this menu option.

Code lock Desired (new) secret number (1234)

CLR 2 1 3 4

The first activation of the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will erase the secret code ( **CLR** ):

Code lock Desired (new) secret number (_ )

SET 2 1 3 4

And the second activation will confirm the empty entry field ( **SET** ). The message shown will appear in the display:

Code lock D i

r )

SET 2 1 3 Memorise secret
  none

Now exit the menu with a brief tap on the **ESC** key of the left four-way button. **Leaving the menu without input of a secret code**To leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by accident when no other key has been touched. Therefore, the display appears as follows: 

### mc

  16 20277 **Program description - Code lock** Code lock Desired (new) secret number (_ )

SET 2 1 3 4

You can leave the menu by pressing the central **ESC** button of the left-hand four-way button. Tip: If you generally want to dispense with a programminglock, that option should be removed from the multifunction menu by way of » **Suppress menus** «. This will prevent unauthorized persons from entering a secret code “on the sly”.278 **Program description - Info display** 

# Info display

Transmitter ID, date, time and memory card This option is available as standard on both transmitter types. Use the selection keys on the left or rightfour-way button to scroll to the menu option » **Info display** « menu option in the multi-function

menu: MP3 player Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock Info display
Tap briefly on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to open this menu option:

RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card available 1.234

0MB

0% ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s 0MB

Transmitter-specific information is shown in this menu and

– insof ar as necessary and beneficial

– can also be changed.

**Pr ogramming procedure**  Select the appropriate line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button then briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The given default value in the value field displayed in inverse video can now be changed

– insof ar possible and necessary

– with the selection k eys of the right four-way button followed by another tap on the center **SET** key to conclude the entry. **RFID**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

The RF identification number of the transmitter is shown in this line. It is transmitter-specific, is only issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed.During the connection process, this is sent to the receiver, among other things, so that it is always capable of identifying the radio signals of “its” transmitter.
**Firmware version**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

The current version number of the transmitter software is shown in this line. At the time these instructions were revised, you can decide whether a current update of the transmitter’soperating system is available by comparing the number displayed here with the information offered on the Internet using the link http://www.graupner.de/en/supportdetail/4d589f17-24b4-4e50-97d2-13a0f39bd13d. If the link does not work, the same information can be obtained by working through www.graupner. de => “Service & Support” => “Update and revision history for Graupner|SJ HoTT components”. If applicable, the version number is also required for inquiries with the service department. **Date**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button and, as necessary, select the month or date field. After activating the respective value field with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the year, month or day can be set with the selection keys of the right four-way button. Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will close the given entry. Years ranging from 2000 through 2135 are available for selection. The abbreviated day of the week to the right outsidein brackets is automatically generated from the respective date.
Notes:

• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described on page 50, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.

• The date and time are protected against data loss due to po wer failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18. 

### mc

  16 20279 **Program description - Info display Time** 

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 

### 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right four-way button and, as applicable, the minute field. After activation of the respective value field by a tap on the center **SET** key of the right fourway button, the hour or minute can be adjusted withthe selection keys of the right four-way button. Another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will close the given entry.In contrast, the seconds display cannot be set directly; it can only be restarted at “00” with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.
Note:

• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described on page 50, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.

• The date and time are protected against data loss due to po wer failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18.
**SD-Card**

1.234

2048MB ABCDEF12
2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

In this line the memory capacity of a memory card inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown in MB. Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take several minutes until the correct value is shown after switching on the transmitter.
**available**

1.234

2048MB 2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s

1234MB firmware ver. date time SD-Card available

Display of the available storage space in MB. As mentioned before, display of the available storage space

– depending on the capacity of the inser ted memory card

– does not appear until some time has passed after s witching on the transmitter.The display of the available storage space in relation to the total memory capacity is shown in the line below:

2048MB 2012/07/01(SUN) 11:22:33s

1234MB 60% date time SD-Card available

As mentioned before, display of the available storage space

– depending on the capacity of the inser ted memory card

– does not appear until some time has passed after s witching on the transmitter.280 **Programming examples - Winged models** 

# mc-16 **and** 

# mc-20 **HoTT programming** Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged model

**Programming models in an** 

### mc-16 **HoTT or** 

### mc20 **HoTT transmitter ... ... is easier than it may appear at first!**  The primary prerequisite for “clean” programming, and this applies not only to the 

### mc- series but is also a principle for all programmable transmitters, isa mechanically correct installation of all remote control components in the model! Therefore, it should be ensured no later than on connection of the linkages that the servos are in their respective neutral position and their rudder lever is also in the desired position. O therwise y ou should loosen the rudder and re-fastenit with an offset of a few lobes. If servos are positioned with the help of a servo tester, e. g. RC tester, order no. **2894.12** , then the “correct” positions can be determined very easily. The possibility of changing the neutral position of a servo in practically every modern transmitter is only intended for fine-tuning . Greater deviations from “0” can result to further asymmetries in the course of the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to “straight”! An additional important point is the adjustment of therudder paths: This should take place through a corresponding adjustment of the steering points, insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more efficient than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve firstand foremost for to compensate for the manufacturerstipulated tolerances for the servos and their fine-tuning , and less for the compensation of carelessness. If two separate aileron servos are used for a wingedmodel, the ailerons, controlled through the corresponding activated wing mixer

– see the f ollowing pages

– can be assigned with both the flap function and r aised with the brake flaps

– ho wever this would make more sense in a glider or electro glider than in a motor model.

In this case the rudder arms

– star ting from the neutral position

– should be tilted f orward one lobe, pointing toward the nose, set to the respective servo. The mechanical differentiation achieved through this asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with their deflection and, therefore, does normally require a greater path upward than downward.Correspondingly, when planning to operated separately controlled flap servos, they should also be integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect ofthis flap position referred to as a “crow position” is influenced less by the elevated ailerons than the downward deflection of the flaps, the rudder arms should be installed somewhat toward the rear in this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result, there is a greater available path for the downward deflection. With such a combination of lowered flaps with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only be elevated moderately, because they have more of a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking function in this type of crow system. A “tip” for seeing the brake effect in this connection: lift the flaps and look over and under the surface from the front. The greater the projected surface of the protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect. 

### Outboard ailerons

Inboard camber-changing flaps

(Similar asymmetric installation of rudder arms can be meaningful, e. g. for open-cowl flaps or landing flaps, even in a motorized model.) If a model is completed and mechanically attuned in this respect, you can basically begin with the programming of the transmitter. The following exam

ples , an attempt is made to follow the practice of first describing the general basic settings and then fine-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent steps. After the initial flight and over the course of the further flying in of a model, it may be necessary to occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot’s experience increases, however, so does the desire for enhancements and expansions of settings. For thisreason, the sequence of options is not always adhered to or some options are even mentioned multiple times. Of course, just the opposite can also be the case, that not everyone of the described steps is relevant for a certain model, just as some users may miss the description of a certain step for their model ... Whatever the case may be, you should consider a logical assignment of the control mechanisms before you begin with the model programming. For models in which the emphasis is on the “motor”, regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or combustion motor, there should be no problem in this respect, because the assignment of the two stick units essentially lies in the four basic functions “Power regulation (= throttle)”, “Side”, “Altitude” and “Trans

-281 **Programming examples - Winged models** verse”! However, in the menu ... **»Model type«** (beginning on page 104)

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
... you should determine whether you would like theminimum throttle position in the “front” or “rear”, because “none (motor)” is entered by the program in the creation of a model memory as a basic principle. The difference between “none” and “idle front/rear” is not only the effect on C1 trimming, which covers the entire scope of stick travel with “none” but with “idle front/rear” only has an effect in the idle direction. In the process, the “effective direction” of the C1 stick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change from “front” to “rear” or vice versa, the rotational direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an “idle front/rear” setting, a warning indication appears in the display for safety reasons and issues a warning beep, if the throttle stick is too far in the full-throttle direction:

#01

2:22h Stp 0:00 0:00

0.0V 3.8 M HoTT Thr

too high!

In any case, it will be necessary to give some thought to “special functions”.With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain solutions have shown to be practical and others have shown to be less practical. For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have to release a stick for the approach of a glider model in order to be able to appropriately control the spoi

lers or a crow position using one of the other controls

. It may be more advantageous to either design the function of the C1 stick to be switchable, see Example 4, beginning on page 291, or to leave the control ofthe brake system at the stick and to control the motor through one of the other controls or even with a switch! Since this type of model does not normally have a motor, and just a “start assistance” function to either “lift” the model in the sky with full force or, in any case, to “tow” it with “half” force by a wind field, When this is also mounted in a convenient to griplocation, the motor can be switched on and off without letting loose of one of the sticks

– ev en during the landing approach.If you do not decide immediately to have the threefunction stick switch, Order No. **33000.3** , installed by a Graupner Service Centre, then we recommend that you use one of the three-position switches fitted as standard, and preferably the switch on the side of the transmitter away from the hand which holds the model when launching. In other words: If the model is started from the right hand, the motor switch should be mounted on the left side and vice versa.The idea is the same for the control of flaps, regardless of whether only ailerons or flaps covering the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or lowered. A 3-position switch with a long grip generally suffices for control of camber flaps, preferably mounted outboardon the throttle/brake stick side There it is always accessible without having to let loose of the stick. If everything is now in order, you can begin with the programming.282 **Programming examples - Winged models** 

# Initial steps for the programming of a new model Example: Winged model with two ailerons and

– initially

– without motor propulsion

In the context of **initial commissioning a new trans mitter**  , in the selection menu ... **»Basic settings«** (beginning on page 268)

Battery type Battery warning

Touch Sense Top LCD Contrast

Lith. Display light

Region 2 3.60V 0

Euro

unlim. Basic settings

Vario Vol Beeps Vol

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

BT Headset OFF 0/0 ID PAIR OFF BT Volume 8 Voice Vol

––– 5

––– 7 ––– 7

Own Stick mode 1 Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Bottom LCD Contr. 0

SEL SEL fr fr fr

... some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes: The first three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter’s headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner’s name and the lines “ **Stick mode** ”,

“ **Modulation** ”, “ **DSC Output** ” and “ **Pitch min** ” are for the storage of pre-set values used as defaults for new models . These are then adopted on the activation of a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be changed there at any time. The “ **LCD Contrast** ” or “ **Top / Bottom LCD Con trast**  ” lines can be used to adapt the contrast of respective displays to ambient light conditions as necessary by changing the standard pre-set “0” in a range of ±20. The setting in the “ **Display light** ” line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last activation of a transmitter operating element. The selection of “yes/no” in the “ **Power-on beep** ” line determines whether the “recognition melody” is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again. The “ **Battery type** ” line indicates to the transmitter whether its power comes from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell Lith battery and the “ **Battery warning**  ” line can be used to individually set the threshold for the battery warning. Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have sufficient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning. If necessary, the “ **Power on warning** ” line can be used to determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last activation of an operating element before issuing a visual and acoustic stick warning, followed about three minutes later by the transmitter switching itself off. On the other hand, the setting made in the “ **Touch Sense**  ” line is merely a personal comfort setting. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the four-way button will be to taps and vice versa. In contrast, the setting in the “ **Region** ” line is anything but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory regulations: **Therefore, when in France, only com mission the transmitter with the “France” setting.**  However, please observe the note on page 273 on this subject. In contrast, the “BT Headset” menu point, and the lines which follow it, are only relevant if you have installed the optional Bluetooth module, Order No. **33002.5** , in your transmitter, and have initialised it as described on page 37. For more information on this please refer to the instructions supplied in the set. This menu can be exited after completing “general settings” with a return to the multi-function menu by way of the center **ESC** key of the left four-way button. To program a new model, now use the selection keys of the left or right four-way button to switch to the

menu ... **„Model select“** (page 79) ..., and use the selection k eys of the left or right fourway button to select a free model memory location:

1

BD2 BD1 Mod.name Stick mode module n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Right after a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to confirm this selection, the type of model to be programmed will be requested: Select model type

Since the objective is to work with a winged model in this section, the symbol for a winged model is to be confirmed with a tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The display switches back to the base screen.
Notes:

• Of course , you can also use the predefined default283 **Programming examples - Winged models**“winged model” supplied with the receiver as model memory 01 for the programming of your first model.

• Once the “Select model type” option has been opened, the process can no longer be canceled! Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! After a selection has been made, the selected model memory can only be made“free” again by erasing it subsequently from a different model memory; see page 80.

• If battery v oltage is too low, the model switchovercannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low
Once this first hurdle has been taken, the binding of the receiver built into the model to this model memory can be done in the menu ... **»Base setup model«** (beginning on page 86) To this end, s witch to the line “ **module** ”:

Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a

BD2 BD1 DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Note: After confirmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confirm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds ...

BIND. N/A OK
... with a tap on the **SET** key of the right four-way button, this line is accessed automatically. In this line the binding process between model memory and receiver is initiated, as described in detail on page 87. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver. Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move up to the first line and begin with the actual model programming in the “ **Model**

**name** ” line:

Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

The “ **Model name** ” can now be entered here by a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button to switch to the character table: !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Mod Name GRAU B FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

The pre-sets for “ **Stick mode** ”, “ **Modulation** ” and

“ **DSC Output** ” are adopted from data stored in the

» **Basic settings** « menu and these should be reviewed and changed as necessary. In the menu ... **Model type** (page 104)

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL ... the principle arrangement of the servos in themodel is selected and communicated to the transmitter. The following selections are available:
**“Motor at C1”**

• “none” Tr imming works independently of the stick position and the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers**  « menu, beginning on page 170, is available without limitation. The “Throttle too high” warning message, seepage 33 and/or 104, and the “Motor stop” option, page 92, are deactivated

.

• “(Idle) front or back“ C1 tr imming is affected in the front or rear and the “Motor stop”, page 92, option is activated

.If the throttle stick is too far in the full throttle direction when the transmitter is switched on, this will be indicated with the warning message “Throttle too high”. In parallel with this, the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers** « menu, beginning on page 170, will only then be available if the “Motor” co

lumn of the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, has the entry “none” for the currently active flight phase. In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter:

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None
Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1

**• Tail type**  “nor mal”, “V-tail”, “Delt/fl.wing” or “2 Sv EL 3+8”284 **Programming examples - Winged models •**  **Ailer on/camber flaps**  1, 2 or 4 AIL servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL servos Since we want to actuate the brake system of the “Brake settings” sub-menu under the » **Wing mix**

**ers** « menu with the C1 stick, we will leave the outer right setting in the “ **Brake Offset** ” line with “Input 1”. With the “Offset value” to the left of this, you should only place the mixer neutral point at the point where the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the process, the offset is not place completely at the end of the control path, the rest of the path is “idle travel”, which means the mixer is not influenced in this range of the stick movement. By now at the latest, servos should be plugged into the receiver in the standard Graupner ’ish sequence:

Receiver power supply

Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function Free or right aileron 2 or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function Free or left flap 2 or aux. function Free or right flap 2 or aux. function

Comments:

• If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either “high/ low” or “left/right”, please observe the information in the table on page 73 in the right column. The same process applies for the ailerons and flaps.

• The settings descr ibed in the following are basedon a model with “normal” tail unit and “none (motor)”. The settings are adopted for models with a V-tail with practically no changes at all. However, the transfer of this information is not so simple fordelta/flying-wing models. Therefore, a special programming example for this model type is provided on page 310. In the menu ... **»Servo adjustment«** (page 112)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... servos can now be adapted for appropriate “ **direc tion of rotation**  ”, “ **neutral position** ”, “ **travel** ” and

“ **limitation** ” to the requirements of the model. In this sense, all settings which serve to compensate servos and make minor adaptations to the model are “necessary”.
Notes:

• The maxim um possible throw of a Graupner servo is 150 % per side , based on both mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, if the sum of the values of the column “Center” and one of both columns of “Servo travel” exceed this limit,the respective servo can no longer follow the control commands starting from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that mixers and settings in the

» **Dual Rate / EXPO** « menu also have an influence on servo travel.

• The settings options pro vided in this menu for asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for achie

ving diff erentiations for ailerons and/or flaps. There are options better suited for this purpose in the

» **Wing mixers** « menu, page 172. In the last column, “ **- limit +** ”, the basic settings of 150 % can, and perhaps should be , significantly reduced. The values entered in this position act as a “limiter”, whereby the setting is actually for which point of travel the respective servo may not exceed, so that it does not start up mechanically and thus unnecessarily draw current. In this case it is the end of available mechanical play on the servo, rudder and/or steering which is decisive for the value to be set. An example of this would be the selection of a model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting up andpossibly blocking it, the travel is normally mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that the rudder does not start with the full throw of the stick. As long as the rudder is only controlled with the corresponding stick, there will not be any further problems with this. But at the moment, when in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer also influences the rudder, such as an “AIL  RUD” mixer (aileron to rudder), it is possible that the two signals can sum to an excessive extent. A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely atthis point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should, however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is permanently and excessively limited. Of course, the travel on both sides could also be reduced, so that a start-up would not even occur with an addition of the maximum values. With this method, however, the prevention of an occasionally occurring event would result in a permanent reduction of the normal rudder throw.The following menu, which is only available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, is not just of interest to model aircraft specialists:285 **Programming examples - Winged models »Stick mode«**  (page 114)

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL PH PH PH

St In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of the increments in the column “Tr” (number of trimincrements for each “trim lever click”) for digital trimming

– separate adjustments f or each of the four trim lever

– in the case of the (later) progr amming of flight phases in the second column of this menu you can select whether the trimming of transverse, altitude and side should operate “GL(obally)” in equal mea

sure ov er all flight phases or separately in each (flight) “PH(ase)”.The “Time” column, on the other hand, is not of interest for this initial programming. The settings made up to this point are sufficient to permit basic flight of winged and motorized mo

dels

– though the latter does require a correctly set idle stick direction in the “Motor on C1” line of the

» **Model type** « menu. However, the “fine-tuning” is stillmissing. The fine-tuning certainly adds to the enjoyment of flying over the course of time. Therefore, if you can already fly your model safely, you should delve into the menu... **»Wing mixer«** (beginning on page 170) ... where v arious options are available, depending on the specifications made in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104. Since this section deals with a model having only 2 servos in the wings, the Multi-flap menu beginning on page 181 is not shown. Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% Wing mixers

EL AI 0%0% –––

––– RU

Therefore, we begin with the “Brake settings” submenu: Brake settings

OFF

If this display appears, your model is equipped with a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section, and therefore you have selected “front/back” instead of “none” in the line “Motor on C1” of the » **Model type** « menu, page 104. Therefore, change this setting temporarily or change the “yes” entry in the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, to “no” for the currently active flight phase

– Phase 1 in this case.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5 

–

– yes ye s yes yes

no

–

–

... Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0%

After this statement about mutual dependencies, back to the topic:If the ailerons are to be elevated for braking, an appropriate value is entered into the “ **Crow** ” line after activating the “AILE” column’s value field. In addition, a value should always be entered in the line below it,

“ **D.red** ” (differentiation reduction), which corresponds to the value you entered or would like to enter on the first page of the » **Wing mixers** « menu in the line“Aile.diff.” (see figure above)! With this entry, on actuation of the brake stick, the set aileron differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order to increase the downward the throw of the raised ailerons and thus significantly improve its effect in the braking phase. A setting of the “ **Elevat. curve** ” mixer is then only necessary if the flight speed of the model changes too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In any case, you should try out the setting at a sufficient and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus less on the flight position than on maintaining the “normal” flight speed of the model. Otherwise there is the risk that the model plunges when engaging the brake system, because it became too slow in the meantime:

Input Output Point 1 –19% –6% –7% Brake

normal EL Curve on

After exiting the “Brake settings”, the “ **Aileron differ-**286 **Programming examples - Winged models entiation**  can be set: This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The downward deflected aileron normally generates a higher level of resistance during the flight than when deflected upward the same distance, whereby the model is pulled to the “wrong” side. In order to prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the travel of the respective servo deflected downward is reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %, in this case, seldom ar ises, however, the “correct” setting must be sought. The option “ **AI**  **RU** ” (aileron  rudder) also servesa similar purpose, as well as for the comfortable control of a model. A value of about 50 % is a practical initial v alue. However, this function should be made switchable with the assignment of a switch if you ever have aerobatic flight ambitions. (The author, for example, switches off this mixer “automatically” whenswitching to the “Speed” flight phase, in which he assigns both options to the same switch accordingly.) The last option in the » **Wing mixers** « menu, the

“ **El**  **Fl** ” mixer, is not yet of interest at the moment. If the model-specific settings were made thus far, the initial start can be considered. If course, at first youshould perform a “dry run”, meaning you should carefully check all the settings once again on the ground. Incorrect programming can damage more than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice of an experienced model pilot.

If you should find during the testing that one or multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of the rudder effects to your control habits, the control throws are too long or short on the whole, you should adjust this in the ... **»Dual Rate / Expo«** (page 130) ... to y our own requirements and habits. “ **Dual Rate** ” establishes a relationship between stick travel and control travel, see page 130:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL
On the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK and only the reactions around the center position areto strong for more sensitive controls, then the “exponential” functions comes (additionally) into play:

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Ail Ele Rud

If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the flight. This is similar for the option ...
**»Channel 1 curve«** (page 138)

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve Curve off

With this option, one or multiple points of the control curve of the throttle/brake stick can be influenced insuch a way that a pleasant or even purposeful behavior is guaranteed.An example of this would be the “dead” travel of spoilers. The flaps first pass through this after a certain “idle travel” of the brake stick from the wing. With a corresponding “bending” of the curve, the “dead’ travel is covered more quickly. The spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then the remaining travel can be controlled with greater sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor in the same manner, which can be controlled through C1 as an alternative.)

Finally, the receiver’s behavior in the event of a failure should certainly be established in the menu...
**»Fail safe«** (page 220)
Fail-safe adjust

Pos hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 DELAY : 0.25s STO
... because “doing nothing” is the worst thing which can be done for a winged model.In the transmitter’s home position, “Hold” is specified and “Hold” means that the receiver continuously sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the model flies straight ahead for an indefinite amount of time and then hopefully “lands” somewhere without causing significant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and “tear” across the flight field completely out of control, putting287 **Programming examples - Winged models** the pilot and/or spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be beneficial to program the function “Motor off” at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe setting “motor off” can also be used, for example, for outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller by immediately switching off the transmitter after the landing. The author usually prefers a “braking finish” within eyeshot to floating off “somewhere else”.288 **Programming examples - Winged models** 

# Integration of an electric drive into the model programming

An electric drive can be controlled in different ways: The simplest method to integrate one such drive into the model programming is with the use of a throttle/brake stick (C1). However, since this is already specified for the brake system in the course of the model programming described above, either the switchable solution described beginning on page 291 or even the use of an alternative control is possible. As a suitable alternative, one of the two 3-position switches would be better than one of the proportio

nals controls. However, either one of the two sideproportional rotary controls are also well suited to activation of a motor without having to let go of the stick. An alternative would also be one of the two-stage switches. Basically, whatever switch is used should be located where it is within convenient reach.Before we turn to the individual examples, it is important must be noted that all inputs in the » **Control adjust**  « menu can be selectively programmed as flight-phase specific (“PH” in the “type” column) or model memory specific (“GL” in the “type” column)! However, since the drive should usually be availabledepending on the current flight phase, we recommend leaving the standard default “GL” (“global”) in the “type” column which your are using. In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr fr

SEL A common option in the following examples 1 ... 5, the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in thepower flight, should also be mentioned at the beginning of this section: If it becomes apparent after the initial power flights that the model must be continuously corrected withthe elevator while the motor is switched on, this situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to the

menu ...
**»Free mixers«** (beginning on page 205) ... and progr am one of the linear mixers, M1 ... 8, oreven one of the curve mixers, C9 ... 12, from “channel controlling the motor” according to “EL”, for example:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 8 EL

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

On its second screen page, the required

– usually low

– correction value is entered:

L.Mix 1

–100% Offset

ASY SYM 8 EL Mix input +4% +4% Note: The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in detail in the section » **Channel 1 curve** « starting on page 138.
**Example 1** 

**Pr oportional control usage**  If one of these controls is used, the connection is very simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has to be connected to a free servo connection 5 ... 12 max. of the receiver. Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and number of aileron and flap servos, the output 2 + 5 and may be 6 + 7 are already linked. Therefore connect your speed controller to the next free input and assign the selected input

– for e xample, “In8”

– to one of the transmitter’ s proportional controls, for example the left-side proportional rotary control. This is done in the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118) Select the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right four-way button. A tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will activate the“Control assignment”. Now move the selected proportional control. After a short time, an entry, e. g. “Lv2”, will appear in the inverse video field:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr Lv2

SEL
However, since propulsion must usually be available, independent of the current flight phase, leave the default value “GL” in the “type” column

– as already mentioned earlier in this section.289 **Programming examples - Winged models** Note: No delay is entered on the “OFF” side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely “runs down”. The adjustment of the appropriate control travel anddirections for the motor control (speed control) is normally carried out in the » **Control adjust** « menu in the “- trv +” column. Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the menu ... **»Servo adjustment«** (page 112)

S4 S5 S6

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S7 S8

**Example 2** 
**2-way s witch usage**  This variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function. On the receiver side, either a simple electronic switch

or

– if a gentle motor start-up , for example, is desired

– an appropriate motor control (speed control) is required. With the e xception of assigning a different operatingelement, the settings required for this are essentially the same as those described under Example 1.Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the infinitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the two transmitter control types only has an effect on the type of timer control, see page 294. Only the nature of the assignment and representation of the selected switch in the display of the menu ... If you need to adjust the travels to suit the speed controller, use one of the arrow buttons to move right to the “- Travel +” column, following the right-pointing triangle at bottom left:

In5

– travel + +100% +100% +100% +100% In6 In7 In8 +100% +100% +100% +100%

This fields of this column can be use to set the travel required, even asymmetric if necessary. A simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left fourway button now will switch over to the » **Servo dis play**  « where the selected proportional control can be activated to watch the bars for channel 8 “wander” from one side to the other and back. However, if the proportional control is moved too fast

– in practice

– the resulting sudden motor acceler ation can briefly strain the entire drive train (too much). In this case, be sure to enter a value in the

“- time +” column to counteract such a condition. Therefore, using one of the selection keys, switch one column to the right, to the “- time +” column then move the selected control close to “full throttle” so the marker frame is only placed around one value field. Now enter a value of at least 1 s ...

In5

– time + 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 1.1s In6 In7 In8 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

... with which a movement of the proportional control in the “ON” direction which is too fast is processes move gently, and you can check immediately this by switching to the » **Servo display** «. **»Control adjust«** (page 118) ... diff er. As in example 1, change over to the line of a free input, activate the “Switch assignment” in the second column as described on page 68, then move the selected switch, in this case for example switch 2, from the desired motor OFF position in the direction of motor ON:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr 2

Here again

– as already mentioned earlier in this section

– leav e the standard default “GL” in the “Typ” column. The setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the “- trv +” column. If the motor should up gently with the use of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate delay time can be set

– as described in Example 1

– in the
“- time +” column:

In5

– time + 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 1.1s In6 In7 In8 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

All other settings

– as already mentioned earlier in the

e xample

– are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.
Note: No delay is entered on the “OFF” side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it290 **Programming examples - Winged models** merely “runs down”.
**Example 3**
**3-way switch usage** This variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, such as Motor OFF, “half” and full power. A corresponding motor control (speed control) is required on the receiver side. The required settings are basically the same as those described under Example 1 and 2. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the infinitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the operating element only has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 294, and the nature of the assignment. Here again

– as already mentioned earlier in this section

– leav e the standard default “GL” in the “type” column.Put the desired 3-way switch into its middle position then activate the “Switch assignment” above the column with the switch symbol, as described on page 68. Now put the selected 3-way switch forward, out of its middle position :

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr 3

Now put the activated switch from its forward position back into its middle position. Now move the marker frame to the left and into the column above the column now labeled with a second switch symbol instead of the previous label **SEL**

. Reactivate the “Switch assignment” for this column then move the 3-way switch out of its middle position toward the rear :

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr 3

2

The setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the “- trv +” column. The motor should rev up gently with a motor control (speed control), to this end a suitable delay time can be set

– as described in e xamples 1 and 2

– in the “- time +” column: All other settings

– as already mentioned earlier in the

e xample

– are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.
Note:By shifting the neutral position and subsequent adjustment of travel, the “half throttle position” can be influenced in the » **Control adjust** « menu by reducing travel from the offset value on the side to which the neutral point has been shifted and adding it to the other side. For example, an offset value of -20 % results in +80 % on the minus side of the tr avel setting and +120 % on the plus side, and vice v ersa.291 **Programming examples - Winged models** Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 2AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 –90% SEL front

STO
This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at “neutral”, even with minor deviations from the limitof the brake flap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %. For this reason, in the ne xt step it must be ensured that the influence of the C1 stick on the motor can be influenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **»Phase settings«** (page 152) ... and assign a meaningful name , such as “Normal”,from the list for “Phase 1” after activation of the selection field in the “Name” column. The asterisk in thesecond column indicates which phase is currently active. As long as no phase switch has been assigned, this is always Phase 1. “Phase 2” can be given, appropriate to the example, the name «Landing». In the “ph.Tim” column you can assign a so-called flight phase timer for the measurement of the motor running time and/or the gliding times as necessary for each phase. You could, for example, assign one of the “Timers 1 ... 3” to the “Normal” flight phase in order to measure the total motor runtime via the C1 stick:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim Pha4 Pha5 normal

–

– – –  

### Clk 1 Landing

Then the timer is controlled through a corresponding control switch to be defined on the C1 stick. As soon as you switch to the “Landing” flight phase, this flight **»Model type«** (page 104) Here y ou first specify in the “motor” line whether the throttle minimum position (= Motor “OFF” position) should be at the “front” or “back”

– as already discussed: In the following programming example, “Motor OFF” and “Brake OFF” are combined at “front”:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 1AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL front

Note: With the selection of “Throttle min front/back” the trimming will then only have an effect in the “idle” direction of the motor and is not the same as with the “none” entry, having the same effect at every position of the C1 stick. Since the C1 trimming is not normally used with electric drives, however, this has no further relevance. You adjust the “Tail type” according to your model, in this case “normal”. In the “Aileron/flaps” line you enter the correct number of aileron and flap servos

– in this example “2 AIL ”. In the last line you leave the standard entries for the selection of “Brake retracted = front”. On the other hand, if the preference is for “Brake retracted = back”, select the “Brake offset” line and define the offset point

– as described on page 105

– as “bac k”. In the process, if the offset point is not placed completely at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the travel is “idle” up to this limit. 

# Control E-motor and crow alternately with C1 stick

**Example 4** Before we discuss the programming of this fourth example or turn to the expansion of the previously described basic programming, a few words should be said about the position of the throttle/brake stick with“Motor OFF” or “Brake OFF”. Normally the C1 control stick is moved forward for the throttle control and backward for the extension of the brake. However, if for this type of “traditional” assignment, for example, a switchover of the brake system is to take place for the “Motor OFF” condition (stick “back”) then a switchover to “full brake” would take place immediately after the pre-set switchover time specified in the » **Phase set tings**  « menu, and the opposite will take place when “brakes retracted” is switched over to propulsion causing the motor to switch over to “full power” within this time range ...A “glider pilot” can make the best of this “Emergency”

– nor mally with “brake retracted = front”

– b y switching to motor “ON” only if necessary so that power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully not forgetting to push the C1 stick “forward” again when switching back). A typical “motor pilot”, on the other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only switching to the brake if necessary, etc. You can also combine the “Zero point” of both systems to avoid confusion, whereby a “glider pilot” would tend prefer the “front” and a “motor pilot”, on the other hand”, would likely prefer the “rear”. Whichever the case may be, the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters permits both variants. In the following text, however, the combination of the two “OFF” positions to “front” is assumed. However, if you have a different preference, it is not a problem: The only difference from the described version lies in the logical selection of “Throttle min rear/front” and, if applicable, of a corresponding brake offset in the

menu ...292 **Programming examples - Winged models »Brake settings«**  (page 183)

Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red 0%
Landing 0%

... of the » **Wing mixers** « menu, set the desired throw of the ailerons by actuation of the C1 stick (“brake”) upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the “FL” column in order to specify the desired through of the flaps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in the figureabove). This flap position is referred to as “Crow position” or “Butterfly; see also page 183. In the line “D.red” (differentiation reduction), enter a value which corresponds to the value entered or want to enter on the first page of the » **Wing mixers** « menu in the “Aile.diff.” line. With the “Elevat curve” mixer the normally occurring “Upward tilting” of the model on the raising of the ailerons can be automatically suppressed. The sui

table correction v alues for the respective value must be tested out through flight. Set this mixer so that the flight speed of the model does not change too much with the brake system extended in comparison with the “normal” flight speed. Otherwise, there is the risk, among other things, that the model plunges when the brake system is retracted, e. g. f or the extension of a landing approach which is too short. If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is controlled with the C1 stick in the “Normal” flight phase, whereas this should be switched off in the flight phase “landing” (Servo 1 in » **Servo display** « independent of “Throttle min front/rear” to -100 % or adequately for a ser vo travel setting deviating by 100 %, if necessary). In this flight phase the C1 stick then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if applicable, the lowering of the flaps with the neutral point in the C1 control position selected per offset. **»Phase assignment«** (page 158) Select the s witch symbol under “C” with one of the selection keys. Following a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, actuate the desired switch, e.g “2”.

P hase assignment

A B C D E F

1 normal 2 prior combi

Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and OFF ( ), are initially assigned at the bottom right of the display to phase «1 Normal». Select this value field with one of the selection keys then activate the phase selection list that was set up in the » **Phase settings**  « menu with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. For example, you name the phase for the front switch position “normal” and “landing” for the rear position (or vice versa):

P hase assignment

A B C D E F 2 prior combi

2Landing
These phase names then appear in all flight-phase dependent menus and, of course, also in the base screen of the transmitter. Now switch to the « **Landing** » flight phase and in the “Crow” line of the sub-menu ... phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden in the base screen. More about this can be found on page 166.Now move the marker frame over the “ph.Tim” column to the “Motor” column to the right. Here you can decide with “yes/no” in which phase the motor is controlled by the throttle/brake stick and the brakesystem to be adjusted in the “Brake settings” submenu of the » **Wing mixers** « menu should be shut off (= “yes”) and vice versa (= “no”):

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5 normal

–

– – –  yes Landing no

Now move the marker frame once more to the rightand enter an appropriate switching time after activation of the value field of the “Sw.Time” column; for example:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 normal

–

– – –  Landing 1.1s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 1.1s

Then you must assigned these two flight phases to a switch with which you can switch between the two flight phases during the flight. In this case, a singleswitch is sufficient. It should be easy to reach, however, so that you can still switch between “motor” and“brake” during a landing approach, for example, without having to release a stick. The assignment of the selected switch takes place in the menu ...293 **Programming examples - Winged models** 

# C1-stick switchable between E-motor and spoiler

**Example 5**If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of the model by means of the following programming. Do this by programming the menus » **Model type** «,

» **Phase settings** « and » **Phase assignment** « in the same manner as described under Example 4. Thesettings described there in the “Brake settings” submenu of the » **Wing mixers** « menu are only then re

lev ant if an additional crow system is to be employed in parallel with the spoilers. With the settings described under Example 4, the control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a crow system will function as usual. Only the control of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118) ... and s witch into the « **normal** » flight phase. Now use the selection keys to switch to the left into the “typ” column to set the parameter in this line, e. g. “In8” from “GL(obal)” to “PH(ase)”, so that the settings too follow become effective on a flight-phase specific basis.

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ normal fr fr fr fr

SEL PH

Afterward, switch to the “Offset” column and, following activation of the value field with a brief tap on the **SET**key of the right four-way button, change the offset value for this Input 8 value field now displayed in inverse video until the spoilers are again “retracted”, e. g.: In5

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ normal fr fr fr fr

SEL PH –95%

Confirm this setting with a brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left or the center **SET** key of the right four-way button then switch to the left into the column above **SEL** . Now switch to the flight phase « **Land ing**  » then briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The display shows the window

... In5

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In6 In7 In8 GL GL

typ Landing fr fr

SEL 95% Move desired control adj.

Now move the C1 stick. As soon as this is recognized, “Cn1” will appear in the display instead of “fr”:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ Landing fr fr fr Cn1

SEL PH –95%

Leave the offset value in this flight phase at “0 %”. It

ma y be necessary to change the leading symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control direction. Do this by switching the travel setting from +100 % to -100 % in the “tr v” column.Now we are practically finished. Check the programming in the » **Servo display** « menu, which you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter as wellas nearly every other menu position with a simultaneous tap on  keys of the left four-way button. You will discover that “Servo 1” (motor control) is controlled in the “Normal” phase and in the “landing” phase only the spoiler is controlled at “Servo 8” and, if applicable the aileron and flap servos

– just as we intended.294 **Programming examples - Timer confirmation with control or switch** SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch –85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Cn1

SEL

Note: Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control’s travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. In order to assign the control switch you just created to the desired timer, switch to the menu ... **»Timers (general)«** (page 162) ... and select the line “T op” with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the “Timer” column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right four-way button. Now tap twice on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: The first tap will activate the “Switch assignment”, the second tap will call up the list of “expanded switches”:

Model time

Alarm ––– 0:34h

SEL Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Now select the previously programmed control switch, C1 in the example, and assign it to the timer with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button: Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stop C1

–––
SEL

The timer in the base screen now starts with movement of the C1 stick toward full throttle and stops if you pull the C1 stick back over the switching point. **Example 1 of the preceding pages**If you have decided to continue with the model programming described on the previous pages in Example 1 on page 288, first switch to the menu ...
**»Control switch«** (page 145) ... and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned y et with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the following window will appear:

SEL 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL Move desired control adj.

Now simply move the respective proportional control,

e. g. the left side propor tional rotary control from its motor “OFF” position toward the motor “ON” direction. Thereafter, change to the column above **STO** by using the appropriate selection key, move the selected control near its motor “OFF” position then set the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The switch status is shown to the right of the control number: **Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pages** If model programming is to be continued for **Exam ple**  **4,** page 291, or **Example 5,** page 293, asdescribed on previous pages or, completely independent of this example programming, the C1 stic k(throttle/brake stick) is to be used for power regulation, then a control switch can be used to automatically start and stop the stopwatch. For this purpose, first switch to the menu ...
**»Control switch«** (page 145) ... and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned y et with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, the following window will appear:

SEL 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch

STO ––– ––– –––

SEL Move desired control adj.

Now simply move the C1 stick (throttle/brake stick)from the motor “OFF” position in the motor “ON” direction. Thereafter, change to the column above **STO** by using the appropriate selection key, move the C1 stick close to its motor “OFF” position then set the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. The switch’s state will be displayed at the right of the control number, e. g.: 

# Timer confirmation with control or switch295 **Programming examples - Timer confirmation with control or switch** SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 Control switch –85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Lv2

SEL

Note: Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control’s travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. C1 used in the example here should be “closed” in the “full throttle” direction and “open” below the switching point. Now switch to the menu ... **»Timers (general)«** (page 162) ... and select the line “T op” with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the “Timer” column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right four-way button. Now tap twice on the center **SET** key of the right touch: The first tap will activate the “Switch assignment”, the second tap will call up the list of “expanded switches”:

Model time

Alarm ––– 0:34h

SEL Control/Logic/fix sw C2 C3 C4 FX FXi L1 L2 L3 L4 C1

Now select the previously programmed control switch “C1” then tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad: Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stop C1

–––
SEL
The stopwatch in the basic display now starts with movement of the proportional rotary control toward full throttle and stops if it is turned back again over the switch-point. **Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pages** If you control your motor with a switch, on the other hand, you do not need the control switch described above. It is completely sufficient if you assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also begins to run when you switch on the motor. Tip: If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time in the “Timer” column, e. g. “5 min”, and shortly bef ore expiration of permissible time, e. g. “30 s” bef ore, have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:

Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0:00 Stop 5 :00

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 15

–––
SEL 30s Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight Stop296 **Programming examples - Parallel operating servos** 

# Parallel operating servos

A second servo running in parallel is often required, such as when brake flaps or spoilers installed in the wings or the left and right elevator or a double fin should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder flap should be simultaneously controlled by two servos due to high throw forces. In principle, this task could also be solved by connec

ting the serv os together on the model side using Ycable. However, the disadvantage here is that servos combined in this manner can no longer be adjusted individually and separately from the transmitter

– thus negating the potential for finely tuning respectiv e servos to one another with a computerized remotecontrol system. A similar situation is given for the socalled “Channel mapping” feature of the » **Telemetry** « menu. Here too there are certain limitations involvedwhen compared to the transmitter’s adjustment possibilities. The first example, therefore, describes the coupling of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes the operation of two or more throttle servos and the third describes the coupling of two elevator servos. The “two rudder servos” example on the next page describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this typebecause this solution is easier and quicker to program, using one of the » **Dual mixer** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but which can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. In contrast, the second variant, also described on the next page, additionally permits asymmetric and/or non-linear curves through use of the » **Free mixer** « menu. **Two brake or spoiler servos**
In a situation where there is one installed servo for operation of brake flaps and/or spoilers in each wing half then the pre-set linear control characteristics for the » **Channel 1 curve** « menu should remain unchanged.Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1, provided for this purpose by standard, and the second to an arbitrary free receiver connection 5 ... 12 max., such as Output “8”. Subsequently switch to the menu

... **»Control adjust«** (page 118) ... and, using the selection k eys, assign “Control 1” in the Input 8 line :

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ fr fr fr Cn1

SEL GL 0%

Since the spoiler on Output 1 can normally only be operated on a flight-phase independent basis, it is strongly recommended that the “Typ” column for the input used is left at its “GL” default setting. Also the remaining values should be left at their default settings. If necessary, carry out the required servo travel adjustments in the » **Servo adjustment** « menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo 1 and 8 to one another , if necessary. **Multiple-motor aircraft** As described above, a model can also be operated with two or more motors. The first throttle servo and/or the first motor control is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and eachadditional throttle servo and/or each additional motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 6 ... 12 max. The inputs of respective assigned control channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for example:

In8

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In9 In10 In11

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ Cn1

SEL GL 0% Cn1 Cn1 Cn1

The remaining values should be left at the defaultsettings. If you need to adjust servo travels, it is better to use the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, where you can adjust the settings as required without having to switch menus. Important notice: Since the motor control unit should be available regardless of a currently active flight phase, make sure to leave the standard default “GL” in the “Type” column.

**Two elevator servos** Two elevator servos should be switched in parallel. According to the receiver assignment plan, see page73, the receiver output 8 is intended for the connection of the second elevator servo. This would be taken into account on the software side in the pre-configuration of a corresponding mixer. You can find this in the ... **»Model type«** (page 104) In this men u, switch to the “Tail type” line using the297 **Programming examples - Parallel operating servos** selection keys, activate the value field with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right key pad then select the entry “2ELSv3+8”:

None

1AIL +100% SEL 2ELSv3+8 Tail type Motor at C1
Aile/flaps Model type

Brake Off In 1

Then do the fine-tuning for travel of the two servos “in the now familiar manner” in the » **Servo adjustment** «
menu.
**Two rudders** We want to switch two rudders “in parallel”. The se

cond rudder is located at the free receiv er output 8.
**Variant 1** In the following menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option ...
**»Dual mixer«** (page 218) ... select one of the dual-mixers and enter “8” and “RU” in its left and center value fields, as shown in the figure:

Diff. Dual mix er Mixer1 Mixer2 8

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% 0% RU

The same deflection “   ”, which would take placethrough “Input 8” must not have an effect here. Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118)

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% ––– In6 In7 In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

typ fr fr fr fr

SEL GL 0%

... menu, that “Input 8” “GL(obal)” is set to “free” sothe control function is separate from the control channel over all flight phases. Alternatively you can set Input 8 to “no transmitter control” for all flight phases in the » **Mix-only chan nel**  « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, by setting channel 8 to “Mix-only”.
MIX–only channel

only normal 7 8 9 10 11 12

Note: This menu can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option.

**Variant 2** This variant uses the ...
**»Free mixers«** (beginning on page 205) ... menu to set a mix er “Tr RU  8”. In the “ty(pe)”column, select the setting “Tr” so that the rudder trimming affects both rudder servos: ty fr to M1 M2 M3 RU 8 ?? ??

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? Tr

Afterwards, switch to the graphic screen and set a symmetric mix of +100 %:

L.Mix 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM RU 8 Mix input +100% +100%

Here too, “Input 8” should also be programmed

– if applicable , for all flight phases

– to “free” by way of the » **Control adjust** « menu. However, it is simpler to separate control function “8” from control channel “8” using the » **Mix-only channel** « menu

– see page 216. This applies to all flight phases, and is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only.
MIX–only channel

only normal 7 8 9 10 11 12298 **Programming examples - Using flight phases** 

# Using flight phases

Up to 7 different flight phases (flight conditions) can be programmed with settings independent of one another within each the model memory. Each of these flight phases can be called with aswitch or a switch combination. This makes it possible to program different settings for various flight states, such as «Normal», «Thermal», «Speed», «Distance», etc., then make in-flight changeovers in a most convenient manner. However, with the flightphase programming you can also make slight modifications, e. g. of mixers, to try out by switching during the flight in order to find the optimal settings for each model more easily. However, as owner of an 

### mc-20 HoTT, or an 

### mc16 HoTT with the » **Stick mode** « option unlocked, you really should think about the use of flight phaseseven before you start the actual programming procedure, and consider whether you wish to be able to adjust the digital trims for aileron, elevator and rudder separately in each flight phase

– this is the def ault “PH(ase)” setting

– or whether y ou want them to take effect in all flight phases

– the alter native “GL(obal)” setting. If you decide in favor of a phase-specific trimming of the rudder, for example, switch the menu ...
**»Stick mode«** (page 114) ... and change the standard “GL(obal)” default accordingly. The same applies for the number of trimming steps in the “Tr” column:

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL PH PH GL

St **Example 1 ...**
**... continuing with the previous programming of an electric glider with 2 aileron servos.** 

AI

AI EL

RU

Control of the electric motor is accomplished, independent of the C1 stick, with one of the two sideproportional rotary controls or one of the two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch panels. The motor’s speed control is connected to receiver output 8 as described on page 288 and continuedin Examples 1 and 2. This is why “none” was selected for the “Motor on C1” line in the » **Model type** « menu. This not only causes the column “Motor” in the

» **Phase settings** « menu to be unavailable but also allows all options to be available without restriction in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers** «
menu.
**1 st**  **Step »Phase settings«**  (page 152)Initially, one or more multiple flight phases are provided with a specific identification (“Name”) for therespective flight status. This identification has no influence on the programming of the transmitter; it only serves for an improved differentiation of the individual flight phases and is shown later in all flight-phase dependent menus and in the base screen. The selection of the respective line, a name and the setting of the switchover time is done in the “usual” manner, with a tap on the appropriate key(s) of the two four-way buttons. 

### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim Pha4 Pha5 



### –

– normal Thermal Speed

–

– Launch

Note: With the exception of Phase 1, which should always be assigned with the name “Normal” since it is alwaysactive, if the flight phases are deactivated, it is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to which phase! In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum of four flight phases are usually completely sufficient:

• “Star t” with the climb settings

• “Ther mal” for “Flying high”,

• “Nor mal” for normal conditions and

• “Speed” for high gear. In the “Sw.time” column (switching time) ...



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 


### +
+ normal Thermal Speed

+

– 3.0s 2.0s 4.0s

0.1s Launch 1.0s

... a “blend-in” time can be established for the time in which a changeover from any other flight phase into this given flight-phase is to be accomplished in orderto permit a “smooth” transition for different servo positions. Thus, an increased stress of the model undercertain circumstances with a “hard” change of rudder or flap positions, for example, is prevented. The “Status” column shows you the currently active flight phase with an asterisk “  ”.299 **Programming examples - Using flight phases 2**  **nd Step** In order to actually be able to switch between the individual flight phases, the assignment of one or multipleswitches is necessary. Either one of the two threeway switches is ideally suited for switching between up to three flight phases. Each of the two switch end positions starting from the center position will be assigned to one of the flight phase switches A ... F. The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu ... **»Phase assignment«** (page 158) First select “C” with the marker frame. Then briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button and move the switch from its center position to one of its end-positions, for example, forward:

P hase assignment

A B C D E F

1 normal 6 prior combi

Move the switch back to the center position and thenselect “D”, and after activation of the switch assignment, move the switch to the other limit position, for example, back:

A B C D E F

1 normal 6 5 P hase assignment prior combi

Now the 3-way switch is programmed. Now and additional switch could be assigned for the “start” flight phase, if applicable. In this case under “A”, so that the “start” phase is always switched tofrom every other flight phase in parallel to the switching-on of the motor:

A B C D E F

1 normal 7 6 5 P hase assignment prior combi

The given switch positions must then be assigned to respective flight phases (names). Although some flight phases have already been assigned to names,the phase name «1 Normal» will always initially appear at the right in the display; see the figures above.First move the 3-way switch to one of its limit positions, for example to the back, and switch with the marker frame in the display down to the right to set the flight phase name. Briefly tap on the center **SET**key of the right four-way button to activate the entry field then select the desired flight phase for this switch position, in this example «2 Thermal», with the selection keys:

A B C D E F 6 5

2 Thermal 7 P hase assignment prior combi

Proceed in the same manner for the other switch limit position, which is assigned the name “3 Speed”. If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch combination the name “4 Start”. A brief tap on the center **ESC** of the left four-way button or the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will complete the phase name assignment. The flight-phase dependent model settings made before the assignment of phase switches are now in the flight phase «1 Normal». This is the phase which is called with the open «Start» switch in the center position of the 3-way switch.

**3 rd**  **Step** In order to not have to carry out all previously made settings for the model in the “new” flight phase fromthe ground up, we recommend first copying the already tested programming of the flight phase “Normal” to the other flight phases. This is carried out in the menu ... **»Copy / Erase«** (page 80)

=>
=>
=>
=>
=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

Here, select the “Copy flight phase” menu item with the selection keys then briefly tap the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. In the window which now appears, “Copy from phase”, “1 Normal” is selected ...

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 2 4 6 1 normal Thermal

Speed Launch

... and a subsequent brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button will change the display to “Copy to phase”. Now the target is to be selected (initially “2 Thermal”) and confir med by another tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. Afterconfirmation of the subsequent safety query, all settings are copied according to the selection. Proceed in the same manner with the other two phases (“1 Normal” to “3 Speed” and “1 Normal” to “4 Star t”).300 **Programming examples - Using flight phases 4**  **th Step**  Now three or four phases are programmed, the settings are also copied and there is even a “soft” transfer, but ... there are still no flight-phase specific settings. Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the flap positions to the different requirements of the individual flight phases, in the menu ...
**»Phase trim«** (page 160) Starting from the “normal” flight phase, switch to one of the other flight phases, whose name will appear at bottom left in accordance with the switch position; for example, the «Thermal» phase. Now move the marker frame to the “  AIL  ” column, and enter any settings for the ailerons which differ from the “normal” flight phase. Both positive and negative changes to travel are possible. Enter these settings separately for each flight phase, for example:

Normal

 0%

ELEV Launch 0%

AI Launch Thermal Speed 0% –7% 0% +5% 0% –11%

**5 th**  **Step**Any necessary phase-specific trimming of the elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming of the elevator stick. This is true provided that you have leftat least the elevator trim at the standard “Phase” setting in the » **Stick mode** « menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, as shown at the start of the programming example. Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the

» **Phase trim** « menu ... Normal

 0%

ELEV Launch 0%

AI Launch Thermal Speed 0% –7% 0% +5% 0% –11%

**6 th**  **Step** In the menu ... **»Wing mixers«** (beginning on page 170) ... the flight phase name of the ne wly activated flight phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If the switch position is now changed, the name of the flight phase selected with the switch appears, but withthe previously copied settings of the flight phase “Normal”. Here you set your values phase-specifically for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the agility over the transverse axis when “Turning”.)

Aile.diff. Brake settings

AI 55% Wing mixer

EL FL 0%0% –––

––– RU

Thermal 33%

Note: The list of displayed options depends on the number of servos entered in the “Ailerons/flaps” line in the

» **Model type** « menu, in this example “2 AIL”.
Now switch to the sub-menu ... Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red +30% +33%

normal

... and enter the raised height of aileron brakes for individual flight phases in the “Crow” line.With “D.red” (differentiation reduction), you should enter the value previously set in the aileron differentiation line in order to suppress it again while breaking. In the “Elevat. curve” sub-menu, enter a correction value for the elevator, see page 160.
Note: The “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mix**

**ers** « menu is switched “off” when: for the “Motor at C1 front/rear” column of the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND f or the “Motor” column of the

» **Phase settings** « menu, page 152, a “yes” is entered for the currently active flight phase. Change the flight phase, if applicable.301 **For your notes**302 **Programming examples - Using flight phases Example 2** 
**Glider with four flap wings, two large flaps and tow coupling** 

AI FL

FL

AI EL

RU

The following example is based on the assumption that you have already mechanically pre-adjusted the model and you have already ensured the correct deflection of all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this programming and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver and/or through the » **Servo adjustment** « menu.This programming example is based on an assignment of the receiver connections in accordance with the following diagram:

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or left rudder / elevator 2nd airbrake servo or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

1st airbrake servo Right aileron Flap or left flap Right flap Aero-tow release or free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Rudder or right rudder / elevator Begin with the new programming of the model in a free model memory location. Essentially, the » **Base setup model** « menu, beginning on page 86, is used to bind the receiver to the transmitter. Enter a model name and select or review the selection of appropriate stick mode. Later on this menu will also be used to activate the range test before the start of flight operations. In the menu ... **»Model type«** (page 104) ...lea ve “Motor at C1” at “none”, and the tail type at “normal”. However, set “2 AIL 2 FL” in the “Aileron/ flaps” line.In the “Brake offset” line program or leave “In1”, because the two brake or spoiler servos connected to 1+ 8 will eventually be controlled by the C1 stick, in addition to the butterfly (crow) braking system which is set up in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixer**  « menu:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 2AIL2FL Model type

Brake Off In 1 –90% SEL None

STO
The setting in the “Brake Offset” value field defines the neutral position of all mixers specified by the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the » **Wing mixers** « menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90 %, insofar as the br ake system should be retracted in thefront position of the C1 stick. The remaining path between +90 % and the full throw of the stic ks, +100 %, is then assigned as idle tra vel. This assures that the rudders or flaps addressed by the mixers of “Brake settings” remain in their “normal” positions even for slight deviations from the limit position of the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %. In the menu ...
**»Contr ol adjust«**  (page 118) ... assign a switch, f or example In 9, to operate the aero-tow coupling. In order for this switch to work independently of the flight phase, leave the standard default “GL” in the “type” column of this input. With “– Travel +” you can adjust the control travel for the switching of the switch:

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr 8

–––

With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left four-way button, the setting can be checked in the

» **Servo display** «.Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8 simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link by way of the

» **Control adjust** « menu.For this reason, also switch to the line before and assign “Control 1” to Input 8.

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr Cn1 8

–––

SEL
However, please note in this connection, that a nonlinear control curve programmed in the » **Channel 1**

**curve** « menu has as little effect on this input as brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can chec k very easily in the » **Servo display** « menu. You canreach this from nearly every menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad: 

# Using flight phases303 **Programming examples - Using flight phases**The travel, and if applicable also the direction of rotation, for spoiler servo 1 as well as the second spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted in the

menu ... **»Servo adjustment«** (page 112)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

In the Multi-flap menu of the ... **»Wing mixers«** (beginning on page 170)
... y ou now enter the first mixer values for the four wing flaps; for example:

0% fl.pos

AILE Diff. Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

+50%

0% fl.pos

FLAP Diff. Ail-tr AI +66% +66% +33%

Note:The parameter values shown here are model-dependent and must be determined by test flights.
In the line...

**•**  **AI**  ... determines the percentage share with which the two flap pairs “AI” and “FL” are to respond to aileron steering . Also check whether the aileronsare deflected in the right direction during the adjustment of the parameter values. The adjustment range from ±150 % enables the correct thro w direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos.

**• AI-Tr** 

**.** ... determines the percentage share with which aileron trimming should effect the AI and FL.

**• Diff.**  ... the entr y to specify aileron steering differentiation for AI and FL flaps is made here. Refer to page 172 about the significance of differentiation. The adjustment range from ±100 % enables thecorrect differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and flap servos.

**• FL-Pos.**  The flight-phase specific positions f or all camber flaps present on the given model are set in thisline. In the process, you can determine the positions the flaps assume for each flight phase.
Note: The values appearing in this line are based on the same data set as in the comparable position in the » **Phase trim** « menu, which is why changes always take effect in both directions.

**•**  **FL**  Since all inputs in the » **Control adjust** « menu are set to “free” by default, neither the ailerons nor the camber flaps can be operated with these default settings. In this respect, you also leave the default entry here. However, if flap positions are to be varied with a switch or proportional control by the position spe

cified in the “FL-P os.” line, assign the desired control to Input 6 in the » **Control adjust** « menu and set the desired reaction to the movement of the control selected for this purpose by way of a percentage in this line.

**• EL**   **FL** This mixer induces a partial reaction from aileron(AI) and camber flaps (FL) during elevator activation. The mixing direction is to be selected so that all flaps are deflected downward with the elevator pulled up and deflected upward with the elevator pushed down (= hydroplane). The mix proportion is normally in the low double-digit range.

**• EL**   **FL Off.** In the “EL  FL” line you may have entered a value to amplify the effect of elevator commands in tight turns and aerobatics. In this “EL  FL offset” line you can enter an Offset value which determines the “onset point” of the flaps when elevator is applied:

• If you lea ve the Offset value at 0 %, the flaps follo w the travel of the elevator from the neutral point of the elevator stick, at the percentage rate set in the “EL  FL” line.

• If you set an Offset v alue other than 0 %, the flaps only follo w the travel of the elevator inthe “down” and “up” direction after the elevator command has reached the selected Offset point. Now, within the » **Wing mixers** « menu, switch to the “Brake settings” ...

Elevat curve Brake settings Crow D .red +44% +77% +66% +55%

Note: The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor304 **Programming examples - Using flight phases** on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings**  « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Change the flight phase, if applicable.

**• Cro**  **w** Further above in this text section, the C1 stick was set for brake system steering. In this line you determine the share with which the AI and FL should be included on actuation of C1 in the manner that both ailerons are deflected “slightly” upward and both flaps are deflected as far downward as possible. Now with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left four-way button, a change to the » **Servo display**  « menu can be affected for observation of servo movements and, in particular, to ensure that no influence on the flaps takes place above the adjusted brake offset, e. g. +90 % and bey ond to the throw limit of the C1 control (“Idle travel” of the C1 stic k).

**• D.red**  The v alue previously entered into the aileron differentiation line should also be entered in this “Differentiation reduction ” line to fade this out during braking.

**• Elev**  **at. curve**This line is used for the entry of any correction factor that may be required for the elevator, see page 185. Insofar as necessary, again check all flap throws and, by way of the » **Servo adjustment** « menu, adjust the servo center, the servo travel and the travel limit. It may also be time to start the initial flight testing, insofar as all global settings

– that is to say, all flightphase independent settings

– are completed. **Two additional flight phases are now to be set up below, each of which requires a somewhat differ**  **ent flap position.** Therefore, switch to the menu ... **»Phase settings«** (page 152) ... and activ ate the assignment of phase names in the “Name” column with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim Pha4 Pha5 –

– – – 

Now give Phase 1

– the “Nor mal phase”

– that is also the phase which includes the previous settings , the name “Normal”, which you select from a list with the selection keys. Phase 2 is given the name “Thermal” and Phase 3 is given the name “Speed”. Now conclude the entries with a brief tap on the **ESC** key of the left four-way button or the **SET** key of the right four-way button:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim Pha4 Pha5 normal Thermal Speed

–

– – – 

Now move the marker frame beyond the “ph.Tim” column to the right into the column “Sw. time” and set a “switching time” from any other phase into the given phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change; in other words to avoid erratic changes of flap positions. Now try out different switching times. In this example we have specified 1 s in each case: 

### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 



### –

– normal Thermal Speed

–

– 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s

0.1s 0.1s

Whether or not one of the phases 1 ... 7 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the “status” column at the second column from left:

**Symbol Meaning** – No switch assigned
+ Phase can be called via switch
 Indicates the currently active phase Since, except for phase 1, all other phases are still designated with a “–” symbol, now switch in the menu

... **»Phase assignment«** (page 158) ... and assign the pre viously defined flight phases to appropriate switches with which a selection from among three phases is possible. Since there is no particular priority here, assign for example switch “C” in the display to one of the twoend settings of one of the two 3-way switches. Afterward put the selected switch again into its middle position, activate the switch assignment under “D” then move the selected 3-way switch again out of its middle position and into the other end position, as shown below:
Phase assignment

A B C D E F

1 normal 6 5 prior combi305 **Programming examples - Using flight phases**After the switch assignment is complete, use the selection keys to switch to the bottom right and activate the assignment of phase names with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button.Now close for example switch “6” by moving the selected 3-way switch forward. Assign the name “<2 Thermal>” to this switch position and leave the name of its “OFF” position as “<1 normal>”.

A B C D E F 6 5

2 Thermalv Phase assignment prior combi

A B C D E F 6 5

1 normal Phase assignment prior combi

Finally, move the 3-way switch to the rear toward “5”-position and assign this switch position the name “<3 Speed>”:

A B C D E F 6 5
3 Speed Phase assignment prior combi

The phase names selected in the programming are now shown, depending on the switch status, in all flight-phase dependent menus, see the table on page 150. Since w e have already made some settings in flightphase dependent menus, such as in the » **Wing mixers**  « menu, we will now copy these settings to the «Thermal» flight phase. For this purpose, open the

menu ... **»Copy/Erase«** (page 80) ... and s witch to the “Copy flight phase” line:

=>
=>
=>

=> => Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

All seven possible flight phases are listed in “Copy from phase”: Select the flight phase to be copied, e. g. “1 Nor mal”.

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 2 4 6 1 normal Thermal

Speed

With a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button, switch the window to entry of the target memory “Copy to phase”. Select phase “2 Thermal” as the target:

7 Copy to phase:

3 5 4 6 1 normal

Speed Thermal 2

Confirm the selection with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right four-way button. A security query follows, who should be confirmed with “Yes”: Phase to:
to be copied?

NO 1 Normal 2 Thermal

YES
Then repeat the process with flight phase “3 Speed”. **Now we will program the required settings in the flight phase “Thermal” as an example.** In order to vary camber flap positions in the «Thermal» phase, it is merely necessary to switch over to the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118) ... then change Input 6

– as described beginning on page beginning on page 118

– from “GL(obal)” to“PH(ase)” and finally assign it to an operating element. To do this, first use the selection keys to switch into the “typ” column for “In6” and change this setting from “GL” to “PH”:

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– PH

GL GL

GL

typ Thermal fr fr Cn1 8

–––

SEL Thereafter change one column to the right into the column above **SEL**

... In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– PH

GL GL

GL

typ Thermal fr fr Cn1 8

–––

SEL ... and now assign this input, as described in the sec-306 **Programming examples - Using flight phases**tion “Physical control, switch and control switch assignments” on page 68, the left proportional slider in the middle console to, for example:

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– PH

GL GL

GL

typ Thermal Lv1 fr Cn1 8

–––

SEL This control will allow the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber flaps (6 + 7) to be contin uously adjusted (as camber flaps) with a mixer ratio yet to be set via the » **Wing mixers**  « menu. If you assign the still free second three-stage switchto Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing flaps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev) in the “Thermal” flight phase, see the following page. (Thesethree switch positions correspond to the center position and the two limit positions of the previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)

Note: The FL and AIL flap positions in the two limit switch positions or in the switch center depend on the value set in the column “- trv +” as well as the offset value and the mixer proportion set in the “Multi-flap menu” of the » **Wing mixers** « menu, see further below. Leave the (control) “- trv +” at its standard symmetric settings of +100 % and the offset v alue at 0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for smooth switching between the three switch positions

– in the

e xample “1.2 s 1.2 s”

– in the column “- time +” is recommended: In6

– time + 1.2s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s In7 In8 In9 1.2s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Thermal

In the “Multi-flap menu” of the ... **»Wing mixers«** ( beginning on page 170) ... menu, subsequently change only the values for “FL.pos” and “  FL  ” in the «Thermal» flight phase:

**• FL.pos**  It is here that AILE and FLAP positioning tak es place during the «Thermal» flight phase in theevent that the assigned control (proportional control or 3-way switch) is in its neutral or middle position:

–9% fl.pos

AILE Thermal Diff. +55% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

**•**  **FL** Enter in this line the share of influence for aileron and camber flap servos, when used as camber flaps, is to be produced by the selected control (see above) or 3-way switch. Be sure to set these values low enough that the flaps can be controlled with appropriate sensitivity, for example:

FL –9% +10% fl.pos +10%

AILE Thermal Diff. +55% Ail-tr +100% FL –14% +15% fl.pos +15%

FLAP Thermal Diff. +33% Ail-tr +60%

A simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination of the right four-way button ( **CLEAR** ) will reset changed values back to their standard default values.
Note: Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of mix ratios should be set so that the camber flaps are slightly “lower” than the ailerons. With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left four-way button, the reaction of the AILE and FLAP servos can be checked in the » **Servo display** « by actuation of the selected camber flap control. (Push the C1 stick to the front position so that the “AILE” and “FLAP” positions can be better followed on actuation of the corresponding control.)
**Caution: With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo dis**  **play« move in the same manner, for camber flap actuation they will move in the opposite manner.** 

• In the control’ s middle position, the

– e xample’s

– “FL-pos .” setting only has a -9 % eff ect for the AI and -11 % f or the FL.

• In one tr ansmitter control end-position, AILE and FLAP are again closer to the neutral position because the mix ratio specified in the example reduces the FL.pos setting, whereas ...

• ... in the other limit position, AILE and FLAP reach the maxim um downward offset prescribed by the mixer percentage. In order to set a

– correctiv e

– admix f or the elevator, exit the “Multi-flap menu” and return to the base screen of the » **Wing mixers** « menu:307 **Programming examples - Using flight phases** Brake settings AI 0% Wing mixer

FL EL +5% +5% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Thermal
In the two limit positions of the three-stage switch the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example with +5 % (tr ue to side). If, on the other hand, you use aproportional control, the elevator is deflected according to the degree for the control position. Then make the settings for the “Speed” flight phase in the same manner.
Notes:

• The digital tr ims for aileron, elevator and rudderare always “phase-specific” in operation at standard, regardless of these settings.

• The current positions of the INC/DEC b uttons, CTL 5 + 6, which may be assigned to inputs 5 ...8 or 5 ... 12, are stored in accordance with your preference entered in the “Type” line, i. e . the positions are not lost when you switch flight phases, nor even when you change models. The particular advantage of these two transmitter controls

– which are fitted as standard to the 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be fitted to the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option

– lies in the f act that you can use one and the same INC/DEC button as trim controls in all the programmed flight phases, but

– in contr ast to a position-related proportional control

– the trim values are retained even if you switch models.308 **Programming examples - Control of temporal processes** 

# Control of temporal processes using time delay and curve mixers

An interesting, but little known, facility included in the software of the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter with optionally unlocked » **MIX-only channel** « and « **Channel sequencer**  « options, and of the standard 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter, is the ability to set up virtually any servo movement to last up to 9.9 seconds via a switch, in addition to the features available in the

» **Channel sequencer** « menu; see page 256. The programming for this should be shown on the basis of some examples in the following. Additional applications can certainly be found once you become familiar with these capabilities. The programming is begin in the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118 or 122) ... and in order to be able to approach an y point ofthe control curve during the programming, first assign one of the proportional controls to the desired control channel

– in this example the side-mounted left propor tional slider “Lv1” to the Input 9. However, leave the standard default “GL” in the “typ(e)” column so that this setting is effective for all flight phases analogously to the free mixers to be programmed in the following:

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr

––– Lv1

SEL However, if necessary you can create phase-specific sequences using the “PH” option in the » **Control adjust**  « menu, and the » **Mix active / phase** « menu; see page 215. The input of a time delay in the “- time +” column most right should also be dispensed with initially: Then in the menu ... **»Mix-only Channel«** (page 216) ... of the selected control channel, “9” in this case, is set to “only”:
MIX-only channel

only normal 7 8 9 10 11 12

It is mandatory that this is set to “only (MIX)”, because the control curves of the curve mixers described in the following example only function on the output of the same channel as desired if there is no direct connection between the control and output!Only then can the linear control signal be manipulated almost arbitrarily around a curve mixer and to the appropriate output. Therefore, in the next step, switch to the menu ...
**»Free mixers«** (beginning on page 205) ... and progr am a curve mixer for the same channel,

e. g. from “9” to “9”:

ty fr to M8 C9 C10 ?? ?? 9 9

C11 C12 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

On this second screen the desired path of the control curve is then set, whereby the following examples should only be “food for thought” for the design of your own control curves. **For example** , the control curve could be for ... **... delayed lighting of a headlight after the begin ning of the extension of the landing gear:** 

+50% –100% Input Output Point 1 C.Mix 9 Curve off 9 9

–100%

**... the control of a landing gear flap which closes again after the landing gear is extended:** 

–100% –100% L 9 9

–100% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve off

**... a smooth motor start-up or the extension of a self-launch ...** 

–100% –100% L 9 9

–100% on Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curve

**... triggered by the same switch, but with a de layed startup of the drive motor connected to**  **Output 10:**

–100% –100% Input Output Point L C.Mix10 Curv e 9 10

–100% on309 **Programming examples - Control of temporal processes** The function you programmed functions as desired according to these suggestions

– which you can v erify at any time after switching to the » **Servo display** « by simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left four-way button

– then to, complete the prog ramming, an arbitrary switch, such as “SW 15” is assigned in the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118 or 122) ... to the control channel used instead of the selected side-mounted proportional control

– in these examples “Lv1” to channel “9”

– and the desired symmetric or asymmetr ic time span is set in the “– Time +” column for the amount of time in which the function should ultimately take place:

In6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% In7 In8 In9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr

––– 15

In6

– time + 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 9.9s In7 In8 In9 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 9.9s

Notice: In the course of the switch assignment, always bear in mind that you can also trigger multiple functions with one switch! For example, with the same switch a landing gear connected to Output 6 can be startedand, as shown here as an example, the time-controlled landing gear flaps connected to Output 9 and/ or the headlight, etc.310 **Programming examples - Delta and flying wing**Of course, the general comments regarding the installation and the adjustment of the RC system to amodel at the beginning of the wing model programming on page 280 also applies for delta and flying wing models! Similarly, the comments for test flying and fine-tuning the settings to the programming of flight phases also apply.

l eft

right

Delta and flying wing models differ significantly from a“normal” flight model due to their unique characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more subtle. For example, with “classic” delta/flying wing models, onlytwo rudders are normally provided. They are responsible for both “transverse” and “height/depth”, like the side rudder/elevator function on a V-tail unit. With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it may be the case that one (or two) interior ruddershave only an elevator function and the exterior ailerons only support the height/depth function, under certain circumstances. Even with a 4, or indeed up to 8, flap wing the use of camber flap functions and/ or even a crow system is nowadays entirely possible. In all these cases, however, the following assignment of the receiver outputs should be used, see also page 73. Unneeded outputs a simply left free: Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Left elevon Right elevon Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Free or aux. function Free or left flap / elevator Free or right flap / elevator Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevator Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / elevator

Free or rudder

According to the assignment of the receiver outputs, in the menu ... **»Model type«** (page 104)

None

2AIL

In 1 +100% SEL Delta/fl Tail type Motor at C1
Aile/flaps Model type

Brake Off

... the necessary settings are made:

**• “Motor an C1”**  “None” or “Throttle min front/back”

**• “Tail type”**  “Delta/fl”

**• “Aileron/camber flaps”**  “2AIL ” (appears automatically). To the extent necessary

– and if with the respectiv e transmitter possible

– expand def ault “2 AIL” by 4 AIL or 1, 2 or 4 camber flaps (“1 FL ”, “2 FL” or “4 FL”).

**• “Brake”**  stays as is , only interesting for a delta wing or flying wing of type “2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL”. In this case, re

# Delta and flying wing

fer to the text under “Brake offset” on page 105. These model type specifying settings primar ily affect the functions made available in the » **Wing mixers** «menu. Therefore, the options are discussed separately for two-flap and multi-flap models in the following: **Delta/flying wing of the type: “2AIL”**

+100% SEL Delta/fl 2AIL None

In 1 Tail type Motor at C1
Aile/flaps Model type

Brake Off

By retaining the standard default “2 AIL” in the “Aileron/flaps” line, elevator and aileron control, including the trim function, are automatically mixed by percen

tage on the software side . However, on the transmitter side, the percentage effect of the elevator and aileron stick can be influenced in the » **Dual Rate / Expo** « menu, page 130. Settings in the menu ... **»Wing mixers«** (beginning on page 170)

... are , if need be, advantageous with the “AI  RU” mixers and are “played’ with a great deal of “feel” for flying behavior with minor differentiation values.

Aile.diff Brake settings +10% AI +50% Wing mixers

––– RU

Due to the specific idiosyncrasies of this model type, additional settings lead to moments which cannot be compensated.311 **Programming examples - Delta and flying wing** 0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

Note: Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the set mixer value with the mixer “EL  FL”. **The following settings are model-specific and may not be adopted without checking that they**  **are correct!** In the top line of this “Multi-flap menu”, analogous to “normal” four, six or eight flap wings, the effect of the aileron stick will be set to aileron (2), camber flap and, if applicable to FL2. One line below, in the line “Ail-tr.” line, will set the influence of aileron trimmingon ailerons and camber changing flaps. The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to the model type and should only take place based on a feel for the flight behavior of the model. The line “  FL  ” should then be set to the standard default of +100 % in the “FLAP” (or “FL2”) column

– as shown

– to 0 %, just to be saf e : **Delta/flying wing of the type: “2 / 4 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL”** 

Tail type Motor at C1 None
Aile/flaps Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL Delta/fl 2AIL4FL

With delta/flying wing constructions with more than two flaps, more moments can be compensated for. For example, the “lifting” moment caused by theraising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be compensated with camber changing flaps lowered correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect). If you decide in favor of this model type and have assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the connection plan shown above, the aileron function of the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly immediately, but not the elevator function of the two aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber changing flaps. This is only then achieved for “2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL” when, in the “ **Multi-flaps menu** ” of the ... **»Wing mixers«** (beginning on page 170)

... men u, is set appropriately in the “HR  WK” line to “Aileron, camber flaps” or, if applicable, “Camber flap 2”:

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Diff. 0% 0%

0% 0%

FLAP 0%

0% 0% FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

0%

0% 0%

FLAP2 0%

0% 0% FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

Even though all inputs are set to “free” by default in the **»Control adjust«** menu **,** should a control be assigned sometime by mistake ... then it will at least have no effect. The last line, “EL  FL”, was explained at the beginning of this section.In principle, the author of this manual had programmed a delta model years ago operated with the mc-20 of that time and a crow system as landing assistance ... entirely without tilting moments through correspondingly attuned wing mixers “Brake  Aileron” and “Brake  Camber flap”, whereby “Aileron” refers to the exterior rudder pair and “Camber flap” refers to the interior rudder pair. To achieve this now with todays 

### mc-16 Hott or 

### mc-20 HoTT also, switch to “ **Brake settings** ” in the ... **»Wing mixers«** (beginning on page 170)

... men u, and enter the values for the ailerons to be raised and the “flaps” to be lowered in the “Crow” lineso that the occurring moments compensate one another and the altitude of the model remains stable. In the process, however, you should leave the flaps with enough “play” for the elevator function!!! Therefore, do312 **Programming examples - Delta and flying wing** not utilize the entire servo travel for the crow alone; for example:

Elevat curve Brake settings

AILE Crow D.red +55% 0% 0% –44% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2 Normal

You can ignore all other settings in this menu.
Note: The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if: “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the » **Model type** « menu, page 104, AND the “Motor” column of the » **Phase settings**  « menu, page 152, are set to “yes” for the currently active flight phase. Change the flight phase, if applicable. Similarly, a modern, tapered flying wing air craft can also be operated. With some of these models there are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases the ascending forces and has an elevator effect. Anupward throw has the opposite effect. On the exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just theopposite: A downward throw shows an elevator effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of the “leading” mixer to the setting of curve mixers in order to achieve a supporting effect from the external rudder pair with only extreme stick deflection in the height/depth direction, “everything” is possible here. The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his model, which is defined by a total of four points: 0% 0% Input Output Point C.Mix 9 Curv e EL 5

0% on

?

In this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2 are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 % and the right edge point at -65 %. In conclusion, the

cur ve was rounded.In this case: Regardless of which type of servo arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation should be set with caution! On a tail-less model, differentiations show a single-sided height/depth elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning at least the initial flights with a setting of 0 %! Over the course of the fur ther flight testing, under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment with differentiations deviating from zero. With larger models, rudders in the winglets

– the “ears” mounted on the wing ends

– can be beneficial. If these are controlled with tw o separate servos, one of the mixers in the » **Dual mixer** « menu can be used; this is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option. In this menu

... **»Dual mixer«** (page 218) ... the rudder signal can be “split” very easily and even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. For a model with a “Delta/fl” tail type, receiver output “5” should still be unoccupied and it can then be used as indicated below: Diff. Dual mix er Mixer1 Mixer2 5 RU

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% +66%

Differentiation is necessary in this case because, when flying curves, the respective exterior rudderswill have a greater curve radius than the interior rudders, so this is comparable to the front wheel positions on a car when driving in curves.
Note: The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed above! If these two rudders are also to deflect outward upon actuation of a brake system with the C1 stick, this can be achieved, for example, by setting an additional mixer “C1  5” with an appropriate travel setting. Set the mixer’s offset according to personal preference, “front” (+100 %) or “rear” (-100 %), because the winglet r udder should deflect outward only for proportional extension. Independent of this, finish up by uncoupling the “false” control function from the control channel to which the second servo was connected

– ev en though all inputs in the » **Control adjust** « menu are “free” by default

– or shift into the menu ...
**»Mix-onl y channel«**  (page 216) ... which applies to all flight phases , and is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, in the interests of safety. In keeping with the above example, control channel 5 should therefore be set to “MIX only”.313 **Programming examples - Delta and flying wing** MIX-only channel

only normal 1 2 3 4 5 6

Note: This menu can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option.314 **Programming examples - F3A model** 

# F3A model

F3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven winged models. They are powered by a combustion or electric motor. Electric-powered model aircraft are now becoming prevalent in the international F3A model aerobatic class as well as being eligible for the F5A electric aerobatic class.

The basic comments and notices for the mechanical installation of a remote steering system, which was already referred to in the first programming example on page 280, also applies, of course, for F3A mo

dels and does not need to be mentioned here again. F aultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely neutral flying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good nature but precisely to control movements without the individual flight axes influencing one another. F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator andrudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated by a separate servo. There is also the regulation of the driveoutput of the motor (throttle function) and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not differ from the previously described winged models. The additional “Retractable landing gear” function is to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 8 or 6 ... 12. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch without center position. In addition, another mix offset for the carburetor can

– if necessar y

– be pro vided. You normally use one of the two proportional controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the unassigned auxiliary channels. Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron Free or aux. function (retracts) Free or aux. function (mixture) Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

With the assignment of auxiliary channels at the transmitter, we recommend making sure that the operating elements required for this are easily within reach, because during flight

– especially in competi

tion

– y ou have “very little time” to release the stick. **Programming procedure** Since the basic programming of the transmitter was already described in detail on pages 280 ... 287, only F3A-specific tips are added here. In the menu ... **»Servo adjustment«** (page 112)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... the settings for the servos are carried out. Experience has shown that working with at least 100 % ser

vo throw is beneficial, because the control precision is significantly better if greater servo travel is used. This should already be taken into account during the construction of the model in the design of the rudder linkages. Check the servo’s direction of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted mechanically, insofar as possible. Any corrections can be made on the software side in the third column during the initial test flights. Through the menu ... **»Model type«** (page 104) ... the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally “back”, because full throttle is “front”). The trimming then only works in the idle direction:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 2AIL Model type

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL back

The remaining settings are made or left as shown in the figure. **After the model is test-flown and trimmed,** we recommend reducing trim travel for the elevator and ailerons. The model has significantly less of a reaction to a movement of the trim lever. “Over-trimming” canbe avoided, because with full trim travel, under certain circumstances, the movement by just one trimming step can have too strong of an effect: Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the trimming. This is accomplished by moving to the ...315 **Programming examples - F3A model »Stick mode«**  (page 114)

... men u, which is available as standard on the 

### mc20 HoTT transmitter only, and reduce the number of trim steps in the “Tr” column appropriately:

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 2 2 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL PH PH PH

St 2

Note: This option can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost optionIt may also be necessary to assign appropriate operating elements and inputs for other model features,

e. g. retr actable landing gear, fuel-mix, etc. Make these assignments with the ... **»Control adjust«** (page 118)

... men u where a specific input can be assigned to an operating element, for example, the landing gear can be assigned to an ON/OFF switch on Input 6 and the fuel-mix can be assigned to one of the proportional sliders in the middle console, e. g. the side-mounted left propor tional slider to Input 7. However, since it involves flight-phase independent settings, leave the standard default “GL” in the “typ” column:

0% 0% 0% –––

0%

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL fr

Lv1 fr

SEL In5

offset In6 In7 In8

typ 3

The control travel of the operating elements must be adapted and can also be reversed with a negative travel setting. Input Output Point 1 –50% 0% 0% Ch1 curve Curv e on

Only three interpolation points, “L” at -100 %, “H” at +100 % and “1” at -50 % give the control tr avel the rounded curve above. **Basic procedure:**

• Mov e the C1 stick and, along with it the vertical line in the graph display, toward idle to about -50 % of control tra vel then briefly tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad.

• In order to attain the curv e shape shown, raise this point with the selection keys to approx. 0 % in the inv erse video value field in the “Point” line.

• Finally, round the char acteristic curve by moving the marker frame upward, select with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad thenchange the value from “Off” to “On” with the selection keys. If additional interpolation points between the left (“L”) and right (“H”) end are necessary, repeat Steps 1 and 2 analogously. Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos, experience has shown that it is beneficial to move both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the process, the model usually approaches somewhat slower and, above all, more steadily for the landing. In order to do this it is necessary to program mixers through the menu ... F3A models fly comparatively fast and thus react “harshly” to the control movements of the servos.However, since small control movements and corrections are not optically perceptible, because this results in inevitable point deductions in competition,we recommend setting an exponential control characteristic of the stick. For this purpose, switch to the

menu ... **»Dual Rate / Expo«** (page 130) Exper ience has shown positive results with values of approx. +30 % on the ailerons, ele vator and rudders, which you set in the right column with the selection keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to run smoothly and cleanly:

+33%

+33% +33% Ail Ele Rud EXPO –––

–––

SEL –––

(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential

r atio.) Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly to movements of the throttle stick, through the menu

... **»Channel 1 curve«** (page 138)

... a “bowed” or, in other words, non-linear throttle curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed range. However, the corresponding values must be adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could appear as follows:316 **Programming examples - F3A model »Free mixers«**  (beginning on page 205) ... accordingly

. The ailerons are extended as landing assistancedepending on the position of the throttle stick, starting from approximately half throttle toward idle. Thefurther the stick is moved toward idle, the more the ailerons deflect upward. Just the opposite applies when “throttling”; the ailerons are retracted again in order to prevent a sudden rise of the model. In order to prevent the model from climbing with the aileron landing flaps extended, the elevator must be mixed in somewhat. For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown in the following display. The activation of the mixers takes place with one and the same switch, such as “15”, to which both mixers must be assigned with identical switching direction.

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 C1 5 C1 EL

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 15 15

Then switch to the second respective display screen in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control center. Enter 0 % abo ve the control center after selection of the **ASY** field for both mixers and below the control center toward idle for: MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % and MIX 2: -5 %

... -10 %. Example Linear MIX 1:

L.Mix 1

0%

0% Offset

ASY SYM C1 5 Mix input

–30%

With this, the base setup model of an F3A model is concluded. **Compensation of model-specific errors**Unfortunately, there are nearly always minor modelspecific “errors” through the mixers of a computerremote control which must be compensated for. However, before you begin with these settings, it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly constructed,optimally balanced over the longitudinal and transverse axes and the down thrust and side thrust are correct. **Influence of longitudinal and transverse axes by the rudder** The actuation of the rudder often influences the behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge flying, in which the lift of the model with the rudder deflectedshould be created by the fuselage alone. In the process, the model can rotate and change directions asthough it were controlled with the ailerons and elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse axis (elevator) and/or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) must be made, if applicable. This can also be done easily with the » **Free mixers** « available in the 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT sys

tem. For example, if the model drifts away to the right over the longitudinal axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge flying, the aileron can be deflected slightly to the left with the mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis can be performed analogously with a mixer on the elevator:

• Correction o ver the transverse axis (elevator) Linear MIX 3: “RU  EL” Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in flight.

• Correction o ver the longitudinal axis (aileron) Linear MIX 4: “RU  AI” Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in flight. Relatively small mixer values are usually sufficient in this case, the range lies below 10 %, b ut can vary from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no values are indicated for this, because this would be model-specific.
**Vertical ascent and descent** Some models have a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical ascents and descents. In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to have a center position of the elevator dependent on the throttle stick position. If, for example, the model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be mixed in at this throttle position. For this purpose, program a free mixer “C1  EL”. The corresponding mixer values are normally under 5 % and m ust also be tested in flight. **Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idle** If the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be counteracted with the aileron. However, the more elegant solution is to correct this effect with a free mixer “C1  AL”. The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %) and the settings should be made in calm w ea
ther . It often suffices to only use the mixer between317 **Programming examples - F3A model** half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer asymmetrically, if applicable.**Turning away with the ailerons/landing flaps ex tended**  If you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the result is often a turning away over the longitudinal axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servosor due to design precisions. Therefore, the model begins to automatically hang the left or right wing. This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer “C1  AI” depending on the position of the ailerons/landing flaps. The mixer must be switched on and off with the same switch with which you can switch the aileron/landingflap function on and off (see previous page). Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing flap function activated. The appropriate value must be tested in flight. One additional comment regarding ... **“FAIL-SAFE setting”**You utilize the safety potential of this option by programming at least the motor throttle position for combustion models to idle and the motor function for electrically powered models to stop for a Fail-Safe case. If interference should occur, the model is then less likely to fly off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. If you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the rudders to that the model flies in gently sinking circles in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that the model even lands relatively gently on its own in the event of a continuing connection failure. You also have sufficient time to re-establish the connection if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily disrupted. In the receiver’s condition as supplied, however, theservos maintain their last validly recognized position (“hold”) in the event of a fail-safe situation. As described on page 220, you can define a “Fail-safe position” for each receiver servo output (Fail-safe mode). **Summary** The settings described on this page are especially useful for the “expert” who would like to have an entirely neutral, precisely flying F3A model acrobatic model at his or her disposal. It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort,instinct and know-how. Experts even program during the flight. To do this, however, is not suggested for an advanced beginner who ventures into an F3Aacrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by step until the model has the desired neutrality in its flight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the not always easy to perform acrobatic figures with a model which flies faultlessly.318 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** 

# Helicopter models

With this programming example, you must have already covered the description of the individual menusand you must be familiar with the use of the transmitter. In addition, the helicopter’s mechanical construction should correspond exactly to the corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities of the transmitter should by no means be used to straighten out rough mechanical imprecision. As is often the case in life, there are also various ways and possibilities to achieve a specific goal when programming the 

### mc-16 HoTT or 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter. The following example should provide you with a clearer structure for logical programming. If there are multiple possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged solutions are recommended first. In order for the helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of course, free to try out other solutions which may be better for you.

The programming example is based on the clockwiserotating STARLET 50 helicopter from Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120 ° of the s washplatetype “3Sv(2 Roll)”, beginner adjustment without increased throttle curve; without heading-lock gyro system and without transmitter-side gyro influence of the “normal operating mode” and without speed regulator. This simple program was also consciously selected to demonstrate that a helicopter which flies really wellcan also be attained with relatively little (programming) effort. However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic description, you will find adjustment information forthe gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the flightphase programming.
Note:If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter described here, but a electric helicopter, please continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most of the settings described in the following unchanged. In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new transmitter, in the selection menu ... **»Basic settings«** (page 268)

Battery type Battery warning

Touch Sense Top LCD Contrast

Lith. Display light

Region 2 3.60V 0

Euro

unlim. Basic settings

Vario Vol Beeps Vol

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

BT Headset OFF 0/0 ID PAIR OFF BT Volume 8 Voice Vol

––– 5

––– 7 ––– 7

Own Stick mode 1 Modulation HoTT DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Bottom LCD Contr. 0

SEL SEL fr fr fr

... some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes: The first three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via thebuilt-in loudspeakers or the transmitter’s headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner’s name. Select the characters for this from an extensive character list on the second display screen, which can be reached via the symbol with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Owner H-J San d b FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`a b cdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

The pre-set for “ **Stick mode** ” can be selected according to the criteria described on page 269. The same applies to the pre-sets for “ **Modulation** ” and “ **DSC Output** ”, page 270. The pre-set for “ **Pitch min** ” is a matter of personal control habits, page 109. The pre-sets established here for “ **Stick mode** ”,

“ **Modulation** ”, “ **DSC Output** ” and “ **Pitch forward/ back**  ” will be initially adopted when a new model memory is created but they can also be freely changed within a given model memory location to any other available option. The settings in the “ **Top/Bottom LCD Contrast** ” lines determine the legibility of the given displays under poor light conditions and the setting in the “ **Display light**  ” line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on without any actuation of a control afterward or after the last control actuation. The selection of “yes/no” in the “ **Power-on beep** ” line determines whether the “recognition melody” is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again.319 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** The “ **Battery type** ” line specifies whether the transmitter is supplied with current from a “NiMH or a “Lith.” battery, and the “ **Battery warning** ” line below it specifies the voltage at which the transmitter’s low-voltage warning should trigger. Do not enter a value that is too low here, so you have enough time to land your helicopter. The setting made in the “ **Stick warning** ” line determines how long the transmitter will wait after the last actuation of an operating element before issuing visual and acoustic warning signals to indicate it is still switched on. Following the warning, you still have about three minutes to actuate the transmitter so the warning will abate. Otherwise the transmitter will switch itself off when this time expires. The value set in the “ **Touch Sense** ” line is a matter of adapting the transmitter to personal preferences. And, in the event the transmitter is to be operated in France, the setting in the “ **Region** ” line is important: **The legal regulations in France require that the “FRANCE” option is selected instead of the de**  **fault setting “EURO”.**
Note: However, please observe the note on page 273 on this subject. Finally, if you are using a Bluetooth headset, you can bind and configure it as described in the instructions supplied with the optional Bluetooth module, Order No. **33002.5** ; see the section entitled “BT Headset”.Once these settings have been taken care of, commissioning continues with the menu ... **»Model select«** (page 79) Use the selection k eys to pick a free memory location

...

1

BD2 BD1 Mod.name Stick mode module n/a Base setup model

n/a DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

... and call it up with a brief tap on the center **SET** keyof the right touch pad. In the display which then appears, use the  key of the left or right touch pad ... Select model type

... to select the “helicopter” model type. The displayimmediately switches to the base screen if the selection is confirmed by a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad.
Notes:

• If the “Select model type” option has been opened, the process cannot be canceled. Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must bemade! In any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting the respective model memory.

• If the “Throttle too high” warning appears, it can be erased by turning the right-side proportional rotary control to its backward limit.

• If batter y voltage is too low, the model switchovercannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low
Once this first hurdle is cleared, the connection of the receiver built into the model at this model memory must be made in the menu ... **»Base setup model«** ( beginning on page 94) To this end, switch to the line “ **module** ”:

Mod.name Stick mode module 1 n/a Base setup model

n/a

BD2 BD1 DSC Output PPM10 HoTT

Note: After confirmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confirm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds ...

BIND. N/A OK
... with a tap on the **SET** key of the right touch pad, this line will be accessed automatically. The line “module” initiates a binding process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 94. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver. Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right four-way button to move up to the first line and begin with actual model programming in the “Model name ” line. Now give the model memory an appropriate name, ...320 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** Note: More more information about the setting of this “emergency shutoff”, see further in this section.
Another tip:Make a habit of giving all switches a common switchon direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter prior to the flight should suffice

– all switches off

. Setting options for the “ **Autorotation C1 position** ”,

“ **Motor stop** ” and “ **Stick warning** ” are not yet of particular interest ... ... and you should only leave or set the “ **Auto timer reset**  ” line to “yes” if you actually want the timers to be reset to the appropriate initial value every time you switch the transmitter on. Additional settings specific to helicopters are made in the menu ... **»Helicopter type«** (page 108) In the “ **Swashplate type** ” line, select control for swashplate or pitch function. In this example: “3Sv(2rol)”. The “ **Linearis. swashpl.** ” line is not yet of interest. In the “ **Rotor direction** ” line, it is established whether the rotor

– as view ed from above

– turns to the r ight (clockwise) or left (counter-clockwise). In other words, whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In this example “right”. Check the default for “ **Pitch min** ”, which was adopted from » **Basic settings** «, to confirm that the entry“front” or “rear” is in keeping with personal preferences or should be changed:

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate
no Rotor direct right Heli type

Pitch min. back 1 n/a bind ST R ET

Rcv Ch Map R12 n/a HoTT Mod.name Stick mode module Base setup model

... which must be assembled from characters avai

lable on the second page of the “ **Model name** ” line: !"#$%&’()�+,–./0123 456789:;

Mod Name STAR L FGHIJK L MNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ A B CDE

After entering the “ **Model name** ”, the settings adopted from » **Basic settings** « for “ **Stick mode** ” and “ **DSC Output**  ” are to be checked and changed as necessary for the given memory location. Another option is to be activated in the “ **Autorotation** ”line. Even if you are not an advanced pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set as an emergency shutoff switch for the motor. Do this by selecting the “ **Autorotation** ” line with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment, assign a 2-way switch, e. g. “7”, and put it in its “ON” position:

99sec PPM10 7I ON
DSC Output Autorotation RF transmit Base setup model
RF Range Test

The selected switch should be in a location on the transmitter which is easily within reach

– without letting loose of a stic k

– e. g. abo ve the pitch stick. “ **Expo throttle lim.** ” in the bottom line of this display, are currently of no interest. By now, the servos should be plugged into the recei

ver in the intended sequence:

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Collective pitch or roll 2 or Pitch-axis 2 servo Free or aux. function Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Note: Please note that on the newer Graupner- mc - and mx - remote control systems, the first pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped in comparison to some older systems. Mix ratios and mix directions for swashplate pitch, roll and nick servos are already pre-adjusted to +61 % in the menu ... **»Swashplate mix er«**  (page 220)
Swashplate mixer Pitch Roll Nick +61% +61% +61%

SEL
If the swashplate mixer should not follow stick movements properly, first change the mixing directions from “+” to “-” before changing servo directions in the321 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** menu ... **»Servo adjustment«** (page 112)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

This menu can also be used to adapt travel and direction for individual servos. However, one must attempt to retain 100 % serv o travel so as to achieve the best possible resolution and control accuracy. The direction of travel is determined with “Rev.” and, in the process, make sure that the direction is correct. The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of the helicopter follows the tail stick direction. In the following menu, which is available as standard on the 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitter only, but can be unlocked on the 

### mc-16 HoTT transmitter as an extra-cost option ...
**»Stick mode«** (page 116)

Thr. Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s TL PH PH PH

St

... the column “ **Tr** ” is used to set the increment size of each “click” on the digital trim keys. The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming (“cut-off trim”) once again. Please read more about this on page 70. (Thanks to digital trimming, trim values can be saved automatically when a model change is affected. In the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT systems these can even be stored automatically when a change of flight phase takes place.) An additional setting which is specific to helicopterscan also be made in this menu in which you determine which function the trim lever on the pitch stick should have. This is accomplished by selecting the

“ **TL** ” setting in the “Thr(ottle)” line or leaving it as it is. This roughly corresponds to trim for the familiar idle trim function. If the trim indicator marker is moved all the way forward by “turning” the trim lever (remember: “pitch min rear” = “throttle forward”) the throttle limit will later take over the throttle limit for throttle enable seamlessly in the menu ... **»Control adjust«** (beginning on page 122)

In5

offset Thro Gyro Lim. ––– ––– –––

Lv2 0% 0% 0% 0% GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr fr

–––

SEL
... where input “Lim.” is assigned and all other inputs are “fr(ee)” by default. This “Lim.” input serves as the **throttle limiter** . Its effect is exclusively on output “6”, where the throttle servo is connected. The throttle limiter is assigned by default to the right-side proportional rotary control. Once again, as a reminder:

• With the use of the “throttle limiter” function, youdo not have to program a flight phase “throttle preselection”.

• The throttle limiter does not control the throttle

serv o; it only limits the travel of the throttle servo in the full throttle direction according to its position. The throttle servo is generally controlled from the pitch stick via » **Helicopter mixer** « menu setting/sfor throttle curve/s, which is why input 6 must absolutely remain “free”. Refer to pages beginning on page 191 in this manual about this.

• The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming once again. Please read more about this on page 70

.(Thanks to the digital trimming, trim can be automatically saved values with a model changeover as well as with a change of the flight phase).

• A detailed description of the idle r un base setup model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit can be found beginning on page 127. Then switch to the “travel” column with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad and increase the now inversely highlighted value from +100 % to +125 % with a fully opened throttle limiter with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad:

– travel + +100% +100% +100% In11 Lim. +100% +100% +100% +100% +125% In9 In10

In doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter releases the entire throttle travel with the pitch stick later during flight. Adjustment notice for electric helicopters: Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle setting, the basic configuration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves ma

king sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lo wer than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to +100 %) by a saf e margin. If necessary, therefore, the adjustment of the “travel” setting of the throttle limiter described above must be modified accordingly, for example, to symmetric +110 %. The further adjustment, however,can take place analogously to the combustion helicopter described here.322 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** With this process, you have carried out the basic settings for the transmitter as they are needed again later for further model programming. The actual helicopter-specific settings take place primarily in the menu ... **»Helicopter mixer«** (beginning on page 188)

C1 C1 Pitch Throttle Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle

Roll Throttle Tail Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter 0% 0% 0%

0° OFF Gyro suppress 0% Gyro gain 0%

The “Pitch” function appears right in the first line. A tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad will cause a switch to the corresponding sub-menu. The graphic representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is initially only defined by the points “L” and “H”:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Pitch Curve off

Now place point “1” in the center with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad: Input Output Point 1 0% 0% Pitch Curve off

0%

Always try to make due with these three points initially; more points can “over-complicate” the matter and are more of a burden at this point. The reference point for the hovering should generally be the mechanical center position of the pitch stick, because this position comes closest to the normal control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables other settings, you must know exactly what you aredoing. First set the pitch stick in the center. The servos which you had previously set according to manufacturer specifications have their levers at positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing (normally). A hovering pitch value of 4 ° to 5 ° is now mechanically set at the control rods to the rotor b lades. In principle, all known helicopters fly with this setting. Then move the pitch stick towards maximum pitch until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you the current stick position.) Now change the pitch curve’s point “H” with the selection keys of the right touch pad such that the main rotor’s blades have a maximum pitch of about 9 °. A v alue of +50 % should be about right:

Input Output Point H +100% +50% Pitch Curve off

+50%

Note: A rotor blade adjustment gage, such as the Graupner pitch gage, order no. 61 , is quite useful for reading the angle. Now move the pitch stick toward the pitch minimum position until its limit position. Depending on the abi

lity of the pilot, adjust the value of point “L” so that the blade angle of approach is 0 to -4 °. No w a slightlypitched line arises at the hovering points, the socalled pitch curve, which can appear as follows:

L –100% –75% Pitch

–75% Input Output Point Curve off

Now you can, if you like, move the marker frame upward with the selection keys to the “Curve” line and after activation of the value field with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad, set the curve function of the mixer to “on”.

L –100% –75% Pitch

–75% on Input Output Point Curve

If you now switch to autorotation phase

– at the bottom left of the displa y the flight phase name “Autorot” appears

– the “old” pitch curve is again:

? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

Autorot Input Output Point Curve off

Now carry out the same setting as before in the normal phase. Only at point “H“

– at maximum pitch

– is it323 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** possible to increase pitch angle by about 2 °. In doing

so , you will have somewhat more of an angle to catch the model later on (!). After setting pitch curve, move the autorotation switchback then return to the helicopter mixer menu selection with a brief tap on the center **ESC** key of the left touch pad. In that display, change to the “ **C1**  **Thro** ” line to set the throttle curve. The adjustment range for idle trim must first be matched to the throttle curve. Do this by putting the pitch stick into its minimum position then set point “L” to about +15 %:

0% +15% C1 Thro

L +15% Input Output Point Curve off

With the throttle limiter closedand idle trim completely open, move the pitch stick back and forth somewhat at the minimum limit position. The throttle servo may not move with it in the process. No you have established a seamless transition from the idle trim tothe throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle curve must be carried out later in flight. If you switch from this graphic to the autorotation phase for testing purposes, the following appears instead of the accustomed representation:

OFF C1 Thro

Autorot

That means that this mixer is switched off and the throttle servo is switched to a fixed value, which can be adjusted as follows: Return to the menu list with a tap on the **ESC** key. As long as you are still in the autorotation phase, new sub-menus are listed; specifically:

Pitch

0%

Autorot –90% 0%
Gyro gain 0% Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress

The line “Thr. setting AR” is important. Enter the value to the right, depending on servo direction, to either approximately +125 % or -125 %.

0%

Autorot 0%

0% –125%

SEL Pitch

Gyro gain Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress

In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later, when you have gained enough experience to practice the autorotation flight, a more stable idle can be entered here. Adjustment notice for electric helicopters: Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this setting is to adopted without change.The further sub-menus are not important at the moment. By switching off “autorotation”, it returns to the first menu list. Select the “ **C1**  **Tail** ” settings page in order to set static torque compensation for the tail rotor. In this case, also work with a maximum of three interpolation points; everything else is reserved for the experienced pilot. Do this by changing the heading-lock systems from their intended uniform pre-setting of 0 % at point “L” (minimum pitch) to -30 % and at the opposite end, at point “H” to +30 % (maximum pitch). These valuesmay have to be corrected in flight. It may also be necessary to set point “1” in the middle.

0% 0% 0% Tail C1

Input Output Point Curve off

?

Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the autorotation phase. Here the setting is also deactivated; the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch movements (no torque usually arises when the main rotor is not powered). All additional interpolation points are not currently of importance yet. If, contrary to the default setting, the gyro has atransmitter-side sensitivity setting, another free proportional control will be needed. This can be assigned in the ... **»Control adjust«** (beginning on page 122)
... menu to “Gyro” input. Activate the control assignment with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad then move the selected control until its control number appears in the display:

In5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Thro Gyro In8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ fr fr

fr Cn6

SEL Conclude this entry with a brief tap on the **ESC** key ofthe left touch pad then change to the column “- travel +” with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad. After a tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad, the gyro’s maximum sensitivity can be set324 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** in the value field displayed in inverse video, e. g. to 50 %. To this end, move the selected control into its middle position or, if applicable also to the side, such that only one value field is displayed in inverse video:

In5

– travel + +100% +100%

+100% Thro Gyro In8 +100% +100%

+100% +50%

+50%

This produces a fixed value for as long as the control remains at the right limit position. The correct value must be adjusted in flight.**In the process, however, always observe the ad justment instructions accompanying your gyro**  **sensor, because your helicopter will not be able to fly otherwise!**  To conclude this initial programming, a few words should be mentioned about the menu ...
**»Channel 1 curve«** (page 141)

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Ch1 curve Curve off

This function is a type of “convenient exponentialcurve” for the throttle/pitch stick and the mixer functions connected to it. If ever, this curve should only be applied “cautiously” at the very end, when all adjustments have been made. It should never be used for the throttle/pitch adjustment! The over-lapping result in “nasty” effects.

With this, all helicopter-specific settings which can be made on the “workbench” are now completed. The further fine-tuning must take place in flight. The flighttested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are automatically saved.Larger deviations should first be mechanically adjusted or adjusted according to the previously discussed settings. **Further settings**Following this programming example, you have provided a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the hovering training and simple trips. Depending on yourknowledge and experience as a pilot, additional functions can, of course, also be activated. If you want to fly at different speeds and with different trimming, you activate the so-called “flight phases”,which can be called with assigned switches as an alternative to the previously described “normal phase”. For this purpose, first open the menu ... **»Phase settings«** (page 156) ... whereb y the symbols appearing in the second column, sometimes only after a switch assignment in the » **Phase assignment** « menu, have the following meanings: “–”: no phase switch present “+”: phase switch present

“  ”: currently active phase

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Autorot

–

– – + Auto


However, consider in advance whether these are to be implemented with individual switches or, more reasonably, with 3-way switches because as many as6 flight phases can be activated in addition to the autorotation phase. The latter possibility is more logical and usually more clearly laid out. The “ **Autorot** ” line is already selected in the figure above. When activated, the autorotation phase always has precedence over any other phases you assign switches to. However, in the “Name” column you first assign “meaningful” names to Phases 1 to 3, which are adopted from a list. These identifications serve for the better differentiation and are shown later in the base screen and for all flight-phase dependent menus, see listing on page 150, for example:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4  +

+ Normal Hover

–

– Speed Autorot Auto

Then, in the fourth column from the left, enter the switching time with which FROM phase should switch TO the next respective phase. Approximately 1 s should suffice:



### Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4  

### +

+ Normal Hover

–

– 1.1s 1.1s 5.0s

Speed Autorot Auto

1.1s

This value can also be adjusted later according to your personal preferences. Please observe in the process that TO the autorotation phase, whose name is defined as “ **Autorot** ”, is switched without a time delay. If necessary, enter the time with which a change FROM the autorotation phase to a different phase should be affected. In order to be able to switch between the individual flight phases, the assignment of the individual switch-325 **Programming examples - Helicopter models** es or the three-stage switch is necessary. The assignment of the switch takes place in the

menu

... **»Phase assignment«** (page 158) Under “C” and “D”, for example, assign the one of the two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch panels, e. g.:

P hase assignment

A B C D E F

1 Normal 6 5 prior combi

Now the given switch position must be assigned to the respective flight phase in the **»Phase settings«**

**menu** . Since these phases already have names, the name «1 Normal» will initially appear at the right in the display. If the already assigned autorotation switchwas activated, the following warning message appears in the display:

P hase assignment

A B E F

1 Normal prior combi Autorot

As a reminder: The autorotation phase has absolute precedence. Therefore, move the autorotation switch back again then put the selected switch, in the example thethree-stage switch connected to switch plug-in locations 5 and 6, initially to one of its limit positions. Now use the selection keys to change to the bottom right and activate this entry field: A B C D E F 6 5

1 Normal P hase assignment prior combi

Now use the selection keys to select the desired flight phase for this

– for e xample “2 Hover” ...

A B C D E F 6 5

2 Hover P hase assignment prior combi

... and confirm this selection with a brief tap on the center **SET** key of the right touch pad or go ahead and put the switch into its other limit position and define the name for this new switch position, such as «3 Speed».

A B C D E F 6 5

3 Speed P hase assignment prior combi

The switch’s middle position then receives the name “1 Normal”:

A B C D E F 6 5

1 Normal P hase assignment prior combi

Note: Exchanged or different name assignments for the three switch positions are, of course, also possible. Thus, for example, implementation of a programmed speed controller (as described beginning in the next column) can make a sequence like “normal / hover / acro” quite logical. The model settings made before the assignment of a phase switch are now in the flight phase “Normal”.This is the phase which is called after the above definition in the switch center position. This normal setting, which was already tested in flight, can be copied to a different flight phase so that flying can take place in the same manner in every phase at first. For this purpose, use the menu ... **»Copy/Erase«** (page 80)

=>
=>
=>

=> => Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

With the operation of the flight phases, it is possible to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu for each individual phase. Since the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters has digital trimming, in addition to the flight-phase dependent menu settings in the helicopter program, the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor stick can also be selected for storage on a flight-phase dependent basis, see **»Stick mode« menu,** page 116:

STARLET #02

2:22h Stp Flt 0:00 0:00

5.5V 3.9V M HoTT326 **Programming examples - Helicopter models Enhancement recommendation:**  **Rotational speed regulator**At some point in time you may want to install a rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, in order to beable to fly with speeds automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it is logical to couple the individual rotational speeds with the flight phases so that further additional adjustments are possible. It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming that the rotational speed regulator was installed andprogrammed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Of course, the 

### mc-16 HoTT and 

### mc-20 HoTT transmitters here too offers multiple possibilitiesto realize various speeds in individual phases. A practical proposal which retains the throttle limiter function can be found beginning on page 193.

If you have adjusted your helicopter according to thisprogramming principle, it is not yet a competition helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated flying. You should only activate additional functions if themodel flies faultlessly so that the (desired) improvements are also easy to follow. Insofar as possible, activate individual functions on an individual basis so that you can actually recognize and attribute the change. Bear in mind that it is not the quantity of func

tions used that distinguishes good pilots, but what they can do in terms of flying with relatively little input.327 **For your notes**328 **For your notes**329 **FCC-Information** 

# FCC Information

**Graupner|SJ** 

### mc-16 **/** 

### 20 **HoTT**

FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-16
FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-20 **FCC Label Compliance Statement** This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause harmful interference. 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
**WARNING:** Changes or modifi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.

**NOTE** This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15C of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interferenceto radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reor ient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separ ation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diff erent from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an e xperienced radio/TV technician for help. **RF Exposure Statement** This device has been evaluated to meet the FCC RF exposure requirement when used in combination with the genuine Graupner|SJ HoTT accessoires and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna and your body.330 **Declaration of Conformity** 

# Declaration of Conformity**K onformitätserklärung** **gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und T** **elek om** **unikationsendeinric htung** **en (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)**Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal EquipmentAct (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)Graupner GmbH & Co. KGHenriettenstraße 94-96D-73230 Kirchheim/Teckerklärt, dass das Produkt:declares that the productGeräteklasse:**2**Equipment classden grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und denübrigeneinschlägigen Bestimmungen desFTEG(Artikel3 der R&TTE) entspricht.complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of theR&TTE Directive).Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:Harmonised standards applied**EN 60950-1:2006+A11: 2009+A1:2010+A12:** **2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2** **EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.1** Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))Kirchheim,07. August 2012Stefan Graupner, GeschäftsführerStefan Graupner, Managing Director**Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany Tel: 07021/722-0** **EMail: info@graupner.de** **Fax: 07021/722-188**Gesundheitund Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetischeVerträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))**mx-10 HoTT - No. 33110, mx-12 HoTT - No. 33112, mx-16 HoTT - No. 33116, mx-20 HoTT - No. 33124,** **mc-16 HoTT - No. 33016, mc-20 HoTT - No. 33020, mc-32 - No. 33032** 0678**GR-12S HoTT - No. 33505, GR-12 HoTT - No. 33506, GR-16 HoTT - No. 33508, GR-24 HoTT - No. 33512,** **GR-32 HoTT - No. 33516**331 **Warranty Certificate** Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94- 96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewährt ab dem Kaufdatum auf dieses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die Garantie gilt nur für die bereits beim Kauf desProduktes vorhandenen Material- oder Funktionsmängel. Schäden, die auf Abnützung, Überlastung, falschesZubehör oder unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleistungsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period of 24 months from date of purchase.The guarantee applies only to such material or operational defects witch are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading, incom

petent handling or the use of incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user ́s legal rights andclaims under guarantee are not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of faults.
La société GraupnerGmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantiene remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vérifiez précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le coût de cette intervention. 

### Garantie-Urkunde Warranty certificate / Certificat de garantie



## Set 

# mc-16 **HoTT**

 Best.-Nr. **33016**



## Set 

# mc-20 **HoTT**

 Best.-Nr. **33020**

Übergabedatum: Date of purchase/delivery: Date d’achat :
Name des Käufers: Owner ́s name: Nom de I`acheteur : Straße, Wohnort: Complete address: Adresse complète : Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers: Stamp and signature of dealer: Cachet et signature du détaillant : 

# Warranty Certificate

**Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente** www.graupner.de/en/service/servicepoints.aspx

**Graupner Zentralservice**  Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim service@graupner.de **Servicehotline**  (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76* Mo - Do: 09:15

- 18:00 F reitag: 09:15

- 16:00 Uhr

**Belgie/Belgique/Nederland** Jan van Mouwerik Slot de Houvelaan 30 NL 3155 Maasland VT  (+31) 10 59 13 59 4 van_mouwerik@versatel.nl **Ceská Republika Slovenská Republika**  RC Service Z. Hnizdil Letecka 666/22 CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne  (+420) 2 33 31 30 95 info@rcservis.cz
**Espana** Anguera Hobbies C/Terrassa 14 E 43206 Reus (Tarragona)  (+34) 97 77 55 32 0 info@anguera-hobbies.com **France** Graupner Service France Gérard Altmayer 86, rue St. Antoine F 57601 Forbach-Oeting  (+33) 3 87 85 62 12 g.altmayer@graupner.fr

**Italia** GiMax Via Manzoni, no. 8 I 25064 Gussago  (+39) 030 25 22 73 2 gimax@gimaxmodel.com **Luxembourg** Kit Flammang 129, route d’Arlon L 8009 Strassen  (+35) 23 12 23 2 tabecofly@gmail.com

**Schweiz** Graupner Service Schweiz CD-Electronics GmbH Kirchweg 18 CH-5614 Sarmenstorf  (+41) 56 667 14 91 c.dunkel@graupner.ch **United Kingdom** Graupner Service UK Brunel Drive GB, NEWARK, Nottingham shire NG242EG  (+44) 16 36 61 05 39 service.uk@graupner.com

* 0,14 Cent / min ute from a German Telecom landline. Calling price variations possible for calls from cell phones or from the landlines of other provider. 

### Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von **This product is warrantied for Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de**  

# 24 **Monaten months**  **mois**HOPPING.TELEME T R Y . TRANSMISSIO N

GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG POSTFACH 1242 D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK GERMANY http://www.graupner.de Modifications and availability reserved. **Graupner** products are only available through model shops. Wewill gladly inform you of your nearest stockist. We accept no liability for printing errors.

Printed in China PN.QK-01 (V3de) Although we have carefully checked the information containedin these instructions and checked that it is correct, we can accept no liability of any kind for mistakes, incomplete information and printing errors. **Graupner** reserves the right to alter the characteristics and features of the software and hardware at any time and without prior notification.